Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Disclaimer: This is a hypothetical alternate timeline to the events of "The Legend of Zelda: Ocarina of Time." This story is a showcase of what might have happened if Saria were to take on the role of Hero of Time in Link's place. This story includes existing events and dialogue from the game, deviating more as the story progresses and its differences become more pronounced. This is not an exact retelling, however. There are new characters, names (some characters were not given names until Majora's Mask while others didn't originally have names at all, such as Saria's fairy), and extra content meant to fill in the gaps. The story also explores and interprets available lore, diverging only when appropriate (such as to complement the additional content). Any critique or feedback is greatly appreciated. I hope you enjoy.

---

Somewhere to the east in Hyrule, a foul plan has been hatched. A sorcerer from the Gerudo Desert known as Ganondorf tried to take the Kokiri’s Emerald, but when the Great Deku Tree refused him, a terrible monster was sent to curse the Deku Tree and feed on his life force. Unable to move, he was helpless against this monster. Growing weaker, he reached out to one of the fairies of the forest.

“Navi… Navi, where art thou? Come hither…”

A blue fairy hears the Deku Tree’s words, swiftly flying to his side.

“Deku Tree? What’s happened to you? You look… Sick.”

“Oh, Navi the fairy… Listen to my words, the words of the Deku Tree… Dost thou sense it? The climate of evil descending upon this realm… Malevolent forces even now are mustering to attack our land of Hyrule.

For so long, the Kokiri Forest, the source of life, has stood as a barrier, deterring outsiders and maintaining the order of the world… But… Before this tremendous evil power, even my power is nothing.”

Navy listened carefully to the Deku Tree’s words, nodding. “Did an outsider do this? Please, tell me!”

“Indeed… A sorcerer most foul sought the spiritual stone I guard. I would not bargain with him, thus do I now suffer from this curse.” A moment of silence followed as the Deku Tree stopped to regain his strength. His voice grew weaker by the second. “It seems the time has come for the boy without a fairy to begin his journey… The youth whose destiny it is to lead Hyrule to the path of justice and truth… Navi… Go now! Find our young friend and guide him to me… I do not have much time left. Fly, Navi, fly! The fate of the forest, nay, the world, depends upon thee!”

“Of course! I’ll bring him here straight away!”

And thus did Navi fly off in search of the boy without a fairy. The Deku Tree watched as Navi disappeared, waiting patiently for her return. As his life force continued to fade, a thought crossed his mind regarding the sorcerer.

That Ganondorf… I feared such a man would come here one day, a man hungry for the Triforce’s power. Such a strange, frightening figure. I wonder what he meant by “We meet again”?

---

Saria, a Kokiri girl, was sitting on a tree stump. She gently played her ocarina as forest spirits danced through the air. She had traveled to the Sacred Forest Meadow, a place of peace and quiet where she often spoke with and played music for the spirits of the forest. Today was peaceful as well, only… Something was bothering her. It was a strange, intangible feeling that she couldn’t place no matter how hard she tried.

At first, she thought she got up on the wrong side of the bed. After all, no one else seemed to be bothered. The other Kokiri were at play throughout the village as if nothing was wrong. Fado was standing on the lookout post, Mido was standing guard in front of the path to the Great Deku Tree, and many of the boys were taking care of the village. One was trying to move rocks, and another was trimming the grass in front of Saria’s house.

How nice of him! Saria thought.

The only one that Saria couldn’t see was Link. This didn’t surprise her, however, as Link was always a late sleeper. She had decided to leave him be and go to the meadow to calm her nerves. There was no need to burden the others with her troubles, after all.

The forest spirits were not talkative that day, wishing to hear Saria’s music first before they answered her questions. As she played her ocarina, that same bothersome feeling crept into her mind.

“Stop. That’s enough,” said one of the wispy spirits in the air. “Your music… It feels sad, somehow.”

“I’m sorry. I don’t know what’s wrong with me. Ever since I woke up I’ve felt like something is wrong.”

“Hmm… The forest has felt strange as of late,” said another spirit. “We’ve seen deku babas sprouting up all over. Strange indeed. The Great Deku Tree should have suppressed their growth. What kind of protector is he if he’s letting all these monsters sprout up!”

“Hey! That’s no fair!” said Saria. “The Great Deku Tree’s reach extends far beyond this forest. We can’t expect him to notice every little thing.”

“It does make me worry though,” said Saria’s fairy, Poppy. “The Deku Tree would never let monsters like deku babas grow here. What if something’s wrong?”

Saria pocketed her ocarina, slapped her knees, then stood up. “I think we should go see what’s wrong then. If he needs help with anything, I think we can handle it. Don’t you?”

Poppy nodded then floated after Saria as she left the meadow behind. Hopping across the top of the maze down the stairway, Saria deftly landed on her feet at the end. As she landed, however, she caught movement out of the corner of her eye. A deku baba burst from the ground and lunged at her with its toothy maw. Saria backflipped away, dodging the plant’s bite.

“There’s one here too? Poppy, close your eyes!”

Saria reached around her back, drawing a deku nut from a pouch and a curved dagger from a hidden sheath. With a toss, the deku nut burst open, stunning the plant monster. In its moment of weakness, Saria dashed forward and sliced the deku baba’s stem, killing it in an instant. The severed stem hardened instantly, becoming a stick. Saria gave her dagger a flick before putting it back in its sheath and picking up the deku stick.

“Seems ordinary enough. Branches like this fall from the Deku Tree all the time,” said Saria as she examined the stick.

Poppy floated over to Saria and said, “You’re right. It really is the same type of wood. You don’t think…”

Saria and Poppy’s eyes met for a moment.

“Let’s not worry about that until we can talk to the Deku Tree.”

“Right!”

Saria and Poppy then left the meadow and made their way through the Lost Woods on their way to the village. While the Kokiri ran, dark thoughts bubbled in her mind.

I just hope the others are okay…

When Saria returned to the village, everything was fine. There were no signs of deku babas or any other monsters about. It seemed that whatever was happening had not yet reached the village. Saria breathed a sigh of relief, checking in on the other Kokiri as she passed through. Finally, she approached the treehouse with a ladder leading high up. At the base of the tree was a small drawing of a kid fighting a giant lizard. Just as Saria reminisced, Link stepped out of his house.

“Yahoo! Good morning, Link!”

Link looked down and waved. “Hi Saria!!”

The young boy climbed down his ladder and greeted the girl. Much to Saria’s surprise, a blue fairy was accompanying Link.

“Wait, is that a fairy? Wow! A fairy finally came to you! Now you’re a true Kokiri!”

“Pardon me,” said the blue fairy, “but we have a pressing matter to attend to! Link must see the Great Deku Tree at once!”

“Is that right? I needed to speak to him as well. I don’t want to interrupt if it’s important. Go on! I’ll wait here until you’re done. Let me know if it’s okay to speak with him when you get back.”

“Of course!” said Link. “All right Navi, lead the way!”

Link ran off with the blue fairy, and all Saria could do was wave goodbye.

“Navi, was it? I don’t think I’ve met that fairy before,” said Saria. “I’m glad he finally got one, though. Now hopefully Mido will leave him alone.”

“I’m not so sure about that,” said Poppy. “I’m sure he’ll find something else to complain about.”

Saria giggled at the comment. “Oh, those two… I hope they become good friends someday.”

The Kokiri girl waited patiently by Link’s house for a time, keeping an eye out for anything unusual. Curiously, Link returned after a few minutes with a frustrated look on his face.

“Link? What’s wrong?”

“Mido won’t let me pass!” said Link. “He says I have to arm myself before I stand before the tree. What’s with that?”

“Indeed!” said Navi. “The Kokiri boy was most rude!”

“What?! Mido won’t let you go to see the Great Deku Tree? Ohh… That bum! I don’t know why he’s always so mean to everyone!” Then the thought occurred to her. Perhaps she wasn’t the only one to have seen the deku babas. “Hmm… I don’t blame him for what he said. Strange things have been happening here lately… You need to be ready for anything, Link. I believe the Kokiri Sword is up by the training grounds, and you can get a shield from the shop. If you show up with those, Mido will have no choice but to let you through.”

Link sighed. “Do I really have to buy the shield, though? It’s not like it’s a real shop…” Link then glanced over to a rupee sticking out of a bush. “I don’t even know where they get these things.”

“I know it’s a little frustrating but try and play along. They take a great deal of pride in their work.”

“All right, all right. I think I’ll need about five blue rupees… I swear, if something bad happens while Mido keeps me out, I’m gonna slug him!”

“Don’t worry. I’ll keep an eye on the village while you’re away. Good luck, Link.”

The boy left with a reassured smile on his face, waving goodbye. Saria was happy to see him in good spirits, yet that nagging feeling would not leave her alone. A cold, sinking sensation in her chest. It was almost as if…

Time passed. Saria saw Link get past Mido, but he had yet to return. It wouldn’t be long until dusk. Even the other villagers were starting to get anxious. Saria decided to check with Mido.

“Hey Mido, have you seen Link?”

The boy shook his head. “Haven’t seen him since we last spoke. I heard some fighting not long after he left. Seems he ran into some deku babas on the way,” Mido said as he pulled out a stick. “Those were some clean cuts, I gotta say…”

“Hmm. Maybe I should check on him.”

“What?! I mean, you shouldn’t worry so much about him. If he can cut stems this cleanly, I’m sure he’ll be fine… Maybe… Probably…” Mido tapped his foot impatiently, his brow furrowed. “He better come back!”

Saria decided to step away for a moment. “Poppy, what do you think?”

“There’s nowhere to really go in the Deku Tree’s domain. I can’t imagine a conversation lasting for hours.”

“What could be taking him, then?”

Worry getting the best of her, Saria marched back to Mido and said, “Let me past. I need to check on him.”

“Wait, I can’t let you through! Not without a summons!”

“Not even me? But I’ve spoken with the Deku Tree before…”

Mido scratched his cheek, glancing away. “It’s not like I want to stop you, but orders are orders, right?”

“I’ll take responsibility,” said Poppy. “If trouble should come from this, you needn’t worry.”

“But Saria doesn’t even have a weapon! What if-”

“I appreciate your worry, but I’ll be fine.”

Mido looked from side to side, as if scanning for observing eyes. “I… Um… Fine! If you really wanna see Link that badly, I won’t stop you!” The boy then stepped aside, grumbling under his breath.

As Saria passed, she looked back and said, “Thank you.” The boy pulled his cap down over his eyes, blushing. Smiling softly, Saria made her way down the path to the Great Deku Tree. Sure enough, more deku babas had grown along the path. Making use of her dagger, nuts, and swiftness, Saria made short work of the plants. At the end, she looked across the field to the Deku Tree. He seemed sickly and tired, and his bark was starting to lose color.

“Saria… Is that you?”

“It is. What’s wrong, Great Deku Tree? Where’s Link?”

“Link…? I asked him for aid. I’ve been… Cursed, you see. I tasked him with striking down the source of the curse, and yet, I still feel myself slipping away.”

“That’s terrible! Is there anything I can do to help?”

“It pains me to burden so many with my troubles, but if you would be willing, step inside me. Find Link and help him stop this curse.”

Saria looked to Poppy, then back to the Deku Tree. “Of course. I’ll do what I can.”

The Deku Tree opened his mouth and Saria approached. Standing at the base of the tree, she was reminded just how big he truly was. Often she and the others would sit in this very grove and listen to his tales of the outside world. To see the Deku Tree in such a sorry state… It pained her to no end. Steeling herself for what lied ahead, Saria stepped inside and began her search.

It didn’t take long to find clues. Inside the Deku Tree were slain monsters (many of which were skulltulas), and a large hole in the center of floor looked like spider webs had once covered it, now torn through.

“What happened here? Where did all these monsters come from?” Saria asked.

“Perhaps they were brought here by whoever put a curse on the Deku Tree.”

Saria reached the edge of the hole ringed with webbing. Looking down, she could see pools of water far below.

“Do you think Link is down there?” asked Poppy.

“Only one way to find out.”

Taking a leap of faith, Saria dove into the hole, safely landing in the water below. After emerging from the water’s surface, she saw the shallows, as well as plots of dirt and rock. There were metal bars to the south where water flowed through, as well as a stone block with curious symbols on its sides to the north.

“This can’t be right. Is this really part of the Deku Tree?” asked Saria.

“It might not be,” said Poppy, following Saria as she stepped onto land. “The Deku Tree’s roots extend far below the surface. Perhaps this place was built by our ancestors so they could check on his roots. It’d be easier to navigate than digging new tunnels every time.”

“Fair point.” Saria looked around, noticing signs of battle and burnt webbing. A half-burned deku stick was discarded by a doorway, as well as by another hole ringed with webbing. After climbing up to the hole via the stone block, Saria and Poppy looked down. “How far does this go? This is most confusing.”

“Do you think whoever built this place left a map behind?” wondered Poppy.

“Even if they did, I doubt it would have survived in these conditions. It’s simply too damp.”

“What if they kept it in a box, or a treasure chest?”

“Now you’re just being silly.”

Once more, Saria dove down, landing in another pool of water. After emerging, she noticed a trio of deku scrubs fighting over something.

“Let me have it! Let me have it!” one cried.

“No! I saw it first! It’s mine!” said another.

“You’re both idiots! It belongs to me! He hit me first, so it’s mine now!” said the third.

It was strange. For just a moment, the thing they were fighting over looked familiar. Saria stepped onto land and swept her hair back to get the excess water out.

“You three! Did you see a young boy come through here?”

“W-what? Another one?!” shouted the deku scrub.

“We can’t let you pass! Not after our last failure!”

“Yes, yes! The queen would never forgive us!”

“The queen?” said Saria. “Who are you talking about?”

“You idiots!” shouted the largest of the scrubs. “You said too much again! Get rid of her, quickly!”

The two smaller deku scrubs stood their ground and fired nuts at Saria. She dodged one then struck the other with a stick, knocking it back at the scrub and smashing it into the wall. Saria closed the distance to the other two, batting away the nuts before finally striking the scrubs across the heads.

“You bullies! That’s what you get for attacking someone for no good reason!”

“Ow ow ow! We’re sorry!” said one of the scrubs.

“We promise we won’t do it again!”

“Honest!”

Saria sighed, crossing her arms. “You better not. Now, if you please, could you answer my question? Did you see a young boy pass through here?”

One of the deku scrubs nodded. “We did, we did! We tried to stop him the same way we did with you, but he was too smart!”

“Someone must have told him our secret! The traitor!”

“We’ll find that no good scrub soon enough!”

“Please, calm down,” said Saria. “This boy, did he have blonde hair? Green clothes?”

“He did, but…” The scrub trailed off, looking away in shame.

“What do you mean?” asked Saria.

Poppy, who had been floating over Saria’s shoulder the whole time looked behind her and flew down to the ground.

“Saria! Take a look at this!”

The Kokiri girl turned and looked. On the ground was Link’s green cap.

“Wait… Did he lose it?”

Saria knelt down by the cap and picked it up. It had a faint red stain on it. The girl’s heart sank at the sight, nearly causing her to drop the cap.

“You three…” said Saria. “Did he go through this door?”

The three deku scrubs, who were huddled up, each nodded nervously. Saria pocketed the cap, readied her dagger, then stepped through the door.

On the other side was a large dark chamber. Stone came slamming down behind Saria after she took a few steps past the door. Pillars of old grey wood supported a twisted ceiling of gnarled roots, and a cold mist obscured the ground. A skittering sound could be heard further within. Saria looked around, but no sign of a monster could be seen. Just skittering, skittering, skittering…

Stepping lightly, Saria moved further into the chamber. A faint flicker of blue light caught her attention, and upon moving closer, Saria realized what it was. A wounded Navi was on the ground, missing a wing. So shocked by the sight, Saria dropped her dagger and scooped up the fairy.

“Navi? Navi! What happened? Who did this to you?!”

“The eye…”

“What?”

“It uses magic to hide… Seek the eye…”

The small fairy went still in the Kokiri’s hands. A tear slipped down her face as Saria placed the fairy in a pouch.

“I’m sorry, Navi. Just hold on for a little while longer.”

Just then, the air shifted. Saria dodged on instinct, avoiding a fatal blow. She suffered a small cut across her leg, however. As she looked around, there was no sign of her attacker. The air shifted again, forcing Saria to roll out of the way. Picking up her dagger as she rolled, Saria got back on her feet in a fighting stance. Then, in the middle of the air, a bright blue eye manifested, its pupil spinning backwards as another pupil appeared. The mist flowed against the faint outline of something strange and insect-like as invisible eyelids closed and the creature disappeared.

“So that’s what she meant,” said Saria. “Poppy, can you see it?”

“Barely, but it’s fast.” Saria and Poppy stayed on the defensive, waiting. Then before the beast struck, Poppy shouted, “Behind you!”

Saria ducked, striking at where she thought a limb might be. The dagger cut across something that felt like steel. The creature was quick to move away, changing its position once more. This exchange went on until the eye revealed itself momentarily. This time, Saria was prepared. She struck a deku nut at the ground below the eye, stunning the beast. The Kokiri made a mad dash and struck at the eye, slicing again and again.

When the beast could move, it darted away, clambering onto the ceiling. Not long after, three egg sacs hit the floor, birthing two-legged eye beasts with singular horns on their heads. When their eyes and horn tips grew red, they charged. Three on one, it was all Saria could do to stay on the defensive. Waiting for an opportunity, Saria struck down one of the beasts, scaring the other two away. Though she was on edge, Saria left them alone. Hostile though they were, she felt bad striking down creatures so young.

Soon enough, the large monster returned to attack. Since it worked the first time, Saria readied a deku nut. She kept dodging the monster’s attacks, and sure enough, it took a peep with its eye to confirm her position. Just before she threw the nut, however, one of the baby monsters leapt in the way, causing Saria to hesitate. The monster’s eye glowed red and its invisible limb shot out, piercing the baby and pinning Saria against one of the wooden pillars.

“That was one of your own! You monster!”

The creature cackled. “I care not. I can always make more.”

Saria tried to swipe with her dagger, but another clawed limb swatted the knife away. A third limb reached up to Saria’s face, bringing a claw to her cheek.

“Where is it?”

“Where’s what?”

“The stone! I need the stone!!”

“The Kokiri Emerald? Why would you want that?”

“Don’t ask questions! Tell me where it is, and I may spare your life.” The claw dug into Saria’s cheek, drawing blood. “But be quick about it. My brood is still hungry. I can’t hold them off forever…” said the monster with a mocking tone.

She wasn’t sure what to say. Saria had heard of the spiritual stone, but its location was a closely guarded secret. Not even she knew.

“Well?!” The claw dug further in. “I’m waiting!!”

Before things took a turn for the worse, Poppy (who had slipped away) floated up from behind the monster, carrying a deku nut. After getting into position, she dropped the nut right onto the monster’s eye, stunning it. Saria broke free, picked up her dagger, then drove it straight into the eye. The monster stumbled back, hissing and howling, then finally collapsed. As if they drew their life force from their queen, the little ones collapsed as well, and then they all faded away in ghostly blue flame.

“Saria, are you okay?” asked Poppy, flying close.

“I’m fine, but where’s Link? I thought those scrubs said he came in here.”

Poppy’s eyes turned downcast. “I… Saw him while I was flying about.”

“Is he wounded? Show me to him.”

“I… I’m not sure I-”

“What are you saying? Show him to me!”

Tears streamed from the fairy’s eyes as she cried, “I can’t!” and flew away.

“Poppy!!”

Wounded and feeling as if a stone was in her throat, Saria searched the chamber. She did find Link, but…

There was nothing left but bones.

“Link… Link…!”

Saria fell to her knees, the strength in her body leaving her. As she reached down for the tattered green cloth and bones, magical light enveloped her.

“No, what’s happening? Link! Link come back to me! Link! LIIIIIIIIIINK!!!”

Saria disappeared from the chamber, teleported back outside by strange magic. Mido was the first to come running into the field, followed shortly thereafter by the other Kokiri.

“Saria! You’re okay!” shouted Mido. “What happened? Where are the others?!”

The girl, who was clinging onto tattered cloth looked up at her friend with teary eyes.

“He’s… He’s gone…”

The other Kokiri reeled at those words, Mido most of all. The boy’s legs shook as he struggled to stand. Before he could ask more questions, the Deku Tree spoke up.

“Saria… Thank you…”

“Thank me? For what?”

“Dost thou not remember thine deeds? Thou has verily demonstrated great courage.”

“But… I didn’t make it in time. I… Couldn’t save him.”

“I know, and for that I am sorry. It was I who tasked him with ending my curse. Perhaps what is happening is my punishment for my misjudgment.”

Saria and Mido looked to one another, then to the Deku Tree.

“What do you mean?” asked Mido. “Did Saria not break the curse?”

“She did, but the curse took too much of a toll on me. Please… My time is short. There is much I must tell you before I go.”

Saria, still grasping onto the tattered cloth, stood up.

“Okay. Tell me.”

“Thank you. Now… Listen carefully… A wicked man of the desert cast this dreadful curse upon me… This evil man ceaselessly uses his vile, sorcerous powers in his search for the Sacred Realm that is connected to Hyrule… For it is in that Sacred Realm that one will find the divine relic, the Triforce, which contains the essence of the gods…”

“The gods? Do you mean Din, Nayru, and Farore?”

“Indeed. Dost thou remember the tale? When the three goddesses finished making the world, they departed for the heavens. And golden sacred triangles remained at the point where the goddesses left the world. Since then, the sacred triangles have become the basis for our world’s providence. And, the resting place of the triangles has become the Sacred Realm.”

“Then that bad man must be after the Triforce, right?” said Mido.

“Yes. Thou must never allow the desert man in black armor to lay his hands on the sacred Triforce… Thou must never suffer that man, with his evil heart, to enter the Sacred Realm of legend… That evil man who cast the death curse upon me and sapped my power… Because of that curse, my end is nigh… Though your valiant efforts to break the curse were successful, I was doomed before you started… Yes, I will pass away soon… But do not grieve for me… I have been able to tell you of these important matters…”

A green orb of light appeared mid-air, floating down to Saria.

“This is Hyrule’s final hope… Saria… I know I ask much of you, but go to Hyrule Castle… There, thou will surely meet the Princess of Destiny… Take this stone with you. The stone that man wanted so much that he cast the curse on me…”

Saria took the stone, which was a brilliant green emerald with gold swirled around it, reminding Saria of a seed.

“But Great Deku Tree… I thought if a Kokiri left the forest they would die? What are you asking of me?”

“The world is full of danger and strife. Within the forest I could always watch over and protect you, but beyond this place I could not. With my disappearance, you must all learn to protect yourselves through your own strength. I am… Sorry to leave you all… But I believe in you. Stay together… Train well… Do what you must… And Saria, the future depends upon thee… Thou art courageous indeed…”

Before her very eyes, the Great Deku Tree began to wither. His brown bark turned grey, his leaves fell one by one, and his voice went silent. His spirit departed, all the Kokiri were reduced to tears.

Saria returned to the inside of the tree, seeking out Poppy, Link’s remains, and anything else of import. Link had the Kokiri sword and a deku shield, which she entrusted to Mido. Saria kept Link’s slingshot and cap, burying the rest with Navi beside the Great Deku Tree. What felt like days passed as the Kokiri mourned the loss of so many and struggled to pick up the pieces. Mido, who had always called himself the boss of the Kokiri, earned his title by directing others and staying strong in the face of looming danger. Soon enough, the Kokiri who were unfamiliar with the ways of battle swiftly learned, fashioning bark and sticks into shields and weapons. Mido and the others would protect the village no matter what.

At least… That’s what Saria hoped.

After talking it over with Poppy, Saria decided it was time to go. She had been entrusted with an important task by the Great Deku Tree. She had to leave the forest and seek out this so-called Princess of Destiny. Once she finished preparing food, supplies, and her gear, she put on a cloak the others fashioned for her as a gift and made her way to the bridge.

As she stepped onto the bridge that sat between Kokiri Village and the outside world, she saw Mido waiting for her.

“You really are leaving, huh?”

“Of course. What choice do I have?”

“You could stay! That bad man wants the spiritual stone, right? If you leave, you’ll be walking right into a trap!”

“But if I stay, he’ll only come back. He’s already done enough harm here.”

“Then let me come with you! Surely it would be safer than being by yourself!”

“The village needs you, Mido. They need a leader. Besides. I won’t truly be alone. I have Poppy, and…” Saria put a hand to the green cap on her head. Mido looked up at it.

“I thought I saw you cleaning it… I still can’t believe he’s gone.” Mido paused for a moment. “Do you… Hate me? If I didn’t let him through, then-”

Saria hugged Mido, patting him on the back. “How could I? This wasn’t your fault, nor the Great Deku Tree’s. It was that monster and the man from the desert.” Saria let go, stepping back. “It all feels wrong. It feels like he should be standing here. I always thought he would leave the village someday. Maybe he would have if it weren’t for that man…”

“What do you think you’ll do if you encounter him? To enter the village undetected and hurt the Deku Tree so… He must surely be strong.”

“I don’t know. But maybe I’ll learn. If the outside world is truly dangerous, then I’ll need to be strong as well. I’ll fight, survive, and seek out the princess. And if I see that man and he hesitates for even an instant…” Saria gripped the handle of her dagger, “I’ll make him regret it.”

Mido couldn’t help but chuckle at the statement, even as he cried. “Spoken like a true warrior. Seems you’ve graduated from being the big sister of the village! Best of luck then. And please… Don’t forget about us.”

“Don’t worry. As soon as I’m done, I’ll return straight away.”

“You better not be lying!” Mido shook his fist. “You hear me!”

For the first time in days, Saria smiled. Without another word, she ran across the bridge and out the tree hollow. For a moment, fear clenched her chest. She had always been told over and over that if a Kokiri left the forest they would die. Even after being told otherwise, instinct almost stopped her dead in her tracks. She pushed through it, however, and left the forest behind. She was still alive, and her journey had finally begun.

Chapter Text

Saria couldn’t believe it. This was the first time she had ever stepped outside of Kokiri Forest. Though she still felt pain from the loss of her friend and father, her heart swelled with excitement. There was such a vast world out there waiting to be explored, and by her side the whole time would be her fairy Poppy and-

“Link! Look up here!” said a strange voice.

“Huh?”

Saria looked up and noticed a gigantic owl roosting on a branch. Aside from its size, it had long feathers where eyebrows would go, giving the owl a distinct appearance.

“Wait… You’re not Link. Who are you?” asked the owl.

“My name is Saria. I’m a Kokiri from Kokiri Village.”

“Hmm. Hmm. Most strange. I was certain Link would leave the forest this day…”

Saria glared at the owl. “How would you even know that? Are you some manner of prophet?”

“W-what? Oh, no… Just a wizened old owl…” At this, the owl turned its face completely upside down. “Are you sure he’s not right behind you?”

With a pained sigh, Saria explained what had transpired. After she was finished, the owl turned its face upright again and narrowed its eyes in a solemn expression.

“Impossible… Could it really be true? But the…”

“But what?” asked Saria.

“Oh, never mind that. Unfortunate as that may be, perhaps there is still hope. You said that you were tasked by the Great Deku Tree to seek out the Princess, right?” Saria nodded. The owl then extended a wing and bowed his head. “My name is Kaepora Gaebora. I was tasked with guiding the young Link throughout his journey, but it would seem I would be your guide instead. I hope you will accept my service.”

“I’m still confused, but I’ll gladly take the help. After all, I’ve never been outside the forest before. I only know of the outside world through stories.”

“Don’t feel discouraged, Saria. There is much to learn and less time to learn it, but I will do all that I can to help. Here. Take this map.” Gaebora raised a scroll clutched in a talon. After dropping it down to Saria, the girl caught the scroll and unfurled it. According to the map, she was on the eastern outskirts of a place called Hyrule Field.

“I see… And I am to go to Hyrule Castle, yes?”

“Indeed! Go west and north,” the owl pointed with a wing, “and you will meet the Princess there. Dark forces are at work and monsters roam the wild. You will encounter many hardships ahead… But have courage! You are far stronger than you may ever know. Do you have any questions?”

Saria thought on this, deciding to take things one step at a time and learn on her own.

“No, that should be all. Thank you Gaebora.”

“You’re very welcome! I’ll see you around, then! Hoot hoot ho!!”

The great owl took off into the sky and disappeared. Once he was gone, Poppy said, “What a strange fellow.”

“I don’t mind him so much, but what he said is worrisome. He was so certain he would meet Link today.”

“Perhaps he’s a magician?”

“But he was wrong…”

“Magicians can be wrong, right?”

“Maybe, but…” Saria stopped, tapping her cheeks with both hands. “Mayhaps it would be better not to think on these matters. To Hyrule Castle!”

“Yeah!!”

Saria ran out to the vast fields of Hyrule, first following a dirt road before immediately being distracted by all the new sights, sounds, and smells. Gentle winds carried the fragrant scent of flowers Saria had never smelled before. The sun shined overhead and warmed her face. It was almost like a dream. She felt guilty for exploring and putting off her mission, but she kept telling herself “It won’t take that long…” over and over. As she walked through the fields, she noticed a rather large plant with equally large red leaves.

“Oh? What’s that?” asked Saria.

“I’m not sure. It looks familiar though,” said Poppy.

“Let’s go check it out!”

“Saria, I’m not sure-”

It was too late. Saria walked as close as she could, but then the ground started to shake. The plant uprooted itself and flew into the air, with long sharp leaves rotating at great speeds to keep the plant aloft.

“What the? It can fly?!”

The plant bent forward as it flew in Saria’s direction. As soon as she saw the sharp leaves cut through dirt and grass with ease, Saria took off running. As the plant pursued, Poppy tried to keep pace with her friend.

“I knew that looked familiar! That’s no ordinary plant. It’s a peahat!” said Poppy.

“A peahat? How do you know about that, but I don’t?”

“We fairies were sometimes tasked to send messages to the outside world. You don’t think I spent every waking hour by your side, do you?”

Saria picked up a rock and hucked it at the peahat, only to see the rock shatter against the spinning leaves.

“Fair point! So if you know what this is, do you know how to calm it down?”

“I’ll bet its roots are sensitive, but without a good vantage point, we’re stuck!”

“Then perhaps we need a distraction. Poppy, do you think you can lead it away?”

“What? Why me?!”

“Because you can fly!”

The peahat continued its pursuit, slicing through bushes and stone. Seeing this, Poppy said, “Fine! But you owe me!”

The green fairy shot a spark of magic at the peahat, drawing its attention as Poppy flew up into the sky. After Saria took cover in a nearby stream, she looked up. Sure enough, small roots could be seen beneath the creature.

“There!”

The girl drew her slingshot, loaded it with deku seeds, and fired. After the seeds hit the roots, the plant squealed and fell to the ground. Poppy flew back to Saria.

“Phew… That should keep it-”

And then the peahat exploded. Saria and Poppy stared blankly at the smoldering crater in the field.

“The outside world truly is filled with wonders,” said Saria.

“No kidding,” said Poppy.

After collecting themselves, the pair returned to the dirt road and made their way to the castle. Only, the sun was starting to go down…

“Oh shoot, it’ll be night soon. We should hurry!” said Saria.

The girl ran as fast as she could, but having dilly-dallied for so long, it was too late. By the time she reached the castle moat, the drawbridge was already being raised.

“No no no! Oh, come on!”

Saria stopped at the edge of the moat, catching her breath.

“I knew we shouldn’t have explored so much,” said Poppy.

“I didn’t think the day would pass by so quickly… It’s okay, though. We can just rest in a tree until daytime.”

When the sun finally set, a distant howl echoed through the night. The wolf’s howl sent shivers down Saria’s spine as she looked around.

“What was that?”

“I’m not sure,” said Poppy.

“Let’s get going, then. We won’t find shelter standing here.”

As Saria walked throughout the moon-painted field, she found herself constantly checking behind herself. There were no signs of monsters, but she couldn’t shake the feeling that she was being watched.

“Hey Poppy, do you think-”

And then it happened. Skeletal hands burst from the ground, grasping at Saria’s legs. Other figures appeared from the shadows. Small skeletal creatures with clawed boney hands, tattered clothes, and red glowing eyes in the sockets of beast-like skulls shambled towards Saria.

“Stalchildren!” shouted Poppy.

Saria drew her dagger and sliced at the grasping hands, freeing herself. She was quick to flee with her fairy companion, but more and more emerged from the ground to pursue, while others disappeared back into the earth.

“What are these things?” shouted Saria as she ran. “You said they’re stalchildren? Where are they all coming from?”

“How should I know? Maybe this is the work of that evil sorcerer!?” shouted Poppy.

Saria dodged the swipe of a claw and countered, severing the stalchild’s skull from its body. The skeletal fiend wandered about aimlessly, swiping at the air while others continued their pursuit.

“Has his influence truly reached this far? There are so many…”

More and more stalchildren emerged from the ground to surround Saria, their eyes gleaming with malice. Saria defended herself, slicing and swiping at the stalchildren as they came at her while striking deku nuts against the ground to thin the horde. The longer the fight dragged on, the more wounds the girl suffered. The creatures cackled with high-pitched, unnatural voices. Soon enough, Saria found herself backed against the edge of the moat, with a short fall to the waters below.

“Any ideas, Poppy?”

“Maybe another deku nut?”

“I’m already out…”

“Then it’s time for another leap of faith!”

With a nod, Saria dove back, falling into the watery moat. One of the stalchildren followed, burning up in the water and disappearing in wisps of green flame.

“Ha! I knew it!” said Poppy. “The water is too pure for their kind!”

Saria looked up at the remaining stalchildren, who were staring blankly at the Kokiri girl before losing interest. They looked less mad and more disappointed.

“I thank you for your wisdom, Poppy, but perhaps you could have told me this sooner.” Saria looked around and groaned. “How many times am I going to have to get wet before this journey is through?”

The currents of the moat were light enough that Saria could navigate the water with ease. In time, she was able to sneak away from the stalchildren and clamber up into a tree, resting throughout the night.

“I can see why the Great Deku Tree didn’t want us leaving the forest. Even with all my training, I could only do so much against them.”

“Don’t be so glum,” said Poppy, resting on Saria’s shoulder. “Your journey has just begun. You remember what that old windbag said earlier, right? Have courage!”

Tired, wet, and wounded, the fairy’s words were the funniest thing Saria had heard in a long time. After wiping a tear from her eye, she said, “Thank you, old friend. I needed that.”

The girl took the time to treat her wounds with powdered medicine. The green powder coagulated on contact with her cuts and scrapes, and though it burned, already she could feel her pain diminishing.

“I can’t believe there are so many of those in this field. What could have possibly left behind all those… Bones?” The girl winced at the word, recalling sour memories.

“Hmm… As I recall, there was a lot of fighting before Hyrule was finally united. I believe it was called the Hyrulean Civil War. The fighting never reached Kokiri Forest, but I think I remember acting as a messenger during those times… It feels so long ago.”

“Civil war? But… Why?”

“Who can say? The hearts of men are fickle things. Perhaps it was greed, or hatred, or simply indifference. All I know is that the war threatened to engulf even our dear forest.”

The fairy then looked out to the distance as if in deep thought.

“What’s wrong, Poppy?”

“I’m just thinking of something the Great Deku Tree once told me…”

It seemed too personal, so Saria decided not to push. She simply rested her head against her travel pack and closed her eyes. When she dreamed, she dreamed of distant memories and of friends come and gone…

---

“Saria, this way!” shouted the young boy.

Link and Saria were running through the Lost Woods together. The boy had something important he wanted to show her, but why it had to be out in the Lost Woods was passing strange. Was it secretly a confession? Saria blushed at the thought but decided to ignore it. Though they were of the same height, Saria had spent most of the boy’s life raising him alongside the other Kokiri. In many ways, she had acted as the surrogate that fairies often were to Kokiri sproutlings. The girl wasn’t sure what to make of her feelings, so she focused on the now rather than the what if.

After skidding to a halt at a crossroad, Link pointed at a dangling circular block of wood hanging from the branch of a tree.

“Oh, I think I know this place,” said Saria. “I’ve seen deku scrubs gather here to practice their marksmanship.”

“Yup! I saw them doing it while hiding in some bushes. It got me thinking. What if I need to defend against something I can’t reach with my hands? Or what if I need to shoot down some fruit I can’t climb up to? That’s when I decided to make this!”

Link drew a slingshot from behind his belt. The craftsmanship was rough but practical, and the band attached to the curved branches was tough yet flexible.

“This is really well-made. Is this your handiwork?” asked Saria.

“Mhmm! That’s why I wanted to show ya!” said Link.

Picking up a deku seed off the ground, Link loaded his slingshot, took aim, and hit right at the center of the branch’s target. He hit the target two more times until it caught the attention of a deku scrub sleeping inside the tree.

“Hey, this isn’t a public shooting gallery! Get outta here!”

Then the deku scrub shot something at Link’s face, knocking him over. It was a small pouch.

“What did you go and do that for?!” the boy shouted. “Why the heck did it even have this?”

Saria giggled and said, “Maybe this is its way of congratulating you for your sharpshooting?”

“I guess…” Link groaned. Saria helped the boy up, who dusted the dirt off his tunic. “You know, I bet I could fit a lot of seeds in this pouch. I guess clouds really do have silver lining, huh?”

“Seems so! Now, was there anything else you wanted to show me?”

“Nope, that’s it! Pretty cool, huh?”

Saria was staggered at his words but was comforted by his boyish grin. “It was pretty cool, as you say. I bet the others would be dying to see it as well.”

“I guess…”

“What’s wrong, Link?”

“Oh, it’s just been hard fitting in with the others. Even after all this time, I still don’t have a fairy. Some of the others are nice, but that Mido is always making fun of me. I’ve gotten into two fights with him just today!”

Saria pat her friend on his back as they left the Lost Woods behind. “Don’t worry, Link. I’m sure you’ll get your fairy someday…”

---

When Saria next awoke, she felt herself gripping something in her lap. It was her green cap. She loosened her grip on it and put it on, looking out to the vast fields before her. The sun was rising, bringing warmth and light to all of Hyrule. It was soothing, but the dreams still echoing in her mind made for a somber morning. It was then that Saria realized Poppy was nowhere to be found.

“Poppy? Poppy, where are you?!”

“Here I am!” said the fairy, floating towards her. She was carrying a small sack which was dangling beneath her. After Poppy gave Saria the sack, the Kokiri looked inside. Nuts, seeds, medicine, and other useful things could be found within.

“What’s all this? Did you really go all the way back to the forest?” asked Saria.

“No no, nothing like that,” said Poppy. “I just felt bad about last night and thought I’d help out. You remember how the Deku Tree’s influence went far beyond the forest?”

“Mhmm. Are you saying we can find these elsewhere?”

“That’s right! It seems his roots extend all over the place, so even ordinary bushes may have mixed with him. I uh… Took the liberty borrowing your dagger for a little while in order to harvest from some of the bushes. I hope you don’t mind.”

Saria’s head was filled with images of the tiny fairy wielding the dagger like a greatsword, struggling with every swing of the blade. She couldn’t help but giggle at the thought. After retrieving her dagger and dispersing the supplies to her pouches, Saria stood up and stretched.

“Mmph! I really needed that rest. Now that it’s safe to do so, let’s go to the castle! I’m starving.”

“Really? But what about those rations you brought?”

“Well… I could eat them, but I’m more curious what Hylian food tastes like.”

“Oh, you really are hopeless!”

Then a loud growl bellowed from Poppy’s stomach. Saria laughed at this while the fiery fairy grumbled.

After climbing down from the tree and making her way across the drawbridge, Saria took a moment to marvel at the craftsmanship. As she walked further in past the gate, she noticed an especially tall man wearing metal armor and holding a spear.

“Oh? Hello there! Welcome to Hyrule Castle Town! I don’t believe I’ve met you before.”

“Hello,” Saria bowed her head. “My name is Saria. This is where the princess lives, right?”

“Another admirer of the princess, eh? Well you wouldn’t be the first. Yes, this is the town surrounding Hyrule Castle – hence the name! The king and the rest of the royal family live further north up in the castle. I wouldn’t expect to see them anytime soon, though.”

“Really? How come?”

“Ever since people started trying to sneak onto the castle grounds to see Zelda, security has been ironclad. It was just tomfoolery this time, but who knows? Better to be safe than sorry.”

“Oh, I see…”

“Cheer up, kid! There are plenty of other children your age in the market square. You don’t have to meet royalty to make friends!” The guard laughed before returning his attention to Hyrule Field. He didn’t seem to take Saria very seriously (perhaps all Hylians were like this?), but maybe it would work in Saria’s favor. She thanked the guard and continued on her way toward the market square.

“What are we going to do, Poppy? If they’ve really tightened security, we might not be able to see the princess,” said Saria.

“We could always try sneaking in,” said Poppy.

“Didn’t you hear the guard? There’s no way we could just sneak in. Besides, it wouldn’t be proper. I’m trying to help people, after all.”

“Fine, fine. Then why don’t we ask around the town? Maybe someone knows a normal way you can see the princess?”

It was a reasonable enough plan. Saria agreed and began walking to and fro throughout the town, taking in the sights, meeting the people, petting the animals (a small dog and a bird called a cucco were running about), and smelling all the delicious food.

“Beef skewers! Get your beef skewers here!!” said a cook running a stall in the market.

“Ooh, that looks tasty. Can I have one?” asked Saria.

“For a cute thing like yourself? Five rupees should be plenty.”

“You take rupees as well? What a coincidence!” Saria pulled out a blue rupee from her pouch. “These are all over the place back at home. We just thought they were ordinary rocks. Here you go sir!”

The cook’s mouth was left agape at the girl’s statement. Saria simply set the rupee on the counter, took a skewer, and continued on her way. The meat was soft and savory, with a hint of spice. Poppy struggled to chew the piece she was given, but the fairy would not be deterred. She had been given a veritable feast, so she would not let it go to waste.

While Saria spoke to the townsfolk in Castle Town, she heard many things. Some useful, some not so much.

“I made so much money! I should find some more things to sell over in Lake Hylia!” said an old woman.

“Have you been to Lon Lon Ranch? Their milk is delicious!” said another woman.

“Did you know Hylians have big ears in order to hear the voices of the gods? Well I’ve never heard them before!”

Many townsfolk were out enjoying the sun, socializing, or competing with each other to get the best sale at the market stalls.

“Hey, who bumped me?!”

“Hey, let go! It’s mine! I found it first!”

“Huh? What? Shoo, kid! Shoo!”

It almost reminded Saria of the bickering deku scrubs. Though most of the townsfolk only gossiped, some had more… Unusual rumors to share. An old man in blue walked around the market square in contemplation. Curious, Saria approached him.

“Hey, do you know anything about the castle or the royal family?” she asked.

“Hmm… I know a thing or two, young miss. Would you care to hear a story?”

“Of course!”

“Have you ever heard the legend of the ‘Shadow Folk’? There is a tribe known as the Sheikah who swore an oath to the king and acted as his shadows. They worked behind the scenes ensuring peace and prosperity, but…”

“But what?”

The old man shook his head. “Perhaps they were not the best of people. I suppose any place can seem serene if dark deeds are dealt with behind closed doors. Ah, but you know… Things have been so peaceful as of late, no one has seen a Sheikah around for a very long time.”

Saria breathed a sigh of relief. “Well that’s good.”

“Wait, no, I think I heard of a Sheikah woman who still lives in the castle. Perhaps these are merely rumors and nothing more… But you never know! Thanks for humoring this old man.”

Then the wizened man went on his way.

“Saria?” said Poppy.

“Yeah?”

“Maybe we should be careful from now on.”

“I agree.”

The pair continued asking around for information. They heard that Princess Zelda could see prophetic visions in her dreams, they heard that a temple had been built around the entrance to the Sacred Realm (an unbelievable rumor to be sure), and they even met one of the people who tried sneaking into the castle. They were laughing it up, unaware that their blunderings had made preventing disaster that much harder. Saria rarely got angry, but even she was losing her patience.

“Easy there, Saria. We don’t want to make a scene,” said Poppy.

“Of course, of course,” she muttered to her companion. “If you don’t mind me asking, how did you sneak into the castle?”

“Ha! You’d never believe it! There’s a drain hole right out in the open! You have to get past some of the guards, but if you make it up the moat you’re halfway there! It’s crazy!” said the first man.

“I know, right? I still can’t believe you did it! What a goof, am I right?” said the second man.

The pair of friends continued laughing at the absurdity of the situation while Saria tried to keep her cool. She tore off a piece of meat from her skewer and chewed on it to calm her nerves. After finding a nice quiet place to rest, she said, “I can’t believe it! Did he even have any good reason for wanting to see Zelda?! What a buffoon!”

“I know a lot of people think Zelda is cute,” said Poppy.

“That doesn’t make me feel better about the situation.” Saria then took off her cap and looked at it. “Link… What would you do in this situation?”

Saria thought on the matter. If Link was here, he’d probably charge straight in without giving it a second thought. Sometimes he was careless, but his swift actions and bravery were always his strong suits. As she weighed Link’s approach against more careful options, Saria lost herself in thought. She didn’t even notice the young girl approaching her.

“Hey! Your clothes seem awfully different from the others. You’re not from around here, are you?”

Saria was surprised the girl had gotten so close to a stranger. Looking up, she saw that the girl had long red hair, bright blue eyes, and a beastly pendant on the collar that sat over her dress.

“I’m sorry, I don’t believe we’ve met,” said the apprehensive Kokiri. “My name is Saria. I’m from Kokiri Village.”

“Ooooh, I see. You’re a fairy girl from the forest! My name is Malon. My dad’s the owner of Lon Lon Ranch!”

“Right, the place with the milk and the horses. I’ve heard of that before.”

“Ha! It figures even someone from the forest would know about us. We are pretty famous.” Malon put her hands on her hips and wore a smug expression. Saria wasn’t sure what to make of the girl, but she seemed friendly enough.

“Say, this might be a weird question, but does your family’s milk ever get delivered to the castle?”

“It’s funny you ask. My dad and I came here to deliver some milk this morning! Only… He’s been gone an awfully long time.”

“Maybe the Sheikah woman got him. He’s probably a lost cause,” whispered Poppy.

It didn’t seem like Malon heard her, but Malon did see the fairy. The girl’s eyes lit up with excitement as she got closer and closer.

“Wow, a real-life fairy! No way! Can you cast spells? Grant wishes? Can you make someone taller? … Not that I would know anyone like that.”

Poppy wore a smug expression reminiscent of Malon’s from earlier as she said, “I’ll have you know I can do all that and more. I’d show you, but I have to conserve my power for the time being. Saria and I are on an important mission.”

“Ooh! Do tell!”

“No, don’t tell please,” said Saria.

“Do you know about Princess Zelda?” asked Poppy excitedly.

“Do I!” said Malon, matching the fairy’s enthusiasm. “I heard she can see the future! How cool is that?!”

“Wait a minute…” said Saria.

“You know what I think we should do?” asked Poppy.

“Wait a minute,” said Saria.

“Are you thinking what I’m thinking?” asked Malon.

“I sure am! Let’s-”

““Sneak in together!”” Malon and Poppy shouted in unison. Saria would have none of it, however.

“Okay, that’s enough,” Saria said, pulling them apart. “Listen, Malon: you seem really nice, but what we’re trying to do is very important. Not only that, but it’s dangerous. You don’t want to get hurt, right?”

“Hurt? Why would I get hurt?”

For just a moment, Malon reminded Saria of Link. The Kokiri girl shuddered.

“It’s… It’s complicated, all right? When I have free time, it would be fun to come visit you on the ranch, but right now it’s just not that time…”

“Oh come on, Saria. Don’t be such a deku stick in the mud!” said Poppy. “If this girl’s family makes deliveries to the castle a bunch, she must know the place in and out!”

“Have you ever been to the castle before?” Saria asked Malon.

“My dad leaves me by myself at the market each time.”

“Do you see what I mean?” said Saria to Poppy. “We can’t get a young Hylian girl involved just because you think she’d be helpful. What if she was caught by the Sheikah? What if that man shows up?”

“That man? What are you talking about?” asked Malon.

“You wouldn’t understand. He’s a sorcerer from the desert clad in black armor. If you see him, run as fast as you can.”

“From the desert? Black armor? That sounds just like that Gerudo man that came through town not too long ago.”

Saria nearly froze in place. Grabbing Malon by the shoulders, she asked, “Where did he go?”

“To the castle… I think. Have you never heard of him?”

“Oh, I’ve heard of him all right…” Saria paused, letting go of Malon. The air grew more tense. Even Poppy had quieted down. “Listen, Malon: if you tell me everything you know about that man, not only will I let you tag along, but I’ll make sure you’re reunited with your dad no matter what it takes.”

Malon stepped back, scratching at her cheek nervously. “O-oh, is that all? I suppose I can tell you what I’ve heard. I’ve never met him, but I see him come through town every once and a while with several Gerudo warriors in tow.”

Malon then went on to explain everything she had heard. Most of it was hearsay, but since she had spent so much time in the market, she had heard all kinds of gossip. The Gerudo were a tribe that lived far to the west in Gerudo Desert. They were a race almost entirely comprised of women and were known not only for their battle prowess, but also their agility, tactics, and stealth. Supposedly, a single male Gerudo was born into the tribe once a century. This time, that man was Ganondorf. Idolized by his people, he became the leader of the Gerudo and had started speaking with the King of Hyrule. Malon didn’t know what for, but she assumed it was to befriend him.

“Of course, you’d have to be pretty tough to be friends with a guy like him. I once saw him look my direction and his eyes… They were really scary!”

After she finished what she had to say, Saria thanked the girl and made her way towards the castle.

“Why do you want to know so much about Ganondorf anyway?” asked Malon.

Trying to control herself, Saria said, “It’s a long story.”

---

When Saria made it to just outside the castle gate, she noticed Kaepora Gaebora was perched atop a lone tree. He didn’t say anything. Rather, he simply watched and waited. Saria wasn’t sure why, but it was as if he were waiting to see what happened next.

“Saria! Check these out!” said Malon, pointing to a cliff wall. “These vines look pretty sturdy. I bet you could climb them just fine.”

The Kokiri tested the weight. “These should do. Thank you, Malon. I know I said you could come with, but now that I look, there are more guards than I thought. You should wait here.”

“What? That’s no fair!”

“Yeah, that’s no fair!” said Poppy.

“I just don’t want to see you get hurt. The guards in town seem friendly enough, but I doubt these ones play nice.”

“I can take care of myself, don’t you worry. Just pretend like I’m not here!”

“If you’re really sure, fine - but I’m going first. When it’s safe to move forward, I’ll flag you down. Deal?”

“Deal!”

Malon then wrapped her arms around Saria, giving her a great big hug. “Thanks for helping me. To be honest it’s kinda scary being in the marketplace all by myself. The adults are nice, but when all the shops close up I have nowhere else to go. They won’t let you leave since monsters come out at night, so I’ve been having to stay with a lady with a bunch of dogs.” Malon then let go. “I guess what I’m trying to say is… Thanks for being reliable.”

Saria felt a little warmth return to her heart. She smiled and said, “Don’t thank me yet. We still have to find your dad.”

“Yeah! Let’s do this!”

“Finally!” said Poppy, joining in. “But if I see even a hint of a Sheikah, I’m leaving.”

Saria glared at Poppy while Malon said, “What’s a Sheikah?”

The Kokiri’s shoulders drooped.

“Oh boy…”

After the girls climbed up the vines, they made their way across an unobserved cliff, climbed down a ladder, then exited the gatehouse. Saria moved ahead, finding a gap in the guards’ patrols. By this time it was getting dark, and the guards were growing tired, and laxer as a result. Once Malon caught up to Saria, they made their way across a field of short grass, trees, and shrubbery. For a moment, it all seemed too easy. But then they saw all the guards posted at the main gate up ahead.

“Oh shoot, how are we gonna get past them?” whispered Malon.

“That goofball in the marketplace said he used the moat, right?” asked Poppy. “Let’s check it out!”

The girls found a stone cliff that was rough enough to climb. After scaling it and crossing a hill, they were at the moat’s edge far from the guards.

“Say, are you going to be okay swimming in that?” asked Saria to Malon.

“Oh, it’ll be fine. I got bloomers on!”

“That’s not what I meant…”

The girls slipped into the moat and swam with the current, eventually reaching the eastern side of the moat. A few stone steps let them climb out, and sure enough, they found Malon’s father sleeping soundly next to a pair of empty milk crates. For the first time, Malon looked furious. Her eyes lit up like fresh flame, and steam billowed from her nostrils. With every step she took, the ground seemed to quake.

“Malon? Are you okay?” asked Saria.

“That no good sonnuva-! I’ll tan his hide!!”

The young girl leapt onto the sleeping man in overalls and started shaking him by his collar. Much to Saria’s surprise, this wasn’t enough to wake him. Malon became more forceful, slapping her father across the face over and over again until he had no choice but to wake up.

“Huh?! What the-Malon!”

“You were asleep? You were asleep?! How could you, Talon?! You left me out in the cold! I was imposing on strangers and begging for food, and you were napping?!?!”

Suddenly, the monstrous pendant on Malon’s collar made a lot more sense.

“Malon, keep it down! You’re gonna draw the guards over!” whispered Saria.

“I can’t believe you!” Malon continued. “How could you do that to your own daughter?! I outta tie you to a horse and slap its flanks so it drags you all the way from here to Gerudo Desert!!”

“I’m sorry, Malon! I’m sorry!”

Just as Saria feared, guards came running from all the noise. Their spears at the ready, they shouted, “Intruders! Stop right there!”

“What do we do? We’re trapped!” shouted Poppy.

“I don’t know. I still have my deku nuts, but what about the others?” asked Saria.

Malon and Talon were oblivious to the situation. Saria had no choice but to step between them and the guards, weapon drawn.

“Is that a kid?” said one of the guards.

“She’s got a weapon! Be careful!” said another.

Before the guards got too close, another figure appeared. Leaping from atop the castle wall, she landed on the ground, slamming her fist into the stone. The imposing figure was a tall, muscular woman with white hair tied back, wearing both an armored chest piece and form-fitting clothes primarily black and purple. As she stood up, she cracked the knuckles of the hand she landed on just by clenching her fist.

“This is no ordinary peeping tom. I’ll handle this.”

“B-but Impa!” complained one of the guards. She merely raised a hand, silencing him.

“Back to your posts. She could just be a distraction. Hyrule has many enemies…” When the guards hesitated, she turned and stared daggers at them. “I said back to your posts!” This was enough to send the guards running like frightened children. They fled the scene, leaving her and Saria alone, all while Malon was still chastising her father. Impa took notice of this and shouted at them. “You two!”

“Huh?” Malon and Talon looked up.

“Didn’t you already finish your delivery? What are you still doing here?”

Talon stared blankly at the frightening woman and said, “I… Fell asleep.”

Impa rubbed the bridge of her prominent nose. “You… Fell asleep.” The woman took a deep breath, widened her stance, and yelled, “Get out of here this instant!!!”

“Gah!” The startled Talon stood up, picking up Malon. “L-let’s get goin’, honey! We gotta get back to the ranch before we fall behind schedule!”

“But what about Sariaaaa?” Malon complained as Talon ran off with her.

There was a moment of silence as Impa and Saria watched the pair leave dust clouds in their wake. Impa then sighed, shaking her head. “The nerve of some people. Now where-” Impa looked back, only to find Saria was gone. “Oh! So that’s how it is? Well you’re not getting away! I, Impa of the Sheikah, will catch you, intruder. And when I do, you’ll be sorry you ever stepped foot here!”

---

After ditching Impa and slipping through the drainage hole, Saria found herself amidst a well-manicured garden. Everywhere she went there were trimmed bushes, marble statues, and guards dutifully on patrol. They seemed on high alert (likely on account of all the noise) but their numbers were thin enough to get by. If only it were that easy…

Not long after Saria entered the garden, Impa gave chase. She didn’t even say anything. She was just speed, strength, and rage. Saria fled as fast as she could away from the woman, darting between cover, dashing across wooden fixtures, and leaping between statues. They were so fast that the guards didn’t even notice them, and in the final stretch, the two just ran and ran. Saria realized she was reaching a dead end. It looked like a courtyard. It wasn’t empty, however. A lone girl was standing near the far wall peeking through one of the windows.

“Wait, I think that’s the princess!” said Poppy.

“Oh no you don’t!” hissed Impa under her breath. After gaining on the pair, Impa pulled out a glass bottle, uncorked it, then managed to capture Poppy in it just as Saria was about to cross the threshold. Saria skid to a halt, turning around.

“Poppy!”

“So she has a name… Interesting. You know, fairies go for a lot of rupees in the right circles.”

Saria stared the woman down. “You wouldn’t dare.”

“I might, I might not. What’s more important is that you leave and never return. If you do this, I’ll deliver your friend back to you soon enough.”

Saria readied her weapon. “You’ll give her back now.”

Impa chuckled at this. “A Kokiri with some fight in them. Now that’s a sight to see.”

“You knew I was a Kokiri?”

“Isn’t it obvious? A girl with a fairy, too pale to be a Gerudo, too swift and crafty to be an ordinary Hylian child. I’m more shocked you thought I wouldn’t know.” Impa then slipped the bottle into a hip pouch. “But that’s neither here nor there. It’s my sworn duty to protect the royal family. Either you leave quietly, or you don’t leave here at all.”

Impa assumed a fighting stance while Saria kept at the ready. Soon after, the pair clashed. Impa was the first to strike, darting forward with lightning speed and throwing a punch. Saria narrowly dodged the attack, but the force of the blow made her hair flutter. It was clear Impa was no ordinary woman. Saria tried to strike with her dagger, but Impa quickly shifted the blow away from her and disarmed the Kokiri.

“Hmph. I thought you forest children used wood for everything. Where did you get something of Hylian make?” Saria said nothing in response, trying to formulate a plan. “Won’t talk? That’s fine. I wouldn’t expect you. Perhaps I’ll hold onto this as well. Children shouldn’t play with knives, after all.”

Impa dodged a deku seed to the face by moving her head a half-inch. The deku seed had embedded itself into the wall behind Impa, leaving cracks in the stone. At this, Impa advanced on the Kokiri girl, dodging the incoming slingshot rounds every step of the way. When it seemed like Impa had Saria where she wanted her, Saria drew from her deku nut bag instead, slamming it into the woman’s stomach. After a flash of light, the force of the blow knocked Impa back, stunning her momentarily. Saria grabbed her dagger as it fell through the air, cut open Impa’s pouch, and retrieved the bottled Poppy.

“Phew! Thanks for that! I could barely breath in there!” said Poppy.

“We’re not through just yet,” said Impa, standing up. A small crack had formed on her chest armor from the deku nut. “You can keep your things, but no matter what, you will not see the princess!”

Impa and Saria assumed fighting stances once more, but before the fighting continued, a small figure approached from the courtyard. She had blue eyes, the pointed ears of a Hylian, and traces of blonde hair hidden by a headdress.

“Impa? What are you doing here?”

“Your highness?”

Impa changed her tone immediately, taking a knee before the princess. She then glanced over to Saria. “If you know what’s good for you, you should follow suit.”

Saria decided not to question things and took a knee as well. Poppy made a mocking imitation of the gesture by taking a knee mid-air.

“Honestly, how many times must I tell you to not do that? Stand up already!” said the princess.

Impa stood up, then the princess looked to Saria. “That means you too!”

Saria stood as well, sheathing her dagger.

“So, who are you, anyway? How did you get past the guards?” The princess turned to Impa and smirked. “This isn’t a secret training session, is it?”

“Actually, it’s-”

“That’s exactly it, your highness,” Impa interrupted.

Zelda let out a girlish laugh. “You always were a bad liar, Impa. Really now, who are you?”

Saria hesitated for a moment before answering. “Princess, my name is Saria. I’m a Kokiri from the forest to the east. I’ve been… Sent here on behalf of the guardian of the forest.”

The princess did a curtsy in her nightgown. “Is that so? And is that a fairy I see?”

“In the flesh,” said Poppy.

“You really are from the forest then. Do you… Do you have the Spiritual Stone of the Forest? That green and shining stone. Do you have it?”

Saria pulled out the stone. Moonlight struck the emerald, making it glow faintly before Saria put it away.

“Just as I thought! I’ve dreamt about this meeting, you know. Although… You’re a little different than I expected.”

“I get that a lot lately,” Saria muttered.

“Mind your tongue,” hissed Impa.

“Oh, come on now! Enough of that already!” complained the princess. “Impa, can you leave us alone for a little while? I have much to discuss with our guest.”

“B-but your highness…”

“Pretty please?” The princess clasped her hands together and pouted, giving the woman puppy dog eyes. A bead of sweat slipped down Impa’s forehead.

“All right. Call me if you need me.” And in an instant, the woman disappeared into the shadows. Poppy pulled out a very tiny handkerchief and wiped her own forehead with it.

“Now then, why don’t you step out of the dark? I want to get a good look at your face,” said the princess.

Saria obliged, following the princess into the courtyard proper. With the moon shining up above, it was easy to see Saria’s sharp yet soft Kokiri features. She was at once like a child and like that of a short, mature adult.

“I see… You’re quite pretty, you know,” said the princess.

“Thank you, your highness,” said Saria.

“Oh, enough with the formalities! It drives me crazy! Speak to me as you would anyone else.”

Saria relaxed a little and said, “Thank you. Are you really Princess Zelda?”

Zelda eyes widened in shock. “Oh, I’m sorry! I didn’t even introduce myself properly! Yes, I am Zelda, Princess of Hyrule. Would you care to sit down? Knowing how Impa treats intruders, you must be exhausted.”

“Maybe a little…” Saria nodded, then the two sat down on a stone bench on the west side of the courtyard.

“I had a dream once,” said Zelda. “I dreamt of dark storm clouds blotting out the sun. Faint traces of light tried to face the clouds but were swiftly blotted out. Then, just as all hope faded, a single brilliant ray of light shot out of the forest, parting the clouds, and lighting a path across the ground. The light turned into a figure holding a green and shining stone, followed by a fairy…” Zelda paused, looking Saria up and down. “Ever since I could remember my dreams, I’ve had… Visions. At first, I thought them mere coincidence, but my dreams always seemed to come true – for better or for worse. I think this recent dream is a prophecy as well. Yes… You just might be the one I dreamt of. You said your name was Saria, right? It’s strange. It feels like I’ve heard that name many times before. And not just that one. Sometimes I speak up and say something I don’t rightly know why I would say, like I’m remembering a distant memory from another life.”

Saria measured the princess’s words carefully. It was clear she was no liar. Indeed, she seemed almost frightened by her powers. Were she a Kokiri, Saria would not hesitate to put a reassuring hand on Zelda’s head to comfort her. Knowing she was the princess, however, Saria decided against it. Just because Impa was gone didn’t mean she wasn’t watching.

“Saria?” Zelda spoke up once more.

“Yes?”

“Can you keep a secret?”

“Of course.”

Zelda smiled, her eyes lighting up. “Thank you. This secret is that of the Sacred Realm passed down by the Royal Family of Hyrule. Don’t tell anyone I told you, okay?”

The princess then went on to tell the tale of the three goddesses. According to her, the Triforce was hidden somewhere in Hyrule. It had the power to grant wishes to whoever held it within their hands.

“If someone righteous of heart makes a wish, it would lead to a golden age of prosperity… But if someone black of heart made a wish…”

“It would plummet the world into an age of chaos and strife.”

“Exactly! That’s part of the legend. Because they didn’t want the Triforce falling into the wrong hands, ancient sages built the Temple of Time to protect the Triforce from evil.”

“The same temple in Castle Town?”

“Right again! You’re pretty good at this,” Zelda smiled. “The Temple of Time is said to be the entrance to the Sacred Realm, but it’s sealed with a stone wall called the Door of Time. In order to open the door, you need three Spiritual Stones. There’s one other thing that you need as well, a treasure that the Royal Family has kept safe for generations – the Ocarina of Time!”

“An ocarina?” Saria paused, pulling out her fairy ocarina.

“Something like that, yes. I’m told that in Hyrule, music has great power. This is especially true for those who hold the Ocarina of Time – an ocarina said to be able to change the flow of time itself.”

Saria, who was gripping her ocarina firmly, looked at the flowers in the center of the garden as a breeze passed over them. “Could this ocarina send you back in time?”

Zelda hummed in thought. “I suppose so. I wouldn’t know myself, but there must be some truth to the legends, right? Speaking of…” Zelda stood up and gestured for Saria to follow. The two went back to the window Zelda had been looking into earlier. “I forgot to tell you… I was spying through this window just now… The other element from my dream… The dark clouds. I believe they symbolize that man in there!”

Saria peered through the window, noticing a tall and striking figure in black armor. His skin was dark brown, his hair a fiery orange, and his eyes… He was speaking to an imposing figure on a throne, but then he glanced over at the window, causing Saria to duck on instinct. Zelda crouched down as well, looking somewhat silly in her nightgown and headdress.

“See what I mean? That was Ganondorf, the leader of the Gerudos.”

Saria, who was doing everything she could to hold in her anger left out quick and harsh words. “I’m familiar with him.”

Zelda was caught off-guard by the Kokiri’s tone and looked sad for a moment. “Then you must know why I’m worried about him. He swore allegiance to my father as a means of bridging the gap between Gerudos and Hylians, but I don’t trust him. Those dark clouds must symbolize that man.”

The girls stepped away from the window and returned to the courtyard bench.

“Did you tell your father about your dream?” asked Saria.

“I did, but… He doesn’t believe me.”

“But you could prove your powers easily to him. Surely you’ve had time after so many dreams.”

“It’s not that he doesn’t believe in my powers, but he believes they’re too unrefined. He would not risk conflict with the Gerudo over simple shapes and colors.”

“He’s got a point there,” said Poppy.

“But even though he doesn’t believe me, you do, right?”

“I have no reason to doubt you. Ganondorf has already… Done something unforgivable to my village.”

Sadness returned to Zelda’s eyes. “I see. I’m sorry. Still, I’m glad to know I was not wrong. That man is evil, no doubt about it.”

“And he’s after the Triforce as well.”

“Exactly! There could be no other reason for playing nice with my father. He must know he needs the Ocarina of Time. If he gets ahold of the ocarina and the spiritual stones, I’m afraid he may destroy all of Hyrule. He already has such terrifying power. I can sense it. I’m glad you have come. We can’t let him enter the Sacred Realm!”

“But I don’t understand. What can we do to stop him? Do you have a plan?”

“I do! If we can get the Triforce before him, we can use it to defeat him and bring peace to all of Hyrule!”

“And how do you propose we do that?”

“Why, by gathering all the spiritual stones, going straight to the Temple of Time with the ocarina and-oh. I think I know where you’re going with this.”

Saria nodded. “I hate to say it, but if we did open the door to the Sacred Realm, who’s to say he won’t follow us in and grab the Triforce? If we can’t fight him now, we definitely couldn’t fight him there.”

“I… See your point…”

“What about Impa? She’s strong. Just ask her to take care of him.”

“W-what are you saying? I can’t just send Impa to fight him! How would that look to the Gerudo if their leader suddenly disappeared while in Hyrule?”

“Sorry, I wasn’t thinking.”

Zelda huffed and crossed her arms. “I know you must be mad at him but try and think more carefully. If we act in the open, it’ll just give him an excuse to do so as well. I don’t know much about politics and fighting, but I know that if the Gerudo attacked with Ganondorf as their leader… Well… The guards have grown a bit soft in times of peace. That’s what my father says, anyway.”

“Then we don’t have much choice,” said Saria. “Either he gets to the spiritual stones, or we do. It’s risky, but I know he’s not afraid of hurting people to get them. If he has to chase after someone, then let it be me.”

“You’ll help me, then?”

“On one condition. We can’t open the door to the Sacred Realm.”

“Aaah, why not?”

Saria stood up, looking at the moon. “As long as I have the spiritual stones, it won’t matter if Ganondorf has the ocarina. Rather than multiple targets, he’ll only have one. I’m not very strong right now, but I’ve already learned a lot in my time in the outside world. I’ll keep training and getting stronger, and when the time is right, I’ll defeat him. For the Great Deku Tree. For Link…”

Zelda looked up at Saria, eyes wide with wonder.

“Link? Who’s that…?”

A cold wind blew through the courtyard. Cold enough to chill the heart. Something was terribly wrong, but Saria didn’t know what it was… Yet. What she did know, however, was that she had a goal. She would aid the princess, protect Hyrule, and defeat the sorcerer Ganondorf.

Zelda stood up, rubbing her arms. “It’s freezing out here. I have to get back inside, otherwise father will be mad. Saria? I know I ask a lot of you, but please… Have courage. I know you can do it.”

“I’ll do my best.” Saria tried to smile, but couldn’t. Zelda nodded as if in understanding.

“Here, before you go, take this letter. It should come in handy. My attendant can lead you out of the castle from here. Don’t be afraid.”

Impa manifested out of the shadows as if she were standing there the whole time.

“Are you finished, your highness?”

Zelda nodded. “I’m going to take a bath. Make sure Saria safely makes it back to Castle Town.”

Impa brought her right arm across her chest. “Of course. Saria… Come with me.”

The pair left Zelda behind as they walked out of the courtyard.

“Kokiri, I hope you understand what you’ve been entrusted with.”

“I am.”

“Good. While the stones need not be gathered immediately, know that Ganondorf and his minions will always be waiting. Never show weakness, for if you do, it will all be over.”

Once the pair reached a secluded area, Impa stopped and turned to Saria.

“Allow me to properly introduce myself. I am Impa of the Sheikah. I am responsible for protecting Princess Zelda. That dream she mentioned, and previous dreams… Everything is exactly as the Princess foretold.”

“You believe her?”

“Of course I do. Why wouldn’t I?” Impa paused, glancing back at the courtyard. “Those bearing the name ‘Zelda’ in the royal family have always been gifted. The princess is no different. Though she is young, I sense in her great potential. I sense potential in you, as well.”

“Thank you, Impa.”

The chiseled woman almost cracked a smile. “There’s something else I sense. Perhaps we are not so different. I heard of what transpired in the forest. I’m sorry for your loss.”

Saria glared at the woman while Poppy frantically moved a hand back and forth across her neck as if to say, “Please don’t!”

“Impa, I’ve heard of the Sheikah. I don’t know much, but if the rumors are true, I have no reason to doubt your words. You being as you are, do you really think Zelda’s plan is for the best?”

Impa sighed. “It is not… The best plan. But it is not the best situation either. With Ganondorf’s allegiance to the crown, any attack against him in Hylia would be a perfect excuse for war. Trust me when I say that Hyrule has suffered enough from war.”

Saria looked back at the sky. “I know.”

“Hmph. You’re a courageous girl for taking on this quest. Or perhaps it’s more than courage that drives you. No matter what it is, I must fulfill my role in the princess’s dream. I was told that I must teach a melody to the one from the forest. It is an ancient melody passed down by the Royal Family. I’ve played this song for Princess Zelda as a lullaby ever since she was a baby… There is power in these notes. Listen carefully.”

Impa played a short, simple, but beautiful song with a small hidden instrument. Saria played the song as well on her ocarina. Somehow, the song made her feel at peace…

“Well done. As for leaving the castle, you and your friends have stirred up enough trouble. If the guards saw you, they’d likely throw you in the dungeon. I’ll lead you out. Try and keep up.”

Rather than stop at Castle Town, Impa led Saria all the way outside, showing her a secret exit. By the time they crossed the moat, the morning sun had come and no stalchildren could be seen.

“Good. If you couldn’t keep up, I’d wonder if you were ready for the task.” Impa then looked across the field to a bridge, a river, and a stairway leading up into the mountains. “Few people truly understand the value of peace. This land was once a scorched, desolate place. With peace came healing, joy, and prosperity. We must do everything we can to protect this peace. Understand?” Saria nodded. “Now, take a good look at that mountain. That is Death Mountain, home of the Gorons. They are the keepers of the Spiritual Stone of Fire. At the foot of Death Mountain you will find my village, Kakariko. That was where I was born and raised. It’s not a bad place to rest before you undertake the journey ahead.”

“Are the others in the village like you?”

Impa chuckled at Saria’s words. “Oh, gods no. There hasn’t been a need for a proper Sheikah in a long time. It’s better that way, I think. No… The villagers are simple, peaceful folk. You’ll not find a better lot in all of Hyrule. Do try and behave yourself while you’re there.”

Poppy smirked at this. “We make no promises.”

“Tsk… You’re lucky I have better things to do, fairy. Don’t forget I always have more bottles.”

The fairy shrank away from Impa, hiding in Saria’s cloak.

“As for you, Kokiri, do not forget the song I taught you. Its notes hold a mysterious power. Only Royal Family members are allowed to learn this song. It will help prove your connection with the Royal Family, so remember it well. When the time is right, we will meet again. We’re counting on you.”

Impa stepped away before smashing a deku nut against the ground. When the flash of light faded, Impa was gone.

“Sheesh! You can’t even make jokes around her!” said Poppy.

“I suspect she lost her sense of humor long ago,” said Saria. She then made her way towards the bridge over the river. “Kakariko Village, was it? Do you think they have soft beds?”

“Hmm, maybe. Why do you ask?” Poppy then turned to look at Saria, who had bags under her bloodshot eyes. “Oh. Right. Because we were up all night.”

Saria trudged her way up the tall flight of stairs leading to the village. Soon after, she was greeted by a guard by the village gate. When asked if the village had a place for travelers to sleep, he said, “Not exactly. It was only recently that Impa opened up this village to the public. There are houses, yes, but no inns. I think I know someone who could offer you a bed, though.”

After the guard spoke with a woman living in a house at the lowest level of the village, the woman accepted Saria with open arms and offered the girl a bed. It wasn’t long until the girl was fast asleep…

Chapter Text

Saria was restless. She remained in a half-conscious, half-unconscious state for hours, never reaching full sleep. Tossing and turning, she eventually woke up to the smell of fresh stew. Salty and savory smells made her mouth water. Wiping her mouth with her sleeve and rubbing her eyes, she remembered where she was. She was in a small house in Kakariko Village.

“Oh, you’re finally awake, dearie!” said a portly woman at a stove. “Are you hungry? I made potato stew if you’d like some.”

“Y-yes, I’d appreciate that. Thank you.”

As Saria sat up, she realized that Poppy was fast asleep inside her cap, right beside the pillow. She decided to leave the fairy alone and join the woman at the table. After being served a good portion of stew, Saria let the steam hit her face. Now she felt fully awake.

After blowing on a few spoonfuls of stew to cool it and eat, Saria said, “This is good! Thank you for this, miss…?”

“You can call me Ofukuro. And your name is Saria, right?”

“It is. My memory of our first meeting is fuzzy. I was pretty tired when I came here.”

“It’s fine. Your little fairy explained things.” Ofukuro paused to eat some stew then continued. “It’s probably not my business, but are doing all right, dear? You were crying in your sleep. Your fairy was so worried she stayed up the whole time to watch over you. She only recently fell asleep herself.”

Saria glanced back at Poppy, who looked so sweet and peaceful. One of the fairy’s legs twitched before she calmed down. The Kokiri’s expression softened at the sight.

“I’ve been better, but I’m trying to make the most of things. Thank you for your concern, Ofukuro.”

“Of course! And if you’re still troubled, you can always come talk to me.” By this time, the kind woman had finished her first bowl and got up to serve herself seconds – or so Saria thought. After filling several other bowls, she turned to Saria. “Since you’re awake, if it’s not too much trouble, my sons have been working all day in the village. They’re carpenters that were all hired by Impa to help expand this village, but their boss, Mutoh, is always working them half to death. Could you take some stew to them for me?”

“I’d be happy to.”

“Wonderful! They’re all over village, but it shouldn’t be hard to recognize them. They’re all quite big, with hair the same color as mine. There’s Ichiro, Jiro, Sabooro, and Shiro.”

“Ichiro, Jiro, Sabooro, and Shiro. Got it.”

Showing great dexterity, Saria grabbed two bowls and balanced two more on her arms. She swiftly made her way through the village, seeking out the oversized men. It didn’t take long to find the first one.

The first son, Ichiro, was found inside a finished but empty building. His eyes lit up as he saw the stew and thanked Saria profusely for it, slurping it down in a go. After slamming the bowl on the counter, he said, “Ah, thanks for that!”

“You’re very welcome,” said Saria. “Say, if you don’t mind me asking, what are you doing in here?”

Ichiro leaned in and said, “Between you and me, I’m actually hiding from the boss.”

“O-oh, is that so?”

“I nearly threw out my back yesterday carrying wood and I barely get paid anything! I’ll never get rich like this! It kinda makes me wonder if there’s a way to work less but get paid more.” The man scratched his chin. “I suppose I could become a thief.”

Did he just say that out loud? Saria thought.

“Are you sure that’s the best course of action? What if you get caught? Wouldn’t you get in trouble?” asked Saria.

“Whaaaat? I’m sure that wouldn’t happen. I just gotta… Find some people who are already thieves and join ‘em. I’m sure my brawn would impress them!” The man laughed to himself. Saria decided to ditch him and move on.

Saria bumped into the second son after leaving the empty building. Jiro, a man with puffy hair, was running things back and forth between the center of town and up near the gate. He gasped upon seeing Saria masterfully balance all the hot bowls.

“Oh my goodness! Is that stew?”

After swiping a bowl, he quickly ate but soon regretted it, burning his tongue. “Ow ow ow ow!”

It was an amusing but worrying sight. Saria asked, “Are you okay?”

“Yeah, I’ll be fine. I was just so hungry I couldn’t help myself! The boss is always making us work on all kinds of projects in the village. It’s super hard work!”

Without missing a beat, Jiro continued his tasks, all while balancing the bowl atop his fluffy hair.

The third son, Sabooro, was found atop a half-finished building in the middle of the village. He was standing on a brick wall overlooking things while the fourth son, Shiro, was running supplies up to the building from the windmill.

“Hey, Ofukuro wanted you to have this,” said Saria, handing Sabooro a bowl.

“Ooooh, thank you!” The man sat down on the building frame, blew on the stew to cool it and started to eat, taking his time to enjoy every bite. “I gotta thank her for this. This really hit the spot! Come to think of it, I don’t think I’ve seen you around before. Are you moving into the village?”

Saria sat down on the building frame as well, saying, “What? Oh no, I’m just passing through. I was just doing Ofukuro a favor since she gave me a place to rest.”

“I see, I see,” the man nodded, enjoying the stew. After taking a break from eating, he looked out across the village. “That’s just how we are in this place. It was Impa that finally opened this village to the public so we poor folk could have a place to live. She even hired all of us to help expand it since we started running out of room for new people. I think that kindness was contagious, because everyone is always trying to help others in their own way here.”

Saria listened intently to the man’s words. Her first impression of Impa was frankly terrifying, but little by little, she started to realize that hard exterior bellied a great deal of kindness.

“I see… Impa is something else, huh?”

“You’re telling me! It’s a shame she’s always so busy. She used to live here you know, before she had to spend all her time working in the castle. She may as well be the head of this village, though we rarely see her. I wonder when she’ll be back?”

“If I happen to see her, I’ll ask her.”

“Well aren’t you a helpful sort?”

“I’m just trying fit in.”

The pair laughed together, and Saria started to feel at peace. The people she had met outside the forest were sometimes strange, scary, or downright rude, but there were many others who were pleasant and kind. She decided that, if possible, she would show all the Kokiri this village when time allowed.

“Oh wow, is that stew?” said Shiro as he swiped the bowl and went back to work without a second thought. Sabooro and Saria froze at the display, unsure how to react.

“Don’t mind my brother,” said Sabooro nervously. “Shiro and the others are, um, how should I put this? A bit blunt. They don’t mean to be rude, they just don’t think about these kinds of things.”

“Reminds me of someone I know back in my village.”

When Sabooro finished his stew, Saria went to reach for the bowl, but the man stopped her. “Don’t worry, I’ll take care of this and the other bowls myself. I’m sure you’re plenty busy.”

“Oh, I wouldn’t say that. I’m still waiting for a friend to wake up.”

“Really? Well… If you’re feeling especially charitable, I know of a way you can kill time. You see that woman over there by the animal pen?”

Saria turned her head. A rather distressed-looking woman with dark red hair and blue eyes was frantically running about trying to grab cuccos, all of which were roaming free throughout the village.

“That’s Anju,” said Sabooro. “She’s the daughter of our boss. I always feel bad for her, because she takes care of the village cuccos even though she has an allergy to them. I’ve helped her with the cuccos before, but they escape the pen so much it’s hard to keep up with them.”

“I see…” Saria looked around, noting the cuccos scattered throughout the village. She left the man by the brick wall, darting around the village at great speed and scooping up every cucco she could find until she dropped them back into the pen.

“W-wha? How did you do that so quickly? Thank you!” said Anju.

“It’s no big deal! I heard you had trouble with these little guys, so I thought I’d help.”

“Oh… I didn’t mean to be a bother.”

“No no, it’s fine.”

Despite Saria’s words, Anju hung her head low. “I don’t have many useful skills so I try and do what I can to help out around here. I was fine taking care of the cuccos for a while, but one day they started giving me goosebumps. It’s so troublesome, but I don’t want to stop and doing nothing all day.”

“Is it really so wrong to sit around? I mean… I know how you feel, but it’s okay to take a break every once and a while too. Don’t be so hard on yourself.”

“I appreciate your kind words, but it’s hard convincing myself it’s okay.”

She has quite the complex, Saria thought. I wonder…

“Hey, do you know if anyone around here has a sewing kit?”

“I think that house over there might have one. Why do you ask?”

Saria took off running. “You’ll see.”

After talking with another villager and getting some supplies, Saria fashioned a thick pair of work gloves for Anju.

“Here, that should help.”

“Oh! Thank you so much! But why the gift?”

“I figure if I can’t convince you to take a break, I can at least make handling the cuccos easier. I made you a bandana as well so you could cover your face when you needed to. I hope it helps!”

As Anju gripped the gloves and bandana, tears streamed from her eyes.

“W-wait, what did I do?” asked Saria.

“I… I… You’re just so kind! I don’t know what to say!!”

Rubbing the back of her head, Saria said, “Don’t worry so much about it! It’s fine. Honest!”

“No, this won’t do. I was raised better. Hold on!”

Anju sped to the top of the village. It sounded like she was frantically searching through her house. When she returned, she gave Saria a fine glass bottle (eerily similar to one Impa had).

“Here, take this!”

“Anju, it’s fine.”

“No! I refuse! I can’t just let you be so nice without trying to give something in return! Please, accept it!”

Feeling defeated, Saria smiled and accepted the bottle, putting it away in one of her pouches.

“Ah, well, I’m sure I can use it for something… Thank you very much, Anju.”

“And you as-” Anju gasped. “Oh no! I don’t even know your name! I’m sorry!”

“It’s Saria.”

“Saria? I’ll do my best to remember the name. Thank you once again!”

Saria nodded along, smiling but a little nervous as she walked away.

She’s a bit sensitive, it seems. That’s okay, though. It wouldn’t be the first time I’ve dealt with people like that.

The Kokiri reminisced about a time in her village when two of the boys were playfighting with wooden swords. One was a bit too rough and tore a hole in the other’s tunic. As Saria had helped fashion the tunic for the boy, he became so mad that he lashed out at his opponent, hurting him more than he intended. Saria had to break up the fight and set the two aside, giving both a talking to. After Saria helped fix the tunic and gave the other some medicine, they both wept profusely before Saria, apologizing over and over for their behavior. Those same two boys went on to become good friends. Saria realized she had been smiling the whole time she was reminiscing, her cheeks grown warm. Somehow, spending time in Kakariko Village and helping the villagers was making her homesick.

I should visit them soon…

With matters settled in the village, Saria returned to Ofukuro’s house to check on Poppy. When she stepped inside the house, Poppy flew straight into her chest.

“There you are! Why were you gone so long? I was worried about you!” the fairy fumed.

“I was helping out in the village. Don’t worry so much.” Saria gave Poppy a pat on the head, frustrating the fairy.

“Don’t tell me what to do! I have every right to worry after everything that’s happened!”

Even as Poppy continued to grumble, Saria chuckled at the sight. Hearing Poppy’s words brought Saria great joy. It was a busy morning, but somehow, she felt more rested than she had when she first woke up.

“Hey, Ofukuro, we’re taking off now. Thanks for all the help!” said Saria.

“Leaving so soon? All right, dearie! Feel free to come back anytime!”

Saria and Poppy said their goodbyes, leaving the house behind and making their way toward the gate that led to Death Mountain. As they did, Saria noticed a man stuck on a roof. He was looking past the Windmill to a corner of the village she had yet to explore.

“Looks like another storm,” said the man.

“A storm? With this weather?”

“There’s always a storm brewing over the graveyard. Not sure why.”

“A graveyard? What’s a graveyard?”

The man looked puzzled at Saria’s words. “Are you serious? It’s where the dead are buried.”

“Oh, I’m sorry. When someone passes away in my village, we simply return them to the soil under our great tree.”

The man seemed unsure how to respond. He said, “Graveyards aren’t too different from that. The one in this village uses stones to mark where the dead are buried. Past members of the Sheikah and Royal Family are buried there, supposedly. Old Dampé maintains the place if you’re really curious, though I suppose he’s likely asleep at the moment…”

Saria looked to Poppy. “Why would there be perpetual storms over such a place? Wouldn’t such an important place have protective magics? Unless…” Saria paused, lost in thought.

“I don’t know, but it gives me the creeps,” said Poppy.

“We should check it out, just in case.”

“What? Why? We have a mission to get to!”

“I want to make sure the village will be okay. It should only take a minute.”

Saria thanked the man on the roof and walked away. Poppy watched her go and fumed. “You say that about everything!”

---

When Saria first stepped into the village graveyard, the weather seemed calm, yet the closer she got, more and more dark clouds formed overhead, rumbling with thunder and lightning. Soon enough, rain was coming down all over the graveyard. Passing through the fence that separated the village from the graves, Saria found a large stone that read:

“R.I.P. Here lie the souls of those who swore fealty to the Royal Family of Hyrule. The Sheikah, guardians of the Royal Family and founders of Kakariko, watch over these spirits in their eternal slumber.”

“So it’s true,” said Saria. “This really is the burial site of the Sheikah and Royal Family.”

“Sounds like a good reason to leave them alone,” said Poppy.

Saria looked around. There was a small wooden shack to her right – likely the home of the gravekeeper – and a small boy who was swinging about a stick up ahead, saying he was imitating Dampé because he was bored. Other than that, there was nothing but rows and rows of graves with elaborately carved headstones. When she looked at the far end of the graveyard, Saria felt a wind blow that chilled her to the bone.

“What was that? It felt so… Unnatural.”

The Kokiri made her way to the very top of the graveyard. A large grave with two smaller graves dedicated to composers sat just before a raised fenced-off area. A strange, dark energy could be felt emanating from the cavern beyond the fencing up above.

“Curious… I wonder what’s up there?” asked Saria.

Poppy, who kept looking over her shoulder, said, “I don’t think it’s our business to know. We should get out of here!” Poppy checked her surroundings once more. “There’s something not right about this place. The spirits here are… Restless.”

“I feel it too, but this could be a good opportunity to learn about the Sheikah. Impa seems nice enough, but I still don’t trust the Sheikah.” Looking up at the fenced-off area, Saria said, “They’re hiding something, and I want to know what.”

Stepping closer to the large grave between the composers’ graves, she noticed an inscription, as well as the symbol of the Royal Family. Thinking back to the song Impa taught her, curiosity got the better of the Kokiri girl.

“It proves your connection to the Royal Family, does it? I wonder…”

Standing before the large grave, Saria played the song using her ocarina. Up above, the storm clouds continued to rumble and quake. They grew in intensity until finally, a lightning bolt shot out of the sky and struck the large grave, shattering it and revealing a deep pit. The explosive bolt startled the young boy in the back of the graveyard, sending him running.

“Ha! I knew it!” said Saria in triumph. “Well, except for the exploding stone part. I’m not sure how to fix that…”

Poppy floated over the dark pit, looking down. “What do you think is in there?” she asked.

“Sheikah secrets, no doubt,” Saria smugly grinned.

Saria joined her friend at the edge of the pit. It was deep enough that the faint light around the graveyard could only illuminate the first few feet. Saria was still curious, but now she wasn’t sure how to even get down there. While she was distracted, a sudden kick to her back knocked her down the hole.

“Saria!!” shouted Poppy, flying after her.

The Kokiri fell for what felt like hundreds of feet. Down, down, down into darkness she went, yet before she hit the bottom, she stopped mid-air and floated gently onto a magical platform that shimmered with light. After straightening herself out, she looked up.

“Saria, are you all right?!” asked Poppy, joining her.

“I’m fine. I don’t know what happened, though. It felt like I was pushed. Did you see who did it?”

Poppy raised a finger and was about to speak but stopped. “I… Flew down too fast to notice.”

Saria sighed. “It’s fine…” Testing her foot against the sparkling platformed, she realized it was enchanted. “I see. This should take us back to the top.”

“Oh good! Let’s get going, then.”

“Hold on,” Saria raised a hand. “We’ve come this far already. I sense dark spirits further within.” Saria drew her dagger and walked forward.

“That seems like a good reason to not stick around. Why do you want to look around so badly, anyway? Are you that curious?”

Saria reached the middle of the blue tiled chamber. The floor was littered with the bones of animals, monsters, and Hylians. She shuddered, holding a hand to her mouth.

“Wicked things truly do rest here…”

Keese noticed Saria and took flight, attacking her. Saria sliced at them as they attacked, and soon after their bodies disappeared.

“Poppy…”

“Yeah?”

“I want to keep those villagers safe. Some of them are rude and dimwitted, but many others are kind, doing their best to live their lives. I couldn’t possibly leave knowing they might be in danger.”

The fairy calmed down and looked at her friend with a tear in her eye. “Saria…”

The Kokiri girl stepped lightly around the chamber. No other monsters attacked. She did notice something else, however. She could hear the whispers of the dead.

“Shine light on the living dead…” said one of the voices.

“Those who break into the Royal Tomb will be obstructed by the lurkers in the dark…” said another.

A third voice said, “I… See… You…”

Saria stepped back. “What?”

A ghostly creature manifested itself before her, holding a lantern. A second spirit appeared behind her. Each spirit had a mustache, a composer’s baton, and flowing tattered robes with the symbol of the Triforce on them. Wearing hats, one was decorated with the image of the sun, while the other was decorated with the moon.

“Stop right there, trespasser!” said one spirit.

“You shall go no further!” said the other.

Before Saria had the chance to explain herself, the ghosts spun their lanterns around and attacked. Saria backflipped away, dodging the attack. The ghosts simply course-corrected and continued their charge. Saria answered their charge, dashing between the spirits and striking each with her dagger. The two spirits’ eyes widened in shock before they fell apart. The lanterns shattered on the ground, revealing ghostly flames. These flames, it would seem, were the true spirits.

“GYAAAAH! YOU KILLED ME… Unbelievable!” said one spirit.

“GYAAAAH! I’M DEAD AGAIN! Wait…” the other spirit said, looking Saria up and down. “You don’t look like one of Ganondorf’s agents.

“What are you talking about?” the first one shouted. “Of course she works for Ganondorf! Why else would she be down here?!”

“Hey!” shouted Saria. “I do not work for Ganondorf. Let’s get that straight right now. Furthermore, is that the only reason you attacked me? Have his agents come down here before?”

The fiery spirits looked at one another, then the right one spoke.

“Hm… Perhaps introductions are in order. My name is Sharp.”

“And I’m Flat!”

“We’re the Composer Brothers,” said Sharp, taking a bow. “We Sheikah could never figure out the power of the Triforce, but we almost completed our study of controlling time with the tones of ocarinas. Uh, I mean… Actually, we did complete that study! We were almost famous!”

“But then Ganondorf got involved…” said Flat.

“That wicked sorcerer,” Saria clenched her fist. “What did he do this time?”

“He tried to steal our results!” said Sharp. “Of course we would never let someone like him reap the fruits of our research. We gave our lives to protect our secret.”

Flat nodded. “To tell you the truth, we were each studying a different song. I was studying the moon.”

“And I, the sun. We once had a mission to study the mysterious powers of the Royal Family, which led us down this path.”

“Now that I think of it, how did you get down here? Only members of the Royal Family should be able to reach this place.”

“Well… I’m technically an envoy,” said Saria, avoiding eye contact with the ghosts.

“Oh, is that so? Perhaps we finally have the chance to share our work!” said Sharp. He turned to face a doorway up a flight of stairs next to unlit torch sconces. “Through that door at the far end of the next chamber, the last of our work has been preserved. However…”

“However?”

“A bunch of monsters are waiting to attack any intruders,” said Flat.

“What kind of monsters?” Poppy asked, biting her nails.

“The living dead,” said Sharp. “Terrible, hollow shells of men come and gone. I want you to see our work, but it may be too dangerous.”

“What would I find if I made it past them?” asked Saria.

“A magical song,” said Flat. “One that makes the moon chase the sun, and the sun chase the moon.”

“A song that could change night to day? Is such a thing even possible?”

“To be honest, we never tested it.”

Saria stumbled back.

“We’re pretty sure it works, but we were in a bit of a rush at the end. If it does work, however, you would have the power to shift the flow of time itself… Interested?”

“I’m not sure. What do you think, Poppy?” asked Saria.

“I mean it could be useful, but I don’t know what you would do with such a power. Is it really worth the risk?”

Saria pondered the matter, then spoke to the Composer Brothers again. “What are the chances these living dead could make it to the surface?”

“Now that the seal is broken?” asked Flat. “Oh, I’d say pretty good. If they can get the door open – which only requires you to touch it - that shiny platform will take them to the surface no problem!”

Sharp glared at his brother. “Are you serious? Who even put that thing there? This is a disaster! If those things get out, who knows what they’ll do!”

“I’ll take care of them,” said Saria. “I realize now I should never have come here, but I made this mess, so I’m going to clean it up.”

“Saria, are you sure?” asked Poppy. Saria nodded.

“Then before we go,” said Sharp, “let me give you some advice. The eyes of these creatures have a terrible power. They can paralyze you with a stare. They cannot see with their eyes, however. If you’re careful, you may be able to get the drop on them.”

“All right, I’ll keep that in mind. Thank you. The both of you,” Saria smiled.

Flat blushed. “Oh, it was nothing… I’m just happy all our hard work will finally amount to something.”

Sharp narrowed his gaze at his brother before saying, “Well, try not to make a habit of sticking your nose in other peoples’ graves.”

And then the flames puttered out, dissipating into the air. Before Saria entered the next chamber, Poppy slipped underneath Saria’s cap.

“I’ll just wait under here. I’m… Sure you’ll be fine.”

Saria could feel the fairy shivering. “That’s quite all right. If things get too dangerous, return to the surface and warn the others of the danger.”

Poppy gave an affirming nod, then slipped under the cap. Saria then touched a hand to the door, causing it to slide up and let her inside before shutting behind her.

Once everyone left the first chamber, a new figure slipped down the hole. After safely landing on the ground, she chuckled quietly to herself.

“So this is where they hid it…”

---

Saria stepped lightly, keeping her back to the left wall. At the end of a short hallway the room opened up. She could see pools of green sludge bubbling and release a foul gas into the air. It had a sharp, sickly-sweet smell to it. Dotting the visible walkways around the sludge were emaciating figures laying on the ground, crouching, or just staring at the walls. It looked like wooden masks had been strapped to their faces – and Saria had no doubt it was against their will.

Three, maybe four… It’s hard to tell with all that gas, Saria thought. They’re far enough away from each other that if I just stay quiet, I could-

A high-pitched whistle rang through the air from behind Saria. Someone or something had alerted the redead, and now they were all on the move.

Who did that?!

One of the redead slowly turned in Saria’s direction, shuffling forward. For just a moment, her eyes met the eyes of the redead, and a blood-curdling scream echoed in her mind, freezing her in place.

Shoot! I was careless! My body… I can’t… Move!

One step after another, the redead grew closer… And closer… A bony arm with long, bony fingers reached out to try and grab the Kokiri, but she broke out of the paralysis in the nick of time. The girl darted behind the undead monster and slashed away with her dagger, making the creature drop to the ground. Blue blood dripped from Saria’s dagger as red blood dripped from her lips. When she was certain it was slain, Saria ran for cover, wiping her mouth on her sleeve.

Had to bite my tongue just to free myself. I can’t even imagine what it would have done if I wasn’t quick enough.

After catching her breath, Saria readied herself for the next attack, but then something strange happened. The remaining redeads shuffled over to the one on the ground, crouched down, and just… Stared at it. Poppy, who was quivering beneath Saria’s cap, poked her head out and watched.

“W-w-w-what are they d-d-d-doing?”

“I’m not sure…” whispered Saria.

A few seconds passed, and the fallen redead’s body seemed to disappear, almost as if it were never real to begin with. Whether the creatures finished their business or lost interest, they all stood back up and turned away.

Now’s my chance!

Saria ran across the room, hopped over one of the sludge pits, then went wild with her dagger, striking the redead down one after the other. As frightening and durable as they were, they were too sluggish to defend themselves. With the last of the redead slain, Saria gasped for air. The gas in the room made it hard to breathe. The Kokiri struggled to get away, slumping against one of the walls and panting.

“It’s… Done…”

“Saria, you don’t look so good,” said Poppy. “Here.”

The fairy touched her hands to Saria’s forehead and glowed with magic power. Trace amounts of life energy were passed to the Kokiri, reversing the effects of the toxic fumes. Within seconds, Saria was back to normal.

“Poppy, you didn’t have to.”

“I’m your fairy, remember? I can’t sit by and do nothing while you’re suffering. Besides, if I let you fall here, it’s not like I could take on Ganondorf by myself.”

“Right you are,” said a woman’s voice. Saria turned to face the source of the voice, narrowly dodging a dagger hucked at her neck. Saria knocked a second dagger out of the air by striking it with her own, and then she finally saw her. It was a tall and muscular woman with bright red hair, dark skin, and vibrant yellow eyes. She wore jewelry, thick makeup, and colorful clothes, as well as light armor across her forearms and shins. Seeing the resemblance, Saria realized she was a Gerudo woman.

“Who are you?” asked Saria.

“Wouldn’t you like to know, fairy girl,” the woman smirked. After pulling out a small chunk of stone from her pants pocket, the woman casually tossed the stone up and down with one hand. “Thanks for the distraction. It would have been a pain to get this without you.”

“Wait, that inscription!” Poppy shouted. “Is that the Composer Brothers’ song?”

“That’s right,” said the Gerudo. “The only copy of it in the world, no less. I had ample time to remove it from that tablet at the back of the chamber. Ganondorf will be pleased once he sees this.”

Saria readied her dagger and drew a deku nut. “I won’t let you get away.”

“Oh, come on now. What do you care? You probably don’t even realize the value of this song. Don’t be a hero, girl. It’s not worth your life.” The woman grinned once more. “Unless you want to trade something for it. Call it a hunch, but I have a feeling you have something even more valuable than this song in one of those pouches.” The Gerudo then pocketed the stone and stepped forward, drawing a pair of scimitars as if from the air itself.

“Be careful, Saria. I can tell she’s no pushover,” said Poppy.

“The fairy is right, you know. I may be a lowly spy at the moment, but one day all of Gerudo Desert will know the name ‘Kitoga’!”

The Gerudo warrior dashed forward, swiping down at Saria. The Kokiri dodged, swerving to the right as she lashed out with her dagger. Kitoga parried, swinging once more with her second blade. Saria ducked, and Poppy shot up into the air, taking the cap with her. The pair of girls traded blows, one after the other as sparks fired from their blades every time they met.

Saria was pushed more and more on the defensive as Kitoga started reading her movements. Soon enough, all Saria could do was parry the Gerudo’s blades as she was pushed back toward a wall. Just when it seemed like there was no more room to go, Saria flipped back onto the wall and kicked off of it, crashing into Kitoga and knocking them both to the ground. One of the Gerudo’s scimitars fell into the green sludge while Saria’s dagger was all the way on the other side of the room.

“Damn you!” shouted Kitoga as she hucked a dagger at the Kokiri. Saria tried to dodge, but the dagger cut across her shoulder, drawing blood. Closing the distance to her own weapon, Saria turned and threw her cloak into the air, blocking Kitoga’s line of sight just long enough for Saria to toss a deku nut. Before the Gerudo realized what happened, Saria had knocked away her second scimitar, leaving her weaponless before the Kokiri.

“It’s over,” said Saria.

“Is it?!”

Kitoga threw a roundhouse kick at the girl, forcing Saria to dodge. The momentum was too much for the Gerudo’s pocket, however, and the stone was flung across the room right toward a sludge pit.

“No!” shouted Saria. The Kokiri leapt for the stone and caught it midair, landing safely on the other side of a pit. When she turned to look for the Gerudo, she was gone.

“Poppy, where’d she go?”

“She went through the door!”

Saria pursued, opening the door. By the time she was on the other side, Kitoga was already rising into the air via the magic platform. After disappearing in a beam of light, she was gone. Saria’s shoulders sunk. After smacking the side of her fist into the wall, she went back to the second chamber to retrieve her cloak.

“What’s wrong, Saria? You got the song. You won, didn’t you?” asked Poppy.

“She could have told us more about Ganondorf and his plans,” said Saria.

“Ah. You make a fair point. So it’s a draw, then.”

“It would seem so.”

Saria walked to the far end of the second chamber, finding a stone tablet on the wall. Missing from the tablet was the chunk of stone she was now carrying.

“Do I… Put it back? It seems wrong to take now.”

“She’d come back for it if you did,” said Poppy. “Might as well hold onto it for now.”

Nodding in agreement, Saria read the tablet aloud.

“This poem is dedicated to the memory of the dearly departed members of the Royal Family.

The rising sun will eventually set.
A newborn’s life will fade.
From sun to moon, moon to sun…
Give peaceful rest to
The living dead.”

“Interesting poem,” said Poppy. “So this is what the Composer Brothers left behind.”

Looking at the chunk of stone, Saria realized it had a musical staff with a set of notes indicating the song. After playing the song with her ocarina, she felt a strange magic wash over the air, as if the very sky had shifted. No longer was a dark storm brewing overhead. The clouds had parted, and the sun shined all over Kakariko.

A voice whispered in the air, “Restless souls wander where they don’t belong. Bring them calm with the Sun’s Song.”

Saria and Poppy looked around. Somehow the dark, dreary chamber felt… Peaceful. The Kokiri pocketed the Sun Song stone then looked to her companion.

“It’s time. Let’s get out of here.”

“Right,” said Poppy.

As Saria and Poppy walked back, Saria stopped, looking at the abandoned scimitar on the ground. Picking it up, Saria noticed the fine craftsmanship of the blade. Not only was the large blade sharp and thin enough to split hairs, but it also had a jeweled knuckle guard. Saria’s eyes widened as she looked at her reflection in the blade.

“Saria? You’re not taking that, are you?”

“I mean… She wouldn’t miss it, right?”

“Saria…”

“What? It’d be a waste to leave it in this tomb!”

“I can’t believe you!” Saria winced at Poppy’s chastising, but then the fairy said, “I knew it was a good idea to bond with you, you little rascal!” The fairy ruffled the Kokiri’s hair, making Saria blush. Despite the heavy mood of before, Saria’s heart felt strangely light. Once the pair were in the first chamber, they stepped onto the magic platform and were pulled to the surface by a beam of light.

“Gah!” a Hylian guard shouted, falling backwards.

“Oh! Sorry about that!” said Saria after returning to the graveyard.

“I should say! What were you doing down there?! Were you grave robbing?”

“No, it’s not like that!”

“Then explain that fancy sword!”

“This was a Royal Family tomb!” said Poppy. “Why would they have Gerudo weaponry?”

“W-why… Wouldn’t… Um… Hm. Fair enough. I still don’t know why you were down there, though.”

Unsure of what to do, Saria presented Zelda’s letter. The guard took the letter and looked it over.

“Wait a minute… This is the princess’s handwriting! Let’s see here… Hmm… Okay… ‘This is Saria… she is under my orders to save Hyrule.’ Wait, seriously?”

The guard started laughing hysterically at the letter. Saria stepped back, feeling uncomfortable.

“Is everything okay?” she asked.

“Ha ha ha! Oh, I think everything is fine. Seems the princess has come up with another funny game to play! Okay, okay, all right. Since she obviously put you up to this, I won’t punish you. In fact, I might as well ask. What else did she want you to do?”

“To travel up to Death Mountain?”

“Ha! Now that’s rich! All right, if that’s your orders, I’ll help you through the gate. Just be careful, Ms. Hero!”

The guard laughed all the way to the gate. Along the way, Saria and Poppy learned that he had been called to the graveyard to investigate the explosion from earlier. No one had seen any sign of a Gerudo. Even when Saria told the guard what happened, he didn’t believe her.

“Then how do you explain this fancy sword?!” she protested.

“I mean… Lots of Gerudo have been coming to Hyrule castle as of late. Who’s to say you didn’t buy that at the marketplace in Castle Town?”

“He’s got you there,” said Poppy.

“Tell you what,” the guard continued. “It’s clear there must be something strange going on, what with all this explosive lighting and Gerudo scimitar business. I’ll keep an eye out for anything strange, but in return, you can do me a favor. Have you ever heard of the Happy Mask Shop?”

Saria thought back to her time in Castle Town. The vague image of a colorful shop came to mind, but she never went inside.

“That sounds familiar…”

“It’s a new business in the market. Everyone’s talking about it! You must have seen my boy hanging out in the graveyard, right? He’s always pestering me for this really popular mask. Next time you head to town, maybe drop on by the shop and pick it up. You’d be doing me a huge favor.”

“Is there a reason you can’t get it yourself?” asked Poppy. The guard stared at her and gestured to the gate.

“I can’t just up and leave. My whole job is standing here and making sure the wrong people don’t pass through the gate. If I left my post without good cause, they’d hang me by my ankles until my face turned purple!”

“He’s got you there,” Saria said to Poppy with a smirk.

“Shush, you.”

“One more thing,” said the guard. “Try and be careful while you hike up the trail. Death Mountain isn’t just any ordinary mountain – it’s an active volcano! Sometimes it shoots whole chunks of rocks and hot magma out. That, and the locals are uh… Well, you’ll see, but they’re a bit careless as of late. Just be careful where you walk, all right?”

“Will do. Thank you, sir.”

“No, thank you Ms. Hero! Wah ha ha!”

As Saria walked off, Poppy floated after her and grumbled.

“I hate that guy.”

Chapter Text

“So this is the fabled Composer Brothers’ final work?” said the man in black armor. “How did you get this?”

“I was able to sneak into a Royal Family tomb,” said Kitoga, kneeling. “It was well-guarded so I had to memorize it, but the notes on that scroll should be accurate – this I pledge my life on.”

“Then let’s put it to the test.” The man in armor walked over to a decorative case where several instruments rested against purple cushions. After pulling out a mizmar, the man played the song. The man stepped over to a window in his chamber, waiting. The sun set while the moon rose, all in the span of a few seconds. He played the song once more, returning the sun to the sky. “Ha! So it is true!”

“Does this please my lord?” asked Kitoga.

“It might have in the past, but I’ve lost interest in this magic,” the man said as he put away his mizmar.

“If I may ask, why the change of heart?”

“There’s only one thing I want in this world now, and in order to get it, I need the Triforce. Had you brought me a spiritual stone, or the Ocarina of Time, I would been elated! But this? Compared to the Triforce, this is a mere parlor trick!”

The man tossed the scroll to the ground, which bounced and unrolled at Kitoga’s feet. It stung seeing her hard work tossed aside like that, but the Gerudo dare not speak such words before her lord. To outsiders, Ganondorf was a mere chieftain, but to the Gerudo, he was akin to a god reborn. And you do not level complaints at God.

“Kitoga,” said Ganondorf, “while you were sneaking about, did you cross paths with a Kokiri? There is a girl from Kokiri Village who I believe may have the very same stone that accursed tree denied me. I saw her the other night at Hyrule Castle peeking through a window.” Ganondorf stepped closer to Kitoga as he said, “Green hair, green clothes, green everything! Does this sound familiar?”

“I fought such a girl while in the tomb. I underestimated her, however, and nearly lost. I decided to flee before our battle drew the attention of the guards.”

Ganondorf looked Kitoga in the eye and gestured. “Rise.”

The Gerudo stood up slowly. Every Gerudo was physically gifted. Tall, muscular – imposing to even the stoutest Hylian. Yet even with her height, Ganondorf stood a head taller than her.

“My lord?”

“I wanted to get a good look at your eyes. They’re quite pretty. Almost like carved amethyst…” The Gerudo woman blushed at this, unsure how to react. “Yes,” Ganondorf continued. “Just like gemstones… So you did indeed encounter the Kokiri.”

“I did.”

Ganondorf started laughing. It was a low chuckle at first, but it soon rose in volume – a mad cackle that echoed throughout the room as the sorcerer clutched his head with a wild-eyed look of disbelief. Kitoga joined in, laughing uncomfortably. That was until Ganondorf grabbed her by the throat and slammed her into a wall, cracking the sandstone.

“That means you let one of the keys to the Door of Time get away! You useless woman, I’ll turn you to ash!!” Dark magic swirled about in Ganondorf’s free hand. “Before I kill you, do you have anything to say for yourself?”

“I… I overheard where she’s going! She’s traveling up Death Mountain!”

Ganondorf dropped the Gerudo woman, dispelling the dark magic in his hand. “Death Mountain… Of course, of course… It’s just like he said… It’s all making sense…”

Kitoga watched as Ganondorf paced about the room. She decided not to question it, saying, “I can pursue her, my lord. I underestimated her before, but I won’t make that mistake again. Not only will I return with the Kokiri’s Emerald, but the Goron’s Ruby as well!”

“Ha! As if I’d trust this matter to your hands alone. Still, you may prove useful yet. Go into the pit and take some of the lizalfos with you. They should be more than enough for the likes of her.”

Kitoga shook at the mere mention of the creatures. Lizalfos were just one of many monsters Ganondorf had won over to his side with his guile and ruthlessness. They were cruel, bestial things that looked at all living things as potential prey. Once Kitoga saw Ganondorf throw a Gerudo into the pit after failing him one too many times. Even to this day, the screams still gave her nightmares.

“H-how many should I take, my lord?”

“As many as you think you can handle, and a few more besides. A band of monsters raiding in the mountains does not raise suspicion the way a band of Gerudo might.” Kitoga nodded and started to walk away, but then Ganondorf said, “And one more thing, Kitoga.”

“Yes, my lord?”

“For every spiritual stone you do not bring back with you, I’ll pluck out one of your eyes. A gemstone for a gemstone… A fair trade, wouldn’t you say?”

Ganondorf laughed once more. All Kitoga could do was bow and leave the room. As she walked, she could feel a hot stinging sensation in her throat. Anger, fear, embarrassment – it hurt more than being struck against the wall. As the fuming Gerudo stomped down the hallway, a voice called out to her.

“Kitoga? Is everything all right?”

She almost snapped at the woman, but upon realizing it was Nabooru, she held back. Kitoga was hesitant to answer, for she feared being overheard by one of Ganondorf’s followers.

“Can’t say? Fine. Just be careful,” said Nabooru. “Our lord has grown a little agitated as of late. I suspect it’s his obsession with the Triforce.” Nabooru then approached Kitoga, putting a reassuring hand on the Gerudo’s shoulder. “It might be safer to disappear and never be seen again. I wouldn’t blame you for it. Trying to get on Ganondorf’s good side is like dancing with death.”

This only angered Kitoga further. She pulled away from Nabooru. “I’m not a coward like you!” she hissed. “Thinking like that is why you lost your place as chieftain to begin with! But I won’t go down the same path as you. My destiny is greatness! I will not falter!!”

Kitoga then ran off, leaving Nabooru alone. The former chieftain simply shook her head.

---

Saria made her way up the mountains, pacing herself as to not get too worn out. Further up the path, Poppy noticed some wandering monsters.

“Hey, I think those are red tektites.”

“Are they dangerous?” asked Saria, watching the creatures hop around.

“I… I think so. They’re certainly territorial.”

Saria took out a deku stick. “They seem harmless enough, but…”

As she inched closer, one of the tektites noticed Saria and hopped in her direction, springing its four spider-like legs off the ground. Its mandibles clicked together as its one eye stared the girl down. One thwack from her stick, however, pulverized the creature. It fell to pieces and dissipated into green flame. The other tektites saw this and hopped away, clearly frightened. Saria and Poppy froze, mouths agape.

“Oh geez, you really let him have it,” said Poppy.

“I didn’t think they were so delicate!” said Saria. “Now I feel sorry for them.”

“Hey, you were just defending yourself. I get it.”

“Yeah, but…”

Saria noticed a smaller red tektite that was too slow to catch up with the others. Upon Saria’s approach, it shook in fright. Seeing this, Saria took out some berries. When it seemed clear the girl meant no harm, the small tektite approached, eating the berries and calming down enough that Saria could pet the creature.

“I knew they weren’t so bad,” said Saria. “They’re cute once you get used to them.”

Poppy looked the creature in the eye. She tried to get close, but the tektite nipped at the air in her direction, causing her to back off. Saria just laughed.

“Oh yeah, real funny!” Poppy fumed, floating away to safety.

After helping the little tektite get back to its pack (or swarm - Saria wasn’t sure), she continued up the mountain trail, occasionally stopping to take a breather. During one of her small breaks, Saria noticed a pair of Hylians making their way up the trail in her direction. One of them was a large man with a fat belly wearing blue overalls and a red shirt, while the other was a small girl with fiery red hair wearing a white dress.

“Malon! Talon!” shouted Saria, waving them over.

“Saria!” shouted Malon, racing up ahead and giving Saria a hug. “What’re you doing up here?”

“An important mission!” said Poppy.

“Ooh. You’ll have to tell me all about it later.”

By this time, Saria took notice of the woven baskets with straps being worn on Malon and Talon’s backs, each filled with heavy-looking rocks.

“Come to think of it, what are you two doing up here?” asked Saria.

“Yeah. Those look super heavy,” said Poppy.

“These are for the Gorons,” said Talon. “They’re in a spot of trouble, so the King of Hyrule asked me to help transport some rations up to Death Mountain for them.”

“So you brought Malon with you to help carry the rocks?” asked Poppy.

“Oh, not exactly. She was the one who wanted to help. I told her it was dangerous up the Death Mountain trail but she insisted she come along.”

“I wanted to make sure he didn’t fall asleep somewhere,” said Malon.

“I see…” said Saria. “But what did you mean by rations?”

A shift in the air alerted the Kokiri. She shoved Malon aside and jumped back, dodging a large lumpy figure that slammed into the ground face-first.

“Gah! What the?!” shouted Talon.

The brown creature was still for a few seconds, eventually standing up after Saria poked it with a deku stick.

“Ooogh. Still hungry. I guess I missed,” said the creature.

Deku stick at the ready, Saria said, “Who are you? Why did you attack us?”

“Attack you? Huh?”

“Yeah! What’s the big idea?!” said Malon, shaking the creature around. “I know you all are hungry but that’s just plain rude! You’ll get yer rations when we get to the city!!”

“M-malon, dear, try and calm down,” said Talon. “I’m sure he didn’t mean anything by it.”

“Hey! Don’t take his side! I was nearly crushed!!”

“I’m sorry, okay!!” The creature pulled Malon off of him and set her down. “You need to understand we haven’t had anything even remotely edible in a long time.”

“What do you mean?” asked Saria.

“Hrrrm? Have you never seen a Goron before?” Saria shook her head. “Oh!” said the Goron. “Things make a bit more sense now. We Gorons live on these mountains, you see. We’ve had trouble getting food as of late, so when I saw some people carrying around some nice-smelling rocks, I couldn’t help myself.”

“You could have asked you know!” Malon fumed.

“I said I was sorry. Why don’t I escort you all the rest of the way to Goron City?”

“Impa said the Gorons had the Spiritual Stone of Fire, right?” Poppy whispered into Saria’s ear.

“Then that must be our destination,” whispered Saria. “We’ll gladly accept the help,” Saria said to the Goron.

“Great! Then right this way!” said the Goron. He then curled up into a ball and rolled up the mountain path. Saria looked to the others, shrugging, then they all followed the Goron.

Along the way, Saria noticed what looked like a sealed cavern. A Goron wearing a metal helmet, pauldrons, and chest armor was standing guard.

“I wonder what that’s about?” Saria wondered aloud.

“I guess we’ll find out soon enough,” said Poppy.

Eventually, the group made it to the top of the trail where they could see a large opening in the mountain. The Goron stood up, gestured for them to come inside, then waddled in, shortly followed by the rest of the group. Once inside, Saria found herself at the top ring of a multi-floor city. Rough round walls had been carved into the mountain, and decorative paintings of dancing Gorons could be seen all over the place. Hanging above the city on the top layer was a platform suspended by rope with a gem-like symbol carved into a short wall on the platform. Below, Saria could see carved openings to rooms, torch sconces, decorative pottery with Goron faces, and dozens of tired Gorons.

Talon set down his rock pack. “Hey, take this,” Talon handed a rock to the Goron that guided everyone to the city. “Call the others up so we can start distributing these.”

“Yes sir!” The Goron took a huge bite out of the rock like it was a berry, making loud crunching sounds. After swallowing, a bit of light returned to his big eyes before he waddled off. Malon set her backpack down as well and helped her father distribute rocks as Gorons wandered up to the top layer of the city.

“So they really do eat rocks,” said Poppy. “Gross!”

“Hey, that’s not very nice,” said a Goron tiptoeing across the rope suspension. After setting foot on the stone floor everyone else was on, he said, “rocks are a great source of nutrition!”

“Oh yeah? What kind of nutrition?”

The Goron took a rock from Talon, eating it. “Minerals, mostly.”

“Wait, I’m confused,” said Saria. “If you all eat rocks, how were you out of food? This whole place is made of rocks.”

The Goron scratched his chin, which had a patch of fuzz on it. “Do you eat the dirt surrounding your potatoes?”

“Then you only eat specific rocks, then. So what’s going on? Why is there a food shortage?”

“Big Bro would be able to explain it better, but some nasty stuff was going on in Dodongo’s Cavern, so he sealed it off. Only problem is that’s where we get most of our food. We can eat other rocks, sure, but the tastiest and most nutritious rocks are all found in that cavern.”

“So you guys are just picky eaters?” said Poppy.

“Hey, be nice,” said Saria. “Who’s this Big Bro? Is he your leader?”

“Yeah!” said another Goron. “You never heard of the Great Darunia? He’s like the strongest Goron ever!”

“I haven’t heard of a lot of things…”

“Well maybe you should go pay him a visit. At least when he’s open to visitors, anyway… He shut the door to his room and hasn’t come out in a while. Said he had to protect the city’s ruby or something.”

“Real shame, too,” said another Goron. “That ruby looked mighty tasty.”

“I think he’s just trying to keep it safe from you guys,” muttered Poppy.

With a better understanding of the situation, Saria walked over to Malon and said, “Hey, I have some things to do. I’ll see you later.”

“Okay! Maybe when we’re both free we can hang out some more!”

“Sounds good to me. Take care, now!”

The two waved goodbye, then Saria made her way down. At the very bottom of the city past a gigantic pot was the sealed chamber. Curiously, it was marked by the crest of the Royal Family.

“Hey, you thinking what I’m thinking?” asked Saria.

“I just hope it doesn’t explode like last time,” said Poppy.

Saria played Zelda’s Lullaby, and just as she suspected, the door opened up. “I see. So it really does open any door with that marking.”

Poppy, who had been shielding her face, peeked between her fingers. Since nothing exploded, she said, “Phew. Let’s get inside, then.”

A short hall led to a larger chamber with two brightly lit torches, a stone statue, some tables and chairs, and a muscular Goron sitting on a rug with his back turned. The rocky bumps on his back looked almost like spikes, and the Goron’s full head of hair looked equally spiky.

“Excuse me,” said Saria. “Are you Darunia?”

“Hm?! It’s about time!” Darunia stood up, turning around. “I was wondering when the… Royal Family’s… Messenger… Would get here. Hm!? Who are you?”

“My name is Saria. I’m a Kokiri, as well as an envoy of the Royal Family.”

“You? An envoy?! How?! When I heard that song, I was expecting a proper messenger, like a Hylian guard, not some puny kid. Go away!”

“Hey! She’s not just some kid! She’s just short!” shouted Poppy in protest.

“You’re really not helping…” muttered Saria.

“I can’t believe it. Has the Great Darunia really fallen so far that this is the best I get from my sworn brother? And after everything I did for that guy! Sheesh!”

“Hold on, the king isn’t trying to slight you. He even sent your people food rations.”

“Yeah! You should be thanking us!” said Poppy. “Or at least Malon and her dad…”

“Food? That helps a little, but that still doesn’t solve the problem. What I need is backup! Fightin’ men! You get me, little pipsqueak? I don’t need a tiny envoy and her even tinier fairy!!”

“Waiting for backup? Is that what you call sealing yourself in your room like a coward?!” shouted Poppy.

“What did you say?!” Darunia got closer to the fairy as a vein bulged on his forehead. “You don’t understand a dang thing!”

“Well maybe we would if you explained a thing or two!!”

“It’s Goron business! It’s got nothing to do with you!!”

Poppy and Darunia looked like they were about to get into a fight (a fight Poppy would surely lose), so Saria stepped between the two.

“Enough! No more fighting! We’re just here to help, and we can do that if you tell us what’s going on.”

Poppy turned her nose up and crossed her arms. “Fine. I’ll be in your cap.” Then the fairy lifted Saria’s cap and took shelter. Saria let out a tired sigh.

“So Darunia, why is Dodongo’s Cavern sealed?”

“Hmph. If you really want to know, a nasty fellow came by not too long ago looking for our sacred treasure. Obviously, I told him to buzz off, and when he tried to steal it, I threw him out – literally. He got so mad that he started waking up a bunch of monsters in Dodongo’s Cavern out of sheer spite.”

“Ganondorf caused all this? That slime!!” Saria clenched her fists, anger welling up inside of her. She saw what it had done to Darunia and Poppy, however, so she took a second to breathe and calmed down. “Then what happened?” Saria asked Darunia.

“What didn’t happen? After he woke up all the dodongos and those other nasties, they started attacking our miners. Do you know how many good men I lost in that cave? Some of my best warriors gave their lives so the others could escape unharmed. I had no choice but to seal the cave, otherwise they would have rampaged through Kakariko Village and the rest of Hyrule!”

“Oh… Then this whole time… You all were starving to keep Hyrule safe?”

The grumpy-faced Goron nodded. “Mhmm. A sorcerer tried to steal our treasure, then monsters were woken up and wreaked havoc where we get our food, we’ve been starving this whole time, and to top it all off, we’ve had a terrible harvest of bomb flowers, so we haven’t had any money to buy food from elsewhere! It’s been one disaster after another! I wanted to put together a team of warriors to take back the cavern, but all I’ve got with me are cooks, miners, sculptors, and painters! And then the lazy bums started getting desperate and tried to eat our sacred ruby! All I could do was send a letter and wait here for someone, anyone to come from Castle Town. I thought maybe if I could get a contingent of soldiers, I could finally fix this mess, but all I got was some rations and a nosy kid!” Darunia collapsed on his back, staring angrily at the ceiling. “So yeah. I’m a little upset, okay? Can you really blame me?”

Poppy poked her head out from under Saria’s cap. “Geez… When you put it that way, I kinda feel like a jerk. I’m sorry.”

“Bah!” Darunia turned away on his side. “I don’t need apologies. I need to fix this mess. But… How?”

Saria thought back to her home village, on how sometimes her fellow Kokiri would squabble, yell at each other, get upset, and sometimes just feel sad for no good reason. Everyone had rainy days – some more than others. She didn’t like seeing her brothers and sisters cry, so she spent time writing a song. It was a song meant to lift the spirits of her brethren, one that would brighten their day no matter how bad things got. It worked, too. It worked so well, it started attracting the attention of the forest spirits, who loved to dance to the tune. It wasn’t much, but Saria wanted to cheer up the Goron, so she pulled out her ocarina.

“Say, I wrote a song once to help cheer up my fellow villagers. It’s not much, but would you like to hear it?”

Darunia continued grumbling. “Go ahead, I don’t care. Maybe some nice music will help me think…”

In an attempt to cheer up Darunia, Saria played her song. The notes danced playfully through the air like the spirits of the forest. As Saria played, Darunia kicked one of his feet to the tune. Then he stood up and started to dance, swinging his oversized fists around.

“Oh! What is this? Oh! Oh yeah! I can dig it! Come on, come on! Hot! Hot! I feel like I’m on fire! Oh yeah!!”

The once sullen Goron danced to his heart’s content, moving about the room, nearly smashing his own statue with one of his flailing fists. When his spirit seemed lifted, Saria finished the song. Darunia took a second to catch his breath.

“Wow… What was that? It felt like all my anger and depression was washed away, and the only thing that was left was the urge… To dance!”

“Feeling better?” Saria smiled.

“I’ll say! That was some song! Saria, right? I’m sorry for how rude I was early. Let me properly introduce myself. I’m Darunia, Chief of the Gorons! I come from a long line of warriors and even fought beside the King of Hyrule during the last war! Normally I’m more of a doer than a thinker, but ever since I took on the role of chief, I barely get to do anything aside from delegate. But no more! I’m gonna whip those sorry Gorons into shape and take back the cavern!”

“Really?”

“In a day or two.”

“A day or two?!”

“What, you think training comes easy? These guys need all the help they can get! As for you, you said you wanted to help, right? Is that why you were sent here?”

“Sort of. Truth be told, I was sent here for the Goron’s Ruby.”

“Wait, really? Why?”

“It’s a bit of a story, but my goal is to keep the spiritual stones away from Ganondorf – the sorcerer that harassed you and caused trouble in the cavern. Ganondorf has been traveling all over Hyrule attacking and harassing people over the stones – my village included. I want to carry that burden for others so they can be safe, and maybe I can even use it to draw the sorcerer out of hiding.”

“Huh! I wouldn’t have taken you for such a brave sort, but I can respect your goal. Even so, I can’t just give you our sacred treasure, so let’s cut a deal. I need time to train my people into proper soldiers. If you can lead the charge into the cavern and help clear out some of the monsters, I’d give you anything, even the ruby! Are you up for some monster slaying?”

“If it means your people will get to eat again, I’ll gladly clear a path.”

“That’s the spirit!” Darunia said, patting Saria on the back with concussive force. “Oh, but you’ll need to make an opening. Here, you can have this magic bracelet. If you wear this, you’ll be almost as strong as a Goron! Even a little gal like you should be able to harvest some bomb flowers and blow open a hole to the cavern.”

Darunia gave the Kokiri a golden bracelet with a shimmering red symbol on one side. After slipping it on, Saria felt the power of the bracelet course through her body. When she clenched her fists, she could see her muscles bulge underneath her sweater.

“Whoa.”

“Here, try crushing this rock.”

Darunia passed Saria a rock, and after holding it in both hands, she squeezed, crushing the rock into tiny little chunks.

“Oh hey, a rupee,” said Poppy, scooping the gem from the rubble.

“Some of our bomb flowers grow in the shade just outside the city. They’re those funny-looking round plants you may have seen on your way up here.”

“Wait, the plants explode here too?” asked Saria.

“Yeah! Pretty crazy, huh?” grinned Darunia. “We use ‘em for mining, or at least we did. What’s with that look on your face, though?”

“Oh, it’s nothing… Anyway, I’m gonna get started on the cavern. Don’t take too long, otherwise I might clear the whole place for you!”

“Ha! I like you, kid. Go get ‘em!”

As Saria tried to leave Darunia’s chamber, she bumped into Malon, as well as a few others. Malon, Talon, and the rest of the Gorons were waiting outside Darunia’s room.

“Wait, when did you guys get here?!” asked Saria.

“We finished distributing most of the rocks, but we still needed to give some to Darunia,” said Talon.

“And the rest of the Gorons followed us down here,” said Malon.

“We were just worried about Big Bro! We hadn’t heard from him in ages!” said one of the Gorons.

“I’m glad he’s feeling better. How’d you know he liked music so much?” asked another.

Just then, Saria felt a presence from behind her.

“How… Long… Were you… Watching…?”

“B-big Bro?”

“A-a-around time she started playing that song…”

Darunia started grinding his teeth and blushing. He stomped his foot and shouted, “You idiots! Who said you could listen in on a private conversation between me and a Royal Envoy? That does it, training starts now! Give me 500 squats on the double!!”

“Gah! Yes, Big Bro!!”

All the Gorons started exercising vigorously on Darunia’s command. Even Talon joined in out of fear. Saria took this as an opportunity to slip out of the city so she could get to work.

Off to the right after walking out the entrance, she noticed patches of bomb flowers growing in the shade. They were near a cliff overlooking that sealed entrance Saria had seen earlier. After gripping one of the flowers and yanking it out of the ground, she could hear a hissing sound. She quickly tossed the flower over the ledge before it exploded.

“Huh? What’s this?” said a voice down below. Then came a loud boom. The voice cried out as the sound of crumbling rocks echoed throughout the mountain.

“Oh shoot! Sorry!” said Saria, looking over the ledge.

“Watch where you’re throwing those things!!” shouted the Goron back at her.

“Try and be careful next time,” said Poppy.

“I’m sorry! I panicked!” said Saria.

After that, the Kokiri made her way down the mountain trail, stopping just before Dodongo’s Cavern. The entrance was a long dark tunnel, almost like the throat of a beast.

“Time to get to work,” said Saria.

“Are you really going in there?” asked the Goron guard.

“Yeah. I promised Darunia I’d help you all with the monsters.”

“Well, if you’re really going in, just watch out for those dodongos. They’ll eat anything, so don’t get yourself eaten!”

“I’ll be careful. Just keep watch in case anything slips past me!”

Saria waved goodbye to the guard then ran inside the cavern. Despite the danger, despite her anger and fear that had been bubbling in her stomach ever since she first left the forest, Saria felt… Excited. It was a strange feeling.

I bet you would have felt the same way, Link, thought the Kokiri girl. Putting a hand on her cap to keep it from slipping off, she thought, Don’t worry. I’ll keep Hyrule safe in your stead. You can count on me.

---

Once Saria was inside the cavern, she found another barrier. A wall of stone stood before her, with bomb flowers growing nearby in dark corners of the cave. It was a simple matter of picking up a bomb and hucking it at the wall to blast it open. Beyond the shattered wall were walkways of stone, platforms held up by support beams, and on the far side, the remains of a great beast embedded in the wall. Round platforms rose and fell into the magma below and waiting on some of the platforms and walkways up ahead were one-eyed monsters that looked more like statues than living things; their singular eye as big as a head, spinning around and around.

“They almost look like they’re guarding the place,” said Poppy. “Do you think Ganondorf put them there, or was it Darunia so they could keep the monsters at bay?”

“I don’t think Darunia would put such mean-looking things in his own cave,” said a familiar voice from behind. Saria turned around, weapon drawn. It was Malon.

“What are you doing here?” exclaimed Saria. “Shouldn’t you be heading home with your father?”

“I overheard some of the things you and Darunia were talking about. You’re gonna fight some of the monsters in this cave, right? Well I’m here to help!”

The farmgirl was no longer wearing her simple white dress, but instead, she was adorned with a red tunic, similarly red pants, sturdy boots, and thick hide armor plated with metal for added protection. She even had an open-faced leather helm on with horns on top.

“Okay, back outside,” said Saria as she pushed the girl.

“Hey! No fair! I can help too!” said Malon.

“Sneaking into a castle is one thing, but clearing a cave full of monsters is another thing entirely! Where did you even get all this?”

Malon stepped away from Saria and beat a fist against her chest proudly. “The local merchant was really hungry, so I traded some of the rations for some gear. Pretty smart, huh?”

“Wait, doesn’t that mean some of the other Gorons went hungry?”

Malon stared blankly then looked up. “Huh. I didn’t think about that. That’s okay though!”

“How?!”

“Because we’re gonna clear out the cave and make sure everybody gets to eat!!”

“No we’re not! Do you know how dangerous it is in here?”

“Do you?”

The Kokiri’s shoulders drooped. “No, but…”

“But nothing! You’re always worried about if I get hurt, but what about you? Don’t I get to be worried about my friend’s safety?”

“Malon…”

The farmgirl stepped closer. Even though Malon was just a child, she was already as tall as Saria. She put her hands on the Kokiri’s shoulders and smiled once more.

“I know places like this can be scary and there’s a chance one of us could get hurt, but if we work together, we’ll probably get hurt way less than if it was just one of us. Besides… I saw how sad the Gorons looked. Knowing that they were scared and hurting like that, I couldn’t just walk away. I want to help them just as much as you, so please, let me come with you!”

Hearing Malon’s words, Saria couldn’t help but smile back at her. “You know what? You’re right. If we tackle this together, it should take no time at all.”

“So you’ll let me join you?”

“On one condition.”

“Aaah…”

“You have to let me lead the way like last time. No running ahead and no splitting up. Got it?”

“Got it!”

“Then let’s get this done.”

“Yay!” Malon put on a metal buckler decorated with a Goron’s face and drew a thick stone club from a belt loop. Weapon and shield at the ready, she said, “Let’s go!”

As Saria and Malon stepped through the opening to the main chamber, Saria said, “You really made out like a bandit, huh?”

“I know, right? I even got this heat-resistant tunic. It was a bit big for me so I had to resize it, but it must be working because I feel downright comfy in here!”

Saria put her hand out, stopping Malon. “Watch your step.”

“Oh, right.” Malon looked around. “This place is huge! And the Gorons used to mine in here?”

“It does seem a bit perplexing how they got around. Did they really hop between platforms? I can see some ladders, but still…”

“Maybe they had a way of controlling the platforms? You know, so they could load rocks and stuff onto them and lower them down for others to grab and transport?”

“Ooh, that makes sense,” said Poppy. “Though now that I’m looking… Where are we even going?”

“The goal is to clear out monsters, right?” said Saria. “Then let’s start with these guys.”

“Me first!” said Malon, charging ahead and hopping between platforms. The beamos took notice of her and fired a concentrated heat beam. Malon raised her shield to block, but it was clear it would only hold for so long. Saria jumped ahead and readied a deku nut.

“Malon, close your eyes!” Saria shouted.

When the girl obeyed, Saria slammed the deku nut to the ground, blinding the beamos. The two girls then struck the creature with their weapons, but its metallic exterior was too tough. They even tried picking it up to throw into the magma, but it was too heavy, even with Saria’s Goron bracelet.

“Wait, I see some bomb flowers,” said Saria. “Think you can keep it busy?”

“I’ll do my best!” said Malon, readying her shield.

Saria hopped to the left side of the chamber, yanking a bomb flower out of the ground. Putting all her weight into the throw, the bomb rocketed across the chamber and smashed into the beamos, exploding. The beamos was torn apart, and its head-sized eye arced through the air, exploding once it hit the ground. Saria joined Malon in the center of the room, giving her a high-five.

“Good work!” said Saria.

“Oh, it was nothing…” said Malon.

“In that case, you think you can handle the monster on that side of the room while I take this one across the way?”

“I can certainly try,” the girl nodded.

Knowing the effectiveness of the bomb flowers, Saria and Malon pulled out the flowers and used them to destroy the remaining beamos in the chamber. Besides a business scrub (who had been hiding ever since the cavern was sealed off), the room was now clear. Saria helped the business scrub to the entrance so it could safely leave, then the girls continued further into the cave.

They navigated stone hallways, doing battle with dodongos young and old. They also found stone creatures that imitated statues found throughout the cavern. Each and every enemy seemed to explode when it was defeated, which really started to make Saria wonder what didn’t explode after it was struck down.

“Looks like this room is clear. What do we have left?” asked Saria.

“Let’s see…” Malon took out a map she had found near a Goron worksite. “It looks like we need to start making our way upwards, but I didn’t see any stairs.”

“Well what about that?” asked Poppy. The fairy pointed to a tall block of stone surrounded by bomb flowers on all sides.

“That’s not a stairway, Poppy, that’s a workplace hazard,” said Saria.

“But look, it’s not one solid piece. It has grooves on its sides. I think it can be moved somehow.”

“Then where are the switches?” asked Malon.

“I do see a walkway built around the upper level,” said Saria. “Can you check if there are any switches up there?”

“On it!” said Poppy.

The fairy fluttered up above, narrowly dodging fiery keese and skulltulas webs. No switches could be found. She did find a sign, however, written in Goron.

“Did you find anything?” asked Saria.

“Yeah! I found a sign that says I’m right!” said Poppy.

“What?”

“Put a bomb between the flowers!”

“Why would I do that?” shouted Saria.

“Just trust me on this one!”

Saria looked to Malon, who shrugged. “Worth a shot, right?” said the farmgirl.

“All right… Let’s just hope this doesn’t collapse the whole cave on us,” said Saria.

After carefully placing a bomb between the two lines of bomb flowers, the girls took cover and waited. When its stem burned away, the bomb exploded, causing a chain reaction that wrapped all the way around the stone pillar. Somehow, the explosive force caused the pillar to shudder and fall piece by piece until there was a Goron-sized stairway in its place.

“What?!”

“I told you!” said Poppy.

Saria and Malon climbed up the stairway, regrouping with Poppy. “But why would it work like that?”

“I can’t read the sign, but the pictures make it seem like the stairs were locked during the evacuation. It might have been to prevent monsters from easily moving up and down the cave.”

“Shame so many can fly or crawl on walls,” said Malon. “It would have been a good idea otherwise.”

Saria raised a finger in protest but decided not to question things anymore. The Kokiri had their way of doing things, and the Gorons clearly had their own way.

Continuing through the cavern, the girls found themselves at the top of a magmafall. Several platforms with broken walkways could be seen, though little else, save for the magma flowing downstream and over the cliff. A doorway to the next room could be seen, so Saria and Malon moved forward. But then… Saria heard something.

“Wait, I think-”

That’s when they attacked! Tall lizard monsters with spiky armor and sharp blades leapt to the ground, hissing from fang-filled maws. Two charged the girls at once, their eyes filled with bloodlust.

Saria dodged to the left, avoiding the lizalfos’ attack. She spun around, slashing it in the side with her Gerudo scimitar, drawing her dagger in her off-hand. Its wound only emboldened the creature, however, and it swung wild. Saria suffered light cuts across her body as she struggled to defend against the wild beast. She decided to feign weakness, causing the creature to leap into the air for a plunging attack. Before the lizalfos could land, Saria hucked her dagger at the creature and stuck it in the chest. It landed, weakened, and Saria finished it off with her scimitar.

That’s one down, she thought. Looking across the chamber, she saw Malon was having a tough time against her opponent. While she hadn’t suffered as many wounds as Saria, she was being pushed closer and closer to her platform’s edge. Saria hopped across to them and slashed the lizalfos across the back while it was distracted, opening it up for a devastating swing from Malon’s club. The beast fell lifeless to the ground, its skull thoroughly caved in. The battle was over.

The girls were silent for a time, taking in what had just occurred. The creatures were monsters, yes, but they were distinctly different from what they had encountered so far. They had only fought rampaging beasts and deadly pests, not trained warriors like these lizalfos. Saria retrieved her dagger, wiping off the blood on it.

“What were these things?” Saria muttered to herself.

“I think I’ve heard of them,” said Poppy. “They’re called lizalfos. They’re evil monsters that crave violence. We’re lucky there was only two of them.”

“Lucky indeed…”

Malon said nothing, instead following Saria across the room to the exit. Once they were safely across, Malon hugged Saria from behind.

“Thank you for saving me!!”

“Malon? What are you doing?”

The farmgirl let go, wiping a tear from her eye. “That was really scary. The little monsters weren’t so bad, but the way those creatures looked at me… I really thought something bad was gonna happen. But then you saved me! You were so cool!!”

“Aaaah… I wasn’t that cool,” said Saria, rubbing the back of her head while blushing.

“How modest of you,” Poppy said with a smirk.

“Oh my goodness, I just realized! You’re hurt!” said Malon.

“A little, but I should be fine. You look a little beat up yourself,” said Saria. “Maybe we should take a break. We still have the rest of the day, and we don’t have to clear every room.”

“Yeah, I think a break would be nice.” Malon walked up to the door and put her hand on it, opening it. “But imagine the look on their faces if we did clear the whole cave.”

Moving forward, the pair found a small room they sealed off with a statue once they were certain it was safe. With the door blockaded, Malon took off her helmet and wiped the sweat from her brow. Saria took out some medicine and began treating the wounds the girls had taken, then they sat down.

“What a day,” said Malon. “I can’t believe I get to go on an adventure like this. It’s just like in my stories!”

“You’re stories?” asked Saria.

“Yeah! Talon got me all kind of books to read. Said it would be good in case I didn’t always wanna work on the ranch. When I was still learning to read, I would sometimes borrow books from the library in Castle Town. I read all sorts of stories about heroes, fair maidens, dark lords, and grand adventures. A part of me always imagined what it would be like to be in one of those stories. What role do you think I fit the best? Hero or maiden?”

“Considering how scary you were the other night, maybe you’d be a good dark lord,” said Poppy with a smug grin. Malon stuck her tongue out at the fairy.

“Hero or maiden? I’m not sure…” said Saria. “Do people really have to fit into one role? Maybe sometimes you save people, and other times when it gets too tough you get saved yourself? There’s nothing wrong with that, right?”

Malon looked up at the ceiling wistfully. “I guess not. Changing things up every once and a while sounds more fun anyway. Although…” Malon blushed, her eyes sparkling, “it would be pretty swell if I got swept off my feet by a dashing knight.” Malon then turned to Saria. “Say, do you ever think about that kind of thing?”

“About knights?”

“No, silly! About boys!”

“I… I guess not.” Not in a while, at least, thought Saria.

“Oh really? Well I bet boys think about you a lot! You’re strong, brave, and kind, too. You must be really popular back at your village!”

Saria thought back to the fights Mido and Link would sometimes have around her, as well as all the flowers the villagers would pick for her. It wasn’t that the thought had never crossed her mind, it’s just that…

It was so peaceful… I didn’t want it to ever change. And yet…

A tear welled up in Saria’s eye. She wiped it away before Malon noticed and said, “Let’s change the subject.”

Saria fished out some of her food rations and shared with Malon – bread, berries, and nuts. Saria then asked, “So what’s life like on the ranch?”

“Oh, it’s not too bad. Lots of work in the morning, but you can take it easy in the afternoon. We have a lot of horses on the ranch which I tend to every day. I feed them, give them water, clean their stables, and brush their manes – that last part is my favorite. I also like to sing to them.”

“You like to sing?”

“Yeah! It’s a little embarrassing, but I guess… It makes me feel a little closer to my mother.”

Saria’s heart sank at those words. “I… See. What happened to your mother?”

“I’m not sure. Father said she died when I was real little. I don’t even remember what her face looked like. All I know is that when she held me, I felt as safe as could be. I also remember her singing to me. I think they were lullabies to help me sleep. That’s why I started to sing, I suppose. The peace mother’s lullabies gave me I want to give to others. The horses really like it, so I’ve been singing to them ever since.”

“I see… You’re a good kid, Malon.” Saria gently ruffled the top of Malon’s head, making the girl smile and blush.

“Oh, you don’t have to say that. Besides, you’re a kid too!”

“Ah ha… Not exactly.”

“Huh? What do you mean?”

“I’m a Kokiri. We’re… Always like this.”

“I don’t follow.”

“They don’t age,” said Poppy, joining the conversation. “After they grow to a certain height, Kokiri look the same their whole lives.”

“How is that possible?” asked Malon. “You don’t look too much older than I do!”

“I don’t know how it works, but I think it’s because we’re the Great Deku Tree’s children. We start as little saplings, and given enough time, we take shape, and become what you see before you. I guess in that regard, we’ll always be the Deku Tree’s children.”

“Hm. I think I understand. Does that mean you’re older than me?” asked Malon.

“Oh, definitely,” said Poppy. “I’ll bet she’s even over fort-”

Saria grabbed the fairy and covered her mouth, laughing awkwardly. “I’m older, but not by too much. Isn’t that right, Poppy?”

“Gah!” the fairy gasped for air. “Okay, okay. Keep your secrets, then.”

Malon giggled at the display. “You two are really close, huh?”

“Oh yeah! We’re the best of friends,” said Poppy. “Like two scrubs in a pod!”

“I’m glad… It means neither of you have to be lonely while you’re out adventuring.”

Saria and Poppy looked at Malon, then at each other.

“Yeah… I guess so,” said Saria. Poppy then floated gently through the air, taking a seat on Saria’s shoulder, kicking her dainty feet back and forth while listening more intently to the conversation.

“Come to think of it, do either of you have moms?” asked Malon. Saria shook her head.

“Not exactly. I’m a child of the Deku Tree. Just the Deku Tree, as far as I know.”

“I was sorta like a mom to Saria when she was smaller,” said Poppy. “We fairies are the surrogates of the Kokiri we bond with, making sure no evil befalls them as they grow up.”

“I see…” said Malon, tracing a finger in the dirt. “I was just curious. I see kids with their moms all the time in the marketplace, and I’d be lying if I wasn’t a little jealous. I guess I’m not totally alone, then. You were probably really surprised when you saw them yourself, huh?”

“Not really,” said Saria.

“You weren’t? But it sounds like you didn’t even know what moms were until you left your village.”

A memory flashed in Saria’s mind like a candle being lit in the dark. It was during the times of trouble. A lone woman, wounded and out of breath, stumbled into the village cradling a baby in her arms. Saria had only caught a glimpse of her as the woman made her way to the Deku Tree. Against Mido’s judgement, Saria watched from afar as the Deku Tree and woman spoke to one another. When she finally collapsed, the Deku Tree called on all of the Kokiri to watch over the baby.

“What should we call him?” asked Fado.

“We shall give him the name his mother requested,” said the Great Deku Tree. “From this day on, the boy shall be named… Link.”

“That was so long ago…” mumbled Saria.

“Everything okay?” asked Malon.

“Oh, sorry. I got a little lost in thought.”

“Heh. That’s all right.” Malon yawned, stretching her arms before resting her head against Saria’s shoulder. “If it’s okay with you, I think I’ll take a little nap. I gotta get my energy back for the rest of the adventure.”

“All right. I’ll keep watch for now. If something happens, I’ll be sure to wake you.”

“Thanks… You know, I always wanted a big sister like you. Someone I could rely on when things got tough, but someone who would encourage me to keep trying as well. Thanks for believing in me…”

Saria smiled. “You’re very welcome.”

The two rested against the wall as silence descended over the room. Malon began drifting off to sleep, but even then, she still had a few things on her mind.

“All I got is pa…” Malon mumbled. “I don’t wanna lose him… I’m scared about… What I’ll do if he leaves me too… I hope we can still be… Friends after this…”

Saria ruffled Malon’s hair once more, gently petting the girl as she fell asleep beside her.

No wonder you act the way you do. Without your dad, you really would be all alone, huh? I’m sorry, Malon. I won’t push you away anymore. Saria looked over to Poppy, who was also sleeping. The Kokiri let out a soft sigh then shook her head. “I guess it’s just me then.”

Saria sat there the whole time, keeping watch as her friends slumbered. No matter what happened, she would keep them safe.

---

After everyone had the chance to rest and recuperate, they delved deeper into the cavern. They hopped, explored, and fought their way through until they reached the deepest chamber they could find. After blowing open the entrance to the last room with a bomb flower, they found a slope leading down into a pit.

“You think it’s safe?” asked Saria.

“Only one way to find out,” said Malon, heading down.

“Hey! I said no running ahead!”

Saria slid down after Malon, and after landing on the ground, she found herself in a large chamber with a pool of lava in the center. The heat was nearly unbearable, and the stench stung her nostrils. These were the least of her concerns, however, as something big was coming her way.

“Uh… Saria? What’s that?” asked Malon, stepping back.

The creature stomped one oversized foot at a time. Easily the biggest thing Saria had ever seen (save the Deku Tree himself), the gigantic dodongo roared, releasing hot burning smoke into the air.

“That’s King Dodongo!!” shouted Poppy. “Run!”

The girls took off in a sprint, racing down the stone pathway that wrapped around the room. The dinosaur gave chase, rolling into a ball and crashing against the walls in its pursuit, causing rocks to fall from the ceiling. Saria dodged the falling rocks while Malon protected herself with her shield. When the dinosaur grew tired of its pursuit, it started sucking in tremendous amounts of air – enough to pull the girls towards it.

Saria stabbed her scimitar into the ground and said, “Hold on!”

Malon gripped Saria by the cloak and stood her ground, even as her boots were grinding against the floor. As heat built up in the monster’s maw, Poppy said, “Forget that! Take cover!!”

The girls dove to the ground, narrowly avoiding the dodongo’s fiery breath. As Saria covered her head, she looked forward.

“Wait, bomb flowers are growing down here too.”

“Yeah? Got any ideas?” asked Malon, shielding herself with her buckler.

“Think you can play distraction one last time?”

The breath attack ended, giving the girls the chance to stand up.

“You already know my answer,” Malon smiled. “Go!”

Saria raced across the chamber, skidding to a halt at the end of the path.

Dodongos eat anything, right? If that’s the case…

The Kokiri plucked the bomb flower from the ground and ran back. Malon was playing defense, blocking incoming bites from King Dodongo. After Malon countered with a swipe to its skull, the dinosaur roared in anger and started sucking in air once more.

“Eat this!” shouted Saria as she hucked the bomb flower. The dinosaur sucked in the bomb, swallowed, then the bomb exploded from the inside, causing King Dodongo to collapse.

“Now’s our chance!” shouted Malon.

The Kokiri and farmgirl ran ahead, striking at the beast with as much force as they could. With a final blow to its eye, the beast threw its head back in pain and curled up into a ball as if to shield itself. It rolled throughout the chamber, slamming into walls over and over. Saria and Malon avoided rocks as best they could. When the beast’s rolling slowed, it slumped over, falling into the lava pit. King Dodongo sank into the lava, hardening it somehow. After reaching to the sky with a claw, it stopped moving.

Malon, whose hair was lightly singed, stood up. “Is it over?”

“I think so,” said Saria. She tested the hardness of the magma. It had cooled and hardened to the point of being no different from ordinary rock. After stepping onto it, she threw a fist into the air in triumph. Malon joined her on the ground, giving Saria a big hug and swinging her around.

“We did it!!” shouted Malon. Even Poppy was excited, and the girls hopped up and down while letting out cheers. After getting it out of their system, Malon let Saria go and looked around. “Soooo… How do we get out?”

“You needn’t worry about that,” said a feminine voice. Saria turned and saw a Gerudo woman with several lizalfos in tow.

“Kitoga!” shouted Saria. “What are you doing here?”

“What I should have done when we first met! Lord Ganondorf knows you have the Kokiri’s Emerald, so hand it over, otherwise these lizalfos will tear you to pieces!”

“Not on your life,” said Saria. Looking to Malon, she said, “Get behind me.”

Malon nodded, stepping behind Saria with her buckler and club at the ready.

“Hmph! You must have been struck in the head. Fine, then. I’ll be more than happy to see you all killed. Lizalfos! Get them!”

The lizalfos charged, hungry for blood. Saria ran forward, cutting one down with her scimitar. Another lizalfos tried to strike, but she parried its blade with her dagger. A third one came in swinging, which she ducked around its attack, stabbing it in the back. Behind her, Malon was keeping the lizalfos’ swords at bay with her shield, clubbing them in the arms, stomach, and head when an opening presented itself. Malon fought valiantly, but the enemy’s numbers were too great, and she was quickly overwhelmed.

“Malon!” shouted Saria. She tried running to the farmgirl, but her path was blocked by more lizalfos. “Get out of my way!”

Saria slashed and stabbed her way through the hissing lizalfos, taking wounds she could have avoided had she been patient. Despite her best efforts, Malon was captured and brought to Kitoga’s side.

“See? It’s foolish to resist. This is but a taste of our power. Now hand over the emerald, or I’ll slit this girl’s throat!” Kitoga drew a curled dagger from a sheath and held it to Malon’s neck.

“Don’t do it!” shouted Malon. “I’ll be fine!”

“Silence!” Kitoga hissed. “One more word and it will be your last!”

“Saria… Are you really going to do it?” asked Poppy.

“I don’t have a choice.” Saria reached into her sweater, pulling out the magical gemstone. Its light was so pure and brilliant, the lizalfos had to shield their eyes from it.

“At last! You, grab it and bring it over!” Kitoga shouted at a lizalfos. The creature narrowed its eyes at the Gerudo but obeyed nonetheless, stepping lightly towards the Kokiri girl.

Before the Kokiri’s Emerald was taken, Malon stomped Kitoga’s foot, causing the Gerudo to scream in pain and lose her grip. Malon broke free, stealing back her club and slugging her way through the lizalfos. Saria pulled the emerald away just in time, and the fighting continued.

“I’ve had enough of this. Kill them both! You can eat them later!” said Kitoga.

Saria and Malon fought back-to-back. They struck down several more lizalfos, but it simply wasn’t enough. The monsters continued crowding around the girls, making it harder and harder to block or dodge attacks. Before things grew too dire, the ground started to quake.

“Wait, what’s going on? Is it an eruption?” Kitoga looked around frantically. It was a squadron of armored Gorons rolling down the slope into the chamber, followed shortly thereafter by Darunia. “What? But how?!” said the Gerudo.

“Training went well,” said Darunia, tossing a lifeless lizalfos to the ground. “It was a bit impromptu, but I appreciate the warmup!” Darunia then looked over to the wounded Kokiri and Hylian girl. “Seems we’re not the only ones you attacked.”

“Malon!!” A voice rang out, and a bumbling, oversized man rolled down the slope, landing on his feet mostly by chance. It was Talon, ready to fight with a mallet.

“Dad?!” exclaimed Malon.

Talon looked at Malon, noticing the wounds she had suffered. “You damn dirty lizards, get your hands off her!!”

The farmer charged into the fray, knocking away the lizalfos with his sheer bulk. After he joined his daughter by her side, the two hugged, then readied themselves for battle. Saria readied her blades as well, and after Kitoga shouted orders at the lizalfos, the final battle came underway.

With Talon and Malon working together, Saria was free to focus on her own enemies. She slashed her way through her foes, dropping them one by one. She could feel the power of the Goron’s bracelet as her blades cut deep, but there was something else there as well, like she was gaining an innate sense of where to strike. It was almost too easy, but then Kitoga joined the fray, swinging wild with two new scimitars.

“I won’t lose!” growled the Gerudo. “My destiny is still far from this place!!”

Saria ducked and parried the Gerudo’s attacks, keeping her at bay while doing her best to avoid attacks from supporting lizalfos.

“Destiny? What are you even saying?!” asked Saria.

“We all have our part to play. One block of stone does not make a house, nor does one Gerudo make a whole tribe! I have my mission, and I will not leave here until I have those stones!” Kitoga slashed furiously with her scimitars, pushing Saria back. “I will bring honor to my people! Now give me the stone!!”

Saria did her best to defend against the mad Gerudo warrior. As she blocked one of the woman’s scimitars, a lizalfos came up from behind her, sword at the ready. She couldn’t defend against both, so she decided to step back and swing at the lizalfos. Kitoga took advantage of this and swung her blade at Saria’s chest, cutting open her outer shirt. The Kokiri’s Emerald fell out, and the Gerudo woman snatched it midair.

“Got it!”

“No! Give it back!”

Kitoga drew a deku nut and slammed it into the ground, blinding not only Saria but the nearby lizalfos. Malon came to the girl’s aid, and with the help of Talon and the Gorons, the lizalfos were defeated. Unfortunately, Kitoga was able to escape.

“No! I can’t believe this!” said Saria.

“What happened?” asked Malon.

“She got the emerald… I failed the Great Deku Tree…”

Talon and Malon looked to one another, falling silent.

“Don’t be so hard on yourself,” said Darunia. “You may have lost your stone, but you two saved my city!”

“You… Two?” questioned Malon.

Darunia laughed, slapping his belly. “Don’t be so modest! You think I didn’t notice when Talon here started asking around for his daughter? You and Saria cleared this whole cavern all by yourselves! Give yourself a little credit!!”

“Were you here this whole time?” asked Talon. Malon nodded.

“Thanks, Darunia, but Saria did most of the hard work,” said Malon.

“Yeah, but… My whole mission was to collect the stones. I’m glad I could help, but I still failed.”

Darunia approached, giving Saria a hearty pat on the back. “Don’t be like that. You and your friend were great! I still can’t believe you two managed to take on King Dodongo all by yourselves! You two are real heroes! Now we Gorons can mine the cavern again and stuff our faces until our stomachs burst!” Darunia looked over to the other Gorons. “Hey, let’s all head back! You fought well today, and that’s cause for celebration! Grab what you can on the way out, for today, we feast!!”

The Gorons raised their fists and weapons into the air, cheering. They all made their way out of the cavern, followed shortly by Darunia, then Talon, who looked back and gestured for Malon to follow. The farmgirl helped Saria out of the cave, and once they were back in Goron City, Darunia threw a feast in honor of Saria and Malon.

“Three cheers for the heroes of the Gorons!!” shouted Darunia. The Gorons cheered once more, and as the feast progressed, there was music, dancing, singing, and more celebrating than you could shake a deku stick at. Even Darunia was going crazy, hopping and dancing around. Though Saria was devastated at the loss of the Kokiri’s Emerald, seeing everyone be so happy cheered her up in time. She played her ocarina while Malon sang, and for just a little while, everything felt right in the world.

As things started to wind down, Darunia rewarded the two girls for their efforts. Each received bomb bags, compliments of the city’s merchant (though Talon was quick to take Malon’s bag away). There was one more thing Saria was owed, as well…

“Here, take this,” said Darunia, pulling out the Goron’s Ruby from his beard. “You’ve more than earned it. Even with the recent setbacks, it’ll probably be safer in your hands anyway.”

Saria took the ruby, noting its brilliant shine. The ruby took the center, acting as the middle of three spikes – the other two coming from its golden frame. In many ways, the spiritual stone looked like crystalized flame.

“Thank you, Darunia. I’m glad I could help,” said Saria.

“And thank you as well. I won’t forget what you’ve done for my people. Say… Why don’t we swear an oath? If the Kokiri ever need help, you can call on us! What do you say?” Darunia put out his hand. Saria reached out, and the two shook, making their oath.

“And if your people ever need help again, you can always count on me and the rest of the Kokiri.”

“Great! Then from this day forth, you shall be my blood sister, and I your blood brother!”

Darunia then picked Saria up, tossing her in the air over and over.

“Poppy! Malon!! Get me down!!!”

The Kokiri’s fairy and Malon, who was in the middle of trying a sirloin rock, just watched, smiling and laughing the whole time.

---

When the festivities were near their end, Saria said her goodbyes to everyone and left Goron City. The girl was shocked to find Kaepora Gaebora waiting for her outside.

“Gaebora? What are you doing here?” the Kokiri asked.

“I’ve been keeping a close eye on you. Quite a fine deed you’ve done today! You don’t exactly look like the hero that will save all of Hyrule, but you’re certainly shaping up to be.”

“What’s that supposed to mean?” Saria glared at the great owl.

“Hmm… Perhaps it’s finally time I tell you.” The owl’s head flipped upside down. “Has anyone ever told you of the prophecy?”

“I… I’m not sure. So much has happened recently…”

“It’s all right if you don’t remember,” the owl flipped his face upright again. “Mayhap I or someone else failed to mention it. Let me explain, then. A long time ago, certain figures across the land had a prophetic dream. We all came together to speak of this, finding it was indeed the same dream. Much like the princess’s visions, our dreams were the prophecy I speak of. That of the boy and the fairy setting out across the land at the behest of the princess, all to thwart the plans of a great evil. Eventually, this would end when the boy became a man. With the Blade of Evil’s Bane, he would strike down the King of Evil once and for all, and with the help of seven sages, seal him away forever.”

Saria thought on the owl’s words. It was… Strange, and yet, somehow the words felt oddly familiar.

“So that’s why you spoke that way back then.”

“It’s good you understand. That boy was someone you once knew. The boy who was destined to defeat the King of Evil was none other than Link.”

“Maybe the prophecy was wrong? He was a brave boy, but even he was… Defeated.”

Gaebora shook his head. “It was not to be. Something has interfered. I do not know what or how, but the prophecy has been undone. Even now I can feel the very fabric of this world begin to unravel. It was subtle at first, but I fear the world will become very different in the coming days. Where order fails, chaos reigns supreme.”

“Then is there no hope? Are my efforts in vain?” asked Saria.

“Perhaps not… You have done well to free the Great Deku Tree of his curse and save the Gorons from their grim fate. The world is changing, Saria, but perhaps we must change with it. Saria… Will you take on the mantle of hero?”

The Kokiri stepped forward, nodding. “I will. My friends, my people… Everyone is depending on me. No matter what happens, I’ll do everything I can to protect them.”

“Good answer,” the owl flipped his head upside down. “I was really worried for a minute.” After flipping his head upright again, Gaebora said, “I believe you, Saria. You have given me much hope for the future. Even so, the dangers ahead will only grow. There is much to be done if you are to face the forces of evil.” The owl then looked further up the mountain. “Perhaps you should see one of the Great Fairies.”

“I think I’ve heard of them before,” said Saria. “Is there one nearby?”

“Indeed! I’ll take you up to her now if you’re all right with it. Grab onto my legs and hold on tight!”

Saria did so, and after the owl clasped her in his talons, he took flight, soaring high into the sky. After avoiding the smoke and falling rubble of the rumbling mountain, Gaebora landed on a cliff’s ledge where multiple cave entrances could be seen. Saria was let go, landing on her feet while Gaebora roosted on a signpost.

“To your left is the entrance to this Great Fairy’s fountain. Speak with her, and if she deems you worthy, she may offer you a boon.”

“Thank you, Gaebora.”

“Think nothing of it,” the owl gestured with his wing. “From now on, I’ll do everything in my power to aid you. Now go see the Great Fairy.”

Saria did so, stepping through the entrance to the magic fountain. As she did, she nudged a much smaller fairy that had been resting under her cap.

“Hey, you awake in there?”

“I am,” said Poppy.

“What do you think about all this? About the prophecy and King of Evil?”

“I think it’s crazy… But I believe him.”

Just as Saria had suspected, her fairy had been listening intently to Gaebora’s words all while recuperating from too much celebration under the cap. Now that the fairy was fully awake, she slipped out and floated through the air, following Saria.

After stepping through a shadowy hall, Saria found the room light up with brilliant, sparkling colors. Beautifully carved tiles formed a walkway up to a large fountain. On every wall it seemed as if gemstones were raining down from a waterfall, dazzling the Kokiri with its sheer brilliance. The air was sweet, a gentle mist cooled Saria’s face, and all the while, beautiful harps played, the instruments and musicians both invisible to the naked eye. Saria couldn’t help but stare in wonder.

“What is this place?? Are we truly still on Death Mountain?” asked Saria.

“Like the place?” a playful feminine voice called out.

“What? Who goes there?”

A large, voluptuous figure emerged from the fountain, with long flowing red hair, pale skin, and a body carefully adorned with leaves and flowers. She floated in the air above the fountain as if she were laying on her side, resting her head in her hand.

“So… You’re the new hero, huh?”

“Um… I’m not sure if I’m a hero yet, but-”

“Oh please, girl, you don’t have to be modest like that. You think you’d get anything that happened on this mountain past me? I saw you and that sweet little farmgirl fight those nasty beasts. You did wonderfully!”

The Great Fairy clapped her hands, and several other ghostly hands manifested around the room, clapping as well. Saria blushed in embarrassment.

“I was just trying to help…”

The Great Fairy giggled. “Well you helped a great deal. Don’t forget that.” Moving her body through the air, the Great Fairy posed as if she were laying on her belly, kicking her feet back and forth. “Now, I know why you’re here.”

“You do?”

“Of course I do! Budding heroes always seek out our aid. And we gladly give it, too, for there is always some nasty to vanquish or seal away. I suspect there will be more than a few of those in your future. So here, take this!”

The Great Fairy held out her hands, and a magical light enveloped Saria. She could feel power course through her, starting from her legs, rising up through her body, then out through her arms and ending in her hands.

“I… Um… Thank you. What is this?” asked Saria.

“I just unlocked some of your magical potential. Pretty sweet, huh? I also passed on a technique used by all those lovely heroes from yore. Try it out!”

Saria stepped back. She could feel memories flickering through her mind. Memories not her own. Warriors in green from all walks of life with sword and shield in hand readied their blade with magic, spinning about in a brilliant display of power and swordsmanship. Saria did much the same, taking her scimitar and dagger in hand. The magic flowed through her limbs before emanating from her blades. When it was ready, Saria spun about, unleashing the powerful new technique. After it was done, Saria spun around and looked at the Great Fairy in amazement.

“Thank you, Great Fairy! I don’t know what to say.”

“Then don’t say anything, girl. It’s all right. Oh, before you go, be sure to visit some of my sisters. I think there’s one near Hyrule Castle who could show you another way to use that magic power of yours. Listen for the harps, and I’m sure you’ll find all of us.”

“I’ll take a look. Thanks once again!”

Saria waved goodbye, leaving the fountain. Poppy floated after her, but then the Great Fairy called out.

“Hey, Poppy!”

“Y-yes, Great Fairy?”

“Be kind to that girl and take good care of her. There’s a lot of trouble for all of us waiting in the future, so be a good friend, okay?”

Poppy smiled and said, “Of course. What, you think I’ve just been flying around and making quips this whole time?”

“Hmm… I wouldn’t put it past you.”

The two fairies laughed before saying their goodbyes. The Great Fairy disappeared into the fountain, and Poppy caught up with Saria.

Outside, Saria was waiting for her fairy.

“Had some catching up to do?” she smirked.

“You could say that,” said Poppy, glancing away.

“Then is everyone ready to go?” asked Gaebora.

“Ready to go? Are we flying again?”

Saria nodded. “Since there’s still lots of volcanic activity, Gaebora offered us a ride down to Kakariko Village.”

“Well that’s nice of you,” said the fairy. “Any chance we can take it easy on the way down? I was nearly flung off Saria’s head last time.”

“Oh, my apologies, little fairy. I will do my utmost to make sure both of my passengers arrive safely to their destination,” said the great owl.

“Good!” Poppy then slipped herself between Saria’s sweater and outer shirt, peeking just above the collarbone region. “Okay, ready to fly!”

“As am I,” said Saria.

“Good!” Gaebora grabbed hold of Saria. “Then we’re off!”

Kaepora Gaebora took to the air once more, flying gently with the warm air currents of the mountain before circling around and lowering himself more and more on his course for Kakariko Village. In the end, he dropped the Kokiri and fairy off on top of a roof.

“Hey, what’s the big idea?” fumed Poppy.

“I didn’t want to make too much of a scene. You should be fine from here, right?”

“Of course!” said Saria.

“Good. I shall try to find the location of the third spiritual stone. What you do with it once you find it is up to you. In the meantime, train all you can! Be ready for anything!!”

The great owl then took to the air, leaving the village behind. Saria and Poppy watched him go, with Saria shielding her eyes to avoid being blinded by the sun. Afterwards, the Kokiri climbed down from the roof, landing just next to a shocked Anju.

“S-saria? What were you doing up there? Was that an owl? Are you okay?!”

“Don’t worry, he’s a friend,” said Saria. “How are those gloves and mask treating you by the way?”

“Oh, they’re working wonders. I can’t thank you enough for these.”

Saria smiled as she said, “Don’t worry about it. I’m always happy to help.”

After leaving Anju behind, Saria made her way toward the village entrance. But as she did, she noticed a familiar face waiting in the shadows. It was Impa.

“We have much to discuss,” said the Sheikah. The woman then walked down a secluded path, gesturing for Saria to follow her.

“Do we have to?” asked Poppy from under the cap.

“Hey, you stuck by me while I fought armored insects and giant dinosaurs. What’s so bad about her?”

“She’s scarier than the dinosaurs.”

Saria laughed, following after Impa. “You know, you’re probably right…”

Chapter Text

Saria and Impa made their way to a secluded spot in Kakariko Village. Once it was clear no one was around to eavesdrop, Saria explained everything that happened on Death Mountain.

“So you lost one spiritual stone but gained another – and only because Darunia was so generous,” said Impa.

“I know… There are so many things I could have done better,” said Saria.

“Oh come on!” said Poppy. “Most people would have struggled just to survive! You did the best you could, and that’s all that matters.”

Impa smirked. “Your fairy isn’t wrong. Even I wouldn’t have expected one of Ganondorf’s minions to be so… Brazen. They may have gained one of the stones, but it came at a great cost. Not only did they lose several lizalfos in the fighting, the Gerudo woman’s actions have affected Ganondorf’s standing in the royal court.”

“Has word traveled that fast?” asked Saria.

“Darunia and the king have always stayed in close contact. I wouldn’t be surprised if the Goron sent a message as soon as he returned from those caverns. Because of that, the king wanted Ganondorf investigated for any possible involvement. But before he could be approached, the man vanished without a trace. He's probably in Gerudo Valley by now.”

The implications were not lost on the Kokiri. Despite Kitoga’s best efforts, she unintentionally foiled Ganondorf’s plans for stealing the Ocarina of Time. Not only that, but such events would no doubt have a ripple effect, creating tensions between the Gerudo and the rest of Hyrule.

“This can’t be good,” said Saria. “Ganondorf always retaliates when he can’t get what he wants. This could mean war.”

“That may be so, but even he must know how difficult it will be to take the castle, should we be prepared. Marching a whole army out of Gerudo Valley has its own problems as well. It will take about a month to gather and prepare his forces for a full-scale assault.”

“A month? How could you possibly know that?”

“I have an informant in Gerudo Valley I’ve been keeping in contact with. While Ganondorf has many loyal subjects, he is not beloved by all Gerudo. There’s been trouble in the valley as of late that he’s ignored in favor of pursuing his ambitions.”

“I shouldn’t be surprised. With a man like that in control, I doubt anyone can openly speak against him without fearing for their life. To think he’d ignore the plights of his own people, though… His heart must be as black as his armor. What’s happening in Gerudo Valley, anyway? Is it anything that could affect the rest of us?”

Impa crossed her arms. “Gerudo have been disappearing from the valley. It’s not that they’re leaving the valley to escape Ganondorf’s rule – I already know about the few who have tried. These Gerudo are vanishing from their own homes.”

“What? And Ganondorf isn’t doing anything about this?!” Saria did her best to keep her voice down, but it was a struggle. Such blatant disregard for one’s people was beyond callous. Saria couldn’t imagine looking the other way if something was happening in her own village. As Saria looked down and gripped the hems of her shorts, a grim thought crossed her mind. “He’s not behind the disappearances… Is he?”

“My informant believes so, but there’s not much to be done about it,” said Impa. Her brow furrowed. “I want to help them. I do not begrudge the Gerudo just because their chosen leader is a tyrant. Unfortunately, we have more pressing matters at hand. As you’ve said, with a Gerudo agent openly attacking an ally of the king, it may be enough to fan the flames of war.”

“Does the king think so as well?”

Impa nodded. “Ganondorf’s disappearance was seen as open admission that he was connected to the attack. The king has already begun ordering arms and armor smithed while his generals put his troops through the rigors. He has no intention of being caught unprepared should Ganondorf march on the castle. We’re trying to keep this all under wraps, however, since the king is worried the people may panic. We’re not certain of what will happen, after all, and if too many people jump to the wrong conclusion, it will only serve to raise tensions between Hylians and Gerudo.”

“Thus fanning the flames even more,” Saria said with a frown. “Impa, if it’s true that we have a month before Ganondorf marches, would you be willing to train me? I know you have to watch over the princess, but I could join you at the castle.”

The Sheikah chuckled. “I appreciate your forwardness. Yes, I think training would do you some good. I had already planned on offering. We wouldn’t be training at the castle, though.”

“But what about Zelda?”

“She’s being taken care of. With this looming threat on the horizon, the king is watching his daughter like a hawk.”

“Then if you’ll have me, I’ll accept whatever training you give. Although… There is one thing I need to take care of first.”

“What is it?”

“I need to check on my village. It’s been a while and I need to make sure they’re okay. And if it’s all right with you, I feel they need to know what’s going on in case conflict becomes inevitable. We Kokiri don’t have a castle or a mountain to take shelter in should the worst come to pass. Our best defense against the outside world was the Great Deku Tree, and he’s gone.”

“I understand. I ask that you choose your words carefully, but I won’t begrudge you for keeping your people informed.”

“Thank you, Impa. Where should I meet you when I’m done?”

“In the back of the village. I have something I need to take care of at the castle, but I should be back before your return.”

“Then until next time.”

Saria and Impa said their goodbyes and parted ways. After taking a few steps, Saria looked back. Impa had disappeared without ever making a sound.

“That woman… I’m glad she’s on our side.”

“No kidding,” said Poppy. “I’d rather fight a pack of lizalfos than tangle with her.”

Saria left Kakariko Village behind and made her way to Kokiri Forest. Saria thought about the Gerudo and Kitoga’s fate. Though she was her enemy, Saria couldn’t help but fear for the woman’s safety.

If we ever cross swords again, Saria thought, I’ll be glad.

---

Saria crossed the bridge, returning to her homeland. Stepping into the village, one of the local Kokiri boys took notice.

“Saria, is that you?” he asked. “You’re okay! Did you even leave?”

“Of course I did,” Saria smiled. “Did you really think I was standing on the bridge for days?”

The young boy scratched at his bright orange hair. “You make a good point. In that case,” he paused, turning to the rest of the village. “Hey guys! Saria’s back!”

Hearing this, Kokiri started popping up everywhere. From the trees, from their homes, out of bushes. Many dropped what they were doing and came running, gathering around their long-lost sister.

“Saria! I can’t believe you’re back!”

“What happened? Is everything okay?”

“Is the outside world safe or not?”

“Calm down. I’ll explain everything in time,” said Saria. “Where’s Mido? Is he not here with the rest of you?”

Fado stepped forward among the crowd, saying, “He’s been going to the Lost Woods all by himself as of late. I’ve had to watch over things in his place.”

“Really? But why?”

“Who knows? Maybe he’s training, maybe he just wants to be alone. I didn’t think to ask.”

Saria’s heart sank. “I see. Everyone, can you wait for me? I want everyone to hear what I have to say. It’s important.”

“Oh?” said one of the Kokiri girls. “All right. We’ll be here until you’re ready then.”

At this, the Kokiri scattered, returning to what they were doing. Some were at play while others were training with deku sticks. Of course from an outsider’s perspective, it merely looked like playfighting. No matter what the Kokiri did, they were children at heart, and even in serious affairs, this fact always shined through.

After Saria took a quick look around, she headed for the Lost Woods, climbing up the hills and stepping through a hollow log. I’m glad everyone is still safe, thought Saria. I just hope Mido is okay too.

---

The Lost Woods, as it was commonly known, was a tangled forest that made up most of Eastern Hyrule. It was home to spirits, drifters, and even monsters. Saria had wandered those labyrinthine woods more times than she could count, befriending many unusual people along the way. Sometimes people stepped into the woods that didn’t belong, disappearing without a trace. Because Saria had never left her village until recently, it was impossible to tell if these people made it out or not… Despite its dangers, Saria traversed the woods as naturally as she would her own village. After all, it was just another part of her homeland as far as she was concerned.

Saria navigated the twists and turns of the woods, searching for Mido. Despite her familiarity with the area, she couldn’t seem to find him. After reaching a small clearing, she encountered a local. It was a young wooden boy with skin like bark, bright eyes, and tattered clothes sitting on a tree stump, practicing with a flute. His wide-brimmed hat occluded his features, though his bird-like beak was instantly recognizable. This was a skull kid - one of many that wandered the Lost Woods. Once the boy took notice of Saria, he sat up.

“Wait, is that who I think it is?” asked the skull kid. He sauntered over, flute in hand. Saria stopped, looking the boy over. Once he was close enough, he stopped, playing a familiar tune on his flute. It was a song Saria had heard many times. Why? Because she was the one who wrote it.

“Do you remember this song? I remember,” said the skull kid. “It was a long time ago in this same clearing… I saw a girl just like you. Green hair, blue eyes, bright smile. Are you… Her?”

In Saria’s experience, the skull children were always cautious. They were not immune to the dangers of the woods, nor the dangers of trespassers. Knowing this, Saria did not answer with words. She answered with song, playing her melody back to the boy. His eyes lit up, looking more like orange fireflies.

“It IS you, isn’t it? You’re Saria!”

“It’s good to see you again, Taru,” said Saria. She remembered the first time she had encountered the boy. Skull kids tended to stick together, but Taru was always something of a loner. When he looked sad, Saria played her song to help brighten his day, and afterwards they became fast friends.

“Where have you been? It feels like you’ve been gone forever!”

“I’ve been to the outside world. It’s a long story, but right now I need to find my friend, Mido. Have you seen him? He’s another Kokiri, dressed in green.”

“And he’s always making this face,” said Poppy before scowling. Taru tilted his head at the fairy.

“Mido, Mido, Mido. I know this name. You say you’re looking for him? I’ve seen this Kokiri!”

“You have?” asked Saria.

“Yes! I’ve seen the boy traveling between your village and the Sacred Meadow. Many times, in fact. Let me show you.”

Taru took off running, his small wooden frame clicking and clacking every step of the way. Saria and Poppy followed, chasing the boy through the Lost Woods until they reached the entrance to the Sacred Meadow. Before them stood bushes, moss, grass, flowers, and other natural things, all surrounding the entrance to a maze of natural stone. Or rather, it was natural to Saria. Perhaps it had been constructed long ago, but it had become so entangled in the woods that it was part of the woods now.

“This way, this way! I saw!”

Taru ran for the entrance to the maze, but something felt off. Saria was quick to run forward, stopping Taru before he was struck by a monster. Claws the size of daggers burst from the ground as a sharp howl rang through the air. A bipedal wolf creature with glowing green eyes attacked, swiping at the Kokiri and skull kid.

“Get back, Taru!” shouted Saria. The girl drew her blades and kept the wolfos distracted while Taru moved away. Taking a few swipes at the beast, it easily blocked the blades with its thick arms. It felt like Saria was striking iron. The beast pushed Saria’s weapons aside and lunged for her neck, but she rolled away, dodging the fatal blow. The wolfos didn’t let up, quickly turning to strike again. The Kokiri blocked, but the force of the blow nearly knocked her over. As the wolfos tried to bite her, Saria swiped with her scimitar, the wolfos parried with its claws, and the dance continued. Neither could get a hit in, at least until a small dart hit the wolfos’ neck.

The beast stopped, scratching at the small wooden dart in its hide. It growled in annoyance as it turned to face Taru, who was still holding onto his flute.

“Now, Saria!” shouted Poppy.

With the beast distracted, Saria struck the one place a wolfos was at its weakest – its tail. It lurched its head back in pain, letting out one last howl before collapsing and fading away in blue flame.

“I wish you hadn’t done that,” said Saria, sheathing her blade, “but thank you. Those beasts are tricky.”

“I know it was dangerous, but Saria is friend! I can’t let anything happen to my friend,” said Taru.

The pair smiled at each other, then Saria took a look around, feeling the grass at her feet.

“It’s strange… I can feel something different. The meadow, no, the whole forest is changing. Deku babas are one thing, but wolfos? Why now? I thought the Deku Tree’s curse was broken.”

“Many strange things have happened in the forest as of late,” said Taru. “I’ve seen many monsters. My brethren and I must be even more cautious than before. Perhaps this Mido has been fighting the monsters. I’ve seen many, but they never get close to your village.”

Saria put a hand to her chest. “I see… Thank you, Taru. I’ll have to thank Mido as well if all this is true. I should be fine from here if you want to head back.”

Taru bowed his head, stepping back towards the entrance to the meadow. “Be seeing you, then. Stay safe… For me.”

Once the skull kid was gone, Saria and Poppy entered the maze.

Along the way, Saria encountered deku scrubs. They were far more violent than others of their kind, with leaves the color of autumn. This proved no trouble for the Kokiri, who struck them down as she went. It hurt to do so, however. Deku scrubs were territorial, but they only resorted to violence to keep outsiders away. This reaffirmed her worries. Something was changing in the forest, and not at all for the better.

At the end of the maze, Saria climbed an old stone stairway. This led to a small grassy plateau. It was a place Saria had visited on many occasions. In the center of the plateau was a stone platform in the shape of a hexagon. In the past, she had no idea what the symbols carved onto its top meant. But now, she realized the swirling pattern in the middle sat amidst a carving of the Triforce. Up ahead was an old moss-covered stone fortress, and at the base of this abandoned structure was a tree stump, as well as a familiar face sitting on the stump, catching his breath. Monsters slowly faded into flame at the boy’s feet. It was clear a battle taken place prior to Saria’s arrival.

“There you are, Mido!” said Saria. “What happened? Are you hurt?”

The boy’s blue eyes lit up upon seeing Saria. He sprung up to his feet, but then stopped, slowing his pace. “Saria? What are you doing here?”

“I came to find you. Did you slay those monsters?”

“I… Uh… Yeah! I guess you could say that…”

Mido’s fairy floated out of the boy’s tunic, flexing his tiny muscles. “Don’t be so modest, my friend. You’ve done well today!”

“Oh hey, Macho,” groaned Poppy. “You’re still around?”

“Of course!” smiled Macho. “It’s my sworn duty to protect Mido no matter what!”

Saria and Poppy looked at the Kokiri boy. He had scratches and bruises from the recent fight, and while it was clear his fairy had been healing him, it seemed as if he wasn’t in the best of spirits.

“Hey Macho, maybe we should leave these two alone for a little bit,” said Poppy.

“Want me all to yourself?” asked the fairy.

“In your dreams, butt chin.”

After the two fairies floated off, Saria approached Mido and gave him some medicine. “Here, to help with your wounds.”

“Thanks. I don’t really need it though. I’m doing just fine,” said Mido.

“Are you? You didn’t answer my question earlier. What are you doing here?”

Mido avoided eye contact with Saria. “Would you believe I was waiting for you?”

“Mido…”

“Hey! I know you liked to come here a lot, so I thought that if you ever came back, this would be the best place to find you!” Mido stepped away from Saria. “That’s what I thought at first… But then I noticed some monsters wandering around and I figured since I had this sword and shield, I might as well put it to good use. After I beat up those monsters, I checked back the next day, only to find more.”

“So you have been keeping the village safe. Thank you, Mido. I can’t tell you how much I appreciate it.”

Mido turned away, hiding his blushing cheeks. “H-hey, it’s not that big of a deal. As the boss of the Kokiri, of course I should be keeping the others safe! It’s been tough without you, though. It really feels like a part of the forest disappeared when you left. I’ve done what I can, but you were always the better leader. I can’t tell you how many times the others asked me when you were coming back. I was the last one to see you, so of course they thought I knew. To tell you the truth, I didn’t think you’d ever come back.”

Saria stepped closer to Mido, putting a hand on his shoulder. “Well I’m here now.” The boy smiled in response, and the two took a small comfort in each other’s company.

After that, the two Kokiri looked up at the stone fortress nearby. It was strange, almost like Saria’s eyes were being drawn to it. She couldn’t rightly tell what it was, but she could feel a presence behind those stone walls and the strange door up above. Somehow, she felt Mido could feel it too.

“Saria, do you remember what the Deku Tree told us about the Forest Temple?” asked Mido.

“I do. I’ve never stepped inside because of it.”

“All these monsters… You don’t think they’re coming from in there, do you? I thought it was supposed to be a sacred place.”

“It was. The forest spirits made those ruins their home. I haven’t seen any on my way here, though. Perhaps they’re trying to deal with whatever is going on inside?”

“Whatever is going on, all the monsters seem to be coming from this meadow - at least the ones I can find.”

“Then in the future, you may need to keep the others from wandering too far through the Lost Woods. We can deal with these monsters, but the others may not be ready.”

Mido beat his chest with his fist. “I can do that. Blocking entrances is one of my specialties, after all. You can count on me!”

“Speaking of the others, they’re all waiting for us back in the village. There’s something I need to tell all of you.”

“Wait, really?” Mido crossed his arms, tapping his foot. “Hey! Is that why you came to find me? I thought you were worried about me!!”

“Of course I was worried about you! That’s why I wanted to include you!”

Mido stuck his nose up and said, “Hmph! I see how it is. Let’s get going, then.”

The Kokiri boy stomped off. Saria’s shoulders sunk as she watched him go.

That boy… I can never tell what he’s thinking. Saria then turned to look at the Forest Temple one last time. The tall structure cast a shadow over the Sacred Meadow, one that chilled her to the bone. Deep down, she knew she would have to go into that temple one day. But for now, she would focus on the present.

---

Saria held the meeting with the rest of the Kokiri in her house. Many of the boys and girls sat around anxiously, kicking their feet back and forth while Mido helped gather up any stragglers. Once everyone was present, Saria regaled the others with tales of her travels: her journey to Castle Town, showing the princess the Kokiri’s Emerald, and helping others where she could until she befriended the chief of the Gorons, Darunia. Saria made sure to leave out the mission Zelda had charged her with. She also told the others, with much regret, that she lost the Kokiri’s Emerald to the thief, Kitoga. Immediately, one of the boys raised his hand.

“Why didn’t you go get it afterwards?” he asked. It was an understandable, albeit blunt question.

“Yeah! You beat that lady the first time!” shouted an excited girl. “I’m sure you can beat her again. You just have to find her!”

“About that,” said Saria. “Hyrule is not in the best place right now. That evil sorcerer, Ganondorf, fled to his homeland, Gerudo Valley. Truth be told, he may be preparing for battle. He has Gerudo warriors and monsters on his side, so if he thinks he can take what he wants with force, he’ll do it.”

Another boy raised his hand. “If he’s the problem, why not go beat him up too?”

Mido smacked the boy over the head. “You idiot! If it were that easy, don’t you think Saria would have done so by now?”

“But what can we even do?” asked one of the girls. “If Saria is struggling, I don’t think I’d be of much use. I only know how to keep the deku babas at bay.”

“The fighting isn’t guaranteed,” said Saria, “but because it’s a possibility, that’s why I wanted you all to know. I’m not asking you to fight in the war, but there’s no telling what will happen once the fighting starts. I have an idea, though.”

“You do?” asked one of the boys.

“Of course she does!” shouted Mido as he smacked that boy as well.

“Hey! Enough of that!” shouted Saria. “If you’re going to keep doing that, you can wait outside!”

Mido grumbled, crossing his arms as he sat down. “Sorry.”

The Kokiri turned their attention back to Saria, their eyes full of anticipation.

“Now, do you remember the Gorons I mentioned?” Saria gestured to a chalk drawing. “I befriended their leader, Darunia, who told me he’d be willing to help us out whenever we needed. It may be early, but I think it’d be worth calling in that favor. Darunia has plenty of experience fighting, and he’s already been whipping his own troops into shape. I think he could do the same for us.”

“Wait, are you saying we have to leave the forest?!” asked Mido.

“Not right now, but it should be something you should all prepare to do. Set aside travel packs – anything essential that isn’t too heavy so you can pick up and go should the need arise.”

The Kokiri didn’t look pleased at the idea. One of the girls said, “But the forest has been our home since… Forever! I don’t know if I can just leave it behind like that.”

“We already know it’s safe to leave. Even should night fall, I can use the song I learned to keep the stalchildren at bay.”

“That is true…” said one of the boys. “But what if we can’t come back? What if we’re stuck outside the forest forever?”

“Oh hush!” snapped Fado. “Saria already came back once. There’s no reason we couldn’t come back once it’s safe to do so. I know change is scary, but look at how much Saria has grown in her time away!”

The Kokiri looked at Saria, who hadn’t grown an inch in the days she had been gone, then looked back to Fado, who grit her teeth.

“I don’t mean literally! I’m saying the new experiences helped her grow stronger and wiser. We’ve spent our whole lives in this forest, but if Saria can make it in the outside world, so can we.” Fado then stood up. “And I’ll prove it. Saria, I’m coming with you!”

“You are?” asked Saria.

“You are?!” asked Mido.

The blonde Kokiri grinned. “We can’t expect Saria to do all the work, right? I can help discuss any plans or training with this Darunia once we meet so Saria can focus on other things. If I have your permission, of course.”

Saria smiled at this. “You don’t need my permission, Fado. You can come along.”

Fado pumped her fist and said, “Then I’ll start packing. See you outside!”

As she walked away, one of the boys tugged at her dress. “Are you really leaving us too?”

“Of course. How else are we going to get anything done? Don’t worry so much. I’ll be back before you know it!”

After Fado walked out of the house, Saria looked to the other Kokiri. She could tell they were still worried, so she approached them and got down on her knee, hugging as many as she could.

“It’ll be okay. As long as we work together, we can overcome anything the world has to throw at us. So stay strong for me while I’m away.”

The other Kokiri teared up, saying, “We will!” while they all hugged. Saria then concluded the meeting, stepping outside with the others and watching them disperse. Mido left without saying a word, returning to his house. Saria decided to follow him in to make sure he was okay.

“Hey, what’s wrong?” asked Saria.

“What? Nothing’s wrong,” said Mido, grabbing some things from his chest. “That just went by pretty fast.”

“Are you sure? We still have time to talk with Fado packing.”

“Oh no, it’s fine. You seem to be in a hurry to get out of here anyway, so who am I to stop you?”

“Hey! It’s not what you think! This is important!”

“More important than us?!”

“I’m doing this because of all of you!” Saria raised her voice more than she intended. She quieted down for a moment before saying, “Ever since I got back, I’ve been struggling to even move. I don’t want to leave home again so soon. I’ve thought about home every day since I’ve been gone. Even so, I understand now more than ever how important it is to keep fighting. If I can’t keep the village safe, there won’t be a home for me to return to.”

Hearing this, Mido shook his head. “I get you’re worried about us and want us to be safe, but what about you? When are you gonna worry about yourself for a change?!”

“What’s that supposed to mean?!”

“You figure it out why don’t you!” Mido then pushed past Saria, stepping out of his house. “I’m going back to the Lost Woods. I gotta do my part too, right?”

Saria watched her friend stomp off once again. She shut the door to his house, leaving it behind.

“Moody as usual,” said Poppy. “I guess I shouldn’t be too surprised.”

“Is it really because of me, though? I know I’ve been gone for a while, but it hasn’t been that long, right?”

Poppy looked into Saria’s eyes and hummed. “Hmmm, no. I won’t say. I’m sure you’ll figure it out eventually.”

Saria grumbled, but she didn’t have much else to say. She put it out of her mind and looked for Fado. She found the girl waiting at the village exit with a Goron-sized travel pack.

“Uh, Fado? You don’t need that much stuff where we’re going,” said Saria.

“We don’t?”

“Yeah. We shouldn’t be gone for more than a day.”

“Fine. I’ll put some stuff away, then. Just give me a sec.”

With some time to kill, Saria visited one last part of the village. Standing at the top of a small slope, she looked up at the treehouse. The carving at the base of the tree and the ladder were fine, but the house felt cold and lifeless. Small bits of moss had started growing on the outer walls. It wouldn’t be long until it fell into disrepair.

Fado met back up with Saria, now with a more practical travel bag. “We weren’t sure what to do with it,” she said while looking at the old house. “Some of us were in disbelief, even after we watched you bury him and Navi. We thought it was an elaborate prank and he’d pop out of the bushes a day later. I guess that’ll never happen, huh?”

Saria rubbed her arm, looking away. She said nothing.

“What do you think we should do with it?” Fado asked.

“I don’t know,” said Saria. “We can figure it out later. Let’s go.”

As Saria left for the exit, Fado said under her breath, “Sorry…”

---

When Fado stepped out into the fields of Hyrule, she patted herself down.

“Is this real? Am I still alive?”

“Of course you are,” said Saria, patting the girl on the back. “Now let’s get going. We have a lot of ground to cover.”

Fado’s fairy, Lati, floated above Fado’s head. “It feels like it’s been forever since I’ve seen the outside world.”

“You never went outside much?” asked Poppy.

Lati shook her head. “Was never asked to.”

“Then stick with me,” said Poppy with a grin. “I’ll show you all the sights when we have time!”

The Kokiri and fairies made their way across the fields, with Fado running ahead, her face beaming with joy.

“Ooh, what’s this? What’s that?” Fado lifted up a rock. “Hey, they have the same kind of bugs in the Lost Woods!” Then she turned, noticing something big in the distance. “Hey Saria, what’s that big plant over there?”

After Saria caught up, she took Fado by the arm. “I wouldn’t mess with that if I were you.”

“Oooh, okay. Is it dangerous?”

“Extremely,” said Poppy. “It can fly, its leaves can cut down trees, and when you defeat it, the whole thing explodes!”

“That just makes me want to check it out even more!”

Saria had to drag Fado away. “None of that, now. I don’t want you to get hurt while we have so far to walk.”

“Aaaah. You’re no fun.”

Once the girls were safely away from the peahats, Saria led Fado towards Kakariko Village. As she did, a thought crossed her mind. Wait a minute, she thought. Didn’t I need to do something in Castle Town?

“Hey Fado, I know we need to head up to Death Mountain, but would you be interested in taking a detour and seeing Castle Town?” asked Saria.

“Would I?! Let’s go!!” shouted Fado.

“Aren’t we in a hurry though?” asked Poppy. “We only have so much time to prepare before Ganondorf shows up.”

“Yeah, but we have a whole month, right? And we do owe that guard in Kakariko a favor…”

“Did he even do anything though?”

Saria paused, tapping her cheek. “I suppose not. But we did promise to help him, and that’s good enough reason for me.”

“Don’t worry so much, Poppy. It won’t take that long!” Fado then took Saria by the hand, running off towards the castle with Lati floating behind. All Poppy could do was watch them go.

“I can’t believe it. Now there’s two of them.” Poppy then gave chase, doing her best to keep up with her companions until they all made it to the town gate.

---

Saria had to stick close to the ever-curious Fado, who was positively ecstatic about all the new sights, sounds, and smells in the market. Looking at the Kokiri girl run around excitedly from place to place made Saria feel nostalgic over her first outing to the town.

“Ooh, is this Hylian food? I wanna try!”

“Hold on,” Saria grabbed Fado. “Before we get too caught up in things, I need to take care of an errand. Then we can have a little fun.”

Fado’s shoulders drooped. “Fiiiine. Have it your way.”

Saria led the way to the strange shop in the middle of the marketplace. It was a house-sized building with a large mask fixture on top that was locked in a perpetual smile.

“Kinda creepy, don’t you think?” asked Lati.

“It does make you curious though, doesn’t it?” said Fado.

Saria felt tense. She moved in front and opened the door, stepping inside. It was a wide-open building with little more than a counter on the other side, though a large sign had been posted on the left side of the store that reached from floor to ceiling. It was too much to read, so she approached the store counter.

“Hello? Is anyone working right now?”

“Quite so!” said an unusual man popping up from behind the counter. He had slicked back orange hair, squinted, and had a toothy smile. A large travel pack leaned against the wall behind the counter covered in masks. “Welcome to the Happy Mask Shop, young ladies. I’m the proprietor of the store, the Happy Mask Salesman. Although… I suppose you could just call me the Salesman for short.”

“Do you not have a proper name?” asked Saria. The Salesman’s brow furrowed at this.

“I find it very proper, for your information. Besides, I reserve personal names for personal affairs. Now, if you are a customer, I can help you to a mask.”

While Fado and the fairies looked at the tall sign, Saria looked at the shelves behind the Salesman. There wasn’t much in stock, curiously enough. Pointing, she said, “Hey, is that yellow mask up there a popular item?”

“It is indeed!” said the Salesman. “People are quite fond of the Keaton character, I’d say. Would you like to borrow the mask?” he smiled.

“Borrow?”

“Yes… I don’t suppose you read the rules, did you?”

“I… No, I guess I didn’t. Can I not just buy it for someone?”

“Well yes, but also no. You see, I’m trying something new with my shop. Think of it like a game. You can borrow the mask as long as you’d like, but on the condition you act as a second salesman on my behalf. If you find someone who wants to buy it, you take what money they give you and bring it back. If they give you more than the mask is worth, you make a profit. If they pay less, it comes out of your pocket. By spreading my masks around, you increase the world’s happiness, and I trust you a little more, so you can see more of my wares. They’re very precious to me, so if you wish to play, I ask you be prompt and courteous.”

Fado approached the counter. “You can just borrow them, huh? And if we can’t find someone, we give back the mask when we’re done?”

“Precisely,” said the Salesman.

“And what happens if someone doesn’t return the mask?” asked Saria. At this, the Salesman opened his eyes, revealing an intense glare.

“Then I take the mask back.” The man then closed his eyes, returning a happy little smile to his face.

“Well… I am trying to get the mask for someone else, so I already have a customer in mind,” said Saria.

“Great! Then take this,” the Salesman passed the Keaton mask over to Saria.

“Ooh, I want one too! I don’t know anybody, I just wanna wear it for a little bit,” said Fado. “I’ll be sure to return it before I leave town.”

“Very well,” the man said, passing a second mask to the girl.

With the masks acquired, the girls left the shop. Saria couldn’t help but mumble, “What a strange man…” to herself.

---

Once outside, the girls tried on their masks. Saria was worried there might be some kind of spell on the masks, but they were entirely ordinary. She slipped hers up to rest on her head and turned to Fado.

“So why did you want one?” she asked.

“Why? Because it means we match!” Fado said with a smile.

“Just be careful, okay? That merchant gave me the creeps. I’d rather not get in trouble, so remember to return the mask when you’re done.”

“I promise! I’m a little surprised, though. There are much scarier things in the Lost Woods than that guy.”

The girls moved on. Saria treated everyone to some food using rupees she had collected during her travels. Saria bought a whole baked cucco, some fruit, and a wedge of cheese to share. While Poppy and Lati chewed on a pear together, Saria and Fado partook of the meat and cheese. As soon as Fado ate some of the food, her face clenched up in pure delight.

“Oooh, that’s really good! This is nothing like what you’d find in our village! Thanks for letting me tag along.”

“You’ve really taken a liking to the outside world, huh?” said Saria.

“Of course! I’ve spent my whole life in those woods! It’s always the same faces, same food, same weather, same everything! Day in, day out. It’s soooo boring. It’s why I like to explore the Lost Woods so much.”

Saria almost felt hurt. “It’s not that boring, is it? I like our home.”

“Oh, I don’t mean it like that. I just felt cooped up in that small village. I love our home, but isn’t it exciting to finally experience so many new things?”

Saria thought back to all her experiences ever since she had left her village. The good times, the bad times, all the explosions. It had been quite an adventure so far.

“Exciting is a good word for it,” said Saria. “Come to think of it, I don’t recall seeing you in the Lost Woods much. How often did you wander around there? Surely you know of the danger.”

“Danger makes things fun,” said Fado, taking a huge bite out of an apple. “Isn’t that why you always went in there yourself? There are so many strange and scary things there, it’s the perfect cure for boredom. You even get to see outsiders, occasionally. Young people, old people, people looking for their friends, people trying to run away. All sorts of types. You must have seen them too, right?”

“I’ve seen a few lost people before. I usually try to lead them out if I can, but sometimes I can’t always help them.”

“It’s kind of strange though, don’t you think? You ever wonder why the Lost Woods does that to people?”

“What do you mean?”

Fado took her fork and stabbed it into the roasted cucco, pulling away a big chunk of meat. “Don’t you know? Outsiders who get lost in those woods start to change. The young ones become skull kids, and the older ones become stalfos. Only we Kokiri are safe in those woods. Any non-Kokiri turn into monsters… I’ve always wondered why. It’s pretty interesting, don’t you think?”

A bead of sweat slipped down Saria’s face. “I’d prefer not to think about that.”

Fado’s expression went back to normal. “Fair enough. You’re the leader, so you get to make the rules. If you don’t want to talk about that kind of thing, then we won’t!” Fado took a big bite out of the meat on her fork, looking as peaceful as could be.

As far back as Saria could remember, Fado had always been around. She wasn’t sure if Fado was older or younger than her, but Fado was most certainly older than the other Kokiri. She was also one of the few blonde-haired villagers, always wearing her hair in two big pompoms. She was loved by the Kokiri, and was quite close to Mido, sometimes playing the part of a doting sister. As for how Saria felt about her, she couldn’t say. Fado was a fun and curious girl, but always the troublemaker. She was cute and affectionate, but also a little scary at times. She was like the wind – an unpredictable free spirit. If nothing else, Saria knew that she could never let Fado out of her sight for even a minute, because if she did, who knows what she would get up to?

When everyone was done eating, Saria wrapped up the leftovers with a clean cloth and stored the food in her travel pack.

“Okay, let’s get out of here,” said Saria.

“Already? But we just got here!” complained Fado.

“Yeah, but we have things to do.” Saria tried walking away, but Fado, still sitting, wrapped her arms around Saria’s waist.

“Come ooooon, there’s still so much I haven’t seen. Just a little longer. Please?”

Saria looked to her fairy companion, who shrugged. She sighed. “Oh, all right. Just a little longer.”

“Yay!” Fado leapt up out of her chair.

With Fado leading the way, the girls spent more time in town. They went everywhere, climbing rooftops, playing with animals, and talking with strangers. They even found games to play in some of the stores. Saria won a new belt pouch at the shooting gallery, whereas Fado got some spending money at the bombchu bowling alley.

When it started to get late, Saria said, “Okay Fado, let’s get going now.”

“Hold on,” Fado stopped, looking towards the castle. “Is that where you said you saw the princess?”

“Yes?”

“Thanks! I’m gonna go say hi to her before we go!”

Fado ran off. Saria shouted, “Hey, get back here!!”

Saria gave chase, leaving the town behind. She was unaware of the man that had been watching her and her friend. From around the corner, a merchant smiled to himself. “There they go. Looks like I’ve found myself more fairies to catch.”

---

The two Kokiri sprinted towards the castle, all while their fairies did their best to keep up. Fado proved nimbler than Saria, climbing the vines along the stone wall with ease while Saria lost her grip halfway through. Fado nearly reached the gate wall when Saria made it to the top. Saria continued chasing the girl, watching as she leapt from the gate and rolled across the ground, unphased by the fall. Saria followed suit, eventually cornering the girl on a path to the right with a sign that read “Dead End.”

“There you are. You need to be more careful! We’re not allowed to be here,” said Saria.

“Are you sure? I thought you got to see the princess,” said Fado.

“And almost got beat up because of it, too. Everyone is on high alert right now because of the Gerudo. If we get caught, who knows what will happen to us?”

“Then all we need to do is not get caught,” Fado smiled.

Saria was starting to get irritated, but before she said anything, a faint wave of energy washed over her. A strong but subdued presence could be felt nearby, like the warmth from a fire. Saria looked past her friend, noticing a boulder at the end of the path. That’s when she remembered something from back on Death Mountain.

“Hold on,” said Saria, walking past Fado. “I think there’s a hidden path here. I met a Great Fairy once before, and she mentioned one of her sisters was nearby Hyrule Castle.”

“You think this might be where she is?” asked Fado.

“I do. The question is how we get past this boulder without alerting the guards…” Saria tested the limits of her magic bracelet, but she wasn’t strong enough to lift the boulder. “Darn, I guess that won’t work. Maybe if we pushed together…”

“I have an idea!” Fado reached into one of her own pouches, pulling out a bombchu.

“Hey! Where did you even get that?”

“I borrowed it? I thought that’s how shops worked here.”

“Fado, not all the shops run on a borrow-based exchange. I paid for the food, remember? That’s a stolen bombchu!”

Fado hummed in thought before setting the bombchu on the ground. Saria was so caught off-guard, she was too slow to stop it. The bombchu raced past her, latched onto the boulder, then spun around and around before finally detonating, destroying the boulder.

“What’d you go and do that for?!” said Saria.

“Figured I might as well use it. Can’t be caught for stealing if I don’t have it, right?”

Already Saria could hear the sound of guards racing down the path as smoke from the explosion cleared up. A small crawlspace could be seen.

“Quick, inside!”

Saria and Fado dove through the crawlspace with their fairies, disappearing before the guards found them. After leaving the crawlspace, the girls found themselves standing before a Great Fairy’s fountain.

“Woooow, what is this place?” asked Fado.

“It’s a fountain where one of the Great Fairies live,” Saria took a deep breath and relaxed her shoulders. “It’s not quite how I imagined finding this place, but I suppose I should thank you for the help.”

Fado wrapped an arm around Saria’s shoulders as she said, “Of course! What are friends for?”

Grumbling, Saria pushed Fado away and said, “No more bombchus, though. We have to be on our best behavior for the Great Fairy, okay?”

“Don’t worry, Saria,” said Lati. “I’ll make sure she doesn’t misbehave anymore.”

Fado rolled her eyes. “Relax. I only had the one bombchu, anyway.”

Saria then stepped forward, summoning the fairy with her ocarina. As before, the Great Fairy appeared from the fountain, floating through the air. She immediately popped her back and let out a pleased wince.

“Ooh, that was nice. Been a while since I got to stretch like that.” She then looked down at Saria. “Aaah, I see. So it is true. You’re the new hero, right?”

Saria straightened her posture and said, “Yes, in a matter of speaking. I was told by your sister on Death Mountain to come see you. I heard you can teach me a spell?”

“I can do that,” the Great Fairy smiled. “I am the Great Fairy of Magic, after all. Receive my power, little one, and rejoice!”

Extending her hands, the Great Fairy transferred a portion of her power into Saria, passing the spell on. Saria felt the magic flow through her body as before, but this time she saw a vision of a great inferno bursting from the ground.

“What is this?” asked Saria.

“That spell is called Din’s Fire. Nice, isn’t it?”

“It feels powerful, but also dangerous.”

“Well, you’re not wrong. Fire can hurt. Fire can destroy. But it can also warm the body, cook your food, and light the path ahead. Fire can be many things. It’s all a matter of how you use it. So use it with care, little one.”

“Ooh, I wanna learn Din’s Fire too!” said Fado. Saria shoved the Kokiri girl away.

“Not happening.”

The Great Fairy chuckled at the exchange and said, “It’s been nice seeing some fresh new faces. If you ever need help or advice, don’t hesitate to call on me. See you later, darlings!”

Then the fairy disappeared into the fountain. The girls turned away and headed for the exit.

“She’s really pretty, huh?” said Fado.

“Indeed.”

“Do you think you’ll ever turn into that?” Fado asked of Lati.

“I’m not sure. Great Fairies are the accumulation of many fairies. I could become a part of one, but probably never be one, if that makes sense.”

“Huh. I think so. What do you think, Poppy?”

“I’m already gorgeous. I don’t need to be big to be pretty,” the fairy grinned. Fado chuckled at this and followed after Saria. When the two Kokiri left the fountain, however, they found someone waiting for them outside.

“And that makes two,” said the merchant.

“Wait, who’s this guy?” asked Fado.

“I have no idea,” said Saria. “I don’t think he’s a guard, though.”

The man standing before the Kokiri was a Hylian. He had shoulder-length brown hair, blue eyes, and wore a green vest over his otherwise plain clothing. He held a glass bottle in his hand as he stared the Kokiri down.

“Okay, let’s make this quick. Hand over your fairies, or else I’ll shout for the guards.”

“You’re bluffing,” said Saria. “You’ll get in just as much trouble with the guards as us.”

“Oh, I wouldn’t say that,” grinned the merchant. “They’ll likely just throw me out like they do with most people. But you? I’ve heard about you and the trouble you’ve caused them. Given how tight security is these days, they might just drag you off to the dungeon. So what’ll it be? Your fairies or the dungeon?”

Saria was unamused by the man’s threats. She said, “You can have this.” She then smashed a deku nut against the ground, blinding the man. “Fado, let’s get out of here!” The merchant was left in such pain he could hardly speak. The Kokiri and fairies slipped past him, sneaking into the gatehouse before climbing out and leaving the castle grounds behind.

Back in the marketplace, Saria and Fado stopped to catch their breath.

“What was that about?” asked Fado. “Why did that guy want our fairies?”

“I don’t know, but I have a bad feeling about this. Let’s get going. We’re long overdue for Kakariko Village.”

Unfortunately, night had fallen across the town. By the time the girls reached the gate, it was already closed. Saria skid to a halt. “Oh shoot! They closed the gate on us!”

“Do you know of any other way out?” asked Fado.

“I was shown a secret exit once, but you need a special key to use it that I don’t have.”

“Ooh, I have an idea,” said Poppy. “You learned that song back in the tomb, right? If you play it, it’ll be day again and we can leave!”

“That might just make them confused, but I’ll give it a shot.”

Saria drew her ocarina out once more and was ready to play. As she did, however, a man shouted from behind her.

“Hey!” Saria stopped and turned to face the man, realizing he was one of the guards.

“What’s wrong?” she asked.

“It’s quiet time. No playing music.”

“But-”

“I said no. People are trying to sleep, so be respectful. If you disturb the peace, I won’t hesitate to throw you in jail.”

Saria narrowed her eyes at the guard and put her ocarina away. “So be it… Can you at least let us out? We need to get to Kakariko Village. It’s urgent.”

“Are you crazy? There are way too many monsters that come out at night for me to do that. You want me to endanger the whole town? Sorry, but you’ll have to wait until morning.”

As the guard walked away, Fado stared daggers at the back of the man’s head, popping her knuckles. Saria had to grab her before she went after him.

“Hey, what gives?” said Fado. “If we take care of him, we can open the gate ourselves, right?”

Saria shook her head. “I’d rather not cause more trouble than I already have. Let’s just find somewhere to rest for the night.”

Fado followed after Saria, saying, “Ooh, and if we find somewhere secluded, then we can play that song.”

With night fallen across the town, the girls found it a far less hospitable place. All the friendly faces had gone home, now soundly asleep. The only things still awake were the guards patrolling the town (far more than Saria expected) and all the dogs wandering the streets. A cold wind blew through the town, making Saria pull her cloak together.

“Saria… Are you all right?” asked Fado.

“I’ve been better. I feel like an idiot for spending all day in town. We should be in Goron City by now.”

“Don’t beat yourself up over it. I’m the reason we stuck around for so long. If you have to blame someone, blame me.”

Saria shook her head. “You can say that, but I’m the one who took a detour in the first place. We wouldn’t be in this situation if I didn’t drag you along on my errand.”

Fado frowned. She watched as Saria sat down with her back against the wall of a building, huddling up with her cloak. The building itself looked like a medicine shop. Fado and her fairy inspected the front of the store and found a sign.

“Hold on, what’s this sign say?”

This got Saria’s attention, so she stood up and read the sign as well. The sign was an advertisement, talking about the store’s inventory to get new customers interested. The store sold potions, deku nuts, blue flame, and even bottled poes – a disturbing thought for Saria, having met a pair of ghosts herself. But the last item it listed was bottled fairies, which sold for fifty rupees each.

“Wait… This shop sells fairies?” scoffed Saria.

“This is outrageous!” growled Poppy. “I’m worth way more than fifty rupees!”

“Does this mean that man from earlier runs this shop?” asked Lati. “Either that or he was planning to sell us to the owner.”

The girls looked at each other. With a furrowed brow, Saria said, “I think we should take a closer look before we leave town tonight.”

---

Saria and the fairies were hiding behind the potion shop while Fado picked the lock. Apparently, Fado had found a number of unusual items abandoned by people who disappeared in the Lost Woods. Saria decided not to question it.

“Got it. Come on!” whispered Fado.

With the backdoor unlocked, everyone slipped inside. It didn’t take long until the girls found the shop’s storeroom. There were several bottled potions, tools used for mixing ingredients, bags of spare deku nuts, and a whole shelf’s worth of bottled fairies. As soon as they noticed the Kokiri girls, they all started banging on their glass, silently shouting for help.

“Don’t worry. We’ll get you out,” said Saria, reaching for one of the bottles.

“Not so fast!” said a familiar voice. “That’s store property!”

Saria and Fado turned, realizing the merchant from earlier was standing by the backdoor with a guard in tow.

“These are the ones I told you about, sir,” said the merchant. “See? They’ve already stolen two of my fairies!”

“These aren’t your fairies, you bum!” shouted Saria. “These are our fairies! We’re Kokiri!”

“What do you mean?” asked the guard.

“Kokiri and faeries have always lived side by side. They’re our companions. Have you never heard of our village?”

“Yeah! We’re not someone’s property!” shouted Poppy.

“Wait… Hold on… I’m not sure how to handle this,” said the guard.

“You’re not just going to let them get away with this, are you?” asked the merchant. “They broke into my shop!”

“True. Okay, you two can come with me. I need to talk with my captain about this fairy business.”

Much to their frustration, Saria and Fado followed the guard out of the shop to the gatehouse by the town’s main entrance. Saria wanted to avoid trouble, but even she was losing her patience. She started questioning what was more important: doing good or following the law?

“Sorry about this,” said the guard. “It’ll just be a minute. Wait here.”

The man stepped inside the gatehouse to talk with his fellow guards. After he shut the door, Fado crossed her arms. “How rude. I don’t care much for the laws these Hylians enforce.”

Saria, who was once again sitting with her back against a wall, rested her head across her arms. “Well we are on the same side. It’s frustrating, but what can we do?”

At this, Fado kicked a rock away. “We are not on the same side! Fairies aren’t property! If we let this go, we’re condoning slavery!!”

“But what if the fairies are being used to help heal people and keep them safe?”

“There’s a difference between asking a fairy for help and forcing them to help you! Didn’t you see how those fairies reacted when they saw us? They need our help! And if we keep letting these guards push us around, we’ll never get the chance!”

Saria’s eyes widened at this. “You know what… You’re right. Who knows how many fairies have already been captured and sold? We can’t let them get away with this!”

“You’re darn right we can’t!” Fado reached out a hand, helping Saria to her feet. “I think it’s time we take matters into our own hands. You ready to ditch these guys?”

“I am. If they won’t respect the people of the forest, there’s no reason to respect them.”

The girls slipped on their Keaton masks and faded into the shadows. Not long after, the guard stepped out of the gatehouse.

“Okay, so it turns out it’s perfectly legal to… Huh? Where’d they go?” The guard looked around, unable to find the Kokiri. Before he could blow his whistle to alert the others, a deku nut slammed into the ground, blinding the man. Two small figures emerged from the darkness, knocking out the guard, as well as the others inside the gatehouse. Once the guards were safely tucked away in the building, the girls returned to the medicine shop.

“Huh? Who goes there?” The merchant looked around, seeing the two figures approach. “Oh, it’s you two? Didn’t you learn your lesson already, or,” he grinned, “are you here to cut me a deal?”

“There will be no more selling of fairies,” said the green-haired girl. “We’ve come to dispense justice.”

“Kokiri justice,” said the blonde-haired girl before shutting and locking the backdoor.

“Wait, you can’t be serious. I’m twice your size. There’s no way you could-”

The green haired girl kicked the merchant in the knee, knocking him to the ground. He pushed himself back, pleading with the girls.

“Wait, hold on! Let’s make a deal! I could give you a cut of the profits! How does 50% sound? No, 70%! 80%! Come on! Answer me!”

The girls ignored his pleading and beat him to a pulp. By the time the guards found him the next day, the shop had been ransacked. All the fairies had been freed, and the owner was tied up in the corner with the word “Slaver” written on his forehead.

“By the goddesses, what happened?!” said one of the guards.

The delirious merchant mumbled, “Keatons… Don’t mess with keatons…”

---

When the Castle Town gate was open, an old lady on a horse-drawn cart made its way out, its goods tied down with a cloth tarp. After the gate guard gave the cart a cursory inspection, he let the woman pass. She rode across the fields as she made her way to Kakariko Village. Once she reached the entrance at the foot of the mountain, she stopped.

“Okay, it’s all clear,” said the old lady.

Saria, Fado, and the two fairies slipped out from under the covers and climbed out of the cart.

“Thanks for the help,” said Saria, handing the old lady some rupees. “Here’s the rest of your payment.”

“Oh, much appreciated. That was a tad surprising, though. I didn’t expect the guards to be on such high alert. Did something happen recently?”

Saria shook her head. “I couldn’t say.”

“I heard the local potion shop had a bad break-in recently.” The woman smiled, almost knowingly. “Seems the world isn’t as safe as it used to be. You kids take care, now.”

Then the old lady flicked her reins and drove her cart back over the bridge, disappearing down the road.

“Nice lady,” Fado smiled. “I’ll have to visit her the next time I’m in town.”

“I’m not sure it’s a good idea to go back right now,” said Saria.

“I gotta return this mask eventually, right?”

Saria tensed up. “You still have that?!”

“Relax. I didn’t have time to give it back since the shop was closed before we left. Besides, as long as I return it in the end, there’s no harm, right?”

Saria sighed. “I can’t believe I’ve become a criminal. They’re all going to hate me now…”

“It’s okay,” said Poppy, patting Saria on the shoulder. “Should the worst come to pass, we fairies will always honor your memory.”

“Hush, you.”

The girls made their way up to Kakariko Village. Before Fado got distracted by all the cuccos, Saria dragged her off and walked up to the Death Mountain gate.

“Hey, long time no see, Ms. Hero!” said the friendly guard. “Did you happen to pick up that mask?”

“I did.” Saria passed the Keaton mask over to the guard. He looked it over and smiled.

“Wow, this is great!” He then put it on. “My kid is gonna love this! Thanks Ms. Hero! You’re the best! Here, take these.”

The guard handed Saria fifteen rupees, and with the errand concluded, the girls passed through the gate and walked up the mountain trail. Unlike in the past, there were no signs of monsters. Instead, Gorons young and old could be seen all throughout the trail. Some were basking in the sun, others were playing, and many more were just rolling around for fun. It was a much livelier place than it was before. Even though Saria felt bad for breaking so many laws in Castle Town, she felt satisfied knowing she had still made a difference elsewhere.

“Big Sis!” shouted a Goron, who faceplanted into the ground. “Didn’t think I’d see you again so soon.”

Saria helped the Goron up, saying, “And I didn’t think you’d be doing that again so soon. Haven’t you learned anything?”

“Sorry, I was just excited to see you.”

Fado burst out laughing at the Goron’s display, saying, “This is what Gorons are like? I think I’m gonna like you guys!”

“Ooh, who’s that, Big Sis?” asked the Goron.

“This is Fado. She’s another Kokiri,” said Saria. “Is Darunia in the city? I need to speak with him.”

The Goron nodded, confirming Darunia was in Goron City. After thanking the man and saying goodbye, Saria led Fado up the rest of the trail, taking her inside the city where they found Darunia running armored Gorons through military drills.

“Saria! Glad to see ya! Who’s this?” asked Darunia. Saria introduced Fado, and then the pair shook hands. “Pleasure to meet you, Fado. Any friend of Saria is a friend of mine!”

“Same!” Fado smiled.

“If you don’t mind me asking, what brings you back so soon? Is something wrong?”

“It’s about Ganondorf,” said Saria. “He escaped to Gerudo Valley. The king thinks he might be planning an attack.”

“Hmph! That slippery little thief! I thought something like that might be happening. It’s why I’m training my warriors. Gotta be ready for anything!”

“Is it possible my people could train with yours? They’re not used to fighting like you and me are. If Ganondorf does attack Hyrule, I want the Kokiri to be prepared.”

Darunia crossed his muscular arms and nodded. “Of course. Anything for my blood sister!”

“Thank you. Fado can take over from here. She can help coordinate things between you and the other Kokiri.”

“I see. So, Fado, was it? You ever been in a fight before?”

Fado smiled. “I’ve had to put down a few stalfos in the past, so I know a thing or two about fighting.”

“Huh. Not sure what those are, but they sound dangerous. Good! I’m glad you’re not as green as your tunic!” The Goron chief laughed alongside Fado while Saria stood back, utterly horrified by what Fado had said.

“She’s joking… Right?” asked Saria.

“You never know with that one,” said Poppy. “At least they’re getting along.”

Saria said her goodbyes and left the city. She had taken longer than she intended, but now that things had been settled, she could focus entirely on her training. She headed back to Kakariko Village and searched for Impa, eventually finding her waiting in the graveyard. The muscular woman was leaning against a wall of dirt, tapping her foot.

“Finally decided to show up, I see. Took you long enough,” said Impa.

“I’m sorry, things got a little out of hand, but it’s all taken care of now,” said Saria.

“It’s all right. I’m just glad you showed up at all. Your training partner is waiting for you.”

“My… Training partner?”

Impa smirked. “You’ll see.” Then the woman turned and walked through a wall. What Saria thought was solid dirt rippled like the surface of a pond. Unsure what to make of it, Saria stuck her hand through the wall.

“It’s an illusion. Interesting.”

Saria then stepped through the illusion, following after Impa. The Sheikah led the girl to a hidden part of the village. The stone buildings looked much older, having a layer of moss on their walls, and the surrounding woods had grown so dense that the canopy nearly swallowed the sun. There were also several structures that seemed to serve little purpose other than for training. It was part village and part obstacle course, with a pond of water in the center where fireflies gently danced above it on the winds.

“Welcome to Sheikah Village,” said Impa. “For the time being, this will be your new home.”

“That answers a few questions,” said Saria. “Kakariko always seemed a bit ordinary compared to what I knew about the Sheikah.”

Impa chuckled at the girl’s words. “There’s a lot you don’t know about us, and hopefully it stays that way.”

Saria walked forward, taking a look around. Then, she sensed a presence coming up from behind her. She turned, weapon at the ready.

“Who goes there?”

“It’s all right,” said Impa. “They’re your new training partner. Come on out, Sheik.”

A young boy about Saria’s height stepped out of the shadows. Wearing form-fitting clothes similar to Impa, but covering their whole body, their forearms, chest, and head were wrapped in bandages, and a tattered tabard was worn over their torso, displaying the symbol of the Sheikah in red. Blonde hair could be seen beneath their head wrappings, and while one eye was covered by hair, their other eye was red, looking at Saria with a subdued yet intense gaze.

“Whoa,” said Poppy. “He’s gonna be your training partner?”

“Nice to meet you,” said Sheik in a calm, boyish voice. He extended a hand to Saria. The Kokiri accepted, shaking the boy’s hand. His grip was firm, and his fingers calloused – likely due to intense training.

“Nice to meet you. You’ve got an interesting name,” said Saria.

“Young Sheikah in training are not given names,” said Impa. “Not all trainees survive their youth. Because of this, it’s a tradition to give our young such a title. If they survive training, they become official Sheikah, earning their name.”

“I thought you were the last of the Sheikah.”

“I am, at least until Sheik earns their place,” Impa smiled. “Now we don’t have much time. Ganondorf may not march for a month, but there’s no telling what that sorcerer will do in the meantime. We have to be ready for anything. Monsters, bandits, wizards – you name it. You two better get ready, because by the end of the month, you’ll either be the toughest warriors in Hyrule, or you’ll be dead. There is no middle ground.”

Saria looked to Sheik and nodded. She had no idea what to expect, but she knew everyone was counting on her. Clenching her fist, she looked Impa in the eye and said, “Okay. Let’s get started!”

Chapter Text

Saria began her training under Impa alongside the mysterious boy, Sheik. While Poppy watched from afar, Saria performed a number of strenuous tasks to help increase her strength, endurance, and agility – all without the help of the Goron’s Bracelet. When questioned, Impa explained that it was important to be able to take care of yourself and not rely on your gear (the bracelet multiplied one’s strength anyway so it would still prove beneficial later on). Saria had to walk tightropes with a basket of rocks on her back, hold her breath for longer and longer periods while completely submerged in the pond, as well as play “games” of stealth where she was struck with a rod anytime she was detected. There were normal exercises too, such as running laps around the village, push-ups, pull-ups, and hanging sit-ups. Of course, even ordinary exercises were pushed to their extreme.

So that’s why she’s so muscular, thought Saria. Impa must have done this all the time in her youth.

Every once and a while, Impa would take things up a notch and make Saria and Sheik run an obstacle course. This course ran all throughout the village, with such things as swinging metal balls, spiked fences that could be raised higher and higher with a turn-crank, trap doors disguised as normal ground that could open up at any time, and many other dangerous devices. Injury from the obstacles was punishment for failure. Impa did nothing if someone was injured during the obstacle course, at least until both Saria and Sheik had either made it across the finish line or were unable to continue. Despite the harsh nature of Impa’s training, she was not completely heartless. She had a large supply of healing medicine on hand to treat any injuries sustained during training.

Impa did everything she could to push Saria to her breaking point. Saria had to become faster, stronger, more agile, and more cunning every day or learn a new lesson in pain. The training was grueling and left her body aching every day, but Saria refused to give up. There was too much at stake.

“Two minutes, fifteen seconds. You shaved off a few seconds, Saria. Good work,” said Impa. The Kokiri, struggling to catch her breath, merely nodded her head. Impa continued, saying, “That will be all for today. Get some rest, you two.”

Then Impa disappeared. When training concluded for the day, Saria and Sheik had the village all to themselves, since Impa had to attend to other duties. Usually Saria would bathe and rest, or sometimes step outside and hang out in Kakariko Village, but today, she decided to check on Sheik first.

“What was your time?” asked Saria. “You’re always ahead of me, so it’s hard to tell.”

Sheik, who was sitting on the edge of a small cliff above a dirt path, said, “One minute and thirty-eight seconds,” solemnly.

“Wow, that’s fast!” said Poppy, joining the two. Sheik shook his head at this.

“It may be fast compared to your time, but I haven’t improved for a while. I’ve plateaued. I’m not sure I have what it takes to become a Sheikah. That’s what Impa says, anyway…”

“Oh, what does she know?! I bet it’s been years since she’s run this course!”

“Did she keep record of her times from her youth?” asked Saria as she sat next to Sheik.

“One minute and twenty-five seconds,” said Sheik.

Thirteen seconds. It seemed like a small number at a glance, but Saria had seen Sheik traverse the obstacle course again and again throughout the week she had been training beside him. The way he slipped through barriers, hopped fences, and ran without making a sound was incredible. Each run through the course was nothing short of perfection, and yet there was still such a wide gap between mentor and student…

“It’s okay. You’ll make it there someday,” said Saria. “You may even surpass Impa.”

“How can you be so sure?”

With a smile, Saria said, “Maybe it’s just intuition, but you’re already this capable at such a young age. I’m certain you’ll go far.”

Sheik gripped his knees with his bandaged hands. “I… I don’t understand.”

“You don’t have to,” said Poppy. “Just have a little faith in yourself!”

“Faith, is it?”

Sheik and Saria looked out across the village. It was midday, though there were enough clouds in the sky to cover the village in shade. A soft, chilling wind blew through the air, making the sweat clinging to Saria feel cold. She took a drink from her waterskin then held it out towards Sheik.

“Thirsty?”

The red-eyed boy looked at the waterskin for a moment before accepting the offer, pulling the cloth covering most of his face down to drink. He was a handsome boy. Saria suspected he’d be very popular back in her village.

After Sheik gave Saria her waterskin back, Saria asked, “Have you always been training under Impa, or is this something new?”

“I’ve been training with Impa since I was physically able to,” said Sheik. “It’s been six, no, seven years I think.”

“Since you were that young? But why?” asked Poppy.

“I’m to be Impa’s replacement. I must be ready to defend the Royal Family with my life as other Sheikah have in the past.” Sheik paused for a moment, looking in the direction of the village entrance. “You’ve probably wondered why Impa and I are the only ones left. I was told that before I was born, there was a great war that threatened to consume all of Hyrule. The Sheikah before me died protecting the Royal Family – including my parents. Their bodies are buried in the graveyard of Kakariko. Surely you understand why I worry so. If I can’t live up to the Sheikah name after Impa retires, the clan will disappear. All their sacrifices, all their history… It’ll be nothing but a memory.”

Hearing this, Saria said, “Sheik… I understand why it’s so important to you, but if you put too much pressure on yourself to succeed, the stress will wear you out faster than the training. You’ve got to relax and clear your head.”

“Do we even have time to relax? Just because Impa believes we have a month doesn’t make it true. Ganondorf could show up any day now with his warriors and monsters, and if he takes the castle, then what? Do I give my life to protect the Royal Family, or do I…?”

“What? What’s wrong?”

Sheik stood up. “I’ve been thinking. Have the Sheikah always served a specific family, or is it merely the family who holds power in Hyrule? Will a day come when I have to serve Ganondorf?”

Saria stood up as well, taking Sheik by his hands. “That will never happen. Not as long as I’m around. And even if Ganondorf takes over, you don’t have to follow tradition. Your life is your own.”

Sheik pulled his hands away, stepping back and turning around. “Is it, though?”

After that, Sheik walked away – likely to wash up, as he tended to after training. Saria would have to wait her turn to use the bath.

Saria collapsed onto her back, finding it difficult to stand. Poppy fluttered over in a panic, but Saria waved her away.

“I’ll be fine. I just wish I could help them. They must feel so trapped.”

Poppy laid on her back next to the Kokiri and said, “I can’t say I blame him. Pressure like that would drive me crazy!” Poppy then turned onto her side, resting her head in her hand. “Do you think he has any friends? I’ve never seen him leave this place before.”

“If he does, he likely uses a disguise of some kind. I get the feeling Impa wants the truth of her successor to be kept secret.” Saria looked over to Poppy. “And that means we can’t tell anyone about him as well.”

“W-whaaaa, why are you looking at me that way? I wasn’t going to say anything… Probably… Plus there aren’t many kids in Kakariko, except for the boy who hangs out in the graveyard all day.”

Saria chuckled at Poppy’s reaction before falling silent and staring up at the sky. Grey clouds moved overhead with the promise of rain. If Impa’s prediction was correct, they still had lots of time to prepare. But if Impa was wrong…

“I’ll be his friend.”

“What?” asked Poppy.

“If he doesn’t have any, I’ll be his friend. Carrying such a burden alone must be exhausting… But if we share it together, maybe it won’t be so bad.”

“I don’t really get it, but far be it from me to tell you what to do. It’s not like you’ve listened to me since we left the forest.”

Somehow, Saria couldn’t help but burst out laughing. She grabbed Poppy and hugged her to her chest.

“H-hey! What’s the big idea?!”

“I’m sorry, Poppy. Even if it seems like I don’t listen, I always consider your words carefully. And I’m here for you as well if you need me. We’re in this together, right?”

Poppy stopped struggling and relented, like a helpless kitten in an affectionate baby’s arms. “Geez… Of course we’re in this together. You’re all I have.”

Saria smiled warmly at this. “You as well, my friend. I’m glad I met you.”

The pair shared a tender moment together while waiting for their turn with the bath. Once Sheik was finished and its waters were drained, Saria filled it back up, put more wood in the fire beneath it, then soaked the pain away. In times like these, moments of respite were worth their weight in rupees.

---

Training continued into the next week. One day, Impa took Saria aside to speak with her.

“What is it, Impa? Am I doing something wrong?” asked Saria.

“Not exactly. Your training has been going well, I think. You’ve been improving steadily each day. No, this is about something that happened in Castle Town.”

Saria froze stiff, her eyes slowly meeting with Impa’s. “Heard about that, did you?”

“Is there a reason you think I wouldn’t?”

“So much time passed since then, I had hoped so…”

Impa shook her head. “Just to be sure, why don’t you tell me what happened. You’ve proven to be level-headed thus far, so even I was surprised when I heard about it.”

Saria explained herself, telling Impa about how she and her friend were cornered and threatened, their initial escape, the discovery of the trapped fairies, and how the merchant used the guards to make things difficult for them. In the end, Saria and her friend had enough and dealt with things in their own way. After Saria was done, Impa had a subtle scowl on her face, like the way one’s face scrunches up after hearing a bad joke.

“I heard rumors of that merchant, but I didn’t realize he was so crooked. I suppose when you have to focus on the politics of the kingdom, little things slip past you every now and then.”

“So you’re not mad?”

“Of course I’m mad! It was a foolish thing to do, especially given the tense climate we’re in. You attacked guards.” Saria tensed up, unsure what would happen next. Impa then said, “Still, it’s not like I blame you for your actions. My knowledge of fairies and what they were like was scant indeed before you came around. I suspect few others saw fairies as people.”

“So what now?”

“Well you’ve racked up quite the fine after everything you did, and I intend you pay it back in full.”

“What! But you said you didn’t blame Saria for what she did!” shouted Poppy.

“It would be troublesome if Saria couldn’t go back to Castle Town if I needed her to. Besides, I may not be a member of the guards, but I can’t have you flagrantly ignoring laws and doing as you please in a town we should be protecting.”

Saria hung her head low. “All right… What would you have me do?”

“I got a job for you on Lon Lon Ranch. When you’re not training, you’ll be helping the ranchers.” Impa smiled at the Kokiri. “That’s not a problem, right?”

Saria’s eyes lit up and she shook her head. “Not at all!”

“I’ve also done some thinking. With that merchant’s behavior, I can’t allow him to keep doing business in town. There’s no telling what trouble he’d get up to in the future. So if you earn enough rupees, maybe we can set up a new shop. Perhaps even a Kokiri-run shop?”

“You really mean it?” Impa nodded, and Saria hugged the Sheikah. There was an awkward silence as Saria realized what she had done, and she let go, backing away slowly. “Ha ha… Sorry.”

The Sheikah sighed. “You Kokiri really are something. Alive for so many years, and you still act like children.” Impa looked across the village at Sheik, who was still hard at work training. “Maybe we could learn a thing or two from you.”

“So when do I start?”

“Today after training. That’s not a problem, is it?”

“Not at all.”

“Good. Then let’s make the most of today.”

Saria returned to training, feeling a sense of relief. While she suspected she’d be even more tired than usual in the coming days, knowing she’d be next to a friend gave her great comfort. But then it occurred to her that Sheik would be by himself on those days. Saria decided to broach the subject at the end of training.

“You want Sheik to join you? Why?” asked Impa.

“I thought it could be a good opportunity for… Training. After all, working on a ranch is physically taxing, isn’t it?”

“And you don’t want an advantage over me. Is that it?” asked Sheik.

Impa – who likely saw through Saria – shook her head. “We’re training in secret for a reason. It’s one thing if you go out to work on the ranch, but it’s another thing entirely for Sheik to leave. However… If you were to assume a new identity when outside of this village, the work could prove beneficial for your training.”

“Then Sheik can join me?” asked Saria.

“Only if Sheik wants to.”

The young boy crossed his arms and closed his eyes in thought. After a few seconds, he nodded. “I’m curious what this ranch is like, as I’ve never visited it before. I’ll join you.”

Saria jumped in excitement, hugging Sheik tight. Even behind his face mask, Sheik could be seen blushing.

“H-hey! Who said you could do that?”

“Ah, sorry. Bad habit I picked up on,” said Saria.

“I hope hugs aren’t a problem,” said Poppy, “because there’ll be a lot more of that on the ranch.”

“Really? Why?” asked Sheik.

“Oh you’ll find out once you meet her…”

Sheik gulped, but then said, “That shouldn’t be a problem. It will be a chance to practice defense against grab attacks.”

Saria imagined a scenario where Malon hugged Sheik from behind, only for him to throw the girl over his shoulder and slam her into the ground.

“Ha ha… Try not to take things too seriously, okay?” said Saria.

After that, Saria and Sheik washed up. By the time they were done, Impa had prepared new clothes for them. They were overalls with undershirts and sturdy boots – dark and light green for Saria, blue and white for Sheik. Sheik was also given a straw hat. After thanking Impa, the pair slipped out of the hidden village and graveyard, through the shadowy outskirts of Kakariko Village, then across the fields to Lon Lon Ranch. After passing through the initial entrance, the pair found themselves between a pair of buildings just next to a fenced-in field and racetrack. Instead of Talon or Malon, the first person Saria saw was a total stranger. She suspected he was one of the ranch hands. He was tall, and besides a little stomach pudge, he was as scrawny as a deku stick. He had hairy arms, thick eyebrows, a mustache, wore pink and green, and had a harsh look in his eyes.

“Um… Excuse me…” said Saria, approaching the man.

“I can’t believe it,” the man grumbled to himself while working. “I, the great Ingo, am stuck on this dump of a ranch doing all the work myself! Talon said there would be another worker here today, but I haven’t seen them! What a joke. I, the hard-working Ingo, should be in charge, not that lazy bum, Talon!” It was then that the man turned towards Saria and Sheik, nearly jumping out of his skin. “Aah! How long have you two been there?!”

“Not too long, thankfully…” Saria sighed. “If you’re finished, we’re actually here to help. I was hoping to talk to Talon. Have you seen him?”

“He’s in his house over there,” Ingo pointed. “You shouldn’t have trouble finding him. He hardly moves all day…”

“Let’s get this over with, then,” said Sheik, walking past everyone. Saria was quick to join him, but as she walked away, Ingo spoke up.

“Say… Are you two really going to help out around here?”

“As long as you’re okay with it,” said Saria.

“Oh, of course, of course. It’s no trouble at all. If you have any questions, be sure to come to me first.”

The Kokiri smiled and said, “All right. Thank you, Ingo.”

Saria joined Sheik inside the ranch home. She was immediately greeted by the sight of over a dozen cuccos running around the house. There was even a cucco on Sheik’s head, flapping its wings and cawing. Despite this, Sheik remained ever the bastion of calm, his arms crossed and gaze intense. Resting on the ground with his back against a table, Talon was snoozing the day away. Saria tried to wake him, but she couldn’t, so Sheik flicked the man’s forehead.

“What the! Oh, Saria? Is that you? I didn’t expect you by so soon! And who’s this lad?”

Saria turned to Sheik who said, “My name is… Marth.”

“Marth? That’s an interesting name. Where are you from, Marth?”

“Kakariko Village.”

“I see! When I was told I could get a new ranch hand, I didn’t expect to get two for the price of one!” The man laughed out loud before saying, “I’m kidding, of course. As long as you two put in the work, you’ll both be getting paid.” Talon then stood up, dusted himself off, then made his way to the front door. “Let me introduce you to the others and show you what you’ll be doing.”

Outside, Talon gathered everyone together. Standing across from Saria and Sheik was Malon and Ingo.

“All right you two, listen up! This here is Saria – who I’m sure you already know, Malon. And this here is uh… Marth?” Sheik nodded at this, then Talon continued. “They’ll be our new helpers from now on, so feel free to boss ‘em around. Same duties as always, but now you can split the work however you like. And as for you two, this is my daughter, Malon. We’ve met a few times already, Saria, but Marth, this girl is the world to me. You be sure to treat her right.”

“Of course, sir.”

“Good. As for this fellow, his name is Ingo.”

“We’ve already met,” said Saria.

“What?! Then what was the point of all this?! Ah well… As long as you all know each other, things should be fine. Today we need to clean the stables, refresh the hay supplies in there, and get the cart ready for a delivery tomorrow. The demand for our milk has gone up recently, so we’ll be sure to meet that demand. If nobody’s got any questions, I’ll show Saria and Marth around a bit.”

“That’s fine by me,” said Ingo.

“No questions!” said Malon.

“Good! Now Saria, Marth, come with me. I’ll show you to the stables.”

Saria and Sheik followed the man. As they walked, Malon joined them, getting close to Sheik. Avoiding eye contact, Sheik asked, “Is something wrong?”

“Nope! I just wanted to get a better look at you,” Malon smiled.

Sheik tensed up and walked past Saria. Malon giggled at this and went about her business. After that, Talon took the time to explain work duties to Saria and Sheik, what they’d be doing day in and day out, and how to best go about their duties. Talon also mentioned that he keeps a checklist of daily tasks inside the house that they can look at if they’re ever unsure of what to do.

“This all seems easy enough,” said Sheik. “Is there anything we should avoid doing?”

“Well let’s see… Don’t break my stuff? I figure anything worth worrying about is common sense. Anything you break will come out of your pay. And try to be careful with the animals. It’ll take time for them to trust you, but once they get used to ya, it’ll be fine.”

After that, the pair helped out with the remaining tasks for the day. They cleaned the stables, refreshed the hay for the cows and horses, and after washing up, they helped load crate after crate of milk into Talon’s cart so it was ready for delivery the next day. By the time Saria and Sheik were done, it was evening time. They were paid a small sum of rupees and invited to eat dinner on the ranch. Since food in the hidden village was mostly nutritious gruel, they happily accepted the offer.

Upstairs around the dinner table sat Talon, Malon, Saria, and Sheik. The food for the evening was roast cucco, mashed potatoes, gravy, and sliced bread with butter. Ingo wasn’t much for socializing with the family and ate elsewhere.

“Soooo, Marth, was it? How was your first day of ranch work?” asked Talon.

“It was fine,” said Sheik. “I thought it would be harder.”

“Huh! It really wasn’t that bad? You must have a talent for this kind of thing! What about you, Saria? Was this your first time doing stuff like this, or did you work at all in your village?”

“Life in Kokiri Village is pretty carefree most days,” said Saria. “But I’m one of the oldest there, so I looked after the others.”

“Then you were like everyone’s big sis!” said Malon. “You must be friends with eeeeveryone there. How many Kokiri are in your village? Are there a ton? Can I come to your village sometime?”

“Calm down, child,” said Talon. “It’s been a long day for them. One question at a time.”

“It’s fine,” said Saria. “You’re right. Everyone knows me in the village. It’s a pretty small place. I would say no more than a dozen or so live there. As far as visiting, well… Maybe someday. If you do ever visit, I’ll escort you to keep you safe. We live near a large forest called the Lost Woods. There’s a kind of magic in that place. An old magic. If anyone besides a Kokiri wanders around in that place, they become lost forever.”

Malon ate nervously. “So don’t do what I normally do when I visit. Got it.”

“Is it truly so dangerous?” asked Sheik. “I had heard of people wandering in and coming out before.”

“Only after I guided them out,” said Saria. “Honestly, I may need to start putting up signs one of these days. Then again, they’d probably just ignore them and walk right in anyway.”

“It’s almost like they can’t help themselves,” said Poppy, sitting on the table and eating buttered bread.

“I think we Hylians are curious by nature,” said Talon. “It’s why we spread out so far and tried learning so many new things. I know it’s troublesome, but please forgive my countrymen.”

“What about you, Marth? You said you’re from Kakariko, right?” asked Malon. “I’ve been through the village a few times, but I don’t think I’ve ever seen you before.” With a mischievous smile on her face, she said, “Don’t tell me you’re that shy.”

“I prefer to live in the shade. My eyes are sensitive to sunlight,” said Sheik.

“Hm. I was wondering why you were still wearing your hat indoors,” said Talon. “Could you pass the butter, please?”

“Of course.”

As Sheik passed the butter over to Talon, the boy paused, as if listening to something. Saria heard it to. A tapping, or perhaps pecking on the rooftop.

“Huh? Is something wrong?” asked Talon.

The tapping and pecking continued increasing in intensity, to the point where even Talon and Malon could hear it. Before they could react, the windows shattered as a swarm of purple-feathered birds burst in.

“Malon, get down!” shouted Talon as he picked up his chair and swung at one of the birds. Saria pulled out her slingshot and Sheik readied throwing needles. The birds had small black eyes ringed with red and sharp orange beaks. Poppy ran across the table, using her bread as cover before flying towards Saria.

“What are so many guay doing here?!” the fairy shouted.

“I don’t know, but I doubt this is ordinary,” said Saria. She dodged a few of the birds that came swooping in, their beaks getting stuck in the walls like throwing knives. Malon joined in on the action, pulling out her club from before (which was hidden under her pillow) and swinging at the hostile birds. As the guay were thinned out, the sound of shouting could be heard from outside.

“That must be Ingo,” said Sheik.

“I’ll take care of it,” said Saria. “You watch over the others.”

Sheik nodded at this, then Saria dove out the broken window, rolling as she hit the ground below. Just as she thought, a swarm of guay were chasing after Ingo. While he had a pitchfork, Ingo was too scared to attack and kept on the run. Dark storm clouds rumbled up above, and it almost seemed like the guay were coming out of the clouds themselves. Saria tossed a deku nut to scatter the swarm then fired with her slingshot to thin them out.

“Get to the stables!” she shouted. “You’ll be safe there!”

“Okay! Thanks!”

Ingo ran past the Kokiri and shut the stable doors behind him. The sound of frightened neighs came from the field ahead, and Saria realized that there may still be horses grazing outside. She ran to the fields, finding that even more guay were flying overhead, chasing and pecking the horses. She cut down the guay within reach and shot down the others that were too high up, doing what she could to lead the horses back to the stables as the wind picked up. With one pony left, Saria tried to calm it down and lead it away, but it proved too stubborn and wild, nearly knocking Saria down with its hooves.

“Hey, calm down! I’m trying to help you!”

The horse kept running around and making things difficult for Saria. Soon after, wind speeds reached new heights, and from the storm clouds came a giant guay, trumping even the largest horses on the ranch in size. It locked onto the wild pony and swooped down. Not wanting to let it have its way, Saria slashed the bird in its side with her scimitar, wounding it. The giant guay crashed to the ground, flailing about while snapping at the Kokiri with its oversized beak. Saria backed away, dodging the monster’s attacks. It didn’t let up though, eventually cornering the girl. She shoved a deku stick in its beak to lodge it open, striking the bird again and again with her weapons while it was distracted. Finally, it stopped moving. It disappeared into flame, and when the last of the monsters were defeated, the storm clouds disappeared. Much to Saria’s surprise, the large guay left behind a small pile of rupees.

“What are these doing here?” she asked, picking them up.

“Maybe it liked to eat shiny things?” said Poppy.

“Saria!!” shouted Malon as she came running. “Are you okay?!”

Talon and Sheik came running as well. Even Ingo poked his shaking head out of the stables.

As Saria and Malon hugged, Saria said, “I’m okay. I would have taken cover sooner, but this pony proved pretty stubborn.” It was then that Saria realized that the pony was next to her, calmly nudging her leg with its head. “What the?”

“Epona?” questioned Malon, who pet the pony’s mane. “Geez, you can’t be doing that. You could have gotten hurt!”

“It’s okay,” said Ingo. “She was probably just-”

Epona headbutted the poor ranch hand when he got too close, knocking him over. Malon was quick to wrap her arms around the pony’s neck and hold her back.

“Epona! No!”

Talon helped Ingo up while Sheik approached Saria.

“What happened out here? Did you find out where they were coming from?”

“It looked like they were coming out of a storm cloud. When the wind picked up enough, a giant one came out. The clouds dispersed as soon as I slew it.”

“Strange…” The boy looked up at the sky, which was now clear and full of stars. “Is this a taste of what’s to come?”

Talon had some spare windowpanes in case of storms, so after a bit of cleaning, the windows were fixed. From that day forward, whenever Saria and Sheik were at the ranch, they always kept an eye out for monsters.

---

Time continued to pass. Days of harsh training at the Sheikah Village and honest work at Lon Lon Ranch. Though the days were long, Saria treasured those few moments of peace and quiet she shared with her friends. She soon learned that Sheik was a master at conversational evasion, dodging every important question Malon had to throw at him. The questions he didn’t dodge were answered with lies, or at least what Saria assumed were lies. Sheik’s new persona steadily developed a false history, and Malon was none the wiser. When Malon wasn’t talking up a storm, she was usually helping Saria and Sheik with chores, eating lunch with them, or teaching the pair new skills. Malon was excellent with animals, and any time either Saria or Sheik had trouble with them, she was there to help calm things down.

At the Sheikah Village, Impa kept intensifying the training little by little. Beyond the typical exercises and obstacles, she also introduced training dummies that moved as you struck them, which helped Saria practice her form. This later advanced to Impa teaching new fighting techniques, both with weapons and hand-to-hand (in case Saria or Sheik were disarmed). At the end of each lesson, Impa had Saria and Sheik spar to help practice their new techniques. Sheik was much faster than Saria, as well as more flexible (both literally and in terms of adaptability). He proved a difficult target to strike. Saria’s experience with fighting and strategizing proved a boon here, as she would often have to bait out an opening in Sheik’s defenses in order to land a hit. As the two sparred, their strengths helped even out their respective weaknesses, and even Impa was impressed with their progress.

“Well done,” Impa clapped. “Keep that up and even the best of the Gerudo will be no match for you. That will be all for today. You’re both dismissed.”

As Impa went to leave, Saria called out to her.

“Wait, hold on.”

“Yes? What is it, Saria?”

“Have you seen a giant owl flying through the sky as of late?”

“Can’t say that I have. Why do you ask?”

Saria explained the nature of the owl and how she had met him several times throughout her journey. After Saria said her piece, Impa muttered to herself, “Wait… Could he be…?”

“Is something wrong?”

“It’s nothing. I do find this strange, though. Why would he be gone for so long searching for the third stone? I thought it was common knowledge that it belonged to the Zora.”

“What’s a Zora?”

“You were saying?” said Sheik.

“Quiet, you,” said Impa. She then looked to Saria and said, “The Zora are a race of people who live in the water. They control every major body of water in Hyrule, including the river, which is named after them. As for the stone, it’s in good hands. Ever since they caught wind of Ganondorf attacking other settlements for their sacred stones, they’re doing everything they can to defend their domain. Nothing short of the Royal Family knocking on their door would get them to open up.”

“Then there’s nothing to be done about it?”

“It may be for the best. We have other things to worry about right now. Besides, as long as Ganondorf is missing even one of the sacred stones, he won’t be able to reach the Triforce.” Before Impa finally left for the day, she ended with, “I’ll ask around and see if anyone has seen Gaebora. If I learn anything at all, I’ll let you know.”

Saria felt a chill as Impa disappeared. She wanted to leave right away to look for the old owl, but Saria knew Impa was better suited to the search than she was. She decided to put it out of her mind and relax. There wasn’t any work to be done on the ranch that day, so both Saria and Sheik stayed in the village. As usual, they took turns bathing, then ate their gruel in relative silence. Later that evening, Saria found Sheik up on one of the building’s rooftops, staring out across the village.

“Is everything all right?” asked Saria.

“Hm… I was just thinking about the future. When this is all over and I’ve taken Impa’s place, I’ll be spending a lot of time with the Royal Family. The king, his court, and even the princess.”

“Do you not want to serve the Royal Family?”

“It’s not that, but… Will that really be my whole life? To be nothing more than another’s shadow? I don’t normally get to interact with others my age. Impa always tells me that the less others know about me, the better. But these days I’ve been training with you or working on the ranch with Malon… It’s been nice. I’ve never really had friends before.” Sheik turned to look Saria in the eye. “We are friends, are we not?”

Saria smiled warmly. “Of course we are. And I’m sure Malon would say the same thing.”

Sheik smiled. “I’m glad. Do you think when I’m older, I might be able to negotiate time for myself every now and then?”

“I don’t see why not. Then again, people are always curious about the princess, so watching over her might keep you busy. Especially when she’s older.”

“Why do you say that?”

“Well, I’m still learning about Hylian culture, but my understanding is the princess will have to marry, one day. And whoever marries her will be the next king, right?”

“I… See what you mean. I hope he is kind, like you.”

Saria wasn’t sure why, but hearing those words made her blush. Poppy, who had been quietly listening this whole time, grew a big grin across her face.

“Interesting…” she muttered to herself.

“Have you ever met the princess?” asked Saria.

“Only once. It was before I started my training with Impa. I was waiting inside a hidden corridor in the castle while Impa was discussing things with the king. There are all sorts of places like that throughout the castle. Hidden doors behind bookshelves, under carpets… They were built with the Sheikah in mind so we could always watch over everyone without being seen. By chance, I saw the princess after she had just been scolded for making a mess in the kitchen. She was crying back then. I wanted to say something, but… I knew I couldn’t.”

“Were you not allowed?”

“In a sense, yes.”

“I’m sorry. I can’t imagine what that must have felt like.”

“It’s fine. I just wonder if she’ll accept me when the time comes…”

“Of course she will. You’re strong, smart, and dependable. I’m sure she’d be more than happy to have you by her side.”

“And hey, maybe if you play your cards right, you can marry her and become king,” said Poppy.

Sheik narrowed his eyes at the fairy. “That will never happen.”

Sheik hopped down and disappeared into his quarters. Saria said, “Geez, Poppy! Why’d you have to go and say that!”

“What? I think it would be romantic! Just think, the tall, strong, stoic type that knew the princess since she was young finally confessing his feelings for her. The thought alone makes me swoon.”

“He’s clearly going through a lot right now, so can you try and be a bit more sensitive?”

Saria hopped down from the roof as well to check on Sheik. Poppy just crossed her arms and grumbled. “I gotta find some way to have fun around here. Those fireflies aren’t much for conversation, you know!”

---

The next day after training, Sheik didn’t go with Saria to Lon Lon Ranch. Given what they had talked about recently, she decided it would be best to give the boy some space. Work that day was easy enough. Cleaning the stables, fixing some fences, milking the cows… The work wasn’t hard at all. Yet with the worry for Gaebora and Sheik on her mind, Saria found it difficult to concentrate.

When night came, Saria and Malon sat out in the field looking up at the stars. Malon was pointing out all sorts of constellations in the sky while Saria sat in silence.

“What’s wrong, Saria?” asked Malon. “You’ve hardly said a word. You don’t have to sit out here with me if you don’t want to.”

“It’s not that. I just have a lot on my mind right now,” said Saria.

“Hmm… I don’t know if it’ll help you, but whenever I feel down, I like to sing!”

Malon stood up, clasped her hands together, and sang. The girl’s beautiful voice echoed throughout the open field and soothed Saria, making her worries melt away. She pulled out her ocarina and played along, doing her best to memorize the notes. The two girls shared a moment of peace together, and then… The song was over.

Saria put her ocarina away. The small pony from before, Epona, was nudging Saria with her head. Petting Epona’s mane, Saria smiled softly.

“Hee hee. She’s really taken a liking to you!” said Malon.

“You think so? I’m glad. She was such a rowdy horse before. I guess saving her from monsters left a good impression.” As Saria continued to pet Epona, she said, “The animals around here really love that song of yours. Where did you learn it?”

“From my mother, remember? She had a way of making me feel safe no matter what was going on, and when I cried, she’d sing for me to calm me down. Since she didn’t leave any keepsakes behind, that song is all I have to remember her by.”

“I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to-”

“It’s okay. I don’t mind talking about it.” Malon put her hands to her chest and closed her eyes. “Every time I sing, I like to think my mother can still hear me. Maybe that’s why I do it so much. She sang for me whenever I was sad, so as long as I keep singing, she’ll never be sad either.”

Saria stood up and ruffled Malon’s hair. “I’ll bet she smiles every day because of you.”

Malon held back her tears. “I hope so too.”

Soon after, Talon opened the door to his house and said, “Hey kids, supper is ready! Come and get it before it gets cold!”

“Coming!” shouted Malon. The girl ran towards the house, but then she stopped and looked back. “Saria?”

“I’ll just be a minute. Don’t wait up on me.”

The farm girl nodded and left the field behind. Now Saria was alone… Or so it seemed. The Kokiri felt a presence nearby. As the presence grew closer, Poppy said, “Wait… Sheik?”

The young Sheikah stepped forward, hand on his hip. He was wearing his normal training uniform. “I knew I’d find you out here. This is good.”

“Good? What’s going on, Sheik? Why aren’t you in your farm clothes?”

“Because I’m not here to farm. I’m here to fight.”

“What? But why?”

“I’ve been doing some thinking. When we sparred in the past, we always fought to learn, to grow, but never to win. If I’m to be a true Sheikah, I have to truly test myself.” Sheik drew a blade. “And that’s why I’m here. Draw your weapon.”

Saria unsheathed her dagger. As soon as she did, Sheik charged her. Their blades clashed and slid off of each other as the pair exchanged places. Dagger at the ready, Saria watched Sheik as he circled around her.

“This is crazy, Sheik. What if you get hurt?”

“That’s awfully confident of you. Shouldn’t you be more worried about yourself?”

Sheik charged once more. Saria did her best to defend as Sheik attacked again and again. A slash here, a kick there; the warriors moved swiftly and gracefully across the field, their every move calculated. Yet even as Saria did her best to defend herself, Sheik found opening after opening. As the boy backflipped away and landed on his feet, Sheik held up his weapon. Blood dripped from the tip of his blade.

“You should start taking things seriously,” said Sheik. “Otherwise you won’t walk away from this.”

“Will you stop it!” shouted Poppy. “What’s the point in all this? Aren’t we your friends?!”

“Friends mean little to the Sheikah. We only keep around those who are useful to us. I’m treated the same way. If my blade ever dulls, I’ll become useless to the Royal Family and be discarded.”

Another exchange of blows. Another wound. Sparks flew as Sheik and Saria’s blades clashed. The boy stared Saria down as he pushed her back further and further.

“Is this all you can muster? How do you expect to defeat Ganondorf if you can’t even beat me? You’ll never get your revenge at this rate.”

A biting anger took hold as Saria forced Sheik back. Rather than strike with her dagger, she punched Sheik in the face. The boy went flying, skidding across the dirt and grass. In a moment of clarity, Saria realized she was wearing her Goron’s Bracelet. She rushed to Sheik’s side to see if he was okay, only to have a blade pointed at her. A bloodstain had formed on Sheik’s face mask around his nose.

“We’re not done yet. Don’t you dare take pity on me.”

Sheik spun around, getting back on his feet before charging Saria. The Kokiri went back on the defensive, even more hesitant than before. Sheik continued slashing with his blade, pushing Saria further and further back.

“Enough already! If you don’t fight with everything you have, I’ll kill you. Is that what you want? What about your people? Your friends? What about Hyrule? Don’t you care?!”

Saria shoved Sheik away. “Of course I care,” she said, dropping her weapon. “And it’s because I care that I can’t continue.” The Kokiri spread her arms wide and looked Sheik in the eye. “I don’t know what madness has taken hold of you, but this ends now.”

Sheik narrowed his eyes. Springing towards Saria, he shouted, “I told you not to take pity on me!”

Saria had learned many hand-to-hand techniques while training under Impa. Typically they were meant for offense, as they were all about striking the opponent before they had a chance to react. Speed, agility, and cunning. These were the things Impa was trying to instill in her students. However, among the many techniques Impa had taught, only one was meant for defense. As Sheik charged the Kokiri once more, Saria kept perfectly still until the last moment. Then her body sprung to life, catching Sheik’s weapon with both hands. In an instant, Saria yanked the weapon (and wielder) to the side, throwing them to the ground. Tossing Sheik’s weapon away, Saria jumped on Sheik, fighting with the boy as they rolled across the field. In the end, Saria had Sheik pinned.

“Do you yield?” asked Saria.

With a bitter tone in their voice, Sheik said, “I do.”

The Kokiri got up, holding out her hand to help the Sheikah boy. He ignored this and got up on his own.

“I didn’t realize there was such a large gap between us,” Sheik dusted himself off. “I’ve learned much this day.”

Just then, Malon burst out of her home.

“Saria, what’s all that noise?!”

While Saria was distracted by the farm girl, the Sheikah boy slipped away, disappearing into the night. Saria picked up the boy’s weapon and hid it in her overalls.

That boy… What was he thinking?

When Malon got closer, she gasped at the state Saria was in. “What happened? Was it another monster attack?”

“Yes,” Saria nodded. “More guay. I got careless this time, but they’re gone now.”

Poppy gave Saria a knowing, worried look, saying, “It’s okay, Malon. I can heal her.” The fairy floated gently around the Kokiri and put her small hands on Saria’s wounds, healing them. Unfortunately this magic did not extend to the state of her damaged, bloody clothes.

“Thank you, Poppy. I’m not sure I’ll be good company at the dinner table in this state, though,” said Saria.

“It’s okay. You can borrow some of my clothes for the evening while we get yours all fixed up,” Malon smiled. “Now let’s get going. Talon is getting worried.”

The rest of the evening passed without incident. Saria spent the night with Malon, washing and fixing her clothes so she could be ready to return to the village in the morning.

When she dreamed, she dreamed of blonde-haired boys and her failure to help them when they needed her the most…

---

Time passed. Training and work continued, though Sheik made himself scarce whenever Impa was gone. Saria tried to reach out to the boy several times, but he had closed himself off to her, even after she returned his blade. Saddened by this, Saria focused on other things. She finished paying off her debt to Castle Town, she checked in on her fellow Kokiri to see how their training went, she helped coordinate the construction of the new shop (of which a certain plump-faced Kokiri was happy to manage), and Saria even paid back the Happy Mask Salesman for the mask she borrowed.

“Finally decided to show your face, I see,” said the Salesman.

“Sorry about the wait,” said Saria. “There were some… Complications.”

The Salesman shrugged. “These things do happen. I’m just glad to see you at all. I’ve not seen your friend since you last visited.”

Saria tensed up. “Don’t worry. I’ll be sure to remind her the next time we meet.”

The Salesman grinned, showing his teeth. “Be sure that you do.” He then gestured to his shelves. “By the way, since you finally completed your first sale, I have more masks available for you to borrow.”

Saria looked over to the shelf, realizing a strange skull-like mask had appeared. “Wait, when did you-”

“Don’t worry about it,” the man grinned. “Would you like to borrow this mask? I hear its fearsome visage keeps certain monsters at bay. Probably because of how tough and scary it makes you look.”

Saria pondered this and then nodded. “I think I have a customer in mind for that one. I’ll take it.”

“Good,” the man said, handing her the mask. “Here you go. Next time, I would appreciate it if you returned as soon as you make the sale.”

“Of course.” Saria held up the mask. It was like the front of a misshapen horned skull, with four blunt teeth and round eye sockets. She pocketed the mask, said her goodbyes, then went on her way.

When the chance presented itself, Saria made her way to the Lost Woods. She found Taru sitting on his stump like usual, playing his flute. The boy sat up in excitement upon seeing Saria and hopped down, approaching her.

“Saria, Saria!”

The Kokiri bowed her head and smiled. “It’s good to see you, Taru. How are you getting along with the other skull children?”

“Not so good… I’ve been trying to practice the flute so I could play with them in their band, but they still won’t accept me. It’s why I prefer hanging out here instead of near where the rest of them are.”

“Well that’s no fair! I’ll be sure to give them a stern talking to next time I see them. In the meantime, I have a present for you.”

“Really? What is it?”

Saria pulled out the skull mask, handing it over to Taru. He looked it over thoroughly, his eyes lighting up.

“Quite an unusual mask you’ve brought me! Hee hee! I like it! I bet it’ll make me look real tough!” Taru reached into his pocket and gave Saria ten rupees. “Here you go. Thank you for this!”

“Wait, but this is a gift. You don’t have to pay me.”

“No, no. I insist!”

Taru put the mask on and flipped through the air, landing nimbly on his tall tree stump. His eyes glowed brightly through the mask’s eyeholes as he said, “So? How do I look?”

Saria clapped her hands. “You look wonderful, Taru!” At this, the skull kid lowered his head.

“Aaah… I thought I would look scary.”

“You look pretty scary to me,” said Poppy. “If I saw you at night, there’s no way I’d get close to you.”

“You really mean it?” Poppy nodded, to which Taru pumped his fist. “Yes! Thanks, you two!”

Saria said her goodbyes and returned to the Happy Mask Shop, only to learn that Taru had underpaid for the mask’s value.

“Oh… Is that how it is…” said the Kokiri.

Saria paid the rest of the mask’s price back out of pocket. She wasn’t exactly upset, though, since she had planned to give the mask away for free. After that, she was able to borrow another mask from the Salesman. It was a frightening thing that reminded her of the masks Redeads wore.

“Where did you get this?” Saria asked.

“Where? Why, from a priest of course. I had learned that Hylians are buried with special funerary masks, so of course I had to get some for my collection!”

Poppy said, “Well that explains things…”

“Hm? Is something wrong?” asked the Salesman.

“Don’t worry about it,” said Saria. “Do you have any advice for who I could sell this to? I can’t think of anyone off the top of my head.”

“Not sure! It’s not a very popular mask in town.”

“I can’t imagine why…”

After tapping his fingers on his counter a few times, the Salesman said, “You know, I bet this would be pretty popular with pranksters. People who like to trick and scare others for laughs.”

“Doesn’t the boy in Kakariko’s graveyard like scary things?” asked Poppy.

“Good point. All right, I’ll see if I can sell this thing. See you later!”

As Saria and Poppy made their way from Castle Town to Kakariko Village, Poppy said, “So why are we doing this again?”

“Do you want the short answer or the long answer?” asked Saria.

“Both?”

“The short answer is I need a distraction.”

“Fair enough.”

“And the long answer is there’s something off about that merchant. He may know more than he’s letting on. He could even be a spy for all we know. So I figure if I keep doing jobs for him and gain his trust, I can finally get some answers. Best case scenario, he’s unrelated to everything going on and I can put my mind at ease.”

“And he’s right in the middle of town just next to the path leading to the Temple of Time! If he is working for Ganondorf, he couldn’t have picked a better place to set up shop.” Poppy grew a smug grin across her face. “Such a smart girl. I really did raise you right!”

Saria smiled at her friend and rolled her eyes. She then ran up the stairway, through the village, and into the graveyard. Sure enough, the young boy was walking around, swinging his stick to and fro. She asked him if he was interested in masks, and when he said yes, Saria pulled out the spooky mask.

“Gyaah! It’s Dampé the gravekeeper’s face! Oh wait a minute, that really is just a mask. I get a different fright from that mask than I do from Dampé… Can I have it?”

“Of course. Just try not to cause too much trouble with it,” said Saria.

“Woo! With this mask, I’ll be just like Dampé! Here’s my money!” The boy gave Saria a bag of thirty rupees. He then ran off with his stick held up to the sky. “I’m gonna dig and dig! Just like Dampé!!”

“What a strange boy,” said Saria. “I hope he has fun, at least.”

“Forget strange, where’d a little kid like him get all this money?”

“Not sure. At least we don’t have to cover any of the mask’s cost out of pocket this time.”

Before Saria could leave the graveyard, a familiar voice called out to her. It was Impa.

“Keeping busy, I see.”

“Impa! Back already?”

“Indeed. There’s something I need to talk to you and Sheik about. Come with me.”

Saria looked to Poppy, who nodded in understanding. The Kokiri followed Impa through the illusory wall and joined up with Sheik in the hidden village.

“You called, master?” said Sheik. “What is it?”

“Your training is almost at its end,” said Impa. “I have one final test for you both. It’s a test crafted by the Sheikah of old as a rite of passage. If you complete this test, you’ll be recognized as true Sheikah.”

“Even me?” asked Saria.

“Even you. The Sheikah do not care about bloodlines. Only results.”

Sheik clenched his fists and looked Impa in the eye. “What must we do?”

Impa escorted the pair to the far end of the village. Hidden behind yet another illusory wall was a metal plate on the ground. It looked like it could be opened like a gate.

“Beyond this door is an underground maze meant to push sheiks to their very limits. The maze is filled with dozens of traps, as well as special chambers that house monsters. As time passes, the chambers will open one by one, releasing monsters into the maze. You’ll have a week to find the exit before it locks for good.”

“Wait, you mean you can get trapped down there with monsters?!” asked Poppy. “That’s crazy!”

“It is not a test to be taken lightly. Furthermore, you will have to begin the test without any weapons or gear.”

“Then we must fight the monsters barehanded?” asked Sheik.

“Approach the challenge however you like. Sneak, use the traps to your advantage, or confront the monsters. It doesn’t matter to me,” said Impa. “In addition, I’ll be spreading all your gear throughout the maze in hidden chests. Find the chests and you can use your gear again. And it doesn’t matter who it once belonged to. This is meant to test your skill and adaptability. There is no such thing as fair once you enter this maze.”

“Isn’t this a bit extreme?” said Saria. “One of us could die down there. Are you really okay with that?”

“If we can’t pass this test, we’d fair no better at protecting Hyrule from Ganondorf,” said Sheik. “I accept this challenge.”

“Good,” said Impa. “And what of you, Saria? You are not of the Sheikah clan, so you are not obligated to take this test. You can walk away now if you’re-”

“No. I’ll take the test.”

“Are you sure, Saria?” asked Poppy.

“I’m sure. It’s just as Sheik said. This will prove once and for all if I’m ready to take on Ganondorf and the Gerudo.”

“Then it’s decided,” said Impa. The woman clapped her hands twice, and as if by magic, the gateway began to open. Its age became apparent as the metal creaked and groaned. Once it was fully open, it revealed a long cylindrical tunnel that led far below ground, with water at the very bottom. In many ways, it reminded Saria of the well in Kakariko Village… After Impa took Saria and Sheik’s gear, she disappeared. From there, Saria looked down into the tunnel.

“There’s no ladder to climb,” said Saria. “How are we supposed to get down there?”

“We go for a swim,” said Sheik. The boy then dove head-first into the tunnel, with the sound of a splash following shortly thereafter. Saria looked to Poppy.

“Looks like it’s do or die. Come on!”

The Kokiri jumped into the tunnel, falling for what felt like forever. She hit the water hard, causing a huge splash. When she resurfaced, she was joined by Poppy, and sure enough, the entrance up above sealed shut.

Saria looked around. The walls were moldy tan bricks whereas the floor was slick grey stone. Though no source of light could be seen, the passageway was dimly lit – perhaps through magic. After climbing out of the pool of water, Saria found herself in what looked less like a maze and more like a sewer. Metal chains dangled from the ceiling, their purpose long since forgotten, and wooden support beams bordered the passage up ahead. The final test of the Sheikah was finally underway…

Chapter Text

Saria marched forward into the Sheikah maze, water flowing past her boots. While there were dry pathways bordering the watery ground, they were thin enough that walking them would require hugging the wall, so for now, Saria walked slowly and kept her ears open. The maze was cold, damp, and had a faint, coppery smell mixed with the mold and water. For someone who lived her whole life in a forest full of fresh air, Saria couldn’t be more miserable.

“What is this place?” asked Poppy as she floated alongside her friend. “This has been underneath Kakariko this whole time? Between this and that tomb, I feel like we got mixed up in the wrong crowd. Can we go back to Goron City? Those lava rocks are sounding awfully welcoming right now.”

“Poppy,” whispered Saria. “I value your insight. I really do. But right now I need you to be quiet. Impa said monsters would be released into the maze after time passed, but she never said how long – or short – that amount of time was.”

“Oh please, with the kind of training you’ve been getting this last month, you could clobber any monster she could throw at you!”

“And what if it was a redead?”

Poppy blinked twice and looked away. “Ah ha… Well… I guess we’ll cross that bridge when we get there.”

After leaving the bottom of the watery tunnel far behind, Saria found herself at the beginning of the maze’s twisting paths. As she suspected, the whole floor had cold water running through its center like a sewer.

This must be part of the test. It’d be easy to alert any nearby monsters by stepping through this, thought Saria.

There were three paths for her to take: forward, left, or right. As Saria decided on which way to go, a loud fluttering noise echoed through the maze. Saria dove into the darkest corner she could find and grabbed Poppy, covering the fairy’s mouth – much to Poppy’s irritation. Then the monster flew past them. It was a gigantic skull with leathery wings, glowing eyes, and green flame covering its whole body. It fluttered past the hidden Kokiri and continued to the right. Saria waited until it could no longer be heard to stand back up.

“What was that?” whispered Saria.

“I think it was a green bubble, but I’ve never seen one so big before! If only you had your slingshot,” whispered Poppy.

“Do they have any weaknesses?”

“Hm… I think they drop their guard sometimes when confident, making their flame go out.”

“Then I’ll have to goad it when the time comes.”

“Just be careful. We may be surrounded by water, but its flame is made of dark magic. It can’t be put out normally. Besides,” Poppy looked at the ground, “I don’t think you wanna bathe in this stuff.”

Saria went right, wanting to take care of the green bubble as soon as possible. As she hugged the left wall, she fell through an illusion and wound up in a small hidden room. The walls looked like they were constructed out of bones and skulls. Saria hugged her arms and shivered at the sight.

“Why… Why are there so many bones here?”

“I can almost hear their whispers…” said Poppy. “They’re taunting us.”

Beyond the macabre construction of the hidden room, there was a small wooden chest in the far back. Unfortunately, it had already been emptied of its contents.

“Looks like Sheik beat us to it,” said Saria. “I wonder what it was?”

Though she could not see it pass by, Saria heard the green bubble flutter past the entrance to the room. It must be patrolling the area, then. But why? the Kokiri wondered.

Once the monster was gone, Saria and Poppy stepped out of the room and continued down the path, turning the corner and heading further down. Eventually the pair reached an intersection, though Saria’s attention was drawn to a statue up ahead and to the right. It looked like the head and hands of a monstrous frog beast with water flowing out of its mouth into a large pool below. On a raised dais, she noticed the symbol of the Royal Family carved into the stone – that of the Triforce!

“I wonder… Do you think that lullaby would affect the flow of water here?” asked Saria. “If only I had my ocarina.”

“We could try whistling the tune,” whispered Poppy. The fairy tried as such while floating above the dais, but nothing came of it. “Hmph! Picky little thing.”

“Let’s keep going for now. I’m sure my ocarina will turn up. Eventually…”

A path to the left prior to the frogmouth statue led to yet another crossroad, one which occupied the center of the floor. Left led back to where she started, the path forward just around a corner led away from where the green bubble was patrolling, and the path to the right led to more dimly lit tunnels. There was also a small secondary path just around the left corner going back in the direction of the frog statue. Saria took a moment to breathe, mentally mapping out everything in her head.

If I go right at this crossroad, it should loop around and take me back to the frog statue. I’ll check this path out right now since I’m so close.

Saria turned right and followed the watery path, turning right again and finding herself in a dark and damp hall. No sign of doors, traps, or monsters could be seen. Nothing felt unusual about the walls either, so nothing was hidden. At the end of that route, the path was split. To the right was the frog statue, and to the left, a long hall that eventually led to a locked door on the left-hand wall.

Well that didn’t help. I guess I’ll go back to that crossroad.

As she moved towards the entrance and reached the crossroad, Saria looked at the small path just around a wall to her left. At the end of the passage was an unnerving painting of a smiling beast resting its chin in its hands. Below the painting was an unopened chest. Saria began for the chest as soon as she saw it, but then she stopped.

“Wait…” said Saria. “Why wouldn’t Sheik notice a chest out in the open like this?”

“Maybe he thought it was too good to be true and moved on?” said Poppy.

Saria narrowed her eyes at the passage, steeling herself. Stepping lightly, she inched closer and closer to the chest until she nearly stumbled over. A part of the floor wasn’t real. Backing up and getting down on all fours, Saria pressed her face through the illusion, realizing it led to a sheer drop into a room far below her.

“What do you see?” asked Poppy.

“Nothing good. It might be a shortcut to a lower floor, but there’s no way to tell if there’s a way out.” Saria raised her head and stood up. “I think I can make this jump, though.”

“No need,” said Poppy as she fluttered forward.

“What?”

“Oh, come on. I’m here, right? I might as well be useful. You just stay put and I’ll bring whatever is in the chest to you.”

“I’m not sure that’s such a good idea.”

“Pleeeease. What’s the worst that could-” A floormaster appeared and grabbed hold of Poppy. The fairy screamed, “SARIAAAAA! HEEEEELP!!!”

Saria dove across the hidden gap in the floor and jumped onto the floormaster, wrestling with the oversized severed hand to try and free her companion. After taking hold of one its fingers, she yanked it back with all her might, breaking it. The monster let go of Poppy and shrieked in ways no severed hand should be able to and fell limp… Only to break apart into three smaller hands. Saria dodged one that leapt for her face, then stomped the hands one by one. The last hand managed to leave a nasty scratch on her leg before it went down.

“Saria, are you okay?!” Poppy fluttered over to the Kokiri.

“I’ll be fine. It’s just a scratch.”

“No, this is bleeding bad. Here, let me help.”

Poppy pressed her hands against the wound and healed it, just as she had healed Saria’s wounds many times before. When she was done, only the stains of spilt blood remained.

“Thank you, though this almost feels like cheating,” chuckled Saria.

“I guess it’s a good thing I’m not considered an item,” the fairy laughed. “Still, let’s be more careful from now on. The energy here is downright oppressive. I don’t know how many times I can heal you in such a grim place.”

“I know the feeling. The very air has a deathly chill to it.”

Saria turned her attention to the chest, curious about its contents. She gestured for Poppy to return to her and opened the chest from the side, worried something might spring out and attack her. The chest was safe, however, and inside was… Her glass bottle.

“What? That’s it?! What about your dagger? Your scimitar? Your bombs?! What are we supposed to do with this?”

“Hm…” Saria swung it a few times like a small club. “I bet hitting something with this would hurt.”

“You can’t be serious!”

The sound of fluttering returned. Saria put a finger to her mouth and the pair watched as the green bubble flew past once again, flying towards the entrance. The Kokiri and fairy nodded to one another before leaving the passageway behind.

Taking the path opposite the small passageway, Saria noticed a door to her left that was locked with a large metal padlock attached to chains from the four corners of the door. She made a mental note of the door and moved forward, finding another intersection. Beyond the watery passage was dry ground, as well as the entrance to two buildings – one door facing towards the entrance, the other facing the opposite way. The latter door was attached to a small brick building. Saria opened it and looked inside, only to be met with the sight of countless skulltulas and cobwebs. She shut the door immediately.

“Huh? What was in there?” asked Poppy.

“Nothing good,” said Saria. The Kokiri was pale in the face. “I think I have an idea, though. Do you remember that spell the second Great Fairy taught me?” Poppy nodded. “Wait right there. I don’t want you to get caught in the blast.”

Poppy did just that, waiting outside the room. Saria stepped inside once more, seeing the skulltulas skittering on the walls towards her. With no time to lose, Saria focused her mind for a moment and cast the spell. A bubble of fire formed in her hands, and with a toss, the bubble exploded on the ground, forming into an ever-growing dome of flame. It burned away the skulltulas, the cobwebs, and just about everything – though Saria was unaffected by the spell. The smoke caused by the fire, however, was a different story. Saria covered her mouth and nose with her arm, looking around for anything useful. At the far end of the room was a half-burned wooden chest, so Saria dashed forward, kicked it open, then grabbed the key inside it before bolting for the door. Saria stumbled to the ground in a coughing fit.

“Saria?!” Poppy cried in a panic.

“I took out the skulltulas… But the smoke had nowhere to go. I got this key, at least.”

“Honestly…”

Poppy flew down to Saria and patted her on the back. Once Saria caught her second wind, she stood up and said, “I learned something about that spell. When I called upon Din’s power, I had to imagine my targets in my head. I think I can control what the fire burns and what it doesn’t.”

“That’s handy. I guess that means you can use it as much as you like around me.”

Saria nodded, then turned her attention to the other nearby door. Steeling herself for whatever awaited her, she entered the building.

It was much larger than the previous room, with a thick L-shape. It had wide open space, small pots lining each wall, and a large chest at the far end of the room. The room seemed harmless enough, but…

“There’s no way this is safe,” said Poppy. “I mean just LOOK at it.”

“I think I can handle this,” said Saria.

Stepping into the larger portion of the room, Saria eyed the floors and walls. Much of the stone reminded her of the stone obstacles Impa had her and Sheik run through countless times before. She wasn’t certain where, but her instincts told her there were traps all over the place. It was just a matter of finding them. Saria unbuckled her belt and took hold of it like a whip, flicking portions of the ground as she inched further in. Much of the floor was safe, but after swatting one part of the tiles, rusty metal spikes shot out.

“There’s one,” said Saria, “but where are the-”

Her thoughts were interrupted as something flew past her face. She dodged just in time, and it smashed against a wall. It was one of the pots. Then came a dozen swirling sounds as all the pots in the room lifted up into the air and flew at Saria, one by one. The Kokiri dodged, hopped, punched, and kicked her way through the pots, avoiding floor spikes, and ducking through swinging scythes from the walls, until finally she made it to the other side of the room. She put her belt back on and breathed a sigh of relief. But then… Something crawled out of the wall behind the chest. A tall, slimy, slithering worm creature, easily double Saria’s size. As it shuffled forward, disgusting wet noises followed every wriggle.

Saria stepped away from the creature, holding a hand to her mouth. The monster was so grotesque, so utterly repulsive, Saria almost felt sick just looking at it. Its flesh writhed and folded into itself until it reached the top of a wet, flapping hole for a mouth.

“Watch out for that thing!” shouted Poppy. “That’s a like like! They’ll eat anything! Meat, metal, fabric – you name it!”

The Kokiri fled from the monster, taking shelter behind one of the floor spikes. The like like shuffled after her in turn. At one point it moved past a trapped area, causing a scythe blade to swing from a slit in the wall. Thick blue blood spilled out of the creature like jelly, but its wound sealed shut soon after. Saria moved further back while trying to come up with a plan, watching as the like like slithered its way through a wall of spikes. All the rust on the spikes seemed to disappear as the creature slithered through them.

“Poppy! Get under my cap now!”

The fairy slipped under the Kokiri’s green cap to hide. Saria still only had one true weapon in her arsenal – though even its first use proved exhausting. But it didn’t matter. She stood her ground, cast her spell, then released a blast of blistering flame all throughout the room. The like like was pushed back as its body melted away, leaving nothing behind but burnt twitching blubber. Saria nearly threw up.

“Oh… By the Deku Tree… May I never encounter such a terrible thing ever again.”

The tired Kokiri stumbled across the room, opening from the side once more. A blast of icy cold blew forth until it was exhausted.

“So some of the chests ARE trapped!” said Saria.

“I wonder if that would have worked on the like like?” pondered Poppy.

“I didn’t want to risk it. I really didn’t want to risk it.”

Poppy smirked and shrugged her shoulders. “Not like I blame you.”

After that, Saria and Poppy looked inside the chest… It was empty. Their hearts sank at the sight.

“What? All of that for NOTHING?!” growled Poppy. “This is an outrage! We’ve been robbed!!”

It was then that Saria noticed the ground beneath the chest looked slightly different than the rest of the room’s tiles. They almost dipped and bended beneath the chest. Curious, she shoved the chest aside, revealing a hole that had another chest in it.

“It looks like it wasn’t a total loss,” said Saria. “Let’s hope this one isn’t trapped as well.”

Saria climbed into the hole, lifting the chest up and out before climbing back out herself. Carefully lifting the lid open, the chest proved safe, and in it was Saria’s ocarina.

“I found it! Finally!” Saria hugged the ocarina tight. “It’s good to see you, old friend.”

“Great! Now that you have that, you can see what that frog statue does!”

“I wonder… If that statue controls the water levels, what can be accomplished by changing them? It would make it easier to sneak around, but… Is that really it, or is it for something we haven’t seen yet?” Saria thought on the matter and remembered how far down she sank to the bottom of the entrance pool before floating back to the top. She hadn’t thought much of it at the time, but she had used the top of a ladder to climb out of the pool… “Ah! I think I understand now. But then again, I have this key… Where should I go next?”

“Don’t look at me. You’re the one being tested.”

“Aww. You don’t want to pass with me and become a true Sheikah?”

“With everything I’ve seen, I think I’d be better off with the Gerudo.”

Saria giggled at this, feeling a small part of her energy return. She was still feeling worn down from the second casting of Din’s Fire. By her estimate, she likely had two more castings of it in her before she was completely exhausted. Theoretically, she had time to rest up and recover afterwards, but given what she had seen of the maze thus far, it was impossible to tell if there even was a safe place to rest.

“Let’s check out that locked room nearby,” said Saria. “This place is confusing, and I don’t want to get lost trying to find it again.”

“Sounds good to me,” said Poppy.

The fairy took shelter under Saria’s cap once more as the Kokiri left the room, returning to the locked doorway. After using the small key on the door, it disappeared in a puff of smoke. The padlock fell to the ground and the chains receded into the walls like metal serpents. Opening the door, Saria found herself in another tomb. Two pools of shallow water bordered Saria on both sides, and sitting along the edges of the pools were sizable rocks. On the opposite wall from the door, three wall niches could be seen. On the left and right niche were bodies wrapped in bandages, and the middle one was empty, with a large chest sitting in front of it. Of note was a third body on the left wall. It was an old, crumpled skeleton wearing Sheikah garb, their clothes torn and bones broken in a dozen places. Saria squatted down next to the skeleton and examined it.

“Poppy…”

“Yeah, Saria?”

“We need to make sure we catch up with Sheik. I know this is a test, but… It’s far too cruel for a child.”

Standing up, Saria undid her belt once more. The floor in front of the chest seemed suspicious, so she slapped it. Sure enough, spikes shot out from the ground. After putting her belt back on, Saria dragged the chest away and opened it up.

“Hm… It’s my bag of deku sticks. This should come in… Handy…”

Out of the corner of her eye, Saria watched as the bandaged bodies in the wall niches floated into the air. The Kokiri stepped back, slinging the stick bag over her shoulder. The bodies then turned right-side up and touched on the ground. A fearsome red glow pierced through the darkness of uncovered eyes as Saria froze in place.

“Oh no! Saria, snap out of it!” Poppy shook her friend’s shoulder in vain. The girl’s body was completely stiff.

Can’t… Move… Got to… Get my ocarina!!

A hint of autonomy returned as Saria bit down on her tongue. The pain shocked her body into working – and just in time. One of the mummified figures lurched forward, clawed hands at the ready. Saria dodged to the side and swerved around the monster, scooping up one of the rocks as she tossed it at the other monster’s head. It stumbled and tripped into the pool of water. Without a moment to spare, Saria readied her ocarina and played the Sun Song. Then… The monsters stopped moving.

While she felt bad about it, Saria couldn’t risk letting the monsters roam free when there was so much to explore (not to mention the danger they might pose to Sheik), so Saria pulled one of her deku sticks out and swatted it over one of the monster’s heads. This wasn’t enough to kill it, however, and it caused the monster to spring to life once more. It spun round and slashed Saria across the chest with a claw. Saria dodged back, with only her tunic taking damage. She goaded the monster into swinging, leaped above it, then struck it once more in the head, destroying it. The effect of the Sun Song wore off on the other monster as it climbed out of the pool of water. It tried staring Saria down, but she shielded her eyes in time before lunging at it and impaling the monster in the chest with the stick. The room was finally clear.

“What were those things?” asked Saria as she caught her breath.

“I think they’re called gibdos. I don’t know much about them, but they’re extremely dangerous – as you’ve already figured out.”

“No kidding.” Saria tossed aside the broken deku stick and patted her chest to make sure she wasn’t hurt. “Looks like I’m okay, but I’ll need to sew my tunic again later… This poor thing. It’ll be nothing but stitches and patches by the time I’m done.” With a sigh, Saria’s attention returned to the skeleton. “Now for you…” Saria approached the old bones, cradling them in her arms before placing them in the middle wall niche and straightening them out. “There,” she smiled. “May you rest in peace.”

“Saria…”

“I’m fine, Poppy. Let’s get going.” The Kokiri drew another deku stick before opening the door. “We have a green bubble to take care of.”

---

Saria was crouched down with her back against a wall. By this point she had memorized the path the green bubble took. It was only a matter of waiting, now… Deku stick in hand, she listened for its fluttering wings. While she listened, other subtle noises could be heard. The trickling of water, the crackling of torch sconces, the skittering of insects, the distant moans of the dead…

Were all Sheikah children trained in this terrible place? Saria wondered. What other secrets is Impa hiding?

Then came the fluttering, followed by the clacking of the green bubble’s teeth. The giant flying skull appeared from around the corner, its eyes locked on Saria. Without warning, it dove straight at her. Saria hopped to the side, dodging its attack. The monster awkwardly spun around, readying for another attack. As it charged, the flame around it disappeared.

“Now!” Poppy cried.

Saria leaped towards the green bubble, striking it dead center with her deku stick. The monster shattered into pieces before burning up and fading away.

“Well that’s one less problem to worry about,” said Saria, sheathing her stick in its bag. “Let’s see what that frog statue can do.”

A quick jaunt down a watery hallway later, and Saria was there. She briefly wondered what inspired the statue’s monstrous visage before playing Zelda’s Lullaby. The gentle notes echoed throughout the dank labyrinth, and the statue’s eyes lit up. The statue’s mouth went dry, and soon enough, the water levels lowered, draining through some unknown mechanism. While there were still light puddles left throughout the surrounding halls, the water was no longer a hazard.

“Oh hey, rupees!” Poppy said, flying down into the hole where the water had once poured. “Maybe old sheiks used this as a wishing well.”

“Then wouldn’t you be stealing their wishes?” smirked Saria.

“Whaaaaat? No. The money doesn’t contain the wish, it’s merely a payment for one. Since these were down there, the payment wasn’t accepted, therefore it’s totally okay to take these.”

Saria just shook her head and said, “All right, let me see them.”

The Kokiri wiped off the grime on Poppy’s new gems. As she did, she looked down into the hole before her. There were oddly familiar bars making up the drainage grate at the bottom.

Those look just like those bars I saw beneath the Great Deku Tree.

“Poppy…”

“Yeah, Saria?”

“Where do you suppose that water drained to?”

“Probably a lower floor. Kakariko does have a well, so maybe the water here is connected to the source? Why do you ask?”

“It’s… Nothing. Let’s move on.”

“If you’re sure…”

Poppy shrugged, fluttering after Saria as the Kokiri returned to the entrance pool.

“Looks like it drained here too,” said Saria. “I’m going to check out the bottom.”

“Just be careful. That ladder looks slimy.”

At the bottom of the hole, there was a water-logged chest with a rusted lock. A well-placed kick pried it open, and inside was another key.

“Nice! Now I can go through that other-” The distant sound of grinding stone echoed through the tunnels, sending a chill up Saria’s spine. “W-what was that?”

“Those monsters must have finally been released!” said Poppy.

“I still haven’t found a proper weapon, either. We need to finish with this floor before we get overrun.”

“Right!”

While Saria climbed back out of the hole, she and Poppy planned their next route. They had found another locked door earlier, so Saria would take a right after leaving the entrance, then a left to follow the path straight to the door. Poppy would assist checking around corners, and if the path was clear, Saria would make a break for it. Otherwise, she’d find another way. There was still no telling how many floors remained or what challenges awaited her, so avoiding fights and conserving resources would be Saria’s priority.

“I don’t see anything,” said Poppy at the end of the entrance hall. “I think we’re safe.”

“All right. Let’s go!”

Saria rushed down the hall until she hit the turn. Poppy looked again and froze stiff. “Saria!” she whispered. “Redeads!!”

“How many?”

“Looks like two… Three… There might be more, though. There are too many shuffling sounds coming from that way.”

“Then let’s circle back around and go through the crossroad.”

“Okay!”

Turning around and taking a right, Saria made her way down the middle path once more. After getting the go-ahead from Poppy, she reached the end of the path and readied to turn. Just then, Saria noticed something strange.

Her shadow was growing.

Thinking quickly, Saria grabbed Poppy and rolled out of the way – just in time, too, for a huge monstrous hand had slammed into the ground where Saria once stood.

“Another one?” Saria reached for a deku stick.

“That’s a wallmaster! They hunt their prey from the shadows and drag them back to their nests!” shouted Poppy.

“Do they split like floormasters?”

“I don’t think so, but they’re crazy durable from what I’ve heard.”

“In that case…” Saria stuffed Poppy under her green cap and said, “Time to go!”

The wallmaster leaped towards Saria, baring its claws at her. Saria dodged backwards as the monster smashed into the ground. Then it disappeared, rising towards the ceiling as if it were pulled by a string. Saria could hear the sound of the monster scuttling above as it gave chase.

“This thing doesn’t know when to quit, does it?” said Saria.

Reaching the end of the path, Saria skidded to a halt. A redead was crouching down in front of the frog statue.

“Nope nope nope nope,” Saria closed her eyes and ran left. As she sped down the path, she said, “Poppy, is anything following me?”

“That redead lost interest, so at least you’re-wait, look out!”

Saria opened her eyes and leaped away from the attacking wallmaster, which landed in front of the locked door.

“Here’s the key, Poppy. Get that door open while I keep it busy!” shouted Saria. She then got into a fighting stance, keeping her palms open to grapple with the monster. The wallmaster lunged for her, slamming its claws down like before. Saria side-stepped the attack, grabbed hold of the monster’s thumb, then pivoted on her heels to slam it into the wall. The stone cracked from the impact, but this did little to deter the monster. It balled into a fist, squeezing Saria’s arm tight. An immense pain shot through Saria’s body as she felt her bones getting crushed. She gritted her teeth and pulled out a deku stick, driving it through the top of the monster’s body. The stick pierced its hide, making it screech and let go.

“It’s open! Come on!” shouted Poppy.

Saria bolted for the open door and slipped inside with Poppy. The monster gave chase, but Saria slammed the door shut just in time. Horrible screaming and clawing sounds could be heard as it kept trying to batter down the door until finally… It went quiet.

“Phew. That was close…” Before Saria could take a breather, a dart flew past her face, cutting her cheek. “What the?!”

Up ahead, Saria realized her predicament. A long hall full of swinging scythe blades, rising and retracting spike traps, and a three-headed dart-shooting statue at the far end laid before her.

“Isn’t this a little extreme?!” shouted Poppy.

“I guess all those obstacle courses Impa had me and Sheik run make sense now. Stay here, Poppy.”

“But why?”

“I’m going to turn off that dart shooter, but things might get dicey up ahead. Stick to the air so you’re out of range from the traps.”

Saria then ran ahead, timing her movements with the scythe blades, ducking to avoid the incoming dart volley, then waiting for the spikes ahead of her to retract. The spikes had a zig-zagging pattern that could be followed to stay ahead of any spikes rising behind you, but the problem was this would put Saria right in a dart’s path. She had an idea, though. The holes the darts were coming out of were about the same size as a deku stick.

I only have one left. Better make it count!

Deku stick in-hand, Saria moved along the spike path, getting closer to improve her odds. When the time came, she hucked the stick like a javelin at the statue, jamming the dart shooter’s left head. With the path clear, Saria stuck to the left path until she cleared the spike traps. But as she stepped forward, she couldn’t find her footing and almost fell. Saria caught herself, realizing it was another illusory floor. She had no room to get a running start because of the spikes, and she had no way of telling how large a gap she had to cross. But then, another idea came to her. She undid her belt once more and hucked it across the room. It landed safely on the ground just in front of the dart thrower. Even so, the distance was vast… Saria took a deep breath, readied herself, then sprang forward. She landed just shy of her destination and found herself falling through the floor.

“Saria!!” cried Poppy.

The Kokiri grabbed hold of the ledge, catching herself. Looking down, there was nothing but darkness. Though one of her arms was still in great pain, Saria pulled herself up and climbed out of the pit. She crawled beneath the dart thrower, grabbed her belt, then looked ahead. There was a brown floor switch with a crescent symbol on top. After stomping it, a click could be heard, and the traps deactivated. Poppy flew across the hall and reunited with Saria, hugging her.

“You!! Don’t scare me like that!” the fairy complained.

“I’ll try not to,” Saria hugged Poppy back.

While the pair finished their reunion, Saria noticed a chest to her right. “Looks like this is the prize for this gauntlet. Let’s see what’s inside…”

Using her good arm, Saria unlocked the latch on the front of the chest and pried the box open. Looking inside, the shimmering gold of the Goron’s Bracelet could be seen.

“There you are!” Saria grabbed hold of the bracelet. “Now this is just what I needed.”

Before Saria could put it on, Poppy said, “Wait!” and went to heal Saria’s damaged arm. “I remember how it made your muscles bulge last time. Who knows what that would do to cracked bone!”

“Fair point. I just got excited, is all.”

“Are you saying you’re enjoying yourself?”

“Maybe a little…” Saria chuckled nervously.

Poppy shook her head, healing the Kokiri. “I swear, every day you become more like Link.” Poppy froze up, looking right at Saria. “I’m sorry, I didn’t mean to-”

“It’s okay,” Saria smiled. “He was reckless, but in the best way possible. He didn’t let fear ever get in the way of him having fun or doing what was right. Saying I’m becoming more like him is the highest praise I could ever receive.”

“Saria…”

The fairy finished healing the Kokiri’s arm, and after she stretched it and tested to see how it felt, Saria slipped the Goron’s Bracelet back on and felt a huge surge of strength throughout her body.

“Now then… Let’s take care of that wallmaster.”

---

Back when Sheik reached the bottom of the water pit, he swam straight to the ladder and rushed down the entrance hall. A thousand thoughts had been on the young Sheikah’s mind, most of all being the future of the country and what his place in it would be. Even so, with the final test laid out before him, Sheik was determined to reach the end no matter what.

As Sheik reached the first crossroad of the dungeon, he turned right. Something about the left wall in that tunnel looked… Strange. Pressing his hand against it, he realized it was an illusion, and he stepped inside. Two deku babas growing amidst the bones lunged for Sheik, but with a swift kick, Sheik severed their heads from their stems. He then kicked open the chest they were guarding and reached inside.

It's Saria’s slingshot… Sheik thought, picking it up. I’ve never used one before, but it seems simple enough. Should I take it, or…

Sheik heard a splash from outside. Realizing Saria would soon catch up, Sheik stepped out of the hidden room, only to narrowly avoid the bite of a gigantic green bubble. Taking aim with the slingshot, the deku seed bounced harmlessly off of the green bubble’s fiery aura.

So its flame makes it impervious. It only nipped at me when it passed by, so it must be compelled to patrol these halls. I could follow behind it, but it will only slow me down. In that case, I’ll cut through the middle of the floor.

Sheik returned to the crossroad and took a right, dashing silently through the middle path. Already he could hear the sound of Saria and Poppy just… Talking. It seemed as if they weren’t taking the test seriously at all.

Those fools! They’ll attract monsters for sure with all that noise! Unless… No, I’m thinking too hard about this. I need to focus on finishing the test myself. If they want to make it harder on themselves, so be it.

Reaching a second crossroad, Sheik noticed another chest to his right in a small alcove, sitting beneath a strange painting. A part of the floor in front of the chest seemed out of alignment with the rest of the brickwork of the floor. Feeling confident, Sheik leaped across the illusory gap, only for a monstrous hand to shoot out of the darkness and punch Sheik in the face. The boy tumbled into the depths below. He tried to slow his descent by grasping at the tunnel walls, but they were far too slippery. He plunged to the bottom of the pit, landing on a plate of stone.

Sheik gritted his teeth in pain, looking around the room. It was dimly lit, and most of the floor – save the center that Sheik landed on – was made up of a metal grate. Distant flickering torches could be seen far below. There was no time to assess the situation, however, for monsters appeared from the darkness and attacked!

A skeletal warrior in loose rusted armor and wielding a sword and shield leaped towards Sheik, forcing him to roll away. Then came a floating lantern, spinning through the darkness like a flail. Sheik flipped onto his feet, dodging the attack, only for a large pair of severed hands to try clawing at him.

A stalfos, poe, and two floormasters. That’s quite the trap, Impa. I won’t let it be the end of me, though.

With only the fairy slingshot and his bare hands to defend himself with, Sheik sized up his opponents. The floormasters were the most aggressive by far, so he prioritized them, dashing between the enemies and kicking one into a wall. The force of the blow seemed to kill it, but it split into three smaller hands afterwards. The stalfos swung his sword at Sheik, forcing him to dodge. One of the smaller hands attacked while Sheik was distracted, slashing his arm with its claws. He ignored the pain and ran, taking shots at the smaller hands until they were all dead. Then Sheik found himself in a corner. To his left, the poe; to his right, the stalfos; dead ahead was the remaining floormaster. With nowhere else to go, Sheik waited for all the monsters converge, and when they did, he leaped into the air, kicking off the wall and charging the stalfos. With a well-placed chop from his hand, the stalfos’ skull was severed from the rest of his body.

“Looks like it’s over,” said Sheik. He kicked the stalfos’ skull into the poe’s lantern, shattering it, then fired away with the slingshot. Several well-placed shots later, and the monsters were dead. Watching them all burn up into flame, Sheik pocketed the slingshot and breathed a sigh of relief. He put a hand to his chest, feeling his heart still beating fast.

I’m safe for now, but I’ve barely even begun. Impa gave us a week to finish this test, yet I can’t help but feel that was just to psyche us out. Is it possible, then, that the time limit is much shorter than that?

While Sheik pondered these thoughts, he looked around. Aside from the hole in the ceiling and the unusual floor, the room was largely featureless - made up of the same dark grey and mossy brick that he had seen on the 1^st floor. There were only two doors: one door ahead of Sheik, and the other to Sheik’s right, likely leading to a middle-portion of the floor. Curious, Sheik stepped lightly across the room and listened to each door. Through the right door, he could hear the faint sound of burning. Likely torches or wandering poes, by Sheik’s estimate. The forward door had a strange wet gurgling sound. Though faint, it was nonetheless foul.

Knowing Impa, the more treacherous rooms will be guarding the more valuable tools. I’ll… Just have to proceed carefully.

The forward door led to a room made up of pale tiles, with small pots lining the walls. The room was long, extending some distance to Sheik’s left, and at the end, there was a treasure chest. Sheik didn’t trust the floor, so he took out some of the deku seeds he was using for slingshot ammo and flicked them onto the surrounding tiles. No reaction. One step into the room, however, caused some of the pots to start hovering and spin in place.

“There it is.”

Sheik chopped, kicked, and dodged as the pots came flying at him, and when the last pot was destroyed, a part of the wall opened up, releasing another monster. A strange, undulating worm-thing slithered out of the wall, making a horrid wet sound with every breath. Sheik knew well what the monster was, so instead of sticking around to fight, Sheik made a mad dash towards the treasure chest. Some parts of the floor were trapped after all, but compared to the harsh obstacles Impa made Sheik run through every day, this was nothing. At the end of the room, Sheik flipped open the chest, thanked the goddesses it too wasn’t trapped, then retrieved the curved sword inside. Yet even armed with a weapon, Sheik ignored the monster, returning to the room he had fallen into earlier.

This sword feels much lighter than it looks. Such craftsmanship, too. This is definitely a Gerudo scimitar. How did Saria even come into possession of such a blade? Did she really steal it from that Gerudo causing trouble as of late? Sheik looked to the only other door, gripping the sword’s handle tight. No matter. At least I have steel on my side.

Beyond the door was a series of hallways leading left, forward, and right. The only place the floating lanterns of poes couldn’t be seen was forward, so Sheik decided to leave the enemies behind and investigate the only clear path. Early on in the hall was a large vault door (likely holding back monsters) on Sheik’s right, and further still was a door down a short hall to Sheik’s left. The small room was filled with skulltulas and their webbing, but the slingshot and scimitar made short work of them. After cutting through the web, Sheik found another chest, this time containing Sheik’s chain whip.

There you are! Sheik grabbed hold of the chain. Spinning and flicking the chain, it lightly crackled with magic sparks. There’s a whole surplus of weapons on this floor. I wonder if there’s anything left for Saria on the floor above?

For a moment, Sheik considered whether to leave the weapon behind or not, but then he remembered Impa’s words. There was no such thing as fair inside this dungeon. If Saria couldn’t manage with what tools she found, that was her problem, not Sheik’s.

I’m sorry, Saria. This is a test after all. If I help you now, what would be the point?

With newfound resolve, Sheik left the small room behind and continued exploring the hallway. Unfortunately, the boy reached a dead end and was forced to turn around.

Nothing but locked doors and another monster vault. I think I saw another vault near the crossroad, so I’ll just go down the opposite path.

Sheik retraced his steps and took a left, heading down a short hall before taking another left, and then a right. The snaking path eventually led to a misaligned crossroad, which was mercifully bereft of enemies. The air was thick, however, with a grim smell hidden beneath the stench of mildew. A small shiver ran up Sheik’s spine, but he ignored it, pondering where to go next.

The path forward provided Sheik with a plethora of options. A door immediately to his left had another pair of deku babas guarding a chest, which held Saria’s deku nut pouch. Another door to the left at the end of the hall led to a trap-filled room with keese, though this proved a simple affair for the boy. At the end of the room was another door, and the room inside, claustrophobic as it was, held another valuable item – Saria’s medicine pouch. The boy took a moment to rest, using some of the healing powder on his wounds before pocketing the leftovers and moving on.

The door opposite the trap-filled room left Sheik at pause. He saw a long hallway with spike traps, swinging scythe blades, and what appeared to be a gigantic boulder rolling into a pit at the end, coming from another hall intersecting at the end of the first. Sheik quietly closed the door and moved on.

That must lead to the exit, but that seems extreme, even for Impa. There’s got to be more to it. Maybe a switch, or a hidden passage? Sheik shook his head and returned to the nearby crossroad. I’ll just keep looking. Once I know what my options are, I can figure out how best to proceed.

After taking a left and moving past a monster vault, Sheik arrived at an unlocked door. Inside was a heavy metallic chest on the left, and a statue shooting darts at the chest. A floor switch was placed curiously behind the chest. It didn’t take long for Sheik to piece together a solution. After crouching down and slipping under the dart barrage, Sheik positioned himself between the wall and the side of the chest, shoving it further and further away with his legs. With it safely out of the way, Sheik crept back, shoving the chest against the wall and over the floor switch. A satisfying click rang out, and the statue ceased firing.

A bit juvenile compared to the other traps, but I could see this being troublesome for the desperate or greedy. Now then…

Prying open the chest, an all-too-familiar blade shimmered inside.

So that’s where you hid it.

It was a blade that Impa gave Sheik at the start of his training. A curved single-edged dagger roughly 30cm in length with a black and red cord wrapped handle; the eye and teardrop symbol of the Sheikah could be seen on the pommel. Taking hold of his Sheikah blade, the young boy couldn’t help but think back to that moment in time.

“Boy, come here,” said Impa.

With a silent nod, the boy walked up to the imposing white-haired woman. She then took the boy by the chin and tilted his head back, looking into his eyes.

“Eyes of red… Just like a Sheikah. This is good. No one will doubt your place among our ranks. What’s your name, boy?”

“I… Don’t have one.”

“That’s right. You don’t have one. Not anymore, anyway. From now on you shall be known as Sheik. Starting today, you will begin your training as one of us, and only after you have finished will you earn your rightful name. Do you understand?”

The boy gave a silent nod.

“Then take this,” said Impa. “Every member of our clan, big or small, must always be prepared to defend themselves and their charges. In your case, it is the Royal Family of Hyrule. Soon you will learn how to wield this blade. Prepare yourself, Sheik, for these next years will be filled with much hardship. But do not fret. While you train under me, I will always watch over you.”

There was a softness in Impa’s voice that day, something that Sheik had not heard in some time since. Yet despite how hard Impa pushed him, it never felt like it came from a place of hate or indifference. Deep down, Sheik knew Impa cared for him… In her own way. To be reunited with that blade, it was as if Impa had put a hand on his shoulder and said, “It will be all right now. I am here with you.”

Sheik’s mind returned to the present. The dark, stuffy, grimy dungeon room he was in didn’t seem so bad now. He even contemplated how he could use the room as a shelter should he need rest, but for now, he would press on.

---

Saria rubbed her bruised knuckles, watching the monsters before her burn up or fade into nothingness.

“That should be the last of them,” she said.

“Saria, are you okay?” asked Poppy.

“Yeah, I’ll be fine.” Of course she only said that to make her friend feel better. Her mild jubilation from clearing the trap-filled hall from earlier had died down after she had to fight all the monsters released into the dungeon. It wasn’t that the danger or difficulty frustrated her. It was the monsters themselves. Why were they down here? Most of them were undead. Was Impa keeping them for the test? Were they always down here? Did monsters simply manifest in the dark reaches of the underground? Saria didn’t have an answer… But she knew who did.

Since there was no sign of an exit in the area, Saria and Poppy returned to the middle crossroad of the floor, heading towards where the skulltulas previously were. As the pair made their way through the hall, Poppy stopped.

“Hey, look at this,” she said.

“What is it?” asked Saria.

“This wall. Doesn’t it look strange?”

“It does look a bit out of alignment. Maybe it’s an illusion?”

“I can check it out for you.”

“Are you sure? It could be dangerous.”

“Oh please, I’m an expert in avoiding danger!” Poppy beat her chest proudly. The fairy then floated towards the wall, disappearing behind it. Not long after, she poked her head and arm back out, waving. “Hey, it’s just dirt and a chest!”

Saria entered and sure enough, it was just a small room with walls of tightly packed dirt. Looking at the chest, Saria wondered how to handle it if it was trapped. It was too narrow of a hall to stand at its side and moving it could trigger a trap as well.

“Ah, I’ve got it!”

“Got what?” asked Poppy.

“All the trapped chests up until now fire out towards the opening side. If I just climb behind it, like so, then I’ll be safe!”

Saria crouched down and unlatched the chest from behind, but once it was opened, she froze stiff. As if from the very darkness, a redead appeared in front of her. A horrid shriek echoed in her mind, and the masked undead reached its emaciated hands for her throat.

“Oh no you don’t!” cried Poppy. The fairy charged the redead with a rupee, jamming the pointed end into its head. It barely left a scratch, but it caused the redead to look away and try swatting at Poppy. This released the paralysis gripping Saria, allowing her to spring on the undead and pummel it.

Panting, Saria drew her fist back. The undead finally stopped moving. “Poppy… Are you okay?”

“I’ll be fine. That sure was close, though. And what a dirty trick that was!”

“Agreed. If chests can summon monsters too, then we’ll have to be doubly careful from now on.”

Inside the chest was another small key. Saria hadn’t seen any other locked doors, but there was still quite a bit of the dungeon to explore, so she pocketed the key and kept moving. She exited out of the illusory wall, taking a right. There she stood at the crossroad just before the skulltula room and where she encountered the like like. The only place she had yet to explore was a path to her right. It snaked around the cold, grimy architecture of the dungeon, eventually leading to a split in the path. To her left at the far end of one path, Saria could see a wall made out of a rusty metal grate, and beyond that wall were standing torches, lighting up the area with a warm glow. The door to it had a lock and chains over it.

“At least we know what the key is for… Wait, do you hear that?”

“Yeah,” said Poppy. “It sounds like flapping wings.”

The path forward led to a sudden turn to the right. Saria and Poppy cautiously moved down the path, realizing there was a long (mostly featureless) hall, as well as an open vault. In the vault were several keese coated in a blue and white flame. In the center of the vault was a metal firepit, with a flame matching the fire coating the keese.

“How strange,” whispered Saria. “Any ideas, Poppy?”

“Hmm… I’m not sure. It doesn’t seem natural.”

“All right. I’ll just have to avoid touching it.”

Saria picked up a small rock and hucked it at one of the keese, killing it in an instant. This alerted the other keese, who came swooping down towards Saria. The Kokiri ducked and dodged the bat creatures, tossing a rock at another one. As the keese slammed into a wall, the blue flame trickled into the stone before dissipating, leaving small cracks where the flame traveled.

“What the?”

“Saria, look out!”

In her distraction, a keese closed in on Saria. Poppy dove in front of Saria to block the attack, and when the keese touched her, the fairy froze into a fist-sized crystal of ice.

“Poppy!!” cried Saria, diving to catch the fairy as she fell. The keese, curiously, was no longer covered in blue flame. Saria got back on her feet and smacked the keese away, killing it. Only one keese remained. The question was how to deal with it…

I can’t touch it. Getting frozen will do me and Poppy no good. No deku sticks left, either. I don’t see any more rubble I could throw. I need something durable, something I could… Wait, I know!

Saria drew the small key from her pouch. It was a sizable thing, made of iron and with a good heft to it. She gripped her fingers between its teeth, holding it like a small club. Saria waited for the keese to swoop down before batting it over the head with the back end of the key. The bat died instantly, and ice crystals formed across the key, forcing Saria to drop it. With the monsters dealt with, Saria held the ice crystal containing Poppy in her hands.

“Poppy! Poppy, hold on! I’m going to get you out of there!”

Saria ran towards the locked door at the end of the other path. While she couldn’t enter the room without the key, it didn’t matter. Saria slipped her hands through the grate and held the ice crystal near the standing torch. Soon enough, the ice around the fairy melted. Poppy coughed and fluttered her wet wings uselessly.

“Agh! I’m alive!” Poppy cried.

The Kokiri drew her friend back through the wall and held her close to her chest. “Thank goodness you’re okay. I’m sorry, Poppy. If I had just been a pinch faster, I could have-”

“Hey, don’t worry! It’s my job to keep you safe! And since you are, that just means I’m doing a good job!” Poppy sneezed. “I may need a little time to dry, though.”

“Of course, my friend. Just sit tight under here,” Saria said, placing Poppy under her cap. “I’ll take care of the rest.”

Saria returned to the hall where the ice keese once were. Something about the rest of the hall being featureless seemed… Suspicious. Upon closer examination, she noticed something about the wall the vault was connected to. Two parts of it were illusory brickwork, and between these two portions was a heavily damaged and cracked wall. Giving it a few jabs, however, yielded nothing.

Still too sturdy to knock down. Let’s see what’s in these two rooms, then.

The left room ended up being a double trap. A space immediately past the illusory wall was an illusory floor that led to a pit. Saria narrowly avoided stepping in, only to then realize that the chest inside the trapped room was… Also an illusion. Leaving that room behind, the other one seemed safer, but after opening a chest inside, Saria had to step away from its icy blast. Nothing was even inside the chest.

“Sheesh! This hall is nothing but bad news!” Poppy sneezed again. “Let’s get out of here, Saria!”

“Hold on. There might be something behind this middle wall.”

“How can you tell? The others were just traps!”

“Every other part of this dungeon has been in fine shape. Dirty, but fine. Why is this the only cracked one?”

“Maybe it was shoddy brickwork. Didn’t hold up to the test of time like the rest of this place,” Poppy said, wiping her nose with a tiny handkerchief. “They could have been in a hurry, too.”

“But if that’s the case, why?”

Saria pondered the matter for a time, thinking about the ice keese. The fire surrounding them had strange properties. Physical contact froze you solid, but if it touched stone, it almost dripped across it like an ooze, leaving cracks and seams in its wake. Saria stepped in front of the open vault, staring into the fire pit. The blue and white flame gently danced, causing Saria’s shadow to flicker behind her.

“I wonder…”

Bottle in hand, Saria uncorked it and approached the fire. She stood over it, a bead of cold sweat slipping down her forehead.

“Saria, what are you doing?” Poppy asked nervously.

“I have an idea.”

“You’re not going to try and scoop up fire, are you?”

“I just might. Do you remember that shop Fado and I cleared out?”

“Yeah…”

“There was something listed on the sign next to its front door. Blue Flame. How do you suppose something like that was stored and sold?”

“I’m… Not sure. Maybe he was selling lanterns of the stuff. But then…”

“How did he get the fire for the lanterns? The way the flame behaved earlier caught my attention. I don’t think it’s a flame at all.”

“But wait, if you touch it, you’ll get frozen solid!!”

“Then I’ll just have to be quick.”

Before Poppy could say anymore, Saria scooped her empty bottle through the flame and capped it. She watched as the blue and white fire sloshed inside the container, almost like a liquid. Much to her surprise, the bottle itself was fine. A little cold, but not nearly as much as the key from earlier.

“Wow, that actually worked,” said Poppy, holding up Saria’s cap to see. “Now what?”

“Now… We do another test.”

Approaching the cracked wall, Saria uncorked the bottle and splashed the blue flame across it. The flame spread throughout the brickwork, breaking it up more and more until, finally, the wall came crumbling down. Dust was kicked up into the air, causing Saria to cough. After waving away the dust with her hand, she saw another chest on the other side of the rubble.

“Ha! I knew it!” Saria smiled ear to ear.

“I can’t believe Impa expected you to figure that out,” said Poppy. “That’s such a strange puzzle.”

“At least it was worth the effort,” said Saria, climbing over the rubble.

“Assuming it isn’t another trap.”

Saria examined the chest. She had started to pick up on small design quirks that gave her an idea of whether a chest was trapped or not. Compared to the last few, this chest seemed ordinary. Her muscles tensed as she grasped the lid, and after throwing it open, she saw what was inside…

“My bomb bag!!” Saria cheered. “It’s still full, too!”

“Finally, a real weapon!” Poppy clenched her fist. “Now we’re unstoppable!”

Before she left the hall, Saria decided to refill her bottle with blue flame – just in case. After corking the bottle and grabbing the key off the ground, she made her way to the last door. She popped the lock open, and stepped inside the room…

“This floor looks like it’s made of iron,” said Saria. “It’s… Spacious, too.”

“Forget about that, look over there!” Poppy shouted. “There’s a ladder leading down!”

“So it seems.” Saria rubbed her chin. There were no immediate signs of monsters, but they could just appear, if the redead trap was any indication. This room was meant for a fight. The question was with what and when? It only took a few steps to answer those questions.

The loud stab of metal on metal rang out from behind the pair. Saria turned and realized that bars had sealed off the door. Moments later, an armored skeleton emerged from the darkness, with a shield in one hand, and a spiked flail in the other.

“Stalfos!” shouted Poppy. “Watch out!”

With a growl, the stalfos leaped forward, slamming his flail into the ground. Saria jumped back, seeing the dent the attack left behind in the floor. She got into a fighting stance and circled around the room, waiting for the stalfos’ next move. The monster swung horizontally next. Saria quickly ducked then sprang from the ground, leaping towards the stalfos. She threw a punch, but the stalfos blocked with his shield. The force of the blow dented the rusty shield, and the skeleton slid backwards. The pair continued exchanging blows, with the stalfos almost landing a direct hit. The Kokiri had stumbled when she stepped onto the dented floor, and while she managed to dodge the full brunt of the blow, the spikes from the flail still scratched her left arm, drawing blood.

“Any ideas, Poppy?” asked Saria.

“This stalfos doesn’t have much armor on his backside. I’d say go for his spine!”

“Easier said than done,” said Saria, dodging flail strikes. “But maybe I can make my own opening.”

Reaching into her bag, Saria pulled out a bomb and lit its fuse. Waiting until it was nearly ready to blow up, she hucked it at the stalfos. The skeleton shielded himself as best as he could from the explosion. While he was distracted, Saria dashed towards him and slid beneath his legs. After springing off the wall behind him, Saria flew through the air and kicked the stalfos’ spine, shattering it in a single blow. The skeleton crumpled to the ground and burned up into flame. Soon after, there was a clicking sound, and the bars barricading the doorway receded.

“I’m a bit low on fairy dust,” said Poppy. “Are you going to be okay with that wound?”

“I’ll be fine. At this point, I’m more worried about Sheik. We’ve explored this entire floor, and there’s been no sign of him. He couldn’t have come this way, so it’s possible he might have fallen in one of those pits.”

“You don’t think he’s-”

“He’s alive.” Saria blurted out. “But he’s probably more injured than we are.”

“Then we’ve got no time to lose. Let’s head down and see if we can catch up to him!”

Saria smiled at this and approached the ladder. There was a trapdoor resting in front of it, with grooves on one side to let it easily close over the ladder handles. After lifting it open, Saria slid down the ladder. Once she reached the bottom, she found herself in a room eerily similar to the one up above, though the standing torches were on the outside of the grate wall, and the grate itself was stained red…

That better be rust, Saria thought.

After exploring the room and finding nothing, Saria headed for the door. She gripped the handle, steeled herself for the challenges ahead, and stepped through.

---

Stepping out of the dart trap room, Sheik’s body tensed up at a distant sound. One of the vault doors from before was opening. What would come out, however, was anyone’s guess.

I should deal with those patrolling poes first. They’ll only get in the way.

Sheik kept his blade at the ready, slowly moving through the snaking path back to the first room he had fallen into. Soon enough, he spotted one of the poe’s floating lanterns. The ghost did not manifest, however, and instead swung the lantern about freely as it charged towards Sheik. As he stepped aside to dodge, he saw movement in the corner of his eye. Another floormaster had appeared and was heading towards him. Changing targets, Sheik met the monster head on, slashing across its body with his blade. It split into three smaller hands like the others, and the hands frantically moved about, hopping and clawing the air. Sheik readied his chain whip when he heard something strange coming from up above. He stayed focused on the floormaster’s hands, though, for he knew that if left alone, they could grow to be as big as the original monster. Sheik chased after the hands, slapping the ground with his chain to take them out. One hand, two hands, then he cornered the third. The poe in the hall manifested and readied another attack. That’s when the wallmaster made its move.

So distracted by the surrounding enemies, Sheik was snatched up by the wallmaster and pulled straight into the air. Phasing through solid stone, the monster pulled Sheik into the darkness, up through the ground of the first floor, and then onto the first floor’s ceiling. It happened so fast; Sheik scarcely had time to think. He put all his will into driving his blade into the wallmaster, forcing the hand to let him go. After landing on the ground, he realized he was back at the beginning of the dungeon. No sound could be heard throughout the floor, save the shuffling of distant monsters. Not even the water was flowing like it once was. Infuriated beyond belief, Sheik ran through the 1st floor once again in order to catch up with his rival.

---

“Did you find anything?” asked Poppy.

“Nope, nothing in this room either,” said Saria.

“I guess Sheik must have been through here too.”

Saria and Poppy were met with quite a few monsters once they started exploring the 2^nd floor, but after that was dealt with, they kept finding empty room after empty room. While there was no sign of Sheik, it was clear he had been busy.

After exiting a room with a dart trap statue and an empty chest, Saria looked to her left, and noticed cracks in the wall. She decided to splash it with blue flame, and once the wall was gone, a small hallway was left in its place, going forward and turning sharply to the left.

“What’s in here, I wonder?” asked Poppy.

“Doesn’t seem like much.” Saria stepped over some of the rubble and peeked around the corner. “Wait, a dead end?”

“I think you could blow open this one too,” said Poppy. “See? More cracks.”

“But do I make the trip back upstairs?” Saria rubbed her chin in thought. “Nah, I don’t want to fall behind.” She then reached into her pouch and pulled out a bomb. “Poppy, go back to the entrance!”

“Don’t have to tell me twice!”

As Poppy left the hall, Saria lit the fuse and rolled the bomb across the floor. With a quick burst of speed, Saria left the hall as well and hopped over the rubble, taking cover. After the boom, dust and debris burst from the hall.

“Looks like that did the trick. Come on!”

Saria vaulted back over the rubble and turned the corner, seeing the new path beyond the opening. As she got closer, she saw a boulder roll past her.

“Huh? What was that?”

“I think it was a rock,” said Poppy. “A real big one, too.”

“How did… You know what, I shouldn’t be questioning things at this point.”

Saria inched as close as she could to the new hall, looking to her right. At the far end of the hall, she saw a set of stairs leading down towards a locked door, and a grooved platform of stone set above the stairs was funneling boulders into the hall. On the left side of the slanted hall was a long empty passageway, eventually leading to a boulder-sized hole in the ground, intersecting with a turn to the left.

“I think that connects to that trap hall we saw earlier,” said Poppy.

“You might be right. Then this passageway we’re in must be a shortcut.”

“It might be more than that. Look!”

Poppy pointed out a pair of odd-looking walls on the left side of the hall. Illusions, by Saria’s reckoning.

So either those are meant as safe zones while you run up the passageway, or they’re hiding items. But then… If you do go for those from this side, you’ll be forced into that trap hallway by the boulder. I see your game, Impa.

“We can check those out later. Let’s head back for now until we find a key,” said Saria.

The Kokiri and fairy left the short hallway behind and returned to the main hall. As Saria climbed over the rubble, she realized the wall across from her was an illusion as well. She hucked a rock through the wall and listened. It sounded like it hit the ground, so she was certain there was no pit trap. After walking through, she found herself in a short hall that led to a larger room with a chest at the end. As Saria reached the border between the short hall and the room, she stopped.

“Wait… Something doesn’t feel right.” She leaned into the room without moving forward, looking both ways. “Spike walls.”

“Sharp ones too. Oh no… I think I see bones hanging from them,” Poppy winced.

“The walls must spring on whoever opens the chest. The question is whether they move fast or slow.”

“I could try opening it for you.”

“No, the chest could be trapped too. I don’t want you to get hurt.” Saria pondered the situation. The chest was big, so she wondered if she could take shelter in it and wait for the trap to reset, but there was also the chance the spike walls would crush her while she was hiding. “Maybe I’m overthinking this. I’ll try darting for the chest and pull it back before the walls come closing in.”

“Are you sure?” asked Poppy.

“Worst case scenario, I can try blasting a hole in the trap with my bombs. Just wait here.”

Poppy nodded and fluttered in place, watching as Saria got ready. The Kokiri bent her legs, ready to spring into the room and nab the chest. Once she leaped inside, however, the wall behind her closed shut.

“Saria!” a muffled Poppy cried.

The Kokiri pivoted on her heels, leaping towards the wall and kicking it. The stone looked thin, but it was still too sturdy to break down.

“Shoot!” Saria watched as the spiked walls began to move. The sound of gears turning could be heard as the walls slid closer and closer, old bloodstains on the stakes becoming plainly visible. But something else was revealed to her the moment the walls grew closer. They were made of wood.

Waiting for just the right moment, Saria called upon the power of Din’s Fire and burned the walls to ash. She covered her mouth and nose to avoid the smoke and noticed a floor switch on one end of the room. After stepping on it, the entrance to the room finally opened, letting out all the smoke.

“Saria, you’re okay!” said Poppy, flying over and hugging her friend. Saria hugged Poppy back, then waved some of the remaining smoke away from her face.

“Yeah, I’m fine. This floor is tricky, though. Definitely a step up from the last one.”

Saria approached the chest in the room, kicking it open from the side. No more traps were sprung. Instead, Saria was greeted by the comforting sight of her dagger.

“There you are!” Saria took hold of it excitedly. She practically hugged her dagger before strapping it back to her hip. “This room may have been dangerous, but it was well worth it.”

“Now there’s nothing that can stop you!” Poppy cheered.

“I don’t know about that, but at least we have something more reliable than sticks and rocks.”

Weapon secured, Saria’s confidence was bolstered. She left the room behind and returned to the main hall. She took a right after leaving through the illusory wall, then a left at the crossroad. After a series of turns, she found herself at an intersection.

“Hmm… A door here, and two other halls to go down. Why don’t you pick where to go this time,” said Saria.

“All right! I choose… This way!” Poppy pointed at the door to Saria’s left.

Saria drew her dagger and gripped the doorknob. “Let’s see what’s waiting for us this time.”

When the pair entered, they found themselves in a peculiar square room. Most of the floor was made of a metal grate, save the center, which was solid stone. Above the plate of stone was a long tunnel.

“Hey, I think we’re at the bottom of one of those pits!” said Poppy.

“It looks like it. No sign of loot or monsters, though. Just a door.” Saria approached the door, opened it, saw a like like right in front of her, and slammed the door shut. She slowly turned her head towards Poppy. “Let’s head somewhere else.”

“R-right. Let’s.”

The pair left the grate room behind and moved forward, noticing an empty vault to their right, and a door to their left shortly thereafter. The door led to a cleared-out room, so they continued.

“Hey, another illusion,” said Poppy, pointing to the left wall. Saria gave it the rock test, and when it seemed safe, she and Poppy entered.

“Huh? It’s just a torch,” said Saria.

“It’s nice and warm at least.” Poppy held up her hands near the fire. “What do you think it’s here for?”

“I’m not sure. It could be for another puzzle…” Saria also held her hands up to the fire. The pair waited around, enjoying the comfort of warmth for a few seconds.

“I wish we brought along some sweet potatoes,” said Poppy.

“Yeah… Those would be really nice right about now.”

Saria’s mind began to wander, taking her back to better times. She was in her village with the other Kokiri, gathering sweet potatoes.

“We got a lot of big ones this year,” said Saria. “How are the rest of you doing?”

“We’re doing great!” said Link. “Our basket is nearly full!”

“No thanks to you,” grumbled Mido.

“What are you talking about? More than half the ones we have are ones I pulled!”

“But you didn’t even brush the dirt off! Our basket would be nothing but dirt were it not for me! You can’t just toss them in willy-nilly like that!”

“Well the Know-It-All Brothers told me the dirt gives the potatoes flavor.”

“Flavor only worms would appreciate!!”

Sparks were flying between Link and Mido. Saria sighed and approached the two, showing them how it was done.

“While I don’t disagree with you, Mido, we give the potatoes a good wash by the river anyway. If you spend too much time brushing them off here, we’ll never get done.”

“B-but Saria, I was just-”

“I know. It’s all right.” Saria then turned to Link, who was looking away and whistling. “As for you, I know it’s faster your way, but you could stand to shake at least a little dirt off the potatoes. If you’re not more careful, you’ll just be making more work for the others.”

“Yeah… Okay. I’m sorry,” said Link.

Saria smiled and said, “If you want, you can help wash them down by the river.”

“I can do that!” Link excitedly grabbed the basket he and Mido were using and ran off with it.

“Link! Link, we weren’t done here!” shouted Mido. “Ooooh, that kid! He’s nothing but trouble!”

“But it’s pretty fun trouble. Don’t you agree?” Saria laughed.

“No, I do not,” Mido crossed his arms.

“Well if it makes you feel any better, I still have my basket, so we can work together now.”

Mido blushed, quickly looking away. “S-sure, I can do that.”

Saria and Mido spent the next hour pulling sweet potatoes, trimming the roots, brushing off dirt, then setting them in the basket. Once they were done, the pair made their way down to the small river running through the village. When Link saw Saria, he stood up and ran over to her excitedly.

“Hey Saria, check it out! I caught a fish with by bare hands!”

“Gah! Put that back, Link!” growled Mido.

“But why? Fish are tasty.” The fish wriggled about in Link’s arms before suddenly escaping, bouncing off of Link’s head and back into the river, swimming downstream. The sight was so ridiculous, all the Kokiri couldn’t help but laugh. Link laughed as well, rubbing the back of his head in embarrassment. The smiling, blushing boy was such a warm and comforting sight, Saria knew she would never forget that day.

“Link…”

“Saria?”

“Wha?”

Saria snapped back to the present, realizing Poppy was in front of her.

“Saria, are you okay? You dozed off on me.”

“I was asleep?”

“It seemed like it, at least. Pretty impressive since you were standing the whole time. I didn’t even see you blink.”

Saria looked around. She was still in that small room with the standing torch. The harsh reality of the present weighed heavily on her shoulders.

“I’ll… I’ll be fine. Let’s keep going.”

Leaving through the illusory wall and taking a left, Saria and Poppy found themselves at another intersection. There were two doors to the left – one at the far end of the left path, while the other was on the wall across the way, and to the right around a turn was a sealed vault door. The door across the way led to a long hall with a big skulltula blocking the way, but Saria was used to dealing with such monsters. She slashed it with her dagger after it spun about, revealing its soft underbelly, and with the monster slain, she found a locked door at the end of the hall. Looking up, the ceiling was full of cobwebs, but little else.

“You don’t suppose a key is hidden up there, do you?” asked Saria.

“Maybe, but is it worth the effort checking?” asked Poppy.

“Nuh uh.” Then the pair left the skulltula hall.

Taking a right, Saria entered through the other door. The room was pretty big, and dark too. It took a moment for Saria’s eyes to adjust to the darkness.

“I think I see standing torches in the corners,” said Saria. “Nothing to light it with… Though…” The Kokiri leaned her head back as she said, “Ooooh, so that’s what that room is for.”

“What do you think lighting the torches will do?” asked Poppy.

“I think I see bars covering a door on the right wall. Maybe they’re connected somehow?”

“Oooh, I see. So we light them up and open the path! Got any deku sticks?”

“No, I used my last one on that dart trap, remember?”

“Oh. Well shoot, now what do we do?”

Saria thought about her options. Nothing she had on-hand would work, and she wasn’t about to tear scraps of cloth from her shirt.

“Wait a minute, wasn’t there a room with deku babas earlier?” asked Saria.

“You’re right! They were in one of the cleared rooms back down the hall,” said Poppy.

“Let’s go harvest some stems, then.”

When Saria first began to explore the 2^nd floor, she had taken a left at the first crossroad. This was where she found a door leading to the trap-filled hallway, as well as multiple rooms with empty treasure chests. In one of the closer ones, two deku babas sat like guard dogs on both sides of an empty chest. Many a times had Saria slain similar creatures out in the Lost Woods to make the area safer, harvesting useful materials from them. While the heads were similar in composition to deku nuts, the stems hardened upon death, turning into wood. Ordinarily, Saria would pull out the roots of deku babas to prevent them from regrowing, but in this case, she took advantage of their rapid growth, killing a number of deku babas until her deku stick bag was full.

“There, that should do it,” said Saria.

“I almost feel bad for the little guys,” said Poppy.

“I get what you mean but try not to let it bother you too much. They’re still monsters, after all. If you’re not careful, they’d happily gobble you up.”

Poppy shivered and said, “Ugh, thanks for the reminder.”

With a fresh supply of deku sticks, Saria returned to the small room with the standing torch. After lighting up a stick, she made her way into the dark room and lit up the torches one by one. After narrowly lighting them up before her stick burned away, the room was enveloped in a warm light. The bars receded from the doorway, letting the pair go through.

On the other side of the door, Saria found herself in an earthy, cave-like room. A skeleton was slumped against a wall, its hand grasping a key.

“This looks like it fits that door in the skulltula hall,” said Saria.

“Wait,” said Poppy. “I can hear the skeleton whisper something.” Saria stopped, hand on the key. Poppy then said, “Beware… Beware the flame… What does that mean?”

Saria’s ears perked up. It sounded like fluttering was coming from the previous room.

“I think I have an idea. Hide in my cap. I’ll keep us safe.”

Poppy did so. After Saria secured the key, she drew her dagger and carefully opened the door. On the other side, she saw several keese flying about the room, now coated in flame. It wasn’t long before they noticed her, changing direction and swooping down towards her. Dagger in hand, Saria made quick work of the beasts. She dashed through the room, slicing at the keese one by one until they were all gone. While she suffered small burns on her hand due to the short reach of her dagger, she and her friend were now safe.

“Are you okay?” asked Poppy.

“I’ll be fine.” Saria winced, shaking her hand. “I can see why that spirit warned us, though.”

“I hope that key was worth it.”

Saria unlocked the door in the skulltula hall. It led to a room with a big chest on a pedestal. After entering the room, bars shot down over the door, sealing it shut. Soon after, two stalfos emerged from the shadows, each armed with a sword and shield. While one stayed back, the other happily charged Saria, swinging his sword.

“If it’s not one thing, it’s another!” shouted Saria, blocking the sword with her dagger. After shoving the sword aside, Saria slashed the stalfos across the ribs, causing him to step back. The two fighters circled around the room, parrying each other’s blades as they attacked. Not wishing to be stuck in a stalemate forever, Saria dashed back, pulling out a bomb. After lighting it up, she moved in, slashed at the stalfos to distract him, and rolled the bomb between his legs. Before it exploded, Saria stepped back. The blast of the bomb caused the stalfos to stumble, and with his defenses open, she drove her dagger straight through the monster’s skull, killing him.

“You got it!” cheered Poppy.

“Yeah, but it’s not over yet,” said Saria.

The second stalfos joined the fray. He tossed his shield aside and picked up his fallen comrade’s sword. Now armed with two blades, he came in swinging like a vortex of steel. While Saria could defend against some of the attacks, she found herself open to strikes from the second sword more often than not. After getting slashed across the side, Saria stumbled, grasping at her wound.

“Saria!!” cried Poppy.

“It’s all right! I haven’t given up just yet!”

Saria rolled out of the way of the stalfos’ next attack, drawing a deku stick from her bag. Dagger and stick in hand, she met the stalfos head on, swinging wildly. The difference in weapon length caught the skeleton off-guard, and when the opening presented itself, Saria smashed the monster’s skull open, slaying it.

“Ugh… There… I did it…”

Saria collapsed onto her knees, panting. Not only was she tired and bleeding, but she was also starving. The burn wound on her hand seemed pleasant by comparison.

Poppy flew to Saria’s side. “Hey, don’t close your eyes on me!”

“I’m not… Poppy… I just wanna take a little nap…”

Tears in her eyes, Poppy said, “Saria, don’t give up yet!” The fairy looked around for something, anything that could help. She then flew over to the chest, using all of her strength to open the lid. “Oh please be something useful, please be something useful!!”

With a mighty shove, Poppy opened the chest and found a glass bottle filled with a red liquid. She lifted it up and carried it over to the Kokiri, placing it in front of her.

“Saria! I think I found a potion!”

“A… Potion?”

Poppy uncorked the bottle and nudged it closer. The Kokiri took it, drinking it all up. The magic of the potion then coursed through Saria’s body, knitting her wounds shut and restoring her strength. Saria stumbled to her feet, wiping her mouth with the back of her hand.

“Saria! Are you feeling okay?”

“Okay? I feel great! What was in that stuff?”

Poppy wiped a tear from her face and smiled. “I haven’t the faintest idea.”

While the pair suffered a close call, Saria’s wounds were healed. She even got a spare bottle out of the encounter. But before the pair could rejoice, they heard the sound of a distant vault opening.

“Oh now what?” asked Poppy.

“More monsters are being released. Stay close to me,” said Saria.

Unsure of what dangers awaited them, the Kokiri and fairy moved back down the skulltula hall. Once they reached the exit door, Saria slowly turned the handle, opening the door as quietly as possible. There were no signs of monsters at the moment, but she could see that the vault down the left path was open.

“So that’s where they came from,” Saria whispered. “Then they must be up further in.”

The pair made use of a previous tactic, with Poppy scouting ahead while Saria followed up from behind.

“Looks like the coast is clear,” whispered Poppy. Saria moved up the hall, eyeing the intersection up ahead suspiciously. The sound of rattling bone and clanking armor echoed throughout the dungeon. More stalfos were on the move…

“Do you see anything?” whispered Saria.

“I see shadows moving down the left path, but the right is clear,” whispered Poppy.

“Then let’s head to the right.”

The pair moved down the hall, running into a peculiar sight. The right path eventually turned left but stopped abruptly due to a breakable wall blocking the path. Unlike previous ones Saria had seen, this one was covered in a strange yellow barrier. To test it, Saria threw a rock at it. The rock bounced harmlessly off the barrier before it even got close to the wall.

“How are we supposed to get through that?” whispered Saria.

“Maybe it has something to do with this,” Poppy pointed back. Saria turned, noticing a disheveled vault door was opposite the energy wall the whole time. So covered in dust and grime, it had escaped Saria’s attention up until then.

“Thanks for spotting that, Poppy, but are you suggesting we wait until it opens to see what’s inside?”

“We might not have to wait. Look, there are cracks in the door. Maybe we could break it open.”

“And alert the stalfos on patrol.”

“Maybe, but I have an idea. Do you remember the song we learned in that other tomb? If it works on redead, it might work on stalfos too!”

Saria thought on it for a moment, nodding with approval. “Poppy, you might just be a genius.”

“Might be, you say? Of course I’m a genius!”

“Calm down now,” Saria smiled. “We still don’t know if it’ll work. Still… I’m willing to give it a shot.”

Now armed with a plan, Saria handed her ocarina to Poppy for a moment. After lighting up another bomb and tossing it across the hall towards the vault door, she shielded her face from the explosion, holding out her hand for the ocarina. When she uncovered her face, however, Saria immediately wished she hadn’t. Four redead were waiting for them on the other side of the old vault door.

“Play the song, Saria! Quickly!” shouted Poppy. But it was no good. The sight of the redead had paralyzed Saria. Worse yet, it sounded like the stalfos were running towards their area. “Ah shoot, what do I do? What do I do?”

Saria struggled against the paralysis as best as she could. If she didn’t do something soon, she and Poppy would be overrun by the undead. She tried forcing her fingers to move, channeling all of her willpower into her hand.

“S-Saria?” Poppy seemed to notice, looking down at her hand. “Wait, I’ve got an idea! Keep doing that!”

For a moment, it was if the Kokiri and fairy’s minds were one. Once the ocarina was in Saria’s hand, she mustered enough willpower to keep her fingers moving, blocking the right holes for the right notes. While she did so, Poppy blew on the ocarina to play it, and together, the pair played the Sun Song. The magic of the song froze all of the nearby undead, releasing Saria from the redead’s gaze attack. Saria gasped for air, pocketing her ocarina.

“Oh thank you, Poppy. Thank you!”

“No problem, but we should really get a move on!”

“You’re right. Let’s see what we can do.”

Saria ran down the hall towards the frozen undead, hopping over them. She saw that the stalfos were there as well, swords in-hand. Curiously, there was a floor switch in the middle of the open vault. Saria pressed it, seeing the barrier around the breakable wall disappear. But as soon as she moved, the floor switch shot back up, returning the barrier to the wall. Though frustrated, it gave Saria an idea. She picked up one of the redead and set it on the switch. The undead’s weight was enough to compress the switch, so Saria hucked another bomb while there was an opening and destroyed the wall.

But then, the Sun Song’s effects started to wear off…

“Saria, they’re starting to move!” shouted Poppy.

There were precious few seconds remaining. Saria had to act fast, otherwise she’d be joining the ranks of the dead in the dungeon. She considered playing the Sun Song again, but she had no idea if it would work a second time. Even if it did, it was advancing time every time she played. Worried it might cause more vaults to open, or worse, cause the exit to the dungeon to seal early, Saria came up with a new plan. A memory from when she first met the Great Fairy on Death Mountain sparked in her mind. She had intended to save her magic energy for later, but given the situation she was in, she realized she had no other choice. In what little time remained, she remembered the special technique she was taught, channeled her magic energy into her dagger, then spun around, releasing a wave of slicing energy. The attack cut through the redeads and stalfos, laying them flat. Saria panted, almost completely out of magic energy. Had she hesitated at all, she knew she would be dead.

“That… Was close…” said Saria, catching her breath.

“I’ll say! That was pretty impressive, though. We’ll have to thank the Great Fairy the next time we visit Death Mountain.”

Saria nodded in agreement, then looked around to take stock of the situation. All the enemies had been dealt with, but the barrier had returned. It seemed it could still hold its shape, even with the wall no longer there. What’s more, Saria could see something beyond the barrier. It was a large chest. Curious, she stepped onto the switch, lowering the barrier. Instead of disappearing completely, it seemed to transfer, wrapping itself around the chest.

“Hmm… Well that’s perplexing. How are we supposed to get through that?” asked Saria.

“I could try going through and opening the chest,” said Poppy.

“If you think you can open it, then sure, let’s give it a shot. Just be careful. Who knows what will happen once that chest is opened.”

Saria remained on stand-by, stepping on and releasing the switch as necessary to give Poppy access to the chest. Unfortunately, she couldn’t make it budge. After lowering the barrier so she could return, Poppy spoke up.

“It’s no good. The lid’s too heavy.”

“Maybe I could leave some gear behind that you could move around?”

“You think I can lift half the stuff you carry?”

“Well, it was worth a shot.”

Saria was just about ready to leave when she noticed someone approaching. It was a slim figure in the darkness, but a familiar one, nonetheless.

“Having trouble, are we?”

““Sheik!!”” Saria and Poppy cried in unison. The pair ran over to the boy and tried hugging him, but he shoved them away before they got too close.

“Hey, now’s not the time for that!”

“Ha ha… Sorry. It was just such a relief to see you. Where have you been? Are you hurt?” asked Saria.

“I’m fine, I…” Sheik sighed. “I may have been a bit careless. I don’t know where the exit is either, so maybe… We could… Work together?”

Saria’s eyes lit up in excitement. “I’d be more than happy to! In fact, we already found the exit.”

“You did?”

“Yeah! Sort of… There’s a door at the bottom of some stairs. It’s locked and guarded by this weird boulder trap. We should be able to get through the trap, but first we need to find the key.”

“All right. What is there left to do? I imagine you’ve explored this floor pretty thoroughly.”

“First we wanna see what’s in this chest,” chimed in Poppy. “Come over here.”

Saria and Poppy showed Sheik the barrier, chest, and floor switch dilemma. Afterwards, Sheik said, “So what we need is one of us to stand on and move from this while the other opens the chest. Does that sound about right?”

“That’s right,” said Saria. “Would you be willing to watch the switch?”

“Me? But what if I lock you in and abandon you?”

“Why would you do that?” asked Saria. “You need our help.”

“B-but how can you trust me again so soon? Did you forget how I attacked you on the ranch?”

“Well sure, but I know you wouldn’t leave me behind.”

“And besides,” said Poppy, “if you did do that, I would pester you for the rest of your days.”

It sounded like Sheik was grinding his teeth together. Saria wasn’t sure what was on the young boy’s mind, but she had an idea. Even so, she had no reason to doubt Sheik in that moment. Despite the boy’s unusual behavior, Saria knew he was also as pragmatic as they came. Sheik would have never approached her and Poppy if Sheik thought for a moment he could get through the rest of the test by himself. There was a much more practical reason why Sheik wouldn’t betray Saria.

Once they settled things, Saria moved over to the barrier and gave Sheik the signal to move it. Sheik did so, letting Saria get to the chest. Once the chest’s barrier was down, Saria opened it up, and sure enough, a large key was inside.

“Got it!” said Saria.

Sheik let Saria through the first barrier, and the two reunited.

“So that must be the key to the exit,” said Sheik.

“Most likely,” said Saria.

Then came a rumbling. In that moment, Saria remembered there was one last vault door remaining on the floor. It would seem that it was finally opening.

“Say, now that we’re on the same side again, could you help me take down those monsters?” asked Saria.

“Hmph. You already got my help with that puzzle.”

“Oh…”

“But then again, those monsters are in my way too. I don’t mind helping you out.”

For a second, Saria was certain Sheik was smirking beneath the cloth covering his face. Saria smiled as well, saying, “Then let’s get going!” as she ran down the hall towards the monsters. While she wasn’t certain what Sheik would do next, just knowing that he was safe and sound was enough to bolster the Kokiri’s resolve. Whatever challenge next awaited them, Saria was certain she, Sheik, and Poppy could overcome it.

---

Saria and Sheik stood victorious over the defeated monsters. Four gibdos were released from the vault, and four gibdos were put to the sword. As Saria sheathed her dagger, she looked at the fallen monsters. Whatever was inhabiting their bandages seemed to simply disappear, leaving nothing behind but strips of old linen.

“How are you doing, Sheik? Did you get hurt?” asked Saria.

“No, I’m fine. And you?”

“Not any worse for wear.”

“Then let’s not dawdle any longer. Where is the exit you spoke of?”

“Right over there,” Saria pointed to a nearby tunnel.

Sheik approached the mouth of the tunnel, looking at the rubble strewn about the floor. “Have you been blowing holes in the walls?”

“If by blowing holes in the walls you mean revealing hidden secrets… Then yes.”

Sheik narrowed his eyes at Saria and said, “Very well. I just hope for your sake Impa is okay with this.”

Sheik moved further in and Saria followed. At the exit just shy of the boulder tunnel, Saria pointed to the stairway.

“See, down there is the locked door. All we need to do is wait until a boulder passes and make a dash for it.”

“Seems easy enough. Is there anything else?”

“In the opposite direction are some hidden rooms I haven’t checked out yet.”

Sheik leaned against the right wall, peering down the tunnel. “I see… There is one thing I’m still missing. Perhaps it’s in one of those rooms.”

“Want to check them out before we go? The first one is just on the other side of this wall,” Saria knocked on the left wall.

“I suppose, but the boulder is too fast to come back up this way if we check out the second one. You’d be funneled into those other traps around the corner.”

“Don’t worry. I can handle them,” Saria put a hand on her chest. “I got some practice in while exploring the 1^st floor.”

“Are you sure? You’d be risking your life for very little.”

“It’s no trouble at all,” Saria smiled.

With a sigh, Sheik said, “All right. When the next boulder passes, we make our move. Ready?”

““Ready!”” Saria and Poppy said in unison.

Once another boulder passed, Sheik said, “Now!” and ran out into the tunnel, swerving to the left to go through the illusory wall. Saria kept on running, keeping pace with the boulder until she, too, dove through an illusory wall. The room was a short L-shaped room made of the same stone as the rest of the dungeon, though old rusty chains and shackles dangled from the ceiling.

“More chains? What are these even for?” asked Poppy.

“I doubt they were just for show,” said Saria. The Kokiri jostled some of the chains with the tip of her dagger, but nothing happened. Feeling relieved, she turned the corner in the room and found a chest. This one was, thankfully, not trapped, and inside was a bag of long steel needles.

“Needles? Do you think these are Sheik’s?” asked Poppy, eyeing the bag.

“They look like throwing weapons. I’d hate to be on the receiving end of one of these.” Saria tied the bag to her belt. “We got our prize. Now comes the fun part.”

“Even though I know you’ll be fine, you saying that still worries me.”

After stretching and adjusting her boots, Saria waited for the sound of a boulder passing before exiting the room and running down the hall. She hopped over the large hole at the bend, side-stepped a swinging scythe, hopped away from a spike trap, then continued to duck and dodge her way down the trap hall until, finally, she made it to the door. Soon after, she met back up with Sheik in the secret tunnel.

“You seem in good spirits. Did you find anything?” asked Sheik.

“Yeah! Are these yours?” asked Saria, holding up the needle bag.

“They are.” Sheik reached for the bag, but Saria pulled it away.

“Hold on. Before I give you this, I’d like to make a trade. I noticed you found quite a few of my things.”

“I did. Which would you like in exchange?”

After giving it some thought, Saria said, “I’d like the scimitar.”

“Another weapon? Very well.”

The pair made the exchange, and Saria strapped the scimitar onto her back. “There we go. This ought to help me with some of the bigger monsters. Where did you find this, anyway?”

Sheik shivered. “In a room with a like like.”

“Ooooh… That’s what that room was…”

With matters finally settled on the 2^nd floor, Saria and Sheik waited for another opening and ran to the stairs. Saria unlocked the door, and then everyone made their way down a long winding stairway into darkness…

Poppy kept the path lit as Saria and Sheik descended further into the dungeon. The once dark grey of the walls took on a noticeably earthy hue as stone brick gave way to dirt and cavernous rock. Eventually, the three reached the bottom where a steel doorway sat in a rusted frame. Decorating the door was the engraving of a robed figure with a skull for a head, their eyes glowing green. Before anyone could even touch the door, a message seemed to emanate from it, echoing in Saria’s mind.

“You who have come this far, prepare yourself for one final challenge. A gauntlet of harrowing foes awaits those who would work from the shadows.”

Saria rubbed the side of her head. “Did you hear that too?”

“Yes. It felt… Strange. Almost like they were my own thoughts,” said Sheik. After shaking his head, he said, “Let’s just get this over with.” Then he opened the door.

The three stepped inside, finding themselves in a bloody brick room with standing torches in the corners of the right wall. On the same wall as the entrance was another door, albeit on the other side of the room and locked. After everyone was inside, bars shot down, sealing the entrance. Two stalfos fell from the darkness up above, weapons at the ready.

“More of them? Sheik, you take the one on the right, I’ll deal with the one on the left,” said Saria.

“Very well. Try and keep up.”

Sheik rushed the stalfos, drawing his blade and swiping diagonally in one fluid motion. The blade met its mark, tearing through parts of the stalfos’ rusted armor. Saria drew her scimitar, gripping it in both hands as she charged her opponent. She brought the full weight of the blade down on the stalfos, who blocked with his shield but faltered from the force. Saria took advantage of the opening and kicked him in the jaw, knocking him back. Before she dealt the final blow, Saria stopped.

“Wait… That skittering sound… Sheik, up above!!”

The pair dodged back, and two wallmasters slammed into the ground where Saria and Sheik once stood. Now with four enemies in the room, Saria planned out her next move. Sheik had no such hesitation, charging back into the fray. He leaped into the air, driving his knee into one of the wallmasters at the same time as his blade, killing it before it had the chance to counterattack. Saria focused her attention on her own foes, slashing the wallmaster in front of her. The giant hand skittered out of the way of the first strike, letting the wounded stalfos charge in and slash at Saria. The Kokiri dodged as best she could, then her and the stalfos’ blades clashed. Sparks flew as the two tried to win in their contest of strength. At first it seemed like the stalfos would win out, and he cackled at the sight. But then Saria kicked one of the stalfos’ legs out from under him, sending him to the ground. As the second wallmaster tried to attack, Saria leaped out of the way, watching as it crushed the stalfos under its weight. She then spun around, slashing her scimitar into the beast’s dark hide and knocking it to the ground. Before it could get up, Saria spun around again and again, striking the wallmaster until it finally died. After she stopped, she saw the other stalfos fall to the ground beside Sheik and burn away.

Saria was feeling a little dizzy from her impromptu spin attacks, but after the feeling dissipated, she realized a small chest had appeared between the two standing torches. Sheik was already retrieving a key from the chest. He then approached the exit, unlocking it.

“Well, are you coming?” asked Sheik.

“Y-yeah, I just needed a minute,” said Saria.

The Kokiri ran to catch up, walking outside onto a small metal platform embedded in the rock. It was high up from the ground, built on top of a cliff with a ladder connecting to a lower platform, and then to another. It was so dark, Saria needed Poppy’s light to find her footing. She carefully made her way to the first ladder and began her descent.

“So Sheik…”

“Yes, Saria?”

“How much did you know about this place?”

“What do you mean?”

“What I mean is did you know about all these traps? All these undead and monsters? All those skeletons - and I don’t mean the ones wearing armor.”

Sheik, who was already climbing down the second ladder, was silent for a moment. When he spoke, he said, “I’ve always been told exactly what I needed to know. I know that this place was repurposed into a Sheikah training dungeon long ago, and that many have explored its halls before us. Many have failed, as well.”

“Repurposed?” asked Poppy. “What is that supposed to mean?”

“It means we Sheikah never waste what we have. If something no longer suits its original purpose, we give it a new one. That is the Sheikah way.”

“And none of this bothers you?” asked Saria.

“Why should it? It wouldn’t bother a true Sheikah.”

“You say that as if you’re not entitled to your own feelings…”

The pair eventually reached the bottom of the last ladder, which was lit by two standing torches. Sheik and Saria stood at the entrance of a long, cavernous tunnel occluded in darkness. Sheik made his way into the tunnel, saying, “It doesn’t matter if I have my own feelings. They are not useful to me… To what I must become. Just like the Sheikah of old, I will repurpose them.”

Saria felt a cold wind blow through her. She wanted to be there for Sheik, to comfort him, but… She didn’t know how. All she could do was provide a little bit of light. And so, she took out a deku stick, lit it with one of the torches, and marched onwards.

The tunnel was largely featureless, save the occasional stalagmites poking out of the ground. Up above, a colony of keese made their home, resting on the ceiling and jutting stalactites. Some deigned to come down attack, but they were dealt with easily enough. Many of the others remained on the ceiling, following Saria with their beady red eyes. Poppy kept under Saria’s hat throughout the tunnel.

By the time her torch burned away, Saria reached the other side of the tunnel where Sheik awaited. Before them was a large lit cavern with a pit of smoky green slime in the center. Wooden logs were placed haphazardly around the pit to act as walkways, though Saria wasn’t sure if they could be trusted. The pit was bordered by four standing torches in its corners, and on the other side of the pit was the entrance to a new tunnel, though it was blocked up by dense layers of skulltula web.

“So this is what I saw from that room,” Sheik muttered.

“What is it?” asked Saria.

“I’m not sure what the pit’s purpose is. I have a hunch, though.” Sheik pulled out a deku nut and gently tossed it into the ooze. The nut smoked and bubbled as the viscous slime melted it into nothing. “I see… I guess that’s another reason not to touch it.”

Saria looked closer, realizing that several skeletal hands were reaching out of the pit. She gulped, unsure what to make of it.

“I’ll go first,” said Saria.

“No, I should go,” said Sheik. “I’m carrying less and am therefore lighter. If it’s not safe for me, then it certainly won’t be for you.”

“Then before you go, take this,” said Saria, holding out a deku stick. “You can use it to balance, and once you’re on the other side, light it with one of the torches and burn the webbing.”

“I can work with that,” said Sheik. “All right, here I go.”

Sheik held the long deku stick horizontally, stepping onto the first log in the pit. The log didn’t seem to move as he pressed his weight down on it. Step by step, the boy made his way closer to the end, and after reaching the upper right corner of the pit, he hopped safely onto solid ground.

“Woo! Nice work, Sheik!” Poppy cheered.

“Thanks. I’ll get to work on this web now. Good luck,” said Sheik.

Saria smiled, taking out another stick as she began her own trek across the pit. The log shifted slightly from her weight, but after standing still for a moment, things settled down, and she continued. Things were going fine, but as soon as Sheik started torching skulltula web, figures emerged from the slime pit. Two redead coated in the acidic slime rose to the surface and trudged their way towards Saria. A foul scream echoed in her mind as her body froze stiff.

“Saria!” Sheik shouted. The boy dropped his torch and pulled out several needles, tossing them in quick succession. One of the redead was taken down immediately, turned into a pincushion by Sheik’s attack. This gave Saria the chance to break free of their paralysis. Instead of fighting, Saria ran, doing her best to balance on the logs and hopping to and fro to get to safety. By the time she reached solid ground, Sheik took care of the other redead.

“Yeah, we made it!” said Poppy.

“All thanks to Sheik. You really came through for me,” Saria smiled.

“It was nothing,” Sheik looked away. “You would have done the same.”

“Well you’re not wrong.”

Saria drew another deku stick and lit it with a torch, and together the pair burned their way through the skulltula web. It was a wide tunnel full of the spider monsters, many of which moved to attack in order to defend their territory. Others skittered away from the light, almost as if they were afraid of it. After veering to the right in the tunnel, Saria and Sheik found a split in the path. To their left was a brick wall – one that looked breakable if Saria had to guess. To their right was the last bit of webbing before the rest of a narrow path forward.

“I can see faint movement in the darkness up ahead. More monsters await us,” said Sheik.

“In that case, why don’t we see what’s behind this wall?” said Saria, pulling out a bomb.

“You know that’s going to alert everything in this cave to our presence, right?”

“It’s not like we have anywhere to hide. Besides, you heard that door earlier. Either way we’ll have to face a gauntlet. Let’s make sure we know our options first.”

“Very well…”

With a light and a toss, Saria blasted a hole right through the left path. After the dust settled, she clambered over the rubble. Inside was a small cavern containing a rather grandiose-looking chest, made of a blue-tinted metal with a golden frame.

“What did you find?” asked Sheik from the entrance.

“I’m not entirely sure,” said Saria. “It looks important, though.”

Examining the chest closer and finding no hints of trickery on the outside, Saria carefully lifted the lid open, and when she did, a faint glimmer of golden light shined from within. The chest contained a key – but it was no ordinary key. It was easily the length of Saria’s forearm and colored gold with a red jewel in its horned head. Ancient markings surrounded the jewel and lined the neck of the key as well.

“Ooooh, now that’s one shiny key!” said Poppy. “What do you think it goes to?”

“The final chamber, most likely,” said Saria.

“You know, it sounds a little ominous when you put it that way.”

“Either way it was to our benefit to grab it now,” said Sheik. “Now we have nothing but the path ahead. Are you ready, Saria?”

Gripping the key in her hand, Saria felt the weight of the challenge before her. She took a deep breath and pocketed the key. “I’m ready.”

“Then it’s time. Let’s go.”

After Poppy hid under Saria’s cap, the Kokiri and Sheikah boy made their way to the final path. Stepping forward, a line of torches came alive throughout the tunnel, shedding light on all the monsters ahead of them. Stalfos, redead, floormasters, a giant green bubble, and a poe wielding a staff with a lantern on one end at the back of the crowd, as if it were their leader. As the poe pointed forward with its lantern staff, the monsters made their way down the tunnel towards Saria and Sheik. The pair didn’t say a word. They just drew their weapons… And charged.

Sheik was the first to attack, tossing down a few deku nuts to blind or stun the first wave of monsters. Saria followed this up with a volley of lit bombs, blasting apart the weaker monsters and softening up the stronger ones. A stalfos made it ahead of the pack and met Sheik head on. The boy side-stepped the initial attack, sweeping the skeleton’s legs before slicing his head off. A floormaster turned green and flew across the battlefield towards Sheik, but Saria intercepted it, slicing right between its middle and ring finger until it was cut in twain. She followed this up with a spin attack to destroy the smaller hands. A redead shambled towards Saria, only to be filled with needles from Sheik. The two kept fighting monster after monster, making sure to back each other up as needed as they cut down each and every threat that came their way.

From the back of the crowd, the poe with a staff seemed to grow impatient. Drawing his lantern staff through the air horizontally, several balls of flame manifested. After pointing the staff forward, the fireballs flew through the air, hitting the ground and exploding in bursts of concussive force and flame.

“That’s not just a poe, Saria. That’s a wizzrobe!” shouted Poppy.

“A wizzrobe? What do you know about them?” asked Saria.

“They’re undead magicians, mages who couldn’t find peace in the afterlife. Just like poes, something unresolved ties them to this world.”

Saria and Sheik dodged out of the way of the incoming fireballs. As Saria took cover behind upturned earth, she said, “That clears up a little bit. Anything else?”

“I heard they can disappear and… Appear from anywhere.”

Saria and Poppy looked up, realizing the wizzrobe had teleported itself just above where Saria was hiding, ready with another spell. Before it could cast, Sheik leaped into the air, attacking the mage with a spinning kick.

“Oh no you don’t!” he shouted. The kick landed, but then the wizzrobe disappeared in a puff of smoke, reappearing further back down the tunnel.

“We’ll never get anywhere like this,” said Saria. “I have an idea, though. Do you think you can keep it busy?”

“I don’t think I have much of a choice. What did you have in mind?”

Saria pulled out her ocarina. “I’m going to bring peace to the living dead.”

Sheik gave Saria a confused look but nodded all the same. After that, he rushed forward, continuing to fight and keep the wizzrobe distracted.

“Saria, what if the song causes too much time to pass and the exit closes shut?” asked Poppy.

“I know that’s a risk, but if we can’t take care of that monster, we won’t even see the exit. Worst case scenario, we can always find a way to climb back out of the entrance tunnel.”

Poppy sighed. “There’s just no reasoning with you, huh? All right, give it all you’ve got!”

Taking hold of her ocarina once more, Saria blocked out all the surrounding noise and chaos and focused on the music. It was a simple song, one that she had played a few times by this point. One, two, three. One, two, three. It was that simple. The final note sounded like the fluttering wings of a bird, rising with the morning sun. A wave of light ushered forth from the ocarina, washing over the undead remaining in the tunnel. Even the wizzrobe was left frozen by the song.

“This is the end!” Sheik shouted. He leaped into the air, driving his blade deep into the magician. After the pair came crashing to the ground, the wizzrobe’s form broke apart, leaving nothing behind but a small flame with a scowling face at its center. The remaining enemies were easy pickings for Sheik and Saria. Once they were finished, they approached the wizzrobe’s flame.

“What did you do, Kokiri?!” shouted the wizzrobe. “What trickery was that?”

“It was no trickery. It was a parting gift from the Composer Brothers,” said Saria.

“Flat and Sharp finished their research? But they would never give up their secrets to an outsider!”

“Research? What are you two talking about?” asked Sheik.

“It’s a bit of a story,” chuckled Saria. “But I had a run in with some other poes in the Royal Family tomb.”

Sheik stared daggers at Saria. “What were you doing in the Royal Family tomb?”

“Well I… You know…” Saria sighed. “All right, I’ll tell you.”

Saria went on to explain how she approached the graveyard in Kakariko Village thinking there was trouble. She talked about the storm, the bolt of lightning that opened the tomb, her encounter with Sharp and Flat, as well as her run-in with Kitoga, who was trying to steal the brothers’ secrets on Ganondorf’s behalf.

“And that is how I got this scimitar,” Saria smiled nervously.

Sheik, who had his arms crossed and was tapping his foot the whole story eventually said, “That would explain a few things. Impa and I had been wondering why such an important tombstone was blown apart.”

“Sorry about that…”

“It really is unbelievable,” said the wizzrobe. “Still, I can’t help but feel happy.”

“Oh? How come?” asked Saria.

“I once trained those two when we were still alive. They were terrible Sheikah, but great musicians. Being artists that lived in the shadows must have been quite a burden for them. I… Can’t help but feel glad they were able to share the fruit of their research. And with a royal envoy, no less!”

“So you’re not mad anymore?”

“Of course I’m still mad! But… To know I was bested by such capable and resourceful folk, it puts what’s left of my heart at ease. I’m sure you two will make fine Sheikah.”

Then the wizzrobe’s flame dissipated. A silence fell over the tunnel, but it was one that left Saria feeling at peace. She looked over to Sheik, and for just a moment, it seemed like his typically stern gaze had softened… If only a little.

“Looks like we beat the gauntlet,” said Saria. “Now we just have to reach the exit.”

“Yeah… I guess so,” said Sheik.

“What’s wrong? You’re almost a full Sheikah. Aren’t you happy?”

The boy was still gripping his dagger at the time. He stared upwards towards the incline of rock before him, which led to a large vault-like door with a huge lock and chain.

“I’m… Not sure.”

“Well… At least we’re almost through with this place, right, Poppy?”

“Exactly!” said the fairy. “Just a little more and we’ll be outside! Just think: sunshine, fresh air, and water that isn’t cursed! Doesn’t that sound great?”

“It… Does.” Sheik sheathed his dagger and made his way up. Saria and Poppy shrugged to each other and followed.

Further up ahead, Saria noticed a small side path which led to a patch of vegetation. She realized the plants were similar to ones from Kokiri Forest.

“Hey, we can get some supplies here!” said Saria. “Nuts, seeds, some leaves for medicine… Huh? What’s this?”

While Saria was sifting through the plants, she noticed an old decrepit journal hidden under the foliage. After picking it up and dusting it off, she saw the cover had the symbol of the Sheikah on it – an eye with three evenly-spaced triangles above it and a teardrop below it. Unfortunately, Saria couldn’t read anything in it.

“Hey Sheik, check it out. I think I found a journal belonging to your people.”

“Oh?” Sheik approached, taking the journal from Saria. “Let’s see what it says…” Saria watched Sheik’s one visible eye scan the pages, never blinking. He was skimming through fast, but as he approached the end, his eye went wide, and he dropped the journal out of shock.

“Huh? What’s wrong?” Saria’s eyes trailed away from Sheik to the journal. The last page it was on was dirtied by old bloodstains.

“It can’t be,” muttered Sheik. “Is that… Really what’s down here?”

Saria stood up, clasping her hands over her heart. “Sheik? What’s wrong? Are you okay?”

“I…” Sheik took a deep breath, composing himself. “There’s something you should know about what’s on the other side of that door. Let me tell you a story.” Saria gave a nod and listened closely to what the boy had to say. Sheik then said, “Are you familiar with the Hyrulean Civil War?”

“Only a little. My people abstained from the war, so I only learned about it after leaving the forest.”

“That doesn’t surprise me… Before I met you, all I knew of the Kokiri was that they lived peaceful, carefree lives in the distant forests. Many people simply called them ‘Forest Fairies’ – but that’s neither here nor there. While the Kokiri stayed safe inside the forests, war raged on for countless generations between the people of Hyrule. My people served the Royal Family from the shadows. This meant a lot of things. Sometimes we were guards, sometimes we were spies, and sometimes we were… Assassins. The Sheikah did everything we were asked to, for that… Was our purpose.”

“I had some idea of that, but what does that have to do with this journal?”

“Before I answer your question, promise me you won’t tell another soul about this.”

The stern, resolved look in Sheik’s eye returned, staring right through Saria. A part of her wondered if she could keep that promise, but for the time being, she would respect Sheik’s wish.

“I promise.”

“Thank you. Then let’s continue. As I said, the Sheikah were tasked with a variety of duties as ordered by the Royal Family. Sometimes that meant bringing back captured enemies and… Learning what we could from them. This isn’t something I’ve ever been trained to do, but I hear some of the methods used were… Unkind. It was dirty work, but it was done in the name of peace. However, in order to hide these dark deeds from the eye of the populace, the Sheikah needed to ensure that the captured enemies never saw the light of day again.”

“So the Sheikah killed them,” said Saria, her voice cold.

“Not just that,” Sheik shook his head. “Did it ever occur to you where the dead were taken, where their remains were buried? Our graveyard was reserved for Sheikah, members of the Royal Family, and these days, the locals of Kakariko Village.” Sheik paused, almost like he was struggling to speak. “That journal belonged to someone who helped with that duty, and behind this door… Is where the bodies were taken.”

Saria clenched her fist. Her thoughts returned to Impa and the nature of the dungeon she had made Saria and Sheik fight through. The dungeon that, in Sheik’s own words… Was repurposed.

“I understand,” said Saria.

“You do?” Sheik asked.

“Yes. I understand before the day is through, Impa and I are going to have a long talk.”

“Hey, I told you not to share what we talked about! Half the stuff I said I had to figure out on my own! Don’t you understand? If Impa finds out what I’ve uncovered, I could…”

Saria stepped forward, putting a hand on Sheik’s shoulder. “If it comes to that, Impa will have to go through me before she gets to you.” The Kokiri then looked up at the locked vault door once again. “I think it’s time we finished up here.”

“Yeah… You’re right.”

Saria and Sheik made their way up to the locked vault door, all while Poppy stayed hidden underneath Saria’s cap. She could tell the fairy was shaking. She slipped her hand under the cap to reach out to Poppy, who took hold of one of Saria’s fingers, calming down.

Don’t worry, my friend. I’ll see us through this. Our destination lies far from this place. I will not let one of the Sheikah’s dirty secrets be the end of me.

---

Saria and Sheik entered the final chamber. The room was dark, though faint light from up above allowed Saria to discern a few details. For one, she was walking on a floor composed entirely of bone. Hundreds upon hundreds of skeletons seemed to comprise the floor, walls, and even bits of the ceiling. What’s more, strange wriggling things could be seen in the far corners of the room.

And then the entrance sealed shut…

“Sheik, do you see anything?” asked Saria.

“Only… Tentacles. No. Not just tentacles. Hands.”

“Hands?”

Saria looked closer, realizing the wriggling things were long pale limbs, each ending in bony, red-tipped claws. The wriggling limbs reached ever towards the sky, though they didn’t move about much otherwise. It reminded Saria of certain plants she had seen in the Lost Woods, plants that naturally reacted when insects landed on them, closing shut to devour their prey.

“These must be used for hunting. But where is the rest of the beast?” asked Saria.

“Likely in hiding. I know how we can get it to show itself.” Sheik drew his blade, approaching one of the hands cautiously. As he readied to cut the limb, it bent down and grabbed hold of his head with a sudden burst of speed. As soon as it grabbed hold of Sheik, something burst out of the bone pile further in the room. It was vaguely humanoid in shape, fat and pale with splotches of red all across its calloused, rubbery hide. It had two arms ending in sharp nubs, and its long neck was currently pointed straight up, hiding the creature’s head from view.

“Don’t worry, Sheik! I’ll save you!” said Saria. She moved to help pry off the hand, which had a death grip around Sheik’s head. Sheik’s legs were kicking back and forth as he tried to pull himself free, but despite the pair’s combined efforts, the hand wouldn’t let go. “Fine then! How about this?”

Saria struck the long thin arm of the hand with her dagger, severing it. The rest of the limb holding Sheik went limp, slumping to the floor. The stump oozed green blood and disappeared into the bone pile. All while this went on, the beast itself had shuffled closer to the pair. It bent its neck down towards them, revealing a long bony face with a pointed nose. Its teeth were all thick incisors, its eye sockets were empty black pits, and its mouth was opening so wide that Saria thought it could devour someone whole. Sheik stood motionless, his body seemingly paralyzed with fear.

“Sheik! Move!” shouted Saria.

This snapped the boy out of it just long enough for him to kick the creature’s body in panic. The impact of the blow caused the monster to wriggle slightly, but it was clear no damage was done. The monster responded to this by clamping down its jaws on Sheik’s leg. The boy howled in pain as blood seeped from the wound.

“Let him go!!” cried Saria. She charged the beast, bringing her scimitar around to strike its head. This caused the beast to scream and let go of Sheik, who fell to the ground. The monster itself retreated into the bone pile, moving its pointed arms swiftly to dig its way underground. Saria used her own body to shield Sheik from the debris kicked up by the monster’s burrowing.

With the monster gone for the moment, Saria tried putting pressure on Sheik’s leg wound. The boy hissed in pain and said, “Saria! I have your medicine! It’s in my left pouch!”

Hearing these words, Saria pulled out her medicine pouch and started applying some of the powder to the wound. She knew it would sting, but it would be enough to staunch the bleeding… For now. Using the leg afterwards was another story.

“Hey, look out!” shouted Poppy. Saria looked around, noticing the hands were on the move. Even the one she had severed had seemingly grown back, and the limbs were wriggling through the bone pile as if searching for her and Sheik.

“If you use the rest, it should get you back on your feet. I’ll keep the monster busy in the meantime,” said Saria. Sheik just gave a silent nod and did what he could to heal himself. As for Saria, she acted as a barrier between the hands and Sheik. When one got too close, she slashed at it with her scimitar, causing it to retreat. After three of the hands were wounded, the monster burst from the bone pile once more, sniffing the air with its beak-like nose.

“It can’t see us!” said Poppy. “It must use touch and smell to find its prey.”

“If that’s the case, then let’s try this,” said Saria. She picked up a bone and hucked it at one of the remaining hands. The hand grabbed hold of the bone, squeezing it with enough force to shatter it into pieces. The monster waddled through the bone pile towards the last hand, biting at the air. When it became clear there was nothing there to eat, it receded back into the ground.

By this time, Sheik was back on his feet. “It’s strong, but not very smart. We can win this.”

Hands sprouted from the bone pile once more. Saria and Sheik tossed bones towards them, watching to see if they attracted the monster. Nothing worked at first, but after Sheik threw a skull, a hand eagerly clamped down on it, driving its claws into the skull’s eye sockets. The monster emerged again, sniffing the air. This time, however, it sensed the bait and turned towards Saria and Sheik instead.

Sheik tossed a volley of needles at the monster. They pierced its hide, but did little else.

“So only its head is vulnerable,” said Sheik. “I had hoped that wasn’t a certainty.”

“We can still strike it when it tries to bite,” said Saria. “We just have to be patient.”

The monster slithered closer and closer to the pair, elongating its jaw in anticipation. Saria and Sheik readied to attack, but as they did, the other hands receded into the ground. When they reemerged, two of them appeared by Saria, grabbing her by her ankles and pulling her to the ground. Sheik tried to move in to help, but another hand emerged, pulling him to the ground as well. The last hand pinned Saria’s sword arm, and the monster moved in closer and closer, ready to bite. A mixture of fear and revulsion welled up inside of Saria. The monster moved its head closer and closer, the stench of death emanating from its maw. Before it could eat Saria, Sheik pulled out his chain and lashed it around the monster’s neck, shocking the beast with magic volts.

“Saria, your dagger!” shouted Poppy.

The Kokiri pulled out her dagger and stabbed the hand holding her sword hand down, then the other hands holding her legs. Now free, she got to her feet and hucked her dagger at the hand holding Sheik down.

“It’s trying to keep its neck craned. Help me, Saria!” shouted Sheik.

“On it!”

Saria rushed to Sheik’s side, helping to pull the chain around the monster’s neck. With their combined strength, they yanked the creature to the ground. Having done so, Saria saw that it had no legs, and instead the bottom of the monster connected to the hands like they were tentacles. A new layer of revulsion entered her mind, but she ignored it in favor of attacking.

Saria and Sheik struck the monster’s head over and over with their blades in a mad fury. After it stopped moving, they gave it a few more thwacks just to be sure. With the monster slain, its body seemed to naturally deflate and slither back into the bone pile, disappearing. Whether it was dead or merely unconscious, Saria had no idea.

The bars on the entrance released, and an opening in one of the walls came down, showing the way to the exit. Finally, a swirl of light circled around a portion of the room, revealing a chest.

“What… Is it?” asked Saria.

“I’m not sure. Care to check it out?” asked Sheik. Seeing as the boy had a limp from his leg injury, Saria gave him a nod and walked towards the chest.

After checking to make sure it was safe, Saria unlatched the chest and looked inside. A strange hand mirror was contained within, with a purple body, gold ring at the bottom of its handle, and three pointed red jewels on the top of the rim. An eye-like design could be seen in the see-through lens of the mirror, and looking through it made Saria’s head feel funny.

“Wait, is that…?” Sheik moved closer, taking hold of the mirror. “I don’t believe it. How long has this been here?”

“What is it?” asked Poppy.

“An ancient Sheikah relic. It’s called the Lens of Truth, for those with the magic power to activate it can see through all illusions and trickery.”

“Is that so… Then you should have it,” said Saria. “It is a Sheikah relic, after all.”

“No, you deserve it more,” Sheik handed the lens back. “While I did what I could in this dungeon, time and time again I saw how much more you accomplished. Were it not for you, I would have just been another body to feed that monstrosity. To the victor go the spoils.”

“You saved my life too, but if you’re really certain, then I’ll hold onto it for now.”

Saria slipped the handle of the lens under her belt and checked to make sure it was secure. Then, Saria, Poppy, and Sheik made their way through the new tunnel towards the exit. A huge stone slab of a door had lowered about halfway, but there was still plenty of room for them to exit out of the dungeon. At last they were outside… And Impa was waiting for them.

Impa approached slowly, clapping all the while. Sheik looked relieved to see her, but Saria held nothing but contempt for the woman’s applause.

“Finally, you both return! For this, I am glad,” said Impa.

“You!” Saria began. “How dare you!!”

“Saria!” Sheik reached out a hand, trying to pull her back. Saria shrugged off the boy and pressed forward.

“Do you have any idea what you just put us through? What you just put Sheik through?”

Impa narrowed her eyes at Saria. “Of course I do. I personally ran through the dungeon to place your gear.”

“Then you’ve got a lot of nerve applauding us like we just won some simple game. That whole dungeon was a death trap. You should have known it was a death trap. And for what? Training? Tests? That went way too far!”

“Yeah, you tell her, Saria!” said Poppy. One look from Impa quieted the fairy down. “Y-yeah, you… Tell her.” The fairy then went back to hiding under Saria’s cap.

“So you don’t like the test I put you through, is that it? Then let me remind you of something: you never had to take the test, Saria. You are not one of the Sheikah. While I was happy to train you along with Sheik, you remain an outsider. You are ignorant of our ways.”

“I understand that. I only have myself to blame for going down there. But Sheik is a different matter. It was expected of him. Required of him! He had to put his life on the line countless times in order to get through.”

“Yes. We Sheikah must always be prepared to put our life on the line for our duty. Is this not what Sheik has told you? Even though we Sheikah were prepared to disappear in the recent era of peace, the flames of war have been fanned by Ganondorf and his minions. There would be no room for those unwilling to commit themselves to their duties.”

“And this I understand perfectly,” said Sheik, bending the knee to Impa. Despite this putting a strain on his wounded leg, Sheik did not wince or complain. The pain Sheik didn’t express Saria felt inside twice over.

“Sheik… I know you’re committed, but you’re just a boy…” said Saria.

“And I don’t have enough time to grow up.”

Impa sighed and crouched down, extending a hand towards Sheik. Magical energy gathered, and with a flash of light, Impa healed the boy’s wound.

“There. That should help,” said Impa.

“The pain… It’s gone! Thank you, master,” said Sheik.

“And as for you, Saria. I know my methods seem cruel, but there are things you must know before you judge. Every Sheik must be put to the test before becoming a true Sheikah. The test has varied over the years, with this one being the least dangerous of them. I was left to die in the dungeon I was sent through, but I persevered, and I returned to the surface stronger for it. This is the Sheikah way. Even so, I did not want to lose either of you. That’s why I’ve been watching.”

“Y-you’ve been watching?” asked Sheik. Impa nodded.

“Every step you took, every decision you made, I was there to witness it. I watched you both travel through the dungeon, admiring your courage, creativity, and determination. More than once did I want to step in and help, but I knew that if I did, then it would all be for naught. I will not always be around, and if you two cannot defeat such challenges on your own, then the test would have been a failure.”

“And if you told us you were watching from the start, we wouldn’t have taken the test as seriously,” said Saria.

“Precisely.”

“So you really were beside me all along…” said Sheik. “But then, that means you-”

Impa held out a hand. “I’m aware of what you spoke of. I’m aware of its… Implications, but that isn’t important right now. The ghosts of the past can be exorcised when peace returns. Right now we have other matters to attend to.”

“Already?” asked Saria.

“Indeed. You are both officially Sheikah, after all, and the world did not stop spinning while you idled away underground.”

“Then what is our mission?” asked Sheik.

Impa explained the situation. The ruler of Hyrule, King Emmerich, was sent a message from Ganondorf. Zora’s Domain had become frozen over, and Princess Ruto was taken captive. As Hyrule relies on Zora’s River for water, Ganondorf threatened the king with cutting off the river completely until he gave into his demands, which included giving him the Ocarina of Time, as well as the Goron’s Ruby.

“The Zora have been allies of the Royal Family for generations,” said Impa. “We simply cannot let this attack go unanswered. But dealing with this will require a coordinated effort. I would call upon you both if you would permit it.”

Saria thought on the matter for only a moment before she said, “Fine, I’ll help. But we’re not done talking about that dungeon.”

“I’ll be more than happy to hear you out once this is all over,” Impa smiled.

“Then who shall go where?” asked Sheik.

“I will send you to Zora’s Domain. I want you to figure out how it’s been frozen and see if you can reverse the effect. Retreat if it becomes too unsafe and seek me out in the castle to report what you learn. Once we figure out how to thaw the river, Ganondorf will only have his hostages to fall back on. And that’s where you come in, Saria. I want you to head to Gerudo Desert.”

“Gerudo Desert? I can’t imagine they’ll let me just walk in if they’re preparing for war. How am I supposed to enter?” asked Saria.

“I’m glad you asked. We have an ally working from the inside. Once you reach the entrance to the territory, there should be messages from them you can follow. Seek them out, and they’ll help you reach the Gerudo. And remember, while Princess Ruto is your top priority, she isn’t the only hostage Ganondorf has. Several people have gone missing as of late, including your friends from Lon Lon Ranch.”

“Malon?!” said Sheik.

“That fiend!” said Saria.

“I understand how you feel, but be careful not to let your emotions get the better of you. The Gerudo are an entire people of warriors and strategists. While the soldiers of the crown sat idle during the near decade of peace, the Gerudo have only intensified their training. You can’t take a single one of them lightly. Do you understand?”

“I do,” Saria nodded. “But what will you be doing during all of this?”

“My sworn duty. I will remain by King Emmerich’s and Princess Zelda’s side until the conflict has passed. After all, these demands could merely be a distraction. It wouldn’t be the first time Gerudo have tried abducting the princess.”

“I see… Then when should we leave?”

“As soon as possible. Rest, eat, stretch, and exchange gear if you need to, but do not idle for long. I wish we had time for a proper ceremony, but unfortunately, we don’t have such a luxury.”

“I understand,” said Sheik. “I’ll only need a minute.”

“With luck, dealing with this current scheme of Ganondorf’s will set him back and give us a chance to better prepare for his next move. During that time, we’ll have to decide on a proper name for you, Sheik.”

The boy’s eye lit up at those words, and Sheik nodded, finally standing up. “I’ll do my best, master.”

“See that you do.”

Saria then reached into one of her pouches, pulling out the Goron’s Ruby. “Here, Impa. Since I’ll be going to Gerudo Desert, it’s not safe with me. It would be better for you to hold onto it.”

“If you’re certain, then I will guard it with my life. Now unless you have anything else to tell me, you are both dismissed.”

Impa left the hidden village while Sheik walked towards the sleeping quarters he and Saria had been using. Saria followed the boy, asking, “Are you really okay with all this?”

“Okay with what? Doing my job?” scowled Sheik.

“I mean all of it. We just got out of that death trap, and we’re already being sent off to do work for Impa and the Royal Family.”

“Would you rather we abandon the Zora?”

“I’m not saying that, but… Aren’t you pushing yourself a little hard?”

“Saria, I understand how you feel, but I’ve been training for this moment my entire life. This is what I’m meant to do. You saw first-hand what I had to go through to earn the right to work for Impa. It’s what I wanted, and everything you’re saying is just belittling me and my efforts.”

“I’m not trying to belittle you!”

“Then leave me be! If you truly cared, you would believe in me the way Impa does. But clearly you see me as nothing but a child.”

“You are a child!” Saria stopped, covering her mouth with her hand as she saw Sheik’s eye go wide. Sheik quickly tossed all of Saria’s gear he collected in the dungeon on a bed.

“Here are your things. I’m glad we’re on separate missions.”

Then Sheik was gone. Saria didn’t even have the strength to call out to him. She just sat on the bed.

“Saria…” said Poppy, climbing out of the Kokiri’s cap. “It’s… It’s not your fault.”

“Then whose fault is it? I just wanted to look after him, but everything I do seems to be pushing him away. What do I do, Poppy?”

“I don’t know. I think he just needs time.”

“Yeah… You’re probably right.” Saria sighed, her shoulders drooping. “Time… I wish we all had more time.”

Saria and Poppy took the time to eat and drink some water. After the Kokiri replenished some of her supplies, she readjusted her clothes, made sure her pouches and belts were secure, then left the hidden village behind. Her next destination… Gerudo Desert.

Chapter Text

Saria left for Gerudo Valley. The skies were cloudy, and a cold breeze blew across the fields of Hyrule. What few animals that could be seen looked restless, like they knew something Saria didn’t. Saria pulled her cloak tightly around her body as she crossed the fields. The winds and birds continued their somber song, echoing across those vast grassy plains.

The path from Kakariko Village to Gerudo Valley took Saria south and west across the fields until she reached more arid lands of orange rock and stone. A cliff with a wooden fence built around its edges loomed over the path, as did a great tree that felt strangely empty – though Saria knew not why. Just as she reached a fork in the road, Saria bumped into a familiar face.

“Salesman! What are you doing here?” she asked.

“Why if it isn’t Saria. Fancy meeting you out here,” the Salesman grinned. He was in his normal attire and carrying his huge travel pack on his back like it was nothing. Several masks hung from the outside of the pack, their faces staring out in every direction. “As for me, I’m actually on a business trip. Things are getting… Too tense in Castle Town for my liking, so much that no one’s been visiting my store anymore. Everyone’s worried, no one’s smiling. It’s… A sad state of affairs.”

Saria’s eyes turned downcast. “I’m sorry to hear that.”

“It’s all right. I won’t be gone forever. I just try to go where my business is most welcome. Speaking of business, did you ever find a buyer for that mask I lent you?”

“Oh! Yes, here’s your fee.”

Saria passed over a handful of rupees to the smiling man, who counted them and nodded. “Good, good. I’m glad we could settle things before I left. Before I go, I have one last mask I can lend you.”

“But how am I supposed to pay you back later if you’re leaving?”

“Oh, I’m sure we’ll meet again someday. I don’t know where or when, but I just have that feeling, you know?” The Salesman then reached into his pack and pulled out a soft yellow bunny ear headband. “Here. Take it.”

Saria eyed the mask curiously. Not only did it have soft bouncy ears, but it also had decorative eyes between them. “I… I see. This mask is pretty cute. You really want me to have this?”

“Yes. That Bunny Hood is a rather handy mask to have in these parts. Supposedly it resembles a sacred beast and can keep monsters at bay. I don’t know how much of that is true, but I did wear it quite a lot in my early years as a merchant. It’s like a good luck charm.”

“It sounds important. I’ll take good care of it, and if I ever find a buyer, maybe we can do business again in the future.”

“I’d like that. Despite the bumps in the road we’ve had, I would say you were my best customer. Farewell for now, Saria. I hope when we next meet, you still have a reason to smile.”

Saria watched as the Happy Mask Salesman walked down the road, disappearing into a distant forest. A part of her wanted to stop him, still curious about what he was really doing in Hyrule, but… She didn’t. She simply waved goodbye and hoped for the best.

“What a strange man,” said Poppy, poking her head out of Saria’s hood.

“Strange… But kind, in his own way.” Saria looked up at the sky. The sun was already on its way towards the horizon. Soon it would be dark, and the stalchildren would be upon them. She decided to put on the bunny hood, and though she knew it was just a mask, somehow, she felt a little bit safer. “Come on, Poppy. Let’s get going.”

Saria continued traveling towards Gerudo Valley, sticking close to the shadows as she evaded patrols. Security was tight, and it wasn’t hard to imagine why. With war looming on the horizon, it was clear the Gerudo weren’t going to let anyone in… Or out.

“See any good vantage points?” whispered Saria.

“I see a cliff you can scale,” whispered Poppy. “Should keep you out of sight for now.”

Saria followed her fairy’s advice and crept towards the cliff. The rough, rocky exterior made it easy to grab hold of the wall, and after making it to about two thirds of the way up, she found a small ledge with a boulder in its center. The Kokiri decided to take cover there and keep an eye out for movement down below.

Time passed as Saria watched groups of Gerudo warriors and monsters travel through the valley. It was slow-going due to how the valley walls bottlenecked how many could travel through the area.

“Where do you think they’re going?” whispered Poppy.

“They’re probably going to make camp out in the fields,” whispered Saria. “I would have thought they’d stay put in the valley since it’s so defensible, but… I guess they have other plans.”

“What should we do? Should we go back and tell Impa?”

Saria shook her head. “I’m sure her agents would have seen this by now. We just have to wait for an opening in the march, then we’ll slip inside.”

The Kokiri thought of something Impa told her before they parted ways. It was a message from the supposed ally within the Gerudo. Truth shines brightest just before noon. It was a curious statement – specific, too. Saria wasn’t sure how this insider operated, but it was clear they had some kind of plan. It was just a matter of watching… And waiting.

More time passed as night faded, and darkness gave way to comforting blue hues, later growing brighter and brighter with the rising of the sun. True to the Salesman’s word, no monster bothered Saria or Poppy all night, and with no sign of marching troops and guards changing shifts, it was time for Saria to move on. She used what rock cover was available and slipped past the patrols. Up ahead, there was a small cliff where a bridge was built at the top – one that could be raised or lowered by the guards, allowing for easy travel from one elevation to the other, passing over a watery plateau beneath it. At the moment, the bridge was raised. While the water was troublesome, it was also shallow. With all the skills she had been practicing under Impa’s watchful eye, Saria had no trouble maneuvering through the water without making a sound. Then she clambered up the cliff face and slipped past the bridge guards before finally reaching the true divide between Gerudo Valley and the rest of Hyrule.

Before Saria was a stretch of rocky land and a small brick path down the middle, connected to a great wooden bridge with a pair of wooden pillars holding a banner on each side. She could tell that not only were there more guards, but also a huge metal fence on the far side of the bridge. It was the only path leading in and out of the valley proper, and the Gerudo knew that. If troops from Hyrule ever tried invading, it would be a simple matter of destroying the bridge and harrowing anyone trying to make a new one with stones and arrows.

As Saria pondered these details, a thought crept into her mind. How do I get across? It’s not as if the Gerudo would let her in, and the distance between each side of the cliff was far too great for even her to cover with a jump. Outside of finding a way to fly or glide across, it seemed as if Saria were at an impasse. The Kokiri looked up. It was almost noon.

Does our ally have a plan for this? Saria wondered.

The sun continued its journey across the sky. Light shined bright, and shadows shifted and darkened. Seconds before noon, something shimmered amidst a rock pile some distance away from the bridge. It seemed too well-timed to be a coincidence, so Saria approached the rocks. Sure enough, something was hidden underneath. It was a message in a bottle.

“So that’s what she meant,” Saria whispered. She used the rocks as cover and uncorked the bottle, reading the message. “In order to overcome great obstacles, sometimes you must take a leap of faith.” The Kokiri looked over at the cliff, hearing the distant sound of rushing water. “There’s no way…”

Poppy took the message and set it down on the ground, walking back and forth while reading it on her own. “A leap of faith… Yeah, I can’t think of many other ways to interpret that.”

“But is the water deep enough, I wonder?” Saria crossed her arms, thinking hard about what to do next. “Hm… I wonder what Link would do in this situation?”

It was then that Saria heard a familiar sound. It was the clucking of a cucco. She and Poppy poked their heads out from behind the rock pile, and sure enough, a lone cucco was grazing on what little vegetation was in the area.

“Poppy… I think I have an idea.”

The Kokiri crept quietly, inching closer to the feathery bird. So distracted by grazing, the cucco failed to realize Saria was upon it until it was too late. Bird in hand, Saria made her way for the cliff furthest from the bridge, away from prying eyes. Poppy was quick to follow, and after the Kokiri jumped, she held the cucco above her head, holding tight. It wasn’t the first time she had pulled such a trick. When she was helping Anju gather her birds in Kakariko Village, she had used a cucco’s impeccable flying skills to hop a tall fence and reach a bird trapped on the other side. She knew the cucco could support her weight and still fly. The question was for how long.

“I can’t believe I didn’t have to talk you into that,” said Poppy, holding the message bottle. “You’re growing more brazen by the day. Pretty soon you’ll be just like Fado.”

“A terrifying thought indeed,” Saria chuckled.

The Kokiri, fairy, and cucco floated gently towards the flowing river at the bottom of the cliff. The white rapids splashed against the jagged rocks, moving swiftly down towards a waterfall. Strangely, there was a carved-out path near the bottom of the cliff on one side. There was a Gerudo woman with short hair, a dark cave entrance, and a cow… The Gerudo woman was sitting on a stool milking the cow when she looked up and saw Saria floating towards her.

“It’s you!” said the woman. The Gerudo then got up and ran towards the cave, bucket in hand.

As Saria landed on the ground, she set the cucco down and ran after the woman. “I hope we didn’t just blow our cover!” said Saria.

“Well at least we have a river to escape to if you did,” said Poppy.

Saria and Poppy reached the entrance of the cave. The Kokiri’s eyes adjusted as she stepped in, the light of the sun fading as a new light took its place – one of softly glowing gemstones. A small path forward led to a short set of carved stairs, as well as a guard near an open door. It was a Gerudo woman wearing simple, drab clothing, as well as a cloth face mask. She gestured to the open door, and Saria nodded, stepping inside. The door led to a small cavern where the short haired Gerudo from before was talking to another Gerudo – one who was especially tall and slender, wearing pink and white Gerudo garb, including gold and red jewelry.

“And she flew down with nothing but a cucco! A cucco, of all things!” said the short haired woman.

“That’s quite enough,” said the taller Gerudo. “I have much to discuss with our new guest.” The woman turned towards Saria, then the other Gerudo turned as well, almost yelping in surprise.

“Gah! Where did you come from?!”

“The door,” said Saria, gesturing behind her.

“I-I see!” The Gerudo leaned towards the taller one, whispering, “Be careful of this one, Nabooru. She makes too little noise for one so brazen…” The short haired Gerudo then walked off, going down another passage and disappearing.

The tall Gerudo, Nabooru, sighed. She then took a seat on a soft square pillow and gestured to another across from her. “Come, sit. We are safe in this place. You needn’t worry. I know who you are.”

While Saria was on edge from being in enemy territory, she played along and sat down. “So, are you the one Impa spoke of?”

“I am,” the Gerudo smiled. “I take it you found my message.”

“I did,” Saria took the bottle from Poppy. “Was the cucco your doing as well?”

The woman laughed. “Oh goodness, no! I had thought for you to dive into the river. A perilous jump to be sure, but far from lethal. I suppose your way works just fine, though! I wonder now if a cucco could support my weight…” After the woman stopped laughing, she said, “Now then, allow me to introduce myself. I’m Nabooru of the Gerudo. And you are Saria of the Kokiri?”

“I am,” Saria nodded.

“And I’m Poppy!” said the fairy.

“It’s good to meet you both. No doubt Impa has told you a little of what has been going on, but perhaps my perspective would help clear things up.”

“I’d appreciate it,” said Saria.

“Then first of all, let me make one thing clear. Though I am Gerudo, I am no friend of Ganondorf. We may both be thieves, but we’re completely different. He and his followers steal from women and children, and kill those that get in their way. This is but one of the reasons why I now work against him.”

“I figured that much. It makes sense that someone as vile as him would make enemies among his own people. But then why work underground? Have you not tried fighting Ganondorf and his followers?” asked Saria.

“His forces are too strong now. He already has most of the Gerudo on his side, but recently he’s been recruiting monsters and letting them live among us. Ordinarily this would be unthinkable, but there’s something you need to understand about us. The Gerudo race consists only of women, you see. Only one man is born among our people every hundred years. The law dictates that such a man must become our king, and the king’s word is absolute. In other words…”

“Your law allows his word to become law,” said Saria. “So if a Gerudo complained about the monsters, they would be swiftly dealt with.”

“Exactly. I, however, will never bow to such an evil man. Thus, I work in the shadows.” Nabooru gestured to a curtain covering another tunnel entrance. “This way leads to the heart of our land, to Gerudo Fortress where most of us live. I had been helping those who did not wish to live under Ganondorf’s iron fist, bringing them down here to the river and ferrying them to Lake Hylia. The waterfall is not as steep as it appears, and the waters grow gentler the further from this place they go. I met Impa when I first began this work, and as we saw eye to eye, I decided I would work with her, keeping her informed about the situation here in the valley. No doubt you’ve seen how dire things have become.”

“Yes… I’ve seen many of Ganondorf’s troops march out of the valley. It’s pretty clear what they’re preparing for.”

“War…” Nabooru sighed. “I had hoped that the peace treaty would have lasted a little longer than a decade, but it seems it was never to be.” Nabooru had been looking up towards the path to the fortress when she spoke. She then returned her attention to Saria and said, “We have to do everything we can to stop that man. I’ll take you to the fortress and help ferry out the prisoners, but you’ll have to find them on your own once you’re there. Understood?”

“Of course,” said Saria. “It’ll be easier to sneak around by myself anyway.”

Nabooru stood up and smiled. “You’ve got a good head on your shoulders. Impa was right to trust you with this mission. Now come! Time is of the essence.”

The Gerudo woman walked to the curtains and passed through, gesturing for Saria to follow. The Kokiri did so, with Poppy sticking close. Several minutes passed as Nabooru helped Saria navigate the labyrinthine tunnels of the cave until finally, they reached the outskirts of the fortress.

“There are several entrances into the fortress, but I recommend that one over there, near the gate. No one needs to pass through that gate right now, so it’s the least guarded area. Follow the path leading up near the gate and try that first entrance there,” Nabooru pointed.

“I can do that,” said Saria. “I hope to see you soon.” As the Kokiri was about to step out, Nabooru stopped her.

“Before you go… I know Impa probably told you to focus on finding that Zora princess, but if you can… I’d like you to free as many prisoners as possible. Not only are there innocent Hylians among them, but even some of my own people. I don’t want to think of what will become of them if they’re left behind. So please… Save them for me.”

“I will.”

“Thank you. I’ll try to think of a suitable reward for you once you’re done here,” Nabooru smiled. “Now off with you!”

Saria left the cave behind, using the cliff along the outer rim of the area for cover. Soon enough she’d be inside the fortress. And from there? She wasn’t sure. Guards, traps, and who knows what else. But despite the danger, Saria was calm. Tired, but calm. When an opening in the guard patrol showed itself, she silently dashed towards the fortress entrance.

Don’t worry, Nabooru. I won’t let you down!

---

Sheik made his way to Zora’s Domain. After leaving the stairs that led to Kakariko Village behind, he could already feel a faint chill in the air. Crossing the waters and following Zora’s River upstream, he could see that portions of it were icy, choking the river’s flow. Even snowflakes were falling. It wouldn’t be long until the river was completely frozen, and Hyrule’s water supply was cut off entirely.

Up ahead, boulders were blocking the left path – no doubt left behind by Ganondorf’s minions. Hopping over the boulders was easy for the Sheikah. On the other side, Sheik saw a shivering cucco and a frightened shirtless man scarfing down beans from a sack. The man sat near a cliff face and a metal fence.

“You there!” Sheik said upon approach. “Have you seen anyone come through here?”

“Gah!!” The fat man raised his hands in a fright. “Don’t hurt me! I’m just a humble bean seller!”

Realizing he needed to calm down, Sheik took a breath and said, “Listen, I’m not here to hurt you. I just want to know what’s going on.”

“O-oh, okay. Well just earlier, I saw a bunch of monsters march through here. I didn’t see who was leading them. I just hid behind this fence until they were gone. I was going to leave, but as they were passing through, a big one smashed a part of the cliff and closed off the exit with rocks!”

“All right. I’ll make a path for you, then. Head to Kakariko Village once you’re through. You’ll be safe there.”

Sheik approached the boulders once more. They were an ordinary enough type of rock, one that Sheik was used to practicing on. Impa had Sheik train for many long hours to hone his hand-to-hand techniques. Such training paid off when fighting foes in the Sheikah dungeon, and it would pay off here as well. After taking a wide stance and a deep breath, Sheik drew his right fist back and punched the boulder in front of him, shattering it to pieces. Sheik shook his hand, feeling pain in his knuckles, but it was done. Better this than making the large man risk harm on the still-forming ice.

“Thank you, thank you! I’ll go to the village straight away!” The bean seller took off running, with the cucco following after.

No doubt everyone from here to the waterfall heard that. I’ll just have to make do, thought Sheik.

The boy continued following the river, taking cover where he could. Low growls and jingling chainmail kept him on alert, and it wasn’t long until Sheik saw the monsters the bean seller mentioned. They were tall, muscular creatures with brown skin, dog-like faces, and red eyes, wearing a mixture of spiked leather armor and chainmail.

Moblins! thought Sheik. They must be working for Ganondorf.

The beastmen wielded spears, pacing and sniffing around what land there was beside the river. Sheik had never encountered a moblin before, but he had learned a good deal about them from Impa. Monster tribes like the moblins led raids on encampments during the Hyrulean Civil War. They were rarely if ever allied with one side during the war, and merely took advantage of times when soldiers were too tired or wounded to defend their supplies. Moblins earned a reputation for being especially bloodthirsty, but their aggressive nature acted as a shield for their weakness. A single well-placed needle to the back of the head was enough to take one down. The moblin guard crumbled to the ground, burning up into nothing. Seeing one of their own taken down, the other moblins in the area marched over to where it died. By the time they were done searching, Sheik was long gone.

The path continued its incline, rising higher and higher to eventually meet with the waterfall further up. A single wooden bridge connected one side of the path to another, and it would have been simple enough to cross, but as Sheik reached the bridge, a moblin turned the corner and saw him. Sheik’s eyes went wide as the moblin charged, howling like a demon. It stomped its way across the bridge and forced Sheik to leap away. While Moblins weren’t difficult to kill when their guard was down, they were near-impossible to take down when they charged.

Once the moblin came to a screeching halt, there was a moment where it dropped its guard and had to look around. Sheik took advantage of this and pulled out his chain, whipping it around the moblin’s leg before electrifying it, shocking the moblin into unconsciousness. A single blow to the back of the head was enough to finish it off. Unfortunately, the moblin’s charge had alerted the other guards from before, who Sheik could already hear marching up the path towards him. Sheik ran across the wooden bridge and severed the rope, causing it to collapse into the river below. After that, Sheik kept running. He wasn’t so naïve as to think the coursing river would deter the moblins forever, but it would at least slow them down.

After fully circling around the cliff’s path, Sheik found himself before the snaking paths in front of the waterfall. Most of the waterfall was frozen solid, though parts of it were thinner than others. The freezing process wasn’t complete, it seemed, as some water could still be seen flowing beneath the ice. Looking down at the river’s icy waters, Sheik got an idea. He hid in a high-up area behind a gossip stone – one of many ancient Sheikah carvings left all over Hyrule. Below, Sheik could see the other moblins wading through the water, lifting their spears overhead as they barked and growled at each other in their own tongue. When they were right where Sheik wanted them, the boy hopped down unseen, charged magic into his chain, and struck the river, electrifying the water and shocking the moblins. While they were stunned, a few needles helped finish them off. With the guards dealt with, Sheik breathed a sigh of relief.

Sheik made his way up to the front of the waterfall, stopping on the metal plate embedded in the ground. He had visited this place many times in the past, escorting members of the Royal Family who had business with the Zora. A familiar tune would normally be enough to open the entrance, but as it was covered in ice, a bit of brute force was in order. Using the same technique Sheik shattered the boulder with, the boy struck the ice covering the waterfall, breaking off huge chunks and revealing the flowing water beneath. That, of course, was merely the first step. Next, Sheik drew his harp. It was an old harp, one passed down throughout the generations. Gold in color, the tips of its handles curled like bird beaks, and ancient engravings like that of a bird spreading its wings decorated the harp from its bottom to its tips. As Sheik strummed the notes for the song, his mind wandered back to the past…

“Keep up now, you’re falling behind!” said Impa.

“Of course, master,” Sheik whispered.

Many years ago, Sheik had taken his first trip to Zora’s Domain, staying close and out of sight of the Royal Family. Among the people they were watching over included the King of Hyrule and the young Princess Zelda, as well a pair of guards that bordered them at all times. The guards, of course, were mostly for show. The true guards were Impa and her apprentice, the young Sheik.

Sheik finally reached the gossip stone platform where Impa awaited. The woman said nothing, but that was enough to know he had not erred. At that point, he simply stayed close and watched the others walk up the path towards the waterfall. King Emmerich was imposing as ever, wearing fine robes, his resplendent cuirass, and a crown atop his flowing blonde hair. Zelda was wearing a beautiful lavender and purple dress, as well as a matching headdress. The girl was nervous, tightly clutching a blue ocarina. After the group reached the front of the waterfall, they stopped, and King Emmerich looked at Zelda.

“Now, go ahead and play it, just like I showed you,” he said.

“A-all right. I’ll try,” said Zelda.

The young girl then put her lips to the ocarina and began to play. Despite her nervous demeanor, she played wonderfully, and the magic song parted the waterfall, alerting the Zora inside to extend a bridge and let the Hylians across.

“You did well, Zelda,” said the king. Then with guards in-tow, the king and princess crossed the bridge.

“It’s time,” said Impa. “We’ll cross once the bridge recedes.”

“Are we not allowed on the bridge?” asked Sheik.

“No. Such niceties are reserved for the Royal Family.”

“I see… Why are we here, anyway? Aren’t the two guards enough?”

“We’re the King’s protection, of course. In an ideal world, we would have no reason to be here, but even though the Zora have been allied with the King for years, we can never afford to let our guard down – even for a moment. You would do well to remember that.”

“I’m sorry…”

“Don’t be,” smiled Impa. “I would rather you ask questions than blindly follow everything I tell you. At least it means you’re paying attention. Now, let us be off.”

Impa hopped down to the ground and swiftly crossed the path, passing through the waterfall. Sheik did much the same, doing what he could to keep pace with his master. He would return to this place many times afterwards. Sometimes with Impa, sometimes without. The many trips blurred together. But the song that opened the way to Zora’s Domain… That was something he would never forget. It was soft and gentle… Just like a lullaby.

The song complete, Sheik’s mind returned to the present. The waterfall split down the middle as if by magic, and the way into Zora’s Domain was open. There was no bridge today… Just silence. Cold, chilling, eerie silence. Unsure of what fate had befallen the Zora, Sheik steeled himself for what lied ahead and dashed through the waterfall.

Zora’s Domain, a place known for its beautiful flowing waters and shimmering rocks, had become something of an ice cavern. Its waters frozen, the ground coated in thick layers of snow, and all throughout the cave, Sheik could see Zora frozen in crystals of red ice. Monsters, mostly moblins, were living inside the cavern as if it were their own, either standing guard at key points, resting on stools, or even warming up next to a large fire. Sheik dared not think of what kind of meat the monsters were roasting, and instead mapped out a path to take. Unlike along the river, the monsters were more relaxed here, so sneaking and taking them out would be easier. Sheik’s main concern were the icy statues roaming the cavern called freezards. These horned blocks of ice were the work of magic and patrolled along paths set by the magician who created them. Occasionally, a freezard would spot an area that didn’t look frozen enough, breathe a mist of icy cold on that spot, then continue along their patrol. More than once did Sheik spot a freezard approaching the campfire in the cave, only for a frustrated moblin to pick it up by its head, spin it around, and send it on its way.

Let’s see… The freezards won’t alert the whole cave if they spot me, but their absence will be noticed. The moblins are a much greater concern… Right now, I’ll avoid conflict as much as possible and focus on finding the source of this ice. Sheik patted one of his hidden travel packs. Hopefully this blue fire will come in handy.

Sheik stayed low to the ground and followed the path leading to the stairs. Further up, a moblin was standing guard, holding his spear to the best of his ability. He was clearly shivering from the cold, which was why he stood so close to a standing torch. Occasionally a backdraft from one of the freezard’s breath attacks would blow upwards and threaten to snuff out the flame in the torch, which the guard used his free hand to shield the flame. Noting this, Sheik silently crawled up to the torch, and while the guard was looking away, blew out the flame and slipped back behind cover. The guard growled and shook his fist at one of the freezards passing by below him before stepping away in search of a new flame. Sheik used his whole body to stay suspended in the upper reaches of the cave tunnel, his hands and feet pressing against the rock. After the moblin passed under him and disappeared further down the stairs, Sheik dropped to the ground and ran up the path, closing the distance to King Zora’s chamber.

Walking through some curtains drawn over the chamber’s entrance, Sheik’s blood ran cold when he saw the state the chamber was in. King Zora De Bon XVI was encased entirely in red ice, his face frozen in a state of shock. Near the gigantic frozen fishman was… Princess Ruto, also encased in red ice. Sheik stepped up to the top of the platform meant for those speaking to the king in a state of utter disbelief.

Wait… But Princess Ruto was supposed to have been taken to Gerudo Desert. It’s clear she’s still Ganondorf’s prisoner, but why the bluff? Unless…

Metal bars slammed down, sealing all exits of the room.

“It’s a trap!” the Sheikah muttered under his breath.

A pair of white wolfos suddenly manifested in the royal chamber, leaping towards Sheik with their claws and fangs. Their red eyes gleamed with hunger and malice as they attacked, swiping and biting at the Sheikah in a maddened fury. Sheik backflipped away from the initial onslaught, throwing a volley of needles at the beasts. They covered their faces with their thick arms and deflected the needles, no worse for wear. After landing on the ice, Sheik drew his blade and readied himself for the next attack. The wolfos then charged, one after the other. Sheik side-stepped the first, swiping at them with his blade before ducking a claw attack from the second one. The ice was slippery, and it took all of Sheik’s concentration to both dodge the incoming attacks and not fall while on the ice. Unfortunately, the white wolfos were not impaired by the ice as Sheik had hoped, so he formulated a new plan.

There’s no opening for me when they’re both on the attack. I need to separate them somehow. Perhaps…

Sheik eyed the path hugging the right wall of the royal chamber, which eventually led to where King Zora and Princess Ruto were frozen. It was a narrow stone path – far too narrow for a pair of wolfos to stand shoulder to shoulder. Sheik charged one of the wolfos, sliding between its legs as it attacked, and hopped onto the stone walkway to reach the narrow path further up. The wolfos followed, with one quickly slipping down in its attempt to stay close to its brother. With one below scrambling along the ice, this freed Sheik up to fight the other wolfos one on one. The two traded blows, with Sheik’s blade and the wolfos’ claws cutting through the air and deflecting off of each other. The two foes ducked, stepped back, and parried one another until the wolfos swung too hard with its claws, pivoting around. With its tail exposed, Sheik sliced it off, slaying the first wolfos. The other one grew enraged at this and rushed up the path towards Sheik. While the wolfos swung with greater force, it proved far too clumsy to keep up with Sheik and was dealt with just as swiftly as the first. The second wolfos fell to the ground, burning up in flame before disappearing.

With the second beast slain, Sheik looked around. The barriers blocking all exits had receded – likely because their magic was connected to the lifeforce of the wolfos – but there was no sign of any monsters rushing to the royal chamber. Sheik thanked his good fortune and continued up the path.

As the princess would be easier to escort if necessary, Sheik decided to free her first. He was at least somewhat familiar with red ice, and the blue fire that Impa kept on hand was said to be able to melt it, so after dousing the ice crystal with the flame, Sheik stepped back, waiting for the results. In a matter of seconds, the ice crystal melted away, freeing Princess Ruto – who slumped to the ground. Sheik darted to her side, catching her just before she hit the ice.

“Huh! W-who are you?” asked Ruto.

“Shh. You’re safe now, but I need you to be quiet,” whispered Sheik. He then helped the princess to her feet and looked her over. She seemed relatively unharmed. No icy burns marked the pale white and blue skin of the princess, nor were there any signs of damage to her fins or large head. The princess stared Sheik down with her purple eyes, blushing and clenching her fists.

“W-what are you staring at?!” The princess’s voice echoed throughout the chamber, and Sheik could already hear the confused growls of the moblins.

“Listen, we don’t have much time,” Sheik whispered. “What happened here? Why is the river frozen?”

“Ah, I’m sorry! It was all that witch’s fault, the one who made Lord Jabu Jabu sick!”

“Witch?”

“I can show you! This way!”

With moblins racing up the stairs towards the royal chamber, Sheik found he didn’t have much choice. He followed after the fleeing Zora and exited out of the cavern, finding himself in a secluded icy and watery area. A large and very sick-looking whale with a jeweled headdress was resting its head on a block of ice in front of a stone altar.

“That’s Lord Jabu Jabu?” asked Sheik.

“It is,” said Ruto, walking up to the altar. “He’s our guardian deity, the protector of our people and of Zora River. That must be why that witch hurt Lord Jabu Jabu.” Tears in her eyes, Ruto turned to Sheik and said, “We have to help him! If we don’t… This place could be frozen forever!”

Sheik nodded, stepping forward. “All right, I’ll gladly help. Just tell me what to do.”

“I saw that witch take some monsters inside Lord Jabu Jabu. We need to go in after them!”

“You want to go inside the whale?”

“I don’t see you coming up with any ideas!”

“All right, all right.” Sheik turned, hearing the sound of the approaching moblin guards. “How do we get inside?”

“Leave that to me!” Ruto dove into the icy waters and returned with a fish. Holding the fish up while standing on the stone platform, she said, “All right, Lord Jabu Jabu! I have another offering!”

Sheik watched as the whale opened its large toothy mouth. Ruto walked towards the whale as if this were normal, but then the whale started breathing in deep. The force of the breath was so powerful, it sucked Ruto straight into his maw. Try as Sheik might, he too was sucked inside the whale, disappearing behind its closed fangs before the moblins arrived.

---

Saria had expected much tighter security, given how important the fortress was to the Gerudo, but she had no complaints. If anything, she thought, they probably don’t have enough people to guard the fortress now since they all marched off. But despite the surprising ease with which Saria was able to sneak through the fort, she still kept her guard up. A certain Gerudo had gotten the jump on her too many times for her not to be cautious.

The Gerudo Fortress was a very angular and practical building, appearing like several stone blocks stacked on top of each other, all embedded into the side of a huge cliff. Rooms and halls were connected in strange ways, seemingly built to confuse intruders. Many a times a path that Saria thought would lead her further in twisted around, leading her right back outside. Thankfully, there were crates of supplies that she could use as cover when she stepped out, so luck was on her side.

Within a high-up room, Saria waited for just the right moment to knock a guard out. Afterwards, she dragged the Gerudo away, hiding her inside a crate indoors. She also hid the guard’s weapon in case she woke up faster than Saria anticipated. After moving down a hall and taking a left, Saria found herself in some living quarters. The cold grey brick that made up the building was decorated with beast skulls and tapestries, and a fire pit in the center of the room was being used to cook stew.

“Mmm, smells good,” whispered Poppy. “You don’t think they’ll miss a spoonful, do you?”

“We don’t have time to eat,” whispered Saria. “Now come on!”

The disappointed fairy floated meagerly after Saria, who climbed a stairway leading to a new room. It seemed like a dead end at first, but Saria’s instincts were telling her to take a closer look. She pulled out the Lens of Truth and peered through it. Sure enough, there was an illusory wall that led further down.

“So that’s why I haven’t found any prisoners despite all those cells,” whispered Saria. “There are hidden rooms in this place.”

“Good thing Sheik let you keep that!” smiled Poppy. When Saria’s smile faded, Poppy said, “Sorry, I-”

“No, it’s okay. I’m just worried about him.”

Poppy landed on Saria’s shoulder, putting a hand on the girl’s ear. “Me too, Saria. Me too.”

With a new path to explore, Saria and Poppy passed through the illusory wall and made their way down. Slowly but surely, the pair moved closer to the heart of the fortress. It was easy to tell, because there were far more guards in this place, and plenty of torch sconces too. Shadows were few and far between. Saria had to swiftly knock out guards then rush to new cover, moving back and forth around patrols. After the guards were all unconscious, Saria stepped down one last hall, which opened up into a large room full of prison cells. It wasn’t long until a familiar face called out to her.

“Saria!!” cried Malon. “Over here!”

Malon and Talon were in a cell with other Hylians, and the girl was reaching an arm through the bars trying to wave at Saria. Talon quickly pulled Malon back and shushed her, whispering, “Quiet, my girl! The guards might hear you!”

Saria ran across the room to where Malon was and crouched down, saying, “The guards are out cold for now, but we don’t have much time. I have a place I can take you all, but make sure to keep quiet and do as I say.”

“Of course,” whispered Malon.

Saria had a ring of keys she picked up from one of the guards. As she searched for the right key, she heard a rapid pair of claps from behind her. Saria stood up, watching as a metal gate sealed the room shut. Gerudo warriors then appeared from the shadows, one after the other, until finally, Kitoga stepped out in front of the pack. Strangely, she was wearing an eyepatch over her left eye.

“Kitoga! I knew you’d show up,” said Saria. “Is this trap your doing?”

“Of course! Lord Ganondorf, in his wisdom, knew that as soon as he demanded a ransom for the Zora princess, someone would come running to save her. How fortunate that it is you who would come here.” Kitoga drew a pair of scimitars, gesturing for the other warriors to stand back. “Now I can finally have my revenge!!”

Kitoga dashed forward, her right scimitar held high. Saria drew her own, blocking the attack, and the two pushed against each other for a moment as sparks flew.

“Why the eyepatch? I don’t recall cutting your face the last time we met.”

Kitoga pushed Saria’s scimitar aside, swinging horizontally with her left blade. Saria ducked, swung upwards with her sword as she stood up, and Kitoga backflipped away. The two circled around the room, each waiting for the other to make the next move.

“It was a punishment for my failure,” said Kitoga in a harsh tone. “I was tasked with returning with both the Kokiri’s Emerald and Goron’s Ruby – but I only brought back one. A jewel for a jewel, and an eye for an eye.”

Kitoga then pivoted on her heels before leaping forward, spinning her swords around. Saria waited until just the right moment, hopping to the side as Kitoga sprung on her. Saria slashed at the Gerudo’s exposed backside, but Kitoga reacted in time, only taking a cut to the shoulder.

“Ganondorf did that to you, didn’t he? Are you sure you’re on the right side?” asked Saria.

“You would never understand!” shouted Kitoga. “Lord Ganondorf is not just some king to us, he is our god, the god that will lead us to victory! But in order to grasp hold of that victory, there can be no weakness, no failure. The pain I suffer will only make me stronger!”

Kitoga rushed Saria once more. When Saria blocked the Gerudo’s scimitars, Kitoga kicked Saria in the stomach, knocking the Kokiri across the floor. Kitoga followed this up with another attack, leaping on Saria with her blades. Saria blocked, doing her best to hold off the Gerudo warrior.

“Is that really the kind of world you want to live in?” asked Saria. “A place where you can never take it easy, never get sick, never let your guard down? You’re not working for a god, you’re working for a tyrant!”

Saria used her legs in tandem to fight off the Gerudo – one for a sweep, and the other for a strike. Saria got back on her feet and readied her blade. Kitoga stumbled back, clutching her side where a bruise was forming.

“Tyrant? Don’t talk to me about tyrants. Do you think I’d forget about all the bloody deeds the Royal Family carried out just because there’s been a decade of peace?” Kitoga spit blood, wiping her lips with the back of her hand. “I would rather die than stay under Hyrule’s heel.” Despite her injuries, Kitoga kept up the fighting, rushing Saria and swinging wildly with her two scimitars. Saria was forced on the defensive, dodging and parrying the Gerudo’s onslaught. “Before my mother died to those Hylian dogs, she told me I was destined for greatness! That I would help our people in their time of need! Whether I will lead the Gerudo one day or merely play a part in their history, it matters not. All I care about is crushing that despicable Royal Family once and for all!”

“Why do you hate the Royal Family so much?” asked Saria. “They united Hyrule, didn’t they?”

“They didn’t unite Hyrule, you fool, they conquered it! Were it not for Lord Ganondorf, we would have been wiped off the map! Though I hated him for bending the knee, I understand now why he did it. You can call him a tyrant if you want, but if working for a tyrant means the survival of my people, then so be it!”

Saria gritted her teeth and shouted, “You idiot!!” After continuing to parry Kitoga’s blades, she struck one of the swords out of the Gerudo’s hands before slashing Kitoga across the chest. The scimitar fell tip-first, piercing the stone ground as Kitoga stepped back, blood hissing from her wound.

“You… Why can’t I… Beat… You…” Kitoga fell to one knee, clutching her chest as she breathed heavily. One of the Gerudo warriors moved to help Kitoga, but another blocked them, shaking her head. Saria felt a terrible sinking sensation in her stomach as she saw blood dripping from her blade. She swished the sword to shake the blood off, and sheathed it, stepping over to Kitoga. Before Saria could help her, swirling magic manifested around the wounded warrior, forcing Saria to step back.

“Why can’t you beat her, you ask?” said an old woman’s voice out of nowhere. Saria looked around, but no source of the voice could be seen. The old woman then said, “It’s because you’re weak, Kitoga! You always have been. I never understood what Lord Ganondorf saw in you.”

A witch on a flying broom manifested, spinning in the air before settling and circling around Kitoga. She looked like an ancient Gerudo woman in a black robe with white Gerudo patterns near the hems, and a large red jewel decorated her forehead above her beak-like nose.

“K-koume, what is the meaning of this? I can still fight!” shouted Kitoga, who was slowly sinking into the ground.

“Haha, how foolish can you be? You’ll be dead before you ever defeat this one – and you’re no good to us dead. I’ll find a use for you yet, foolish girl! Now begone!”

Kitoga disappeared and the spell dissipated. Then the witch set her sights on Saria.

“As for you, you’ve done well to make it this far, but your journey ends here! Guards, seize her and take the Goron’s Ruby!”

“Jokes on you, we don’t have the Goron’s Ruby!” said Poppy.

“What?! No matter. We’ll figure out what you did with it one way or another.”

As the other Gerudo warriors closed in on Saria, she whispered to Poppy, “You know, you really didn’t have to say that.”

Though Saria put up a fight, it wasn’t long until the guards had her tied up, disarmed, and thrown in a cell. Poppy was stuffed in a bottle and taken by Koume, and as Saria watched the witch disappear from behind bars, she hoped against hope that Sheik was faring better.

Chapter Text

Sheik felt dizzy. The ground was soft and slippery, the air was acrid and foul, and everything was wet. He could have never imagined being inside a whale would be so… Unpleasant. Standing up proved difficult, but he managed to find his footing. All around him were meaty red walls. Sheik hadn’t traveled far. He was still in the mouth, just past a wall of large sharp teeth. Up ahead was a pool, though of what, Sheik didn’t want to think about. More alarmingly, Ruto was nowhere to be seen.

Where did she go? She didn’t run off without me, did she? Or was she pulled further inside?

Above the pool in front of Sheik were large bouncing bubbles. Sheik ignored them as he moved further in, towards the throat. When he stepped foot in the pool, however, two octoroks emerged and fired stones at him.

Octoroks, in here?!

Sheik dodged to the side, not accounting for the floating bubble nearby. After bumping into it, the bubble burst, releasing a burning slime all over Sheik. Most of it landed on his headwrap, so he discarded it before too much got on his scalp. The octoroks fired again, but this time Sheik kicked one of the rocks back at the purple mollusk before tossing a needle at the other. As the creatures died, Sheik did his best to wipe off the rest of the slime on him with a cloth.

Even the very gas bubbles are dangerous. I have to hurry before the princess gets hurt!

Up ahead, a thin membrane acted as a barrier, though looking up above at a strange pale growth, Sheik had an idea of how to dislodge the membrane. Hopping into the air and giving it a flick, this caused a reaction in the whale, opening the membrane. This led to a fleshy circular corridor with a path hugging the left wall, a long drop down in the center of the room, and a pair of conspicuous crates sitting nearby. Sheik stared at the small crates in disbelief.

What are these doing here? Were they left by the enemy or do the Zora… Sheik put the thought out of his mind and continued along the left path.

After avoiding an electric biri and opening another membrane, Sheik found himself in a large room full of dense flesh, holes in the floor sealed with soft membranes, and in the case of one of the holes, an undulating tube of sickly green and yellow flesh connected to the ceiling and passing through the hole in the ground, though what it was, Sheik couldn’t even begin to guess. It was then that Sheik heard a yelp, realizing more biri were harassing Princess Ruto nearby. A few quick needle tosses took care of the biri, but the princess looked hurt. Sheik quickly rushed to Ruto’s side.

“Princess, are you all right? It looks like those things stung you.”

“Huh? There you are!” Ruto shouted. “Where have you been this whole time?!”

“I wasn’t pulled in too far, so I was still near the teeth. What about you? Were you pulled in further than that?”

“I…” Ruto looked away, grumbling. “More or less. Monsters started chasing after me, but I couldn’t find you. Do you know how scared I was?!”

Sheik knelt down, lowering his head. “My apologies, princess. I won’t let it happen again. If you need it, I can treat those wounds. Just give me the word.”

Ruto seemed taken aback by this display, blushing. “N-never mind that! Stand up already!!”

“Very well.” After standing, Sheik said, “So what is this place? We should be as far back as the tail by now. These rooms don’t seem physically possible.”

“Lord Jabu Jabu is a divine being. His insides are more like a temple than that of a fish.”

“Have you ever been inside before?”

“Many times, actually! In order to make sure his lordship is doing well, it’s common for us Zora to venture inside and clean things up. But this time… Things are different. I’ve never seen monsters in here before, or any of these strange holes. That witch must be at the bottom of this! I’ll make sure she pays!”

“Since you’ve been through here before, can you guide me? I don’t even know where to begin.”

Ruto sighed and said, “Very well, I shall help you.” Ruto then sat down, hugging her knees. “Now then, let us be off.”

“Pardon?”

“Don’t stand there gawking, carry me! Whenever I enter this place, it is customary for my servants to carry me about. You are Sheikah, are you not? And aren’t Sheikah servants to the Royal Family?”

“Yes…”

“Then as allies of the Royal Family, it only makes sense for you to serve me as well.”

Sheik had some disagreements with Ruto’s logic, but he did not wish to upset the girl, so he followed her command and hoisted her above his head.

“Very well, princess, I am here to serve.”

“Excellent. This should give me a good view of things. Now a lot of gunk tends to collect at the far end of this floor. Head straight across this room, and we can see what that witch left here to make Lord Jabu Jabu so sick. Onwards!”

Without saying a word, Sheik ran across the room, keeping the young Zora held high. More than once did Sheik have to dodge more biris, and even a bari with its sharp spinning fins. After safely making it to the other side of the room, Sheik passed through another barrier, finding himself in a strange hall that split in multiple directions. It took a moment to adjust to the room, as the floors seemed to move on their own, pulling Sheik further in at a slow but steady pace.

“Tailpasaran, dead ahead!” shouted Ruto.

Three sets of three-pronged mandibles were sticking out of the ground. When the creatures took notice of Sheik and Ruto, they slithered up into the air, revealing strange wormy bodies made up of sparking balls of blue electricity. Sheik set Ruto down and drew his blade.

“Excuse me, princess… This should take but a moment,” said Sheik.

The boy ran ahead, swiping at the mandibles of the tailpasaran. While the first two went down with ease, the third dodged Sheik’s attack, whipping him with its tail. Electric currents coursed through Sheik’s body, stunning him with an immense amount of pain. Sheik fought through it and slashed the mandibles of the monster in half, killing it as well.

After walking back over to Ruto, Sheik said, “It is done. Let us continue.”

“But you’re hurt!” complained Ruto.

“It is fine. I have dealt with worse.”

“Nonsense!” Ruto stood up, looking indignant. She marched over to Sheik and held out her hands. “Stand still!” A watery aura of magic emanated from the girl’s hands, washing over Sheik and soothing his body. The aches and pains of battle faded from memory.

“Healing magic?”

“Hey, at least thank me properly!!”

“I… I apologize. Thank you, princess. You have done well. I was just… Surprised.”

Ruto crossed her arms and stuck her nose up. “Hmph! You should know better than to doubt me. I am the princess of the Zora, after all. Of course I would be studied in the ways of magic.” She then sat down and said, “Well, let’s get a move on, then!”

After picking Ruto back up, Sheik explored the tunnels, realizing most of them were blocked or sealed in some capacity - some even with fleshy tubes similar to the room from before.

“Is this place always like this?” asked Sheik.

“No… Lord Jabu Jabu’s whole filtration system is blocked up. We definitely need to do something about this.” Ruto looked around and said, “Over there, do you see that yellow lump on the ground? They’re kind of like natural switches. If you put enough weight on one, it might open one of these barriers.”

“All right. Let’s give it a shot.”

Sheik maneuvered over to the yellow switch and stepped on it. The pressure caused a reaction, prying open a mesh that was blocking one of the membranes. The room on the other side was much pinker than the previous areas, with a thin, springy floor. Green fins slid through the ground, moving like they were fish swimming in the sea.

“Stingers! Flush them out!” shouted Ruto. Sheik set the princess down and went to work, yanking the creatures out and striking them down, one after the other. When they were all gone, a healthy mix of red and pink colored the room, and a sparkle of magic swirled about in the room’s center, revealing a large chest.

“What? What is this?” asked Sheik.

“I think it’s a gift from Lord Jabu Jabu,” said Ruto. “Perhaps this is his way of thanking you?”

Uncertain of the chest’s nature but still curious, Sheik walked over and opened it up. Inside was a finely crafted jeweled boomerang. Ruto gasped at the sight and wandered over.

“I know of this! It’s a sacred treasure passed on from the Royal Family of Hyrule to us Zora. It was given as a token of friendship by one of the kings!”

Sheik held the boomerang, admiring its pristine condition in a place otherwise coated in mucus and slime. There was a kind of weight to the weapon in that moment. Sheik couldn’t help but wonder what kind of history it had.

“What should I do?” asked Sheik.

“What do you mean? We should take it! Lord Jabu Jabu gave it to you, after all.”

“But… Is this really mine to keep? It feels wrong somehow.”

“Don’t worry about it. If you feel indebted, just use it to help Lord Jabu Jabu!”

Thinking on the matter, Sheik gave a nod, looked up, and said, “Very well. Thank you, your lordship. I’ll put it to good use.”

After that, Sheik and Ruto returned to the split halls, exploring and finding more switches.

“There’s another one! Step on that blue one!” said Ruto. Sheik did so, causing another veiny mesh to get pulled free from a membrane. Stepping off of it, however, caused the mesh to return.

“Shoot, this isn’t right,” said Ruto. “Usually touching them is enough. How are we going to keep it open now?”

“I may have an idea, but…”

“But…?”

“You may not like it.”

Sheik explained his reasoning, to which Ruto said, “You’re going to leave me behind?!”

“Only for a moment. There could be monsters on the other side, so it will be safer for you here.”

“No way! I am Princess Ruto, first in line for the throne of the Zora! I am not a paperweight!” A loud rumble, followed by the growls of monsters on the other side of the barrier echoed throughout the tunnel. Ruto then said, “But maybe it would be a good idea for you to clear a path.”

Amused by this reaction, Sheik set Ruto down on the switch and passed through the barrier. On the other side was an especially tall room with a long tentacle protruding from the ceiling. It didn’t seem to be part of the room, but instead looked like an invasive parasite. Taking one step forward, the tentacle reacted, lashing out at Sheik. The boy ducked and rolled away, dodging the attack. The force of the strike caused bruising on the ground where Sheik once stood. It was clear it had to be dealt with if he was going to save the whale.

Sheik tried striking the tentacle with his electrified chain, but it pulled away far too quickly. He considered tossing some needles, but he worried he might miss and hurt Lord Jabu Jabu. It then occurred to him to try the boomerang, giving it a toss at a thin part of the tentacle. Not only did the weapon strike true, but it also perfectly found its way back to Sheik’s hand. A few more strikes, and the tentacle shriveled and died, falling to pieces.

Back outside, Ruto stood up and said, “Sheik! One of those tubes disappeared!”

“One of the ones blocking the tunnels?”

“Yeah! What did you do?” Sheik explained his encounter to Ruto, to which the princess said, “Then it’s true. There really is a parasite inside Lord Jabu Jabu…” At first the girl looked saddened, but this quickly faded as the girl’s face turned red with rage. “That horrible witch! How dare she!!”

“Calm down, princess. We need to stay focused if we’re going to save your guardian. Now what do you think we should do next?”

“I… No, we should check out that cleared passageway. We need to make sure there aren’t anymore of those tentacles hurting Lord Jabu Jabu!”

“Very well. Come with me, then.”

Sheik picked up Ruto and continued through the split hallways, going from chamber to chamber and clearing out the tentacles. On one occasion, Ruto insisted on entering a chamber with Sheik. In that room, the tentacle tried to strike Ruto, forcing Sheik to move in front of her and take the blow on her behalf. Fighting through the pain, Sheik did his best to keep the tentacle’s attention until he was able to kill it. When it was over, Ruto ran to Sheik’s side.

“You idiot! Why’d you have to get yourself hurt like that?!”

“I was merely trying to protect you, princess.”

“But…” Ruto sniffled. “No, this is my fault. I wanted to help because I was feeling useless, but I just made things worse. Here I thought we could do this together, but you’re doing all the work…”

Sheik watched as the Zora cried from both pairs of eyes, unsure of what to do. Though hesitant, Sheik reached out and put his hand on Ruto’s shoulder in an attempt to comfort her.

“Listen, I understand how you feel. Not too long ago, I found myself in a similar predicament.”

“Y-yeah? What happened?”

Sheik looked around. Feeling the room was safe for the time being, he took a seat, gesturing to Ruto to do the same. Once they were on the floor together, Sheik talked about his recent experience in the Sheikah training dungeon.

“Keep this between you and me, but… There’s this girl I met not too long ago, and she…” Sheik paused, clicking his tongue. “She made me feel like a fool.”

“What do you mean?” asked Ruto.

“In my people’s culture, you can’t become a true Sheikah until you pass an initiation test. I had been training for this test for years, doing my hardest to obey my master and follow her rules to the letter. Then, about a month ago or so, this fairy girl from the forest joined in. I knew of her. She had been running all around Hyrule trying to help people, but I had assumed most of it was dumb luck. Then, when she joined me in my training, she took to it like a fish to water. I had never seen someone so capable before. I don’t know much about the Kokiri, but I assumed they were all just frolicking children in the woods.”

“I don’t know much about them either. The Kokiri never come out of their forest normally, and the few people who tried going in were said to have been guided back. I don’t know if the forest is dangerous or not, but this girl’s ability can’t be a coincidence, right? Who knows what she’s been through before she met you?”

“I… I suppose you’re right. She looked just like another kid to me, so when she started acting like she was my mom and tried bossing me around, it frustrated me. But given how much she’s accomplished, maybe I should have taken her more seriously.” In that moment, Sheik remembered his last talk with Saria before running off to Zora River. He hugged his knees, feeling remorseful. It hurt when she said it was all too dangerous for a boy like him, but… She wasn’t wrong. Were it not for Saria, he would have never made it out of that dungeon alive.

“Sheik, are you okay?” asked Ruto. “You look so sad.”

“I’ll be fine. I realize now though that I need to make it out of here.”

“Why is that?”

“Because I owe her an apology.” Sheik stood up and offered Ruto his hand. “Come on, princess. We still have work to do.”

Blushing, Ruto took Sheik by the hand and was pulled up, carried out of the chamber. As the two were on the move, Ruto said, “Hey, I think I have an idea. Those tentacles were causing those barriers from earlier, right? Didn’t we see something like that in that room full of holes?”

“You’re right. Maybe it was blocking the way to the rest of the parasite,” said Sheik.

“Let’s check it out!”

The two followed the path, jumping through the hole that was blocked off. They landed on a high-up cliff of hard white blubber. Another membrane up ahead seemed promising, so the pair passed through, entering into a circular room with a raised platform ringed with toothy spikes. Upon the platform was a glowing blue gem.

“Wait, is that the Zora’s Sapphire? What is it doing here?” asked Sheik.

“Ah! Let me down! I need to get it at once!” said Ruto. The struggling Zora wrestled her way out of Sheik’s grasp and climbed onto the platform. “Thank goodness, I’m glad my mother’s stone is okay. I was worried sick about this. I lost it when I got sucked in and-” another rumbling, and the platform flew up into the ceiling. “Gaaaah! What is that? An octopus?!”

“Princess!” shouted Sheik.

Seconds later, the platform lowered itself, and a truly gigantic octorok was sitting in the center of the platform. It then hopped off the platform and charged towards Sheik, kicking up enough water to cause the spiky platform to spin in place. Sheik drew his blade and readied himself for combat.

When the big octo closed the distance, Sheik tried striking the beast, only for his blade to bounce off the creature’s rubbery hide. The big octo then rammed into Sheik, knocking him to the ground. As it reached out to grab Sheik with a tentacle, Sheik threw the boomerang at it, striking it in the forehead and stunning it. Sheik only had a second to get back on his feet, for the big octo shook off the hit from the boomerang… Or so Sheik thought, because the beast turned around and ran the other direction. It was fast, though. Fast enough that if Sheik didn’t stay on the move, it would ram him again soon. Sheik did his best to avoid the spinning spikes and chase after the octorok.

As he closed the distance, Sheik noticed a soft green spot on the back of the octorok. Striking the beast again with the boomerang, Sheik ran up and struck the spot. The big octo yelped in pain and spun around, trying to attack Sheik. It proved too slow, however, and the Sheikah nimbly avoided its tentacle strikes. Now that he knew the big octo’s weakness, it was only a matter of time before the beast was slain. Upon the last blow, the big octo hopped into the air, crashed into the ground, and let out a weak puff of air from its mouth before melting away into nothing. Though the beast disappeared, there was no sign of Ruto.

So it didn’t eat her. What happened, then? Did the witch abduct her?!

Sheik hopped onto the platform and rode it into the air. It led to a circular room with more biris, but no sign of Ruto or the Zora’s Sapphire. After dealing with the biris, Sheik passed through another membrane, entering into a foul-smelling room with hard, lumpy, dark walls, a pool of green viscous fluid at the bottom, and wobbling blocks of red. They were lined up in such a way as to act as a path to the next membrane, but as they were, it seemed they would fight off anyone trying to stand on them. A strike from the boomerang proved enough to stun them, though. Sheik did what he could to hop across, stunning the meaty platforms, all while dodging attacks from more octoroks below. On the other side, the passageway led to a white blubbery platform that faltered under Sheik’s weight, sliding down to the first room beyond the mouth.

Wait, that barrier… I don’t remember it from before. Did this platform reveal it somehow?

The membrane was covered in a veiny mesh, with a blue switch in front of it. Looking over at the crates nearby, everything clicked into place.

Lord Jabu Jabu’s insides are quite strange, but they do seem to follow some sense of logic… I just hope I can reach Ruto in time before she gets hurt.

One last chamber with walls similar to the green slime room, it seemed to be the source of those veiny meshes, covering parts of the wall like grape vines. More of the mesh blocked the way through another membrane, but a white growth similar to the one in the mouth was up on the ceiling. Sheik navigated the watery room, dodging and killing biri with the boomerang before climbing just high enough to strike the growth. Another rumble, and the way forward was clear.

Passing through the barrier, Sheik could hear the sound of crackling electricity. The large round room was filled with electrified jellyfish similar to the biri, and an oversized heart-shaped parasite was in the middle of the room, tendrils piercing the fleshy ceiling while other funnel-headed organs wriggled and twitched, almost like antennae on an insect. Sheik approached, blade and boomerang at the ready. As he prepared to strike the parasite, his instincts kicked in, and he dodged back. A blast of magical ice struck the ground where he once stood, and across the room, Sheik heard an old crone’s voice say, “Drat!!”

“Who goes there? Show yourself!” shouted Sheik.

An ancient-looking Gerudo woman on a broom with white-trimmed black robes, a curved nose, and a blue-jeweled headdress appeared, floating in the air.

“I was so hoping I could knab you too, but it seems you’re going to be stubborn, aren’t you?” The witch cackled. “No matter. I’ll get you soon enough, just like your Zora friend.”

“What?!” Sheik looked around, realizing that Ruto was across the room, encased in red ice once more. Sheik narrowed his eyes at the witch. “You’re going to regret this.”

“Oh ho ho, you’ve got some spunk, kid!” The witch cackled once more. “The great Ganondorf charged me with securing the Zora’s Sapphire for him, as well as protecting Barinade from interlopers such as yourself. What a fine monster, too. It lets me have complete control over this whale and its magic. Observe!” With a single gesture, the witch sealed the room’s exit shut. “I am the Gerudo witch, Kotake! Prepare yourself, Sheikah, for it’s going to be a long winter in Hyrule! Ho ho ho ho!!”

Kotake pointed at Sheik, and the electric jellyfish gathered around Barinade and clung to its body like armor. Then the parasite’s funnel tentacles charged up, firing bolts of electricity at the Sheikah. The boy made use of his speed to dodge the attacks, though it wasn’t easy.

Wait, some of those tentacles… Could the boomerang cut them too?

Sheik dodged another lightning blast and tossed the boomerang, severing one of the tendrils connecting Barinade to the ceiling. Kotake shouted, “Hey! Stop that!” and fired a bolt of ice. While Sheik dodged the attack, the ice spread across the ground, causing Sheik to slip. Left vulnerable, Kotake directed Barinade to fire on Sheik once more. Sheik was blasted into the wall with a continuous line of electricity, shocking him to his core. It took all his strength not to cry out in pain.

“Ho ho ho, how I love to see rude children like yourself get reprimanded! I wonder what I should do with you now? Shall I kill you, or brainwash you? Perhaps your skills could be useful to the great Ganondorf…”

Clenching his teeth, Sheik said, “I will never work for Ganondorf!” Pressing through the pain, Sheik pulled out his last bottle of blue flame. He tossed it right at Ruto, causing the bottle to shatter and spread its flame over the red ice.

“Huh? How can you still move after all of that?!” shouted Kotake. She then looked down, seeing Ruto break free. “Drat! Double drat! Don’t you dare move! I still need you as a hostage!” Kotake fired a beam of ice at Ruto, but the Zora princess held out her hands and seemingly blocked the spell, causing the magic ice to spread out and strike the walls. The Gerudo looked even more surprised than before.

“What? How did I?” Ruto looked around, seeing Sheik was still being electrocuted. She went red with rage and picked up a piece of broken glass, jamming it into Barinade. The parasite faltered, and Sheik dropped to the ground. Ruto quickly crossed the room and helped the boy to his feet.

“Are you all right, princess?” asked a winded Sheik.

“How can you ask that when you’re so hurt?!” said Ruto. “Hold still for a moment. I’ll try and heal you.”

“Oh no you don’t. Barinade! Attack!” shouted Kotake.

The bulbous parasite aimed one of its funnel tentacles at Sheik and Ruto. Sheik grabbed hold of Ruto and jumped away, dodging the attack. While they rolled across the ground, Sheik hucked the boomerang once more, severing another tentacle.

“I can still fight. You need to get to safety, princess,” said Sheik.

“No way! I’m helping too!” Ruto looked at her hands. “I don’t fully understand it, but I feel an energy coursing through me. It’s like I’m connected to Lord Jabu Jabu.” Ruto then turned to face Barinade and Kotake. “I’ll make sure we both get out of here!”

“So that’s how it is,” said Kotake. “Fine, then. I can always puppeteer your body once I’m done with you.” After swirling in the air, Kotake grew twice as big, her white hair now like frosty crystals of ice. “I’ll freeze you both to your very souls! Ho ho ho ho!”

“I’ll keep that witch busy. You handle the parasite!” said Ruto.

“That’s fine by me. Just don’t do anything reckless,” said Sheik.

“Like you can tell me what to do.” Ruto and Sheik smiled at one another, then charged.

Barinade fired a volley of electricity, but Sheik avoided it, severing the last grasping tentacle with the boomerang. After it came loose, it fell to the ground, its jellyfish armor coming loose. Sheik lashed out against its lumpy, spiky body until it shrieked, pulling in the jellyfish once more and twirling around the room. Meanwhile, Ruto was doing her best to dodge and deflect the incoming ice attacks from Kotake. Melting the ice and using the water like a whip, Ruto lashed out at Kotake and sent her spinning.

“Insolent child! How dare you use my own magic against me!!” shouted Kotake.

“Well maybe if you weren’t so old, you could keep up with me!” Ruto shouted back.

Kotake gasped. “How dare you! I’m not even a year over 380!”

With the Gerudo witch thoroughly distracted, Sheik was able to stay focused on Barinade. After avoiding its spinning attack, the creature slowed down, leaving itself open. Sheik used this opportunity to strike down the jellyfish connected to it, robbing it of its armor. Barinade retaliated with more lightning, but Sheik was too quick for the parasite. The boy dashed between the lightning volleys and struck it again and again with his blade. A rumble throughout the room followed. It seemed that the parasite’s strength was waning.

“No, stop that!!” shouted Kotake. After spinning about, several ice crystals formed in a ring around the witch. With a gesture, the ice crystals fired as swift as arrows, one after the other at Sheik. Though Sheik was fast, he couldn’t avoid all of them, taking one to his shoulder. It froze his blood as quickly as it bled out from the wound. But this left Kotake open to attack from Ruto, who fired a cutting beam of water from her hands. The witch narrowly dodged, only suffering a cut across the cheek. Yet even this was enough to frighten the witch, who put a hand to the wound on her cheek and shook at the sight of her own blood.

“Sheik, are you okay?” Ruto shouted across the room.

“I’ll be fine,” Sheik said between heavy breaths.

Deep down, Sheik thought of Saria, and how hard she had fought to save him from the Dead Hand. The memory of Saria’s bravery gave the boy renewed strength. Dashing towards the weakened Barinade, Sheik tossed a volley of needles at the parasite, then hopped onto its top, stabbing deep with his Sheikah blade. The parasite began to tremble, its flesh rupturing and turning a sickly green. Sheik hopped off of Barinade, and the parasite exploded into a pile of green blood and meat.

“No! Barinade!” shouted Kotake. “You… I’ll make certain you don’t leave this whale alive!!” Kotake grabbed hold of her broom and hopped into the air, holding it more like a staff than a broom. A large white magic sigil appeared in the air, glowing bright and pulsating with great power. A huge beam of ice magic fired from the sigil, flying right at Sheik. He tried to move, but he stumbled, weakened from his wounds. Were it not for Ruto, that would have been his end.

Ruto jumped in front of Sheik, holding out her hands to block the spell. Sheik could see trace amounts of magic floating up from Jabu Jabu into the Zora princess, empowering her.

“I can’t hold her off forever,” said Ruto. “Can you still fight?”

“Of course,” Sheik stood back up. “I’ll finish her off in one blow.”

“You better not be lying! If you are, I’ll…” The spell continued firing with even greater strength, causing Ruto to fall to one knee. She continued holding it back. “Now get going!”

Sheik ran across the room towards Kotake. Though her main focus was being diverted by Ruto, ice crystals surrounding the witch acted on their own and fired at Sheik. The boy ran with all his might, dodging, tumbling through the air, and parrying the ice crystals as he closed the distance. Though Kotake tried to divert her main spell towards Sheik, Ruto was there to keep it at bay.

“No… No! This cannot be!!” the Gerudo hissed. “How is this possible?!”

Sheik then ran up the wall behind Kotake, jumped off of it, then flew through the air, slashing at the witch. Kotake coughed up blood, mortally wounded. Without the strength to use her magic, she spun to the ground, collapsing on the fleshy floor of the room. Sheik landed as well, flicking the blood off of his blade before sheathing it. The battle was finally over.

“Ganon… Dorf… I’m… Sorry…” Kotake’s body finally gave in. It disappeared in a puff of smoke, and in its place, a spiritual apparition of the witch with a halo above her head manifested, floating in the air. “Gaaaah! I can’t believe you two actually beat me!!!” The ghost of Kotake threw a fit while floating up higher and higher. “Ah, no matter. Even without control of the river, this changes nothing. I’m sure you predicted even this, didn’t you, my lord?”

“What do you mean? Was this just a distraction?” asked Sheik.

“Ho ho ho! I’m sure you’d like to know! Go out to the fields. You’ll see what I mean soon enough! Ho ho ho ho ho!!”

Kotake’s spirit vanished, and both Sheik and Ruto were left alone. Ruto ran to Sheik, hugging him tight. With her empowered magic, she was able to heal Sheik’s wounds in a matter of seconds.

“Princess, I…” Sheik paused, looking at Ruto’s crying face.

“You idiot! Do you know how scared I was? Not for myself, but for you! How you could fight with so many wounds…” Ruto sniffled. “But it doesn’t matter now. The witch is gone, and Lord Jabu Jabu has been healed. And, well…” Ruto looked away. “You probably need to get going, huh?”

Sheik gave a nod. “Do you think you’ll be okay? There are still monsters in the area.”

“Don’t you worry about that. Lord Jabu Jabu and I have made a connection. With his magic, I’ll be able to force out the intruders and melt the ice. You just focus on what you need to do, okay?”

“Of course. Thank you, Ruto.”

“W-wha? Why are you thanking me?! You’re the one that saved me and defeated those fiends!!” Ruto crossed her arms and looked away, blushing. “I know I saved you too, but I still don’t think we’re even. If… If there’s anything you’d like before you go, just name it. But hurry it up!”

Thinking about it for a moment, there was only one thing that came to mind. Sheik said, “The Zora’s Sapphire… May I have it?”

“You want our spiritual stone? Why?”

“Because I believe it’s the key to stopping Ganondorf.”

Ruto looked confused, but said, “Fine, I can give it to you if you really want it. My mother once told me I should only give it to the man who would be my husband, but… I’m sure we can work something out.” Ruto then raised her hands up, causing the spiritual stone to manifest. It was a beautiful stone, made up of three round sapphires wedged together in a golden frame. After passing it over to Sheik, a magic circle formed around the boy. Before Sheik was teleported away, Ruto smiled at Sheik and said, “Don’t tell my father…”

---

The fires of torch sconces flickered in the dusty prison, their embers floating in the air before disappearing into darkness. Saria, bloody and bruised, sat on the cold stone with her back against the wall. Despite all the training Impa had put her through, she ended up as yet another prisoner to the Gerudo. Resting her head against one knee, she thought only of Sheik and their last exchange.

“If you truly cared, you would believe in me the way Impa does. But clearly you see me as nothing but a child.”

“You are a child!”

“Bold words for a failure…” Saria mumbled.

Saria had been stripped of everything, save the clothes on her back. Even Poppy had been taken away by the witch, Koume. She felt hurt, helpless, hungry, but most of all, alone…

But she wasn’t completely alone.

“Saria? Saria? Can you hear me?”

“Wait, I know that voice… Kaepora Gaebora?” Saria scooted closer to the left wall of her cramped cell, putting her ear to the stone.

“Hoo hoot! So it is you! I must have slept through the commotion. What happened to you?”

Saria sighed, saying, “I messed up. I snuck into the fortress and was trying to rescue everyone, but I got caught instead. What about you? I haven’t seen you in forever!”

“It is a bit embarrassing for me to say, but I shall say anyway. You see, I was flying over the fields, searching for the next spiritual stone when I saw strange movement near Gerudo Valley. I flew closer to take a look, but a sling stone struck my right wing, and I crashed to the ground. The Gerudo thought I was a spy, so they brought me here and I’ve been imprisoned ever since. At least there are always rats to keep me fed! Hoo hoo… Hoo.” The owl’s chuckles died down. “I’m sorry, Saria.”

“No, it’s okay. How’s your wing?”

“Oh, it’s as fit as a feather! It took time, but a kind Gerudo lass nursed me back to health, so the only thing keeping me here are these bars.”

Saria was silent for a moment, a question on the tip of her tongue. Finally she asked, “Who was the one that helped you?”

“I think I only heard her name once before. Ki… Kitoga I believe? Ah yes, that was her name.”

“You don’t say…”

“Hmm? Is something wrong?”

“No… It’s nothing.”

“Well all right. If you need someone to talk to, just let me know!”

Saria turned around and rested her back against the wall adjacent to the owl’s cell. Her mood lifted somewhat, she started thinking about what to do next. Two guards patrolled the prison chamber at all times, so even if she tried something on one guard when she got close to Saria’s cell, the other would be quick to notice. The bars were too strong to bend or break, and digging a tunnel was completely out of the question. What, then, was the answer? While Saria contemplated this, someone new entered the prison chamber.

“Lady Nabooru!” said one of the guards. “What are you doing here?”

“It has been some time since food and water has been brought to the prisoners, so I thought I’d help,” said Nabooru. “We are not barbarians, after all. We can afford to spare them some bread.”

“B-but my lady, surely someone lesser should-”

“Now now, just because I was once chieftain doesn’t mean I can’t help out every now and then. I don’t have any title or rank anymore, remember?”

“Of course…”

The two guards bowed their heads to Nabooru, who went about the prison chamber, handing out pita bread and pouring water into small clay cups. One by one, Nabooru passed by each and every prison cell until she wound up in front of Saria’s. The pair gave each other a look of recognition, with Nabooru looking neither angry nor disappointed. Instead, she merely gave Saria food and water like she did with the rest of the prisoners.

“Better eat up while you can, Kokiri. I hear they’ll be tossing you into the arena soon,” said Nabooru. The Gerudo woman then walked away, continuing her trip throughout the prison.

The arena? What does she mean? wondered Saria.

While crouched down and turned away from the guards, Saria ate her meal. The pita was soft and warm, and the water refreshing. The pain in her belly subsided, and she could even feel a smidgen of her magical energy returning. Despite being in a prison, the meal was a touch better than the gruel that Impa had fed to her over the last month.

Some time later, a new guard entered the prison chamber, holding a pair of iron manacles.

“Prisoner!” shouted one of the guards. “Put your hands through the hole!” The Gerudo stood before Saria’s cell, having opened the same latch that was used to funnel food and water to her before. Saria complied, and the manacles were latched around her wrists. “Now stand back!”

After Saria stepped away from the bars, the cell was unlocked, and the guard gestured for Saria to walk out. The guard then led Saria out of the prison chamber and down a series of corridors. The deeper the pair went, the more their surroundings changed. The upper levels of the fortress were made of a simple grey and brown brick, with flat featureless walls and little décor. The lower levels, however, were much more ornate, with a reddish stone used for the architecture. Pillars supported the walls with carvings of fanged serpents, and a diamond symbol with two eye-like circles in the middle could be seen every now and then, such as on rounded blocks of stone used for stairway posts. The air was especially dusty in the lower levels, but this was nothing compared to the stench of blood coming from below.

Saria was forced to travel down many stairs, which spiraled downward and circled some great sandpit. Tall thin oval window holes on the left walls gave Saria the occasional glimpse into the pit, though its true nature did not become clear until she reached the bottom of the stairs. Bones of beasts and men littered the outer ring of the pit, and large metal gates sat on its four sides. After the gate Saria stood before was opened, she was kicked out into the sandpit, with the gate promptly shut afterwards. Soon enough, Saria could see onlookers up above her. Guards and warriors peeking through the window holes, and even other prisoners that were brought out to watch.

“This must be the arena,” said Saria.

“Correct!” said Koume from up above.

Saria tilted her head back, realizing that the old witch was sitting on a stone throne on a high-up balcony overlooking the arena. Bordering both sides of the witch were heavily armored knights with Gerudo-patterned waist cloths and battle axes.

“What am I doing here? What do you want from me?” demanded Saria.

“Just a bit of entertainment! You’ve been a thorn in the great Ganondorf’s side for quite some time, but it’d be a waste to execute you like a common prisoner. Instead, I’ll make your demise into a show for the other! Hee hee hee!” With a gesture, Koume said, “Now, release the moblins!”

Chains rattled as one of the gates to the arena was opened, and in the darkness, Saria saw beady red eyes full of malice stare back at her. One by one, dog-faced warriors in leather and chainmail armor walked out, spears and clubs in hand. They raised their weapons to the air, howled, then readied for battle.

The moblin in front of the pack charged with his spear, intent on running Saria through. Saria rolled out of the way, and the moblin crashed into the arena wall. While the monster stumbled, Saria leaped into the air and wrapped her manacle chains around his throat, choking him. The moblin growled, doing his best to try and pry Saria off. Another moblin with a rough-looking metal club came in swinging, trying to squash Saria. Instead, she let go of the first moblin, causing the second to smash the first in the back, killing him. When the first moblin burned away, Saria snatched the monster’s oversized spear and pointed it at the club moblin. Up above, Gerudo booed and cheered.

“You dogs can do better than that! Kill her!” shrieked Koume.

More moblins rushed out of the gate, spears in hand. While hopping out of the way, the club moblin swung horizontally. Saria ducked, jabbing her spear into the moblin’s knee. The beast staggered, and Saria stabbed him in the gut, finishing him off. The other spear moblins kept up the pressure, jabbing at her with their spears and howling with rage. Saria was eventually backed into a wall after suffering several cuts.

““Kill! Kill! Kill!”” cheered some of the Gerudo.

With few options available, Saria decided to drop her spear and call upon the fires of Din. After casting the spell, a great dome of fire grew and grew, burning away the attacking moblins until none remained. What’s more, Saria used the spell to target her manacle chains (though not the manacles themselves), heating them up and making them soft.

“What? The Kokiri can call upon the Great Din’s power?” scoffed Koume. “Fine then. Release the lizards!!”

Another gate opened, and lizalfos scurried out from the darkness, hungry and ready to kill. One rushed Saria with its mouth wide open, tongue flapping in the breeze. After swinging its sword, Saria hopped back at just the right moment, letting the beast strike her chain instead, tearing through the shoddy hot iron. After backflipping away from another strike, Saria grabbed another moblin’s spear and pierced the lizalfos through the heart, killing it before taking its sword. The prisoners let out a resounding cheer.

“Talon, Talon, look! She’s free!” cried Malon.

“By the Goddesses, she’s really doing it! Go, Saria! Go!!” cheered Talon.

Saria continued defending herself against the lizalfos, ducking, dodging, and parrying their attacks, all while slicing and stabbing when the lizards let their guards down. After killing her fourth, an especially large and fearsome lizalfos stepped out from the gate, with large sharp fangs visible from its underbite, and a spiky ridge running down from the top of its head to its tail.

That’s no ordinary lizalfos, thought Saria. Even the other monsters are cowering before it. Maybe if I take it down, the others will be too scared to fight.

Saria readied her blade, standing her ground as the dinolfos moved in. After the beast stared at her with its yellow saurian eyes, it slashed with its blade, cutting Saria’s blade in two.

Oh.

The dinolfos cackled with murderous glee and continued its attack, forcing Saria on the run. Up on the balcony, Koume clapped and cheered.

“Yes, yes! Now this is what I want to see!” said Koume.

Saria scrambled to grab other weapons, but each time, the dinolfos proved too strong, breaking the weapons before she had the chance to use them. Once more, Saria found herself cornered. One of the few weapons remaining was a metal club left behind by a moblin, but it was so big, Saria wasn’t sure if she could even lift it.

I could try Din’s Fire again, but if it turns out this monster is resistant to fire, I’m done for.

Saria eyed the club once again as the dinolfos leered at her, licking its blade. Then the beast bent its legs before leaping into the air, stabbing downwards. Saria dodged at the last second, kicking sand into the dinolfos’ eyes before rolling to the side and grabbing the club. Its weight was immense, but she had an idea. Holding onto the lowest parts of the handle, she tried dragging it around, pivoted on her heels, and began to spin. Channeling magic into her attack, the Kokiri spun faster and faster around the arena, kicking up a storm of sand while bashing any stray lizalfos out of the way. Though the dinolfos tried to attack, it too was knocked away by the force of the club, and the beast went flying into a wall, smashing into it and leaving a small crater. It slumped to the ground, lifeless, and burned away into nothing. Saria finally stopped, completely dizzy from the attack.

“Hmph! I can’t believe this! If the lizards can’t kill her, then release the stalfos!!” shouted Koume.

Another gate opened, and skeletal warriors walked out. But after looking at the wounded, tired, and half-crazed Saria who had just picked up the dinolfos’ blade, the skeletons looked at each other and shook their heads, walking back into their den.

“What? You cowardly bags of bones! Fine then.” Koume turned to one of the armored warriors by her side, snapping her finger. “Kumegi, it’s time. Execute Saria at once!!”

The armored warrior nodded, hopping off the balcony and landing on the arena floor with a loud thud. The impact kicked up a wave of sand. Saria covered her eyes with the back of her arm, and after lowering it, she saw the warrior grip its axe in both hands, raising it to the sky before growling in a metallic, distorted voice.

“Wait, did that Gerudo say Kumegi?” asked Talon.

“Huh? What’s wrong?” asked Malon.

Down below, Saria was worn down from all the fighting, but she gathered that this warrior was Koume’s last ditch effort to kill her. Believing this, she gripped her sword firmly and charged. The iron knuckle easily blocked the attack with the shaft of its axe, shirking Saria to the side before swinging. Saria ducked the attack, but the force of the blow was so great, her green cap went flying off of her head. It swung again, and Saria tried to block, but she was pushed back, smashing into the wall behind her. Saria coughed up blood, her arms shaking and feeling weak. She could barely hold onto her sword.

This warrior, this… Monster… It’s unlike any of the others. Is this to be my end?

“Don’t you dare give up, Saria! You can win!” shouted Malon! “Come on, everybody! Cheer for her!!”

One by one, the other prisoners watching the fight started cheering, drowning out the boos and hisses of the Gerudo. This enraged Koume, causing her to slam her fist down on her throne.

“Silence! Silence all of you!!” But no matter how hard she screamed, she couldn’t be heard over all the cheering for Saria. Even the iron knuckle hesitated when Malon first began to cheer.

“Looks like it’s now or never.”

Saria gripped her sword with all of her might and charged, howling all the while. The iron knuckle swung with its axe, but Saria leaped over the attack, slicing right at its helmet. After she landed on the ground, the iron knuckle faltered. The helm split in two and fell to the ground, revealing the face of a Gerudo woman.

“It’s her! I knew it!” said Talon. “Kumegi!! Kumegi, can you hear me?! Up here!!”

“Kumegi?” questioned Saria. The Kokiri turned, realizing the Gerudo woman had a glazed look in her eye. It was clear that she was not in her right state of mind. Then something clicked in Saria’s head. The vanishing Gerudo, the way even Kitoga was abducted by Koume…

They’re brainwashing their own people, aren’t they? thought Saria.

Then came an explosion, and then another. Saria heard the sounds of shouting and fighting up above.

“Huh? What’s going on?!” shouted Koume. Then another Gerudo rushed to the witch’s side and got down on one knee.

“My lady, we’re under attack!”

“Under attack? By who?”

“It’s Nabooru! She’s betrayed us!!”

“That foul woman! I should have known!”

It was around this time that another gate to the arena opened up. It was the one Saria had been forced through before. On the other side was none other than Nabooru herself, with a pair of Gerudo at her side.

“Come on, Saria! It’s time to leave!” shouted Nabooru.

“Right!” said Saria. The Kokiri grabbed her green cap and ran towards the open gate, but then she stopped, looking back at the iron knuckle, Kumegi.

“We can worry about her later. Come on!”

Koume noticed what was happening and shrieked, “Oh no you don’t!” Taking to the air on her broomstick, Koume flew after Saria and Nabooru as they left the arena, only to smack into the gate as it shut. “Grrr. You think this gate can hold me? I’ll melt it into paste, then I’ll burn you all to your bones!!”

On the other side of the gate, Saria and Nabooru took off running. There was fighting on the stairs leading up. Those loyal to Koume wore purple, while those loyal to Nabooru wore white. Saria rushed ahead, striking down two of the guards with her blade. Nabooru looked to her own warriors and said, “Make sure the prisoners get to safety! I’m taking Saria to the surface!”

““Yes ma’am!!”” the two women said in unison.

As Nabooru and Saria kept running, Saria said, “So what’s going on?”

“I had been readying myself for a coup for some time, keeping it secret while playing along with those witches. But things have changed, and I couldn’t wait any longer.”

“But why?”

“Because Ganondorf is attacking Hyrule!”

Even though Saria knew it was coming, hearing the words still shook her. After processing things, she said, “Tell me what I need to do.”

“First, we need to get you your things. No sense sending you to that battlefield empty-handed.”

“I can work with that, but why me? I want to stop Ganondorf as much as you do, but I’m just one Kokiri.”

More Gerudo sprung on the pair, and the two worked together to fight them off, with Saria swinging her sword and Nabooru striking with her scimitar. When the guards were defeated, Nabooru turned to Saria.

“While I was looking after the prisoners here, that oversized owl told me something. He told me I was destined to help you defeat that man… I didn’t believe him at first, but after seeing the way you fought in the arena, I think you really could defeat him. It might sound crazy, but something is telling me I need to get you to that battlefield.”

“Then I’ll gladly accept the help,” nodded Saria.

“Don’t think you’ll get away that easily!!” shrieked Koume. The witch had grown twice in size, and her white hair had taken on a fiery visage. With a gesture, a gout of flame fired from her fingertips.

“Look out!” shouted Saria, pushing back Nabooru. The Kokiri dodged as well, though one of her sleeves had caught fire. After patting the fire out, she readied her sword once more, looking up at the Gerudo witch. “You! Where’s Poppy?”

“The fairy? Right here,” Koume patted a fold of her robe over her chest. “I hear fairies are quite handy for those close to death, so I’m keeping her as a good luck charm! Hee hee hee!”

Saria gritted her teeth and charged. Fairies were not just simple companions to the Kokiri. While the Great Deku Tree acted as the Kokiris’ father, each and every fairy was like a second parent, guiding, teaching, and raising the Kokiri until they were swift and clever enough to survive the dangers of the forest. Poppy was no mere friend to Saria. In many ways, she was like a surrogate mother to her. The idea of holding Poppy captive and using her magic like that against her will… It made Saria’s blood boil. With no words left to exchange, Saria attacked, ready to bring the witch down.

Koume was quick to blast Saria with flame as she leaped towards her. Saria called upon the magic of the spinning technique, slashing through the fire before striking Koume in the chest. Saria had lost most of her momentum, but she didn’t intend on cutting deep with the attack. Merely cutting open the pouch Poppy was kept in was enough. After landing on the ground, Saria caught the falling bottle and uncorked it.

“Saria!” shouted Poppy. “You’re alive!”

“Not for long!” shrieked Koume. “Take this!” Rather than a simple gout of flame like before, Koume summoned several small flames that shot through the air like fast-flying birds, pursuing Saria and Poppy as the two were forced to stay on the run. Spotting a fallen piece of rubble, Saria ran over, grabbed hold of it, and threw it at the pursuing spells, causing them to trigger mid-air and explode.

“The next one’s gonna hit your head!” shouted Saria. Koume shrunk back from this.

“Y-you don’t frighten me, fairy girl! I’ve been pulling the Gerudo’s strings for over 400 years! Do you know how many would-be heroes I’ve put down?!”

“Only 400? You look way older than that,” said Poppy.

“Gah!! How dare you! You’ll die first!” Koume summoned another swarm of pursuing fireballs, creating them one after the other. With so many in the air, if they were set off like before, the chain reaction would turn the whole room into rubble.

“Time to go,” said Saria. She lifted her cap to hide Poppy and ran for it, doing her best to ensure the spells didn’t strike anyone else.

Nabooru, who had been kept busy fighting another iron knuckle, saw Saria running and gave chase as well, following Koume and the spells after ducking a strike from her opponent.

“Saria!!” shouted Nabooru. “I’ve got you!” After making a gesture, Nabooru summoned a blue crystal to encase the pursuing spells. The crystal shrunk down, containing the explosions before dissipating into shards of light.

“What? Since when did you learn that spell?” asked Koume.

“Since I spoke to a certain great fairy out in the desert,” Nabooru smiled.

The witch’s eyes grew bloodshot at this, and Koume said, “I knew I should have kept a closer eye on you! Of all the girls my sister and I have granted the title chieftain, you are by far the most troublesome!”

“I’ll take that as a compliment,” Nabooru winked. “Now then, Saria! It’s time to finish this old crone off!”

“Crone?! I’ll turn you to ash for that!” Koume fired another gout of flame at the Gerudo, all while Nabooru gestured once more with her hands. Saria was quick to cross the room and step in front of Nabooru, taking the attack. Only, Saria wasn’t harmed at all, for the same blue light that the Gerudo had captured the flames with before now encased Saria, turning her into a living shield.

“Good timing,” said Nabooru. “I wasn’t sure if you caught onto my plan.”

“When you didn’t look frightened, I had a feeling you were up to something,” said Saria.

“Oh, silly girl, I’m never frightened.”

Koume looked too angry to even speak at this point. She just chucked spell after spell at the pair, with Nabooru dodging and Saria taking the blasts like a champ. The spell would continue to protect her, but for how long, Saria wasn’t sure. Despite her confidence, it was clear Nabooru was growing tired, so Saria knew she couldn’t waste anymore time. When Koume raised her hand for one last spell, Saria made her move.

Saria dashed ahead, tossing her sword like a spear. Koume dodged out of the way, just as Saria predicted. The sword pierced the stone wall behind the witch, acting as a springboard for Saria to jump off of after she ran up the wall. After leaping into the air, Saria came in with a spinning kick, striking Koume across the face. Saria then kicked off the opposite wall, striking Koume again before landing back where her sword was, and with one last leap, she pulled the sword free and charged the witch. Though Koume tried to put everything into her spell to blast Saria, the protective spell held out just long enough. Saria charged through the flame, slicing Koume right down the middle. When Saria landed on the ground, the protective spell broke apart and faded away. Koume then fell to the ground, twitching.

“Your reign of tyranny is over,” said Saria. “Goodbye.”

Koume’s body then disappeared, and in its place, a ghostly apparition looking like Koume manifested, floating in the air.

“Nyaaaah! I can’t believe I lost to such brats! If my sister was here, you would have been dead for sure!” Koume then looked up, putting a hand to her ear to listen. “What? Kotake, is that you? What do you mean you lost too?! You were supposed to guard that blasted whale!! You what? No! You idiot! Come over here so I can strangle you and kill you a second time!”

Nabooru stepped forward and said, “Hey now, don’t be mean to your sister. She’s all you’ll have on the other side!”

“Yeah! Be nicer to your family!” shouted Poppy after lifting up Saria’s cap.

Koume’s ghost looked ready to explode with rage, but then the fire in her died down. She sighed, saying, “Maybe you’re right. Instead, I should be angry at all of you! If I ever figure out how to, I’ll haunt all of you! A pox! A curse!! No matter what, I’ll never let you reeeeest!”

The ghost of Koume flew up into the air, vanishing. With the witch defeated, the surviving Gerudo loyal to her were routed, and the fortress came under Nabooru’s control. After that, Saria was taken to where her things were kept, and with Nabooru and Poppy’s magical aid, Saria’s health and stamina were restored.

“Thank you for the help,” said Saria.

“No, thank you. For too long have Kotake and Koume puppeteered the Gerudo from the shadows, prolonging the conflict that had been ongoing between my people and the Hylians. While our future is uncertain with Ganondorf’s army on the rise, I will do what I can to offer the Hylians support from now on.”

A Gerudo in white rushed down the stairs to where Nabooru and Saria were, saying, “My lady, I have brought the owl to the surface just as you have requested.”

“Very good!” said Nabooru. “Saria, whenever you’re ready, Kaepora Gaebora will take you out of the valley.”

“All right,” said Saria. “Before I go, can I ask you something?”

“What is it?”

“Can you look after Malon for me? She’ll probably be eager to chase after me now that she’s freed, but the battlefield I’m going to is no place for a child like her.”

Nabooru gave Saria a puzzled look but then said, “Very well. I had planned to keep the former prisoners safe anyhow. I have a sinking suspicion Malon would not want to leave at this moment… Now then, off with you! The battlefield awaits its hero!”

Saria gave a nod then ran up to the surface, thinking to herself, Hero, huh? I’m not so sure…

Outside, Kaepora Gaebora was roosting on a supply crate. Upon seeing Saria, he said, “Hoo hoot! There you are!”

“Sorry for the wait.”

“It’s no trouble. Now grab hold of my talons, and we’ll head to Hyrule Fields!”

“While we’re flying, can we check on Zora’s River? A friend of mine should be in the area and I want to make sure they’re okay.”

“Of course, but let us not dally anymore.”

Kaepora Gaebora spread his wings and took to the air. Saria grabbed hold of the owl and held on tight. With luck, she would reunite with Sheik, and from there, they would face down Ganondorf together. The Kokiri felt a heavy weight in her stomach, but was it the flight, or worry? Whatever it was, Saria ignored it, gathering her courage for the upcoming battle.

Chapter Text

Ganondorf strode up a grassy hill in Hyrule Fields, overlooking the battlefield from atop his steed. The black horse shook its body, appearing anxious. Ganondorf placed a patient hand on the horse’s red mane, calming it in an instant.

“Be patient, my friend. We will begin soon enough.”

With an army of Gerudo warriors and loyal monsters at his back, the King of Thieves grinned as Hylian troops marched onto the field. Yes… The time for trickery and guile was over. Now was the time for war, and by his will, Ganondorf would take back what was rightfully his.

This time… This time it will be different.

In that moment, Ganondorf thought back to his past. It felt like his whole life was leading up to this moment. Once upon a time, he was not a fearsome ruler sitting upon the Gerudo throne. Instead, he was a closely guarded secret, living in the shadows.

“Pick up your sword, welp!” shouted Kotake.

The young Ganondorf wiped the blood from his face, his entire body shaking from the pain. Standing over him was a shadowy version of himself, created by Koume and Kotake’s magic. The shadow leered at him with bright orange eyes behind a horned skull mask.

Grabbing his scimitar off the ground, Ganondorf said, “I will not let you best me, phantom!” Then he charged, howling a war cry. Ganondorf and the shadow clashed, and the training continued.

By the day’s end, the young Gerudo’s body was riddled with cuts and bruises. The twins’ training was harsh and grueling, and while potions and tonics helped him heal, he would have to do it all over again the next day, and the next day, and the next…

Ganondorf Dragmire, born to a lowly Gerudo soldier, was taken under the wing of Koume and Kotake the day he entered into this world. He knew nothing of his father, and his birth mother died in battle not even a week later. Only a select few were told of Ganondorf’s existence. Gerudo society was strict, secretive, and militant. It had to be that way, after all. It had been at war for countless generations.

While a woman named Nabooru led the Gerudo as a chieftain, the truth was that she was a mere figurehead. Koume and Kotake were the true rulers of the Gerudo, guiding their people from the shadows for centuries. Through their acquired wisdom and brutality, they kept the Gerudo alive during the Hyrulean Civil War. Their enemies, the Hylians, were allied with the Gorons and the Zora, and the Sheikah Tribe aided the Hylians as well, working for the Royal Family as spies and assassins. This war of one versus four required the utmost care, and only through careful planning and tactics did the Gerudo hold the line. But after fighting for so long, their numbers were dwindling. It seemed like every day more Gerudo left the valley, never to return…

Sitting on the edge of a stone rooftop, the wounded Ganondorf drank from a waterskin and overlooked Gerudo Valley. It was a warm night, but his body felt cold. In the far distance, he could see dust and smoke wafting into the starry night. The winds carried the smell of war all the way to the valley. It was a smell he would not soon forget.

How long must this nonsense go on for? Ganondorf thought. Are we truly destined to be stamped out of existence?

These thoughts and more swirled around in his mind. He was once told by the twins that he was meant to be the King of the Gerudo, but first he would have to earn his place on the throne. If he did not prove himself worthy, he would be discarded. There was no room for useless kids in their society, let alone useless men.

But will we live to see that day, I wonder? Will I even have the chance to look upon that throne?

The days carried on. Ganondorf was taught many things. Swordsmanship, archery, horse riding. Before he knew how to read, he knew how to sneak, and he was often tasked with pickpocketing shadowy guards in the Gerudo training grounds in order to earn his food and water for the day. If he was caught, he was beaten and dragged to a special prison prepared by the twins. Every important lesson in his life was instilled into him through force. Nothing was given. Everything had to be taken.

One day, Ganondorf learned he had the ability to use magic. He kept this hidden from the twins, practicing in secret. He put his training to use, sneaking into their inner sanctum and studying recorded spells. Little by little, Ganondorf honed his skills as a mage until he could no longer hide it. On that day, he challenged Koume and Kotake for the throne, and when he bested them in spell combat, the twins revealed something to him.

“Finally, you’ve completed your training! Well done, Lord Ganondorf!” said Koume.

“What do you mean? Was this all a part of your plan?!” shouted Ganondorf.

“Quite so!” said Kotake. “We always knew you were capable of using magic. We simply bided our time, waiting for the day your powers would show themselves.”

“Now that you have bested us, there is nothing left for us to teach you,” said Koume. “The throne… Is yours.”

The truth enraged Ganondorf to no end. It made him feel like a puppet on strings, and even when he thought he had gained the upper hand, he was still dancing to the tune of another. After telling the twins to get out of his sight, he revealed himself to his people at last, declaring himself King of the Gerudo. Nabooru stepped down, becoming Ganondorf’s right hand (for a time), and when Ganondorf could finally make his own decisions…

He kneeled before the King of Hyrule.

“What have you done? Are you mad?!” shouted Koume.

“This is an outrage! The Hylians have been our enemy for centuries! You can’t do this!!” shouted Kotake.

The twins had visited him in his throne room after Ganondorf returned from Hyrule Castle. Seeing them angry delighted the Gerudo King.

“Do not fret. This is but the first part of my plan,” said Ganondorf.

“Your plan?” said Koume. “Explain yourself.”

“Now that King Emmerich thinks I am subservient, I will be able to travel all across Hyrule without question. One day when the time is right, I will go to the Temple of Time.”

“Then you seek the Triforce?” asked Kotake.

“Indeed! This war is far from over. While the Kingdom of Hyrule grows soft from peace, we shall use that time to recover, sharpen our blades, and prepare for one last assault.”

Hearing this, the twins cackled in unison.

“Wonderful!” said Koume. “I see now the genius of this, Lord Ganondorf! If you can acquire the Triforce, then the Hylians, nay, the whole world will have no choice but to bow to you!”

“We will support you as best as we can,” said Kotake. “If ever you need anything, just let us know.”

“For now, let the Gerudo rest. I have already written up trade agreements with the king. With our plentiful jewels, we will not want for food or water.”

“Of course, of course. We shall watch and wait, my lord,” said Koume.

The twins disappeared in a cloud of smoke, and then Ganondorf was alone. From his throne room, he looked out to the valley once more. His decision to kneel before the King of Hyrule was not a popular one by any means. A considerable number of the Gerudo opposed him, and it would take time to win them over. He would have to establish his authority through force, striking down his enemies without mercy. While he did not wish to rule with fear, that was the only way he knew how. Nothing was given. Everything had to be taken.

With Ganondorf swearing allegiance to King Emmerich, Gerudo Valley became a part of the Kingdom of Hyrule. Though there was still considerable tension between the Gerudo and the other people of Hyrule, the fighting had finally ended, and an era of peace and prosperity followed. Naturally, Ganondorf took advantage of this. He had sought out monster tribes in secret, offering them whatever they wanted in exchange for their services. Then, mysterious monster attacks happened across Hyrule. Ganondorf and his most trusted warriors would always appear to strike them down. Though the supplies Hylian merchants carried were not always recovered, the merchants were nonetheless thankful for Ganondorf’s aid, and the Gerudo King built up a reputation as a capable and fearsome hero. Behind the scenes, monsters funneled the stolen supplies to Gerudo Valley, and this allowed the Gerudo to slowly recover. While the last of the remaining Sheikah, Impa, had grown wise to his schemes, little could be done due to his political allegiance and reputation.

“Welcome back, my friend,” said King Emmerich. “What news do you bring from the valley?”

“Things have been settled with the moblins, your grace,” said Ganondorf, kneeling on the ground. “We’ve beaten them back to the Haunted Wastes, so trade routes should be safe once more.”

“Excellent news!” King Emmerich stood up from his throne. “Would you care to join me on the balcony?”

“Of course. I would be delighted.”

The two kings walked out to the balcony high up in the castle. From there, the entirety of Castle Town, Hyrule Fields, and even the borders of other distant lands could be seen. The sun was bright, the breeze was cool, and there wasn’t a cloud in the sky. This time, the winds carried the scent of flowers.

“Isn’t it marvelous?” said King Emmerich. “To think, in less than a decade, not a hint of that horrid war can be seen.”

“It truly is a wonderful view,” said Ganondorf. “You’ve done well.”

“Do not be so modest, my friend. Were it not for you, my men would still be scurrying around in the fields beating back monsters. Now there is so little to do, they’re growing fat!”

“And you are okay with this? You, a seasoned warrior yourself?”

“Why not? This peace is what all true warriors strive for!”

The two kings laughed together, and after a servant brought them drinks, they sat down, enjoying wine from goblets. Goblets encrusted with Gerudo jewels…

“King Emmerich… Do you ever wonder what the rest of the world is like?” asked Ganondorf.

“All the time,” said Emmerich.

“I’ve heard that if you travel far enough south, you can eventually reach the sea. Have you ever been?”

“Once, but only when I was a child.”

“What was it like?”

“Blue… Blue as far as the eyes can see. It’s like a lake without end. Waves lap up against the sandy shore or crash against distant rocks, the air smells of salt, and at noon, the sun makes the water sparkle like diamonds.”

Ganondorf swished around his wine goblet, staring into the dark red liquor. “That sounds… Mesmerizing. I wonder what kind of fish can be found there?”

“Fish? Why do you concern yourself with the fish?”

“I’ve taken up fishing recently. I tried my hand at it in Lake Hylia, and it’s quite relaxing.” After saying this, Ganondorf looked up, realizing Emmerich was chuckling. “What’s so funny?”

“Oh, just the idea of a king sitting by a lake with a fishing rod sounded funny to me. Could you not get your servants to fish for you?”

“But my king, where is the fun in that? Do you sit idly by during your yearly boar hunts?”

“Only so my men have a chance of snagging the boar themselves!” The two kings laughed once more, and when their laughter grew quiet, King Emmerich walked to the balcony’s edge, setting a hand on the beautifully carved balustrade. “Perhaps now that things have quieted down with the monsters, we can expand further south. We could even establish a town at sea! Once we’ve built boats sturdy enough for seafaring, we can set out and find new lands together. What do you say?”

Ganondorf, who had joined the king by the balustrade, looked at Emmerich’s outstretched hand. With a grin, he shook with the king and said, “I would love nothing more.”

You were always a fool, Emmerich. You thought you had the whole world in your hands, and that’s why you felt so at ease. Your arrogance will not be forgiven.

Sitting atop his black steed, Ganondorf looked around. The Hylian forces had all gotten into position, but there was no sign of King Emmerich.

“It seems the king can’t even be bothered to meet you on the battlefield. What a coward,” said a Gerudo lieutenant.

“It matters not,” said Ganondorf. “While he hides behind his walls, we will slaughter his men to the last. Make ready!”

The lieutenant nodded, signaling to the others. Once Ganondorf drew his scimitar, he charged down the hill, and his forces followed in his wake, washing over those green fields like a flood. Gerudo archers were joined by moblin spearmen and lizalfos swordsmen, and when Ganondorf’s forces met the Hylians, a squadron of iron knuckles crashed into the Hylians’ western flank. The battle had finally come underway, and with every slain soldier, Ganondorf grew closer to Castle Town’s walls.

I wonder… Can you see me from that lofty balcony, my friend? Perhaps it matters not, thought Ganondorf. We will see each other again very soon.

Horses galloped across the battlefield while the Gerudo riders harried their foes with arrows, circling about the enemy and staying out of reach of retaliation. Moblins crushed soldiers with clubs or ran them through with spears, howling in a mad fury. Then a squadron of armored cavalry road from the gate, joining the Hylian infantry on the field. With halberds and shields, they struck the moblins down one by one.

“Support the armored cavalry! Don’t give those monsters an inch!!” shouted a Hylian field commander.

Lizalfos snuck through the ranks, attacking the cavalry by slicing the legs of the horses. The Hylian infantry did their best to halt this, stabbing the lizalfos with their spears, but the spearmen were felled by incoming arrows. Every time it seemed like the Hylians took a step forward, they were forced two steps back. This is to say nothing of the troops that were being crushed by the iron knuckles on the western flank.

Ganondorf cackled like a madman as he cut down soldier after soldier, racing across the battlefield. He set his eyes on one of the field commanders and was ready to strike, but then boulders came falling down. Ganondorf’s steed reared back from the sudden rockfall.

“What is this? Catapults? No… It’s them.”

Ganondorf turned east. Goron troops were rolling across the fields in spiked armor while others hucked rocks at the monsters. Smashing right into the iron knuckle squadron was none other than Darunia. With a massive metal hammer, he struck down an iron knuckle with a single swing. Ganondorf and the Goron chieftain locked eyes from across the battlefield in that moment. The unspoken challenge was made, and to this, Ganondorf grinned. He flicked the blood off his scimitar, sheathed his blade, then drew a trident from his back, spinning it around in a flourish before charging towards Darunia. When the two warriors clashed, the battlefield quaked.

“Finally done sneaking through the grass, I see!” said Darunia. “I’m glad. Your defeat shall bring my people great honor!”

“Honor among whom? Your cowardly king? You may see him as a brother, but to him, you’re nothing more than a tool!” shouted Ganondorf.

The two warriors exchanged blows, their weapons lighting up the field with sparks every time they clashed.

“Your words mean nothing to me! You’re nothing but an overgrown child! As I recall, you threw a tantrum when I refused to give you the Goron’s Ruby!”

“Perhaps I did, but let me ask: did the king even raise a finger to aid you? Or was it not an outsider that had to come to your aid?”

Darunia growled and smashed his hammer into the ground. Before the shockwave threw Ganondorf from his steed, he made his horse leap through the air towards the Goron chieftain. Ganondorf slashed at Darunia with the tips of his trident, cutting the Goron’s cheek, and after landing behind him, the two warriors turned around, ready for another exchange of blows. The fight between Ganondorf and Darunia proved so dazzling, some of the monsters and Hylians were left in awe, halting their own battle for a moment. This is when the Kokiri joined the fray, sneaking into the ranks of the enemy and striking with treated wooden weapons.

“Even the forest children are fighting?!” shouted a Gerudo captain. Before the woman could even react, the straps of her saddle were cut, and she fell to the ground. Nearby, a Kokiri boy with a dagger and a wooden shield could be seen.

“We can’t let those big guys have all the fun,” said Mido with a grin. “Otherwise, what was the point of all that training?”

The Gerudo captain stood up and readied her scimitars. “You insolent welp! You’ll pay for this!”

The battle raged on, with Gerudo, Hylians, Gorons, Kokiri, and monsters entangled together, and in the center fought the King of Thieves and the Chieftain of the Gorons. Despite the arrival of enemy reinforcements, Ganondorf’s confidence never waned. He merely continued his fight with Darunia, laughing all the while.

---

Saria gripped Kaepora Gaebora’s ankles tightly as she was carried over Hyrule Fields. The great owl flew south and east to avoid the worst of the fighting, making his way around to Zora River. Despite the owl’s warnings, Saria could not avert her eyes from the bloodshed taking place below. She had lived a long time, but never had she seen such violence before. With sorrow in her heart, she hoped Sheik was all right.

Flying over Zora River, Saria scanned the ground for any sign of Sheik. Finally she saw a familiar face fending off attacking moblins.

“There he is! Bring me closer!” said Saria.

After she let go, Saria drew her sword, driving it right between the shoulder blades of a moblin. The beast collapsed into flame, and Saria fell to the water, with all eyes on her.

“Saria! What are you doing here?” said Sheik.

“I came to get you. We were tricked!” said Saria. She dodged the stabs of a moblin’s spear and spun around, slashing its ankles before finishing it off with a stab to the back. Together, she and Sheik made short work of the remaining moblins, and the monsters’ spears drifted down the river, fading from view.

“It seems I’m not the only one who was led astray,” said Sheik. “The-” Before Sheik could finish, Saria hugged him tight.

“I’m glad you’re okay. I’m sorry about what I said…”

Sheik pushed Saria back. “You’re apologizing to me?! I’m the one who should-” Sheik paused, shaking his head. “Never mind that. We need to stop Ganondorf!”

“Right!” Saria then looked to the air and shouted, “Kaepora Gaebora!”

The great owl flew back down to the ground and said, “Hoo hoot! Glad I am that your friend is safe. Shall we get a move on?”

Saria gave the owl a nod and said, “Grab on, Sheik. He’s never led me astray.”

The Sheikah boy seemed hesitant, but he grabbed hold of one leg all the same, and when the pair were in Kaepora Gaebora’s grasp, he took to the air and left Zora’s River behind.

“So what happened in Zora’s Domain?” asked Saria.

“A Gerudo witch had taken control of a great whale named Lord Jabu Jabu using a monstrous parasite. Channeling its strength, she froze all of Zora’s Domain, including the king and the princess.”

“Then she’s…?”

“The princess is fine. I’ve already taken care of everything. What of you?”

“Well… It turns out the rumors of the princess’s capture was just a trap meant to lure in agents of the Royal Family. I was captured and almost died, but a woman named Nabooru saved me. She was the ally among the Gerudo Impa spoke of.”

“I see… It seems your decision to leave the Goron’s Ruby with Impa was a wise one.” In that moment, Sheik’s expression turned grim. “Wait… Something has changed.”

“What is it?”

“Kaepora Gaebora, you need to take me over Castle Town’s walls. I have to… Save the Royal Family!”

Saria looked at Sheik. The normally calm and collected boy was sweating and breathing heavy. He almost looked sick. She spoke up, saying, “Can you do it, Kaepora?”

“I’ll do that and more!” said the owl with gusto.

Kaepora Gaebora changed course, swerving over Hyrule Fields and heading straight towards Castle Town. After flying over a rooftop, Sheik let go of the owl, landing on the building.

“Thank you. I’ll take care of things from here.”

“Sheik… Tell me you’ll be all right,” said Saria.

“I’ll… I’ll be fine,” said Sheik, turning away. The boy looked in the direction of the castle, and even Saria saw the plumes of smoke coming from that place. Before they parted ways, Sheik said, “Saria… I’m sorry.” Then he was gone.

“So… What will you do now?” asked Kaepora Gaebora. “I would not fault you for going after him.”

“He’ll be fine on his own. He’s proven that much… As for me, I need to help the others.”

“Then let us be off!”

Kaepora Gaebora took to the air once more, flying over the walls and bringing Saria to the battlefield. When the time came, Saria let go of the owl, and as she fell, she channeled that special technique once more. Sword in hand, she cut down a swathe of enemy monsters before even touching the ground. Landing in a clearing, her enemies fell before her, fading into flame.

“Who in the blazes are you?!” shouted a nearby field commander.

“She’s the girl who’s gonna save your sorry butts!” shouted Poppy.

“Where’s Ganondorf?” asked Saria.

“He’s there, fighting the Chieftain of the Gorons,” the commander gestured.

Saria looked across the field. Ganondorf rode a great steed while clashing with Darunia. The Goron chieftain looked wounded. Gripping her sword tight, Saria said, “Enemies have already made it inside the wall. Send who you can spare into Castle Town and make sure the people are safe. I’ll try to make up the difference.” When the field commander hesitated, Saria shouted, “Give the command now!!”

The commander shrinked back from this and then shouted, “First Formation, return to Castle Town and defend the people! Strike down every last monster you can find!!”

“Yes sir!!” several soldiers shouted in unison.

While the troops reorganized, Saria ran headlong into battle. Lizalfos blocked her path, but they were felled one by one, their armor and swords destroyed by Saria’s superior blade. When the Gerudo took notice of her, a captain ordered a squadron of horse archers to attack. Saria threw a pair of bombs at the squadron in response, diving out of the way of the incoming arrow volley. Dirt and smoke kicked up into the air as riders were blown away, with others falling to the ground as the horses stumbled over their brethren. A surviving archer leaped across the fallen and fired her bow, but a Goron soldier dove in front of Saria, blocking the arrow with his thick armor.

“Saria!! I got your back!”

“That voice,” said Saria. “Are you…?”

The Goron soldier knocked the Gerudo archer to the ground and Saria finished her off. With a moment’s respite, the Goron said, “You probably don’t recognize me! I’m the one that kept trying to jump you on Death Mountain!” the Goron chuckled. “You really saved us, so I’ll do what I can to help you!”

“I need to get to Darunia. Think you can make a path for me?”

“Can and will!”

The Goron soldier rolled up into a ball and bulldozed through the crowd of enemies. Saria ran close behind, striking any monster that got too close. But just when things were going well, a gigantic moblin with a club knocked the Goron soldier away with a single strike. Angered by this, Saria dodged the moblin’s next few swings and sliced the monster’s ankles. When he stumbled, Saria hucked a bomb at his face to finish him off. She had no time to rest, though, for another pack of lizalfos were charging her.

The Kokiri ducked and dodged the flurry of sword swipes from the attacking lizalfos, but with so many enemies, even Saria couldn’t avoid them all. Cuts across her leg and her side met their mark, and even after felling several lizalfos, more joined the fray, forcing her on the defensive. It was then that she heard a familiar voice.

“Saria, duck!!”

The Kokiri did so, dropping to the ground before a hail of deku seeds shot across the field, pelting the lizalfos into submission. Saria stood up, realizing it was Fado leading a group of Kokiri with slingshots.

“You’re all here too?” asked Saria.

“There’s no way we’d sit back again when so much is at stake!” said one of the Kokiri boys.

“And Mido would never let us hear the end of it,” smirked Fado.

“Mido is here too?” asked Poppy.

“He’s somewhere around here. Although… I must admit, it’s a bit hard to tell with so many tall folk,” Fado looked around. “Wait, there he is!”

Saria turned and saw Mido fighting an iron knuckle some distance away. He was dodging the warrior’s attacks well enough, but he couldn’t get a hit in, and it was clear he was growing tired. The problem was that Mido was in a different direction than Darunia and Ganondorf.

Wait… If I don’t intervene, Mido might-no, I can’t let that happen. But Darunia… Saria looked back at her brethren, feeling unsure. Deku seeds would never penetrate armor that thick. I can’t send them into a losing battle either.

“Fado, can you and the others back me up? I need to help Mido!!” shouted Saria.

“We’ll do what we can,” Fado nodded, looking to the other Kokiri. “All right, you heard the lady. Make sure none of those other monsters get close to her!”

“Yes ma’am!!” the Kokiri shouted in unison.

Fado giggled. “I quite like this position.”

Saria charged back into the fray, dodging incoming attacks from monsters and Gerudo. The Kokiri led by Fado fired on these attackers and helped keep Saria safe until, finally, she dove in front of Mido and blocked the iron knuckle’s axe.

“S-saria?! What are you doing?” asked a sweating Mido.

“I’m helping you! What does it look like I’m doing?!” Saria shirked the iron knuckle’s axe to the side and pushed it back with a flurry of sword swings. When she saw an opening, Saria struck the iron knuckle’s helmet, splitting it open. The Gerudo inside breathed fresh air at last, and she fell to her knees in a daze.

“I… I didn’t need your help.” Mido struggled to stand. Saria helped him up all the same.

“Your shield arm… It looks like it’s broken,” said Saria.

“I blocked one of that thing’s attacks and paid for it. I-I’ll be fine, though.” Mido gritted his teeth in pain.

“No, you can’t fight in this condition. Get to Fado and get this arm treated.” Saria then looked to Mido’s fairy. “Macho, take care of him for me.”

“Of course!” the muscular fairy saluted. “Come along, then!”

As Saria readied to leave, she looked back at the wide-eyed Gerudo woman in the iron knuckle armor. The Kokiri was filled with disgust, cursing Ganondorf under his breath. She continued her trek across the field, fighting her way to Darunia. As she struck down another moblin, she looked up at the sky. The sun was setting.

“No… Not now!” A bloody dinolfos rushed her, and Saria blocked, struggling against the lizardman’s strength. She growled, shouting, “Get out of my way!!”

Knowing her time was short, Saria did everything she could to hurry. Her defense grew sloppy, and she took more damage. Even so, she pressed on, slaying every monster that tried to stop her. But when she grew close to the battle between Ganondorf and Darunia, the sun finally set, and stalchildren burst from the ground, attacking everyone indiscriminately. One of the skeletons managed to grab Saria by the arm and yank her back. Saria spun around and punched the head off the stalchild, but it continued to fight. More stalchildren attacked, dogpiling onto her.

“No, get off of me! Darunia!!” Saria reached out a hand.

Up ahead, the wounded Goron blocked another strike as Ganondorf rode past. Several small cuts and bruises covered his body. Saria could tell he was being worn down.

“You fight well for a coward,” said Darunia. “I might have to take this seriously after all.”

Ganondorf laughed, saying, “Even a child could see through your bluff. Submit yourself to me, or you shall die!”

“Ha! I’d rather be dead than kneel before you!”

Ganondorf made a gesture with his free hand. “So be it!”

The Gerudo kicked his heels into his steed and charged, trident at the ready. Darunia put his dominant foot forward and stood his ground, gripping his hammer. Behind the Goron, a shadowy manifestation of Ganondorf had appeared, riding a phantom steed towards him. Saria punched, kicked, and sliced at the stalchildren surrounding her, all while shouting after her friend.

“Darunia! Darunia, behind you!!”

In that moment, Darunia hesitated. He looked back, swinging his hammer at the phantom. Only, this proved to be his downfall. In that moment, he left himself open, and that was when the real Ganondorf struck. The Gerudo’s trident struck true, mortally wounding the Goron. Ganondorf left his weapon behind, riding away from the fallen chieftain.

Saria’s blood went cold at the sight. As Darunia fell, Saria cried out Ganondorf’s name in a rage and used up the last of her magic energy to cast Din’s Fire. The surrounding stalchildren were blown away, their bones reduced to ash. She didn’t even consider going after Ganondorf. Instead, she ran to Darunia’s side.

“Darunia!”

“Sister…? Is that you?”

“Poppy, can you treat his wounds?”

“I can try, but-”

“Just do it!”

With a stalwart look in her eye, Poppy nodded, looking over the Goron and applying fairy dust.

Holding her blood brother in her arms, Saria said, “Darunia, I’m sorry. If I hadn’t shouted, you’d still be…”

“No, don’t say that. Either he would have done me in or his shadow. Either way, I met my match.” Darunia looked out across the fields, catching Saria’s attention. She looked as well, seeing that Ganondorf was leading a charge on Castle Town’s gate. “You need to stop him,” Darunia continued. “His eyes… There was something strange about his eyes. He truly is a madman. If he gets the Triforce…”

“That won’t happen!” said Saria. “I’ll make sure of it.”

Despite Poppy’s best efforts, Darunia was still bleeding fast. The Goron clasped his large hands over Saria’s and said, “Blood sister… I have a son back on Death Mountain. He’s… A timid boy. Small, weak, and cowardly… Someone needs to be there for him, to help him find his courage… You’ll help him, won’t you?”

Tears in her eyes, Saria nodded, saying, “I’ll watch over him. Don’t you worry.”

Darunia smiled. “Ha ha… I knew I could count on you. You’re a true friend.” Darunia’s grasp grew weak. He then said, “It’s strange… We hadn’t met that long ago, but I feel like I’ve known you for years. Maybe… I’m just… A little tired…”

The Chieftain of the Gorons breathed his last. His body fell limp, but… He died with a smile on his face. Saria didn’t know how to respond. She looked at the man, dumbfounded, doing everything she could to shake him awake. She tried calling his name, but he didn’t answer. Never did that smile fade.

“Saria… We need to go,” said Poppy.

The Kokiri girl sniffled, drying her eyes with the back of her good sleeve. “You’re right. The fight isn’t over yet.” Saria stood up, turning to face the stalchildren looking at her. Gripping her sword, she rushed them, striking the skeletons down in a flash. Then the ground rumbled, and a giant stalchild dug its way out of the dirt, towering over the Kokiri with its great claws. Saria gripped her sword and walked towards the giant.

“Out of my way,” she muttered. The giant stalchild tilted its head, then readied to strike. Saria then screamed. “Out of my way!!!”

Chapter Text

Impa ran from the castle gate, carrying the young Princess Zelda on her back. Behind her, Hyrule Castle was falling to ruin from the beasts that besieged it. As harsh winds carried smoke and cinders through the air, Impa steeled herself for the challenges ahead. Soon enough, monsters appeared to block her path, leaping from the grassy cliffs up above.

“Hang on, your highness,” said Impa, and as swift as lightning, Impa struck down the monsters with a series of kicks. Yet even more appeared, bursting from the very earth.

Stalchildren? Impossible! Is the protective barrier already weakening? thought Impa. No matter. I will destroy them like the rest.

Every foe that dared oppose her fell, utterly crushed by Impa’s superior strength and technique. But even with her skill in battle, fighting with a child clinging to her back limited her movements. If she moved too quickly, Zelda wouldn’t be able to hold on, so in order to keep the girl safe, Impa allowed herself to be struck. Cuts and bruises were of no consequence to her, yet with so many foes and so many wounds, even a Sheikah Master could not keep this up forever.

“Impa, please! Let me run on my own,” said Zelda.

“I’m sorry, but you’re far too slow in your current state. I can’t allow you to fall behind and be captured,” said Impa.

“But you’re getting hurt because of me…”

The Sheikah woman simply smiled. “These wounds are nothing.” Then Impa dodged back, avoiding an arrow from a Gerudo archer atop a roof. “Now let us be off. These invaders are too impatient for conversation.”

Impa used her arms to support Zelda while the child continued clinging onto her back. Dodging from side to side, Impa then leaped onto the nearby roof, striking the Gerudo in the neck and sending her flying off the building. Others were moving into position atop other buildings, so Impa took a moment to scan her surroundings, eventually deciding on the most efficient route.

There! We’ll jump to that alleyway.

The fighting continued, and though Impa suffered more wounds, her years of intense training let her push them from her mind. All that mattered was the princess’s safety. All that mattered were her final orders…

When the castle was first attacked, even the king’s elite guards proved no match for the enemy forces. With their backs up against the wall, the king gave Impa the Royal Family’s most sacred treasure, the Ocarina of Time, and told her to escape with Princess Zelda.

“But my liege, your safety is just as paramount!” said Impa.

“Ha! Your concern is noted, but my decision is final. Take Zelda and the sacred treasures far from this place. No matter what, Ganondorf must not be allowed beyond the Door of Time. If he steps foot in the Sacred Realm, the whole world is doomed!”

“But-”

“These are my final orders. Now go!” shouted King Emmerich. To this, Impa nodded, leaving the throne room. The last thing she heard was the door being broken down. Behind her, the king unsheathed his sword. “It’s been some time since I had to use this… Let’s see if you monsters can help me shake off the rust!”

Emmerich… Please be safe…

Impa reached Castle Town proper, and all around her was fighting and chaos. Hylian soldiers could be seen giving it their all. Some were fighting the invading monsters and Gerudo, some were helping citizens get to safety, and others were trying to put out the raging fires being lit all over the town. Spotting a soldier about to get killed, Impa rushed in and struck down a dinolfos.

“L-lady Impa! You saved me!” said the wounded soldier.

“This is no time for niceties. Are there any horses still in the stables?” asked Impa.

“Unfortunately no. The stables were the first thing the Gerudo targeted.”

“I should have known… If you can still fight, focus on protecting the people. We can rebuild whatever homes we lose this night!”

“But what about you?”

“I need to get the princess to safety. Don’t worry about me. I can handle these fiends on my own.”

The wounded soldier nodded, gripping his spear tight. “I won’t let you down!” The soldier then ran back into the fray, charging an oversized moblin. Impa ran into an alleyway to continue her escape, unsure of the man’s fate.

Impa continued running through the town, striking down monsters and Gerudo – especially those that were targeting the townsfolk. When the main gate to Castle Town was breached, the attacks only grew more intense. Eventually Impa was forced to ignore the plights of those around her, barely able to avoid incoming attacks herself. Whenever she ran down one path, more monsters appeared, forcing her down another. So focused on keeping herself and Zelda alive, she didn’t even realize what was happening until it was too late. Taking shelter inside the Temple of Time, she barred the doors and took stock of her surroundings.

It will be some time before those monsters break through the front door, but the Gerudo should have no trouble coming in through the windows. Perhaps I should do the same. If it hasn’t already been compromised, I could take the secret passage nearby, and once I’m out in the fields… Yes, that should work.

Reaching into a hip pouch, Impa drew a deku nut and threw it at one of the temple’s windows, shattering the glass. She then said, “Brace yourself, your highness. This will require another great leap.”

Impa then ran towards the broken window, jumping into the air. Much to her surprise, a magical barrier appeared, blocking her path. She bashed into the barrier, tumbling through the air before landing on her feet.

“What? Who-” Impa’s questions were quickly answered by the sound of clapping hands. Turning towards the sound, a figure emerged, seemingly manifesting from the shadows. It was none other than Ganondorf, smiling from ear to ear.

“Well done, well done indeed! You’ve exceeded my expectations in making it here, though it seems my minions were a bit rough with you along the way,” said Ganondorf.

“What are you talking about?” asked Impa.

“Don’t tell me you didn’t notice. I had ordered my minions to intentionally block what paths they did so that you might arrive here on your own. Think of it like a fox hunt, except this time you were the fox. Now that you’re here, I’m one step closer to opening the Door of Time.”

Impa narrowed her eyes. Such careful planning, she thought. He most likely knows I have the Goron’s Ruby and the Ocarina of Time. But one step closer… Is he still missing something?

“Zelda, hide behind that pillar. I’ll take care of him,” said Impa.

“O-okay,” said Zelda, dropping to the ground and running back.

Ganondorf chuckled. “Oh please, you don’t have to call her that around me. I already know that Zelda is a fake.”

“What?! But how…?”

Throwing off his cape, Ganondorf assumed a fighting stance. “Let’s just say… I heard it through the cracks.” Then Ganondorf rushed Impa, punching her in the chest. Impa flew back, catching herself on a pillar before leaping from it. Ganondorf narrowly dodged Impa’s attack, and the ground where he once stood turned to shattered stone.

“You’d best pray to your desert goddess while you have the chance. I won’t miss again,” said Impa.

“Ha ha! Now that’s the spirit!” shouted Ganondorf. “Come on then! Show me the true power of the Sheikah!!”

Impa dashed towards the Gerudo, feigning a kick before circling around and striking Ganondorf’s back with her elbow. The Gerudo stumbled, wheezing from the blow before being struck in the stomach by Impa’s knee. Ganondorf was knocked into the air by the strike, but instead of landing on the ground, he created a magic circle mid-air to leap from. As he fell towards Impa, a black and purple flame built up around his right hand. Impa could sense the great power from this spell, so she jumped back as far as she could. When Ganondorf struck the ground, a huge explosion of dark energy was released, causing the Temple of Time to rumble. Standing amidst a small crater, Ganondorf smirked.

“What’s wrong? Is the Great Impa scared of a little magic?”

“No… On the contrary, I’m happy you showed your hand early. Now I know what to expect.”

“Hmph! I wouldn’t be so sure. I’ve-” Before Ganondorf could finish his sentence, Impa had already closed the distance, striking him over and over again. Punches, kicks, knees, elbow strikes, and more struck the Gerudo, leaving him stunned from the pain. With one final kick, she sent Ganondorf flying, and he smashed into a nearby wall, coughing up blood from the impact.

“You may have found a way to empower your strikes with dark magic, but it’s far too slow. As you can see, I can hit you a dozen times before you can throw a single punch. Come back in a century once you’ve honed a real fighting technique.”

Climbing out of the crater in the wall, Ganondorf laughed. “It seems I’ve underestimated you, Sheikah. I’m glad.”

“You’re… Glad?”

“Yes! I was worried you had grown weak from the last decade of peace. Killing you when you weren’t at your best would have never satisfied me. You’ve put down far too many of my people for that!”

“I see how it is. So you just want to satisfy your own ego by defeating the woman your ancestors could not.”

“Precisely!!”

Ganondorf flew across the temple with a dark magic kick. Impa flipped over the Gerudo, ready to counterattack, but her strike was blocked by a summoned magic circle. Ganondorf spun around, striking his fist into the circle. Instinct took over as Impa shirked her head to the side, and she narrowly avoided a magic beam. Even so, the beam had still singed her cheek.

A direct hit from that would kill me. It seems this welp still has a few tricks up his sleeve.

The fighting continued, with Impa and Ganondorf tearing through the Temple of Time, leaving cracked and shattered stone in their wake. All the while, Princess Zelda watched from the sidelines, hiding behind a distant pillar.

“You can do it, Impa! I believe in you!!” shouted Zelda.

“We’ll see about that,” said Ganondorf. After dodging a kick from Impa, the Gerudo made another magic circle pointed right at Zelda. He dashed away from his opponent and struck the circle.

“Princess!!” Her body moved on its own. Impa stepped in front of the magic beam to protect Zelda. Quite suddenly, Impa felt very, very cold. She looked down, realizing there was a bloody hole in her chest. “P-princess…”

Impa collapsed to the ground, barely able to stay conscious. Her vision blurred as she looked up at Ganondorf, who towered over her, laughing.

“Ha ha ha! So you’ve gone soft after all! I’ve heard countless legends of the cold-hearted Impa. It was said that you cut down countless enemies of the Royal Family. Young, old – it didn’t matter. Anyone who was your enemy was killed without mercy. Perhaps your stories were mere exaggerations…”

“You… Fiend…”

“I suppose if she were the real Zelda, it would make sense to sacrifice yourself for her, but…” Ganondorf turned his gaze towards the crying princess. “I wonder who she really is? An orphan plucked from the streets? A paid actress? Or…” Ganondorf paused, shaking his head. “Ah, it doesn’t matter. I’ll just be taking the-”

Impa grabbed hold of Ganondorf’s wrist and clenched down hard. Though it only worsened her bleeding, she put in enough force to crush iron. Ganondorf howled in pain, striking Impa over and over with his other hand to make her let go.

“Unhand me, woman! You’ve lost! Fulfill your destiny and die already!!”

“Not until… I finish… You off…” Impa began quietly muttering an incantation for a spell unique to the Sheikah. Not wanting to ever compromise their brothers and sisters by being captured, the Sheikah developed a special spell that would detonate their own bodies, sacrificing themselves, and with luck, taking out any surrounding enemies in the blast. With the King of the Gerudo firmly in her grasp, Impa tried to finish the incantation with what little time she had left.

“W-what are you doing? Stop!!”

Impa’s body began to glow, and despite Ganondorf’s best efforts, he couldn’t break free. Finally unsheathing his scimitar, he tried striking Impa’s arm, but her incredible musculature, when fully flexed, was as hard as steel. It seemed as if this was truly the end for Ganondorf, but…

Her body went limp.

Even a woman as strong as Impa could not maintain consciousness after losing so much blood. Before she could finish the incantation, Impa passed out. A bead of sweat slipped down Ganondorf’s forehead as he easily pulled his hand back. Stumbling to his feet, the Gerudo nervously laughed as he put his good hand over his broken wrist, focusing his magic to heal the wound. Though he would still be sore for some time, his bones were mended, and the battle was won.

“At last, I’ve done it! I’ve defeated the Great Impa! You had me worried there, I’ll give you that, but it seems even you have your limits. Good riddance!”

A swift kick knocked Impa’s body across the room, bashing it into a nearby pillar. Zelda screamed and ran over to her.

“Stop it! You’ve already won, so leave her alone!”

Ganondorf looked down at the crying girl, not feeling even a wisp of remorse for her. He said, “I will do as I please, girl, although I suppose I should be gentler. It wouldn’t do me much good if I broke the stone and ocarina…”

The Gerudo reached down, ready to take the sacred treasures off of Impa’s body, but then Zelda stepped in the way, blocking him.

“No, I won’t let you!” said the girl.

“Kid… You’ve got a lot of guts! Killing you will accomplish nothing, but I am not a patient man. Move aside, and I might let you live.

“I… I refuse!!”

“Tsk. Suit yourself.”

Ganondorf charged up a magical attack in his hand, ready to blow the princess to bits, but before he could cast his spell, a strange ringing echoed through the temple, and a young boy in Sheikah garb appeared, tossing a needle at his hand. Ganondorf winced in pain from the sudden attack and fired his spell at the boy, but he dodged to the side, rushing in to kick Ganondorf in the chest. The Gerudo caught the boy’s foot and threw him back. As the boy flipped through the air and landed on his feet, Ganondorf yanked the needle out of his hand.

“Your reign of terror ends here,” said the boy.

“Is that so? You really think you’ll fare better than your master?” Ganondorf then took stock of the boy. His visible eye was red like a Sheikah’s, but the blonde hair was unmistakable. “I see… So you’ve finally appeared, Princess Zelda.”

The boy’s eyes went wide, and he dove in for another attack. While he and Ganondorf exchanged blows, the King of the Gerudo couldn’t help but smile.

It’s just as I predicted, thought Ganondorf. Everything is falling into place…

---

Saria fought her way into Castle Town, cutting down monsters as she went. From her hip, a torn pouch dangled uselessly. She had tried to play the Sun Song to banish the stalchildren, but one of them had attacked while her guard was down, shattering her ocarina with a single swipe. A dull rage boiled within her, for she knew her hesitation and carelessness had only led to more suffering.

If I just played when I had the chance, then things would be different, but I was so focused on saving Darunia, I… Saria clenched her teeth, shaking her head as tears streamed down her face. I have to stay focused and find Ganondorf. Defeating him is the only way to stop this madness now!

One by one, monsters fell before her blade. After she cleared a path for them, she shouted after the scared townsfolk.

“Go now!” Saria yelled.

““Thank you!!”” said the townsfolk as they ran.

Looking around, the town was in absolute chaos. Fires had spread all over, engulfing entire buildings. The heat was overwhelming, and the choking smoke burned her eyes. Soldiers were still fighting valiantly to ensure the safety of the people, but there were far too many enemies in the town. It wouldn’t be long until the Hylians were forced back across the moat.

While she was scanning her surroundings, Saria heard a crying woman and a barking dog. The sound was coming from a burning building on the verge of collapse.

“Someone! Anyone!” the woman cried between coughs.

Saria tried opening the door on reflex, burning her hand. As she winced in pain, Poppy flew off to the side of the building into an alleyway.

“Over here!” said Poppy.

Seeing all the smoke pouring out, Saria wrapped her face with her cloak and climbed through the open window. She searched the first floor, dodging burning debris. There was no sign of anyone. She then made her way to the second floor, finding a large woman in a dress with a small dog. Saria recognized her from the marketplace.

“Hey! Come this way! We can get out through this window!” shouted Saria.

“I can’t,” the woman coughed. “My leg…” Saria looked down, realizing the woman’s right leg was bruised and badly burned. It seemed she had been struck by falling debris. “Please,” said the woman. “Save my puppy…”

“No can do. We’re all getting out of here!” said Saria. The Kokiri hoisted the large woman over her back while Poppy carried the dog. Together, they went downstairs, and just before the building came down, Saria leaped from the window, landing safely outside. After putting some distance from the collapsed building, Saria set the woman down and began treating her leg with her medicinal powder. Poppy’s arms nearly gave out before she passed the dog back to the woman.

“Thank you… I really didn’t think I was going to make it. What’s going on?” asked the woman.

“Ganondorf… He finally attacked Hyrule with his army of monsters.”

“Really? But he was such good friends with the king. What could drive someone to throw away their friendship like that?

“It was just a ruse,” said a nearby voice. Saria looked over, realizing it was a wounded guard on the ground, leaning his back against a wall. “We should have never trusted that man.”

Saria wasn’t sure how to respond. The rage deep inside her had been tempered by the tragedy befalling the townsfolk. Innocent people were being caught up in Ganondorf’s war, trampled by his ambitions. After she finished treating the woman, she spoke up in a cool, quiet voice.

“That should do it. Can you walk on your own?”

“I think I can manage… Where should I go?”

“Follow the main road towards the gate. There should still be soldiers funneling out townsfolk.”

“Okay,” the woman stood up, taking her dog back. “Thank you, dearie!”

“What about you?” Saria asked, looking at the wounded guard. “I still have some medicine.”

“Save it,” the guard grumbled. “I’m finished.” After coughing up blood, the guard looked up at Saria and said, “H-hey, I recognize you. You’re that girl Lady Impa told us about.” Much to everyone’s surprise, the guard tried standing up. He quickly fell to his knees, and Saria moved to catch him.

“Hey, take it easy!”

“No, I have to… Tell you something. I saw Lady Impa running with the princess! They were funneled towards the Temple of Time!”

“What?!”

“S-she might be trapped there! You have to… Save… Them…” The guard went limp in Saria’s arms. As the realization dawned on her, she hugged the guard’s body, then set him back down against the wall.

“Don’t worry,” said Saria. “I won’t let you down.”

As Saria and Poppy went to leave, the woman with her dog called out. “Hey, you aren’t really going to fight, are you?”

“I have to. If I don’t stop this, who will?”

“But…” The woman cradled her dog. “I can’t stand the thought of someone so young fighting in a war… What has the world come to?”

“If it makes you feel any better, I’m probably older than you.”

The woman seemed shocked, yet as she looked into Saria’s resolute eyes, she relaxed. “You’re no ordinary girl, are you? Well… Just be careful, okay?”

Saria’s mouth made a half-smile. She nodded, running back towards the fighting. As she ran, she felt a twisting sensation in her stomach. If Impa and Princess Zelda had been funneled towards the temple, that’s most likely where Sheik would head. If she could reunite with them, Saria was certain they could best Ganondorf. Then why… Why did she have such a bad feeling?

The sky was dark and cloudy, and the moon was painted a deep red from all the smoke. This was the first time Saria had ever approached the Temple of Time, and between the sky and the Sheikah stones staring at her from nearby, it had a strange, foreboding atmosphere. On her approach, she felt the ground quake. Something terrible was happening inside the temple. As she tried to open the doors, she realized it was blocked by a magical barrier.

“No! Let me in!!” Saria slammed into the double doors with her shoulder. Try as she might, she just struck the magic barrier uselessly.

“Wait… I think I have an idea,” said Poppy.

“What is it?”

“I can tell the magic used for this barrier isn’t being maintained. If you hit it enough times with your own magic, you might be able to break it!”

Saria considered her options, thinking back to that special sword technique. It seemed more suited to striking surrounding foes than smashing things, but she wondered if there was a way to adjust the technique. She thought back to Darunia, and the way he swung around his giant hammer on the battlefield. Channeling that memory into a vision, she surrounded her dinolfos blade in magic, gripping its handle with both hands. After taking a stance just like Darunia, she swung her sword at the barrier. Magic sparks flew as she met resistance, but she pushed her sword against the barrier as hard as she could, until finally, it shattered – as did the dinolfos blade. As the barrier fell to pieces and faded away, her broken blade flew back, landing in the nearby grass.

“I guess you need a tougher blade for that technique,” said Poppy.

“No matter,” Saria tossed the broken sword aside, feeling a little sad. “Now let’s get inside!”

Saria pulled open the double doors and ran in, noticing broken parts of a barricade in the hall. Somehow there was a light so bright it obscured the inside of the temple. When her eyes finally adjusted, she realized just what had happened. Off to the side was an unconscious Impa, bleeding badly from a grievous wound. Doing her best to tend to her was the princess, who was in tears. Up ahead was Sheik, bruised and battered, and in front of the boy was none other than Ganondorf. Saria rushed in with her scimitar, joining the battle. It felt like her body was moving on its own. She didn’t even say anything before she started swiping at the King of the Gerudo.

“Saria!” said Sheik from behind.

“Get the others to safety!” said Saria. “I’ll take care of him.”

“No. We’ll defeat him here and now, together!”

“You should probably listen to your friend,” Ganondorf grinned, parrying with his own scimitar. “You’re a brave little runt, but you’re no match for me!”

Every time Saria’s blade clashed with Ganondorf’s, she could feel a biting force reverberating through her arms. He was stronger than she had anticipated, and his speed and technique far surpassed her own. Even knowing this, Saria refused to relent. When an opening presented itself, Saria used her spinning technique, distracting Ganondorf as she drew her dagger with her free hand, then she dashed forward, cutting him across his side. Everyone, including Ganondorf, was left stunned by this turn of events. As Saria got into a fighting stance with her two blades, Ganondorf touched his wound and laughed.

“Ha ha! So you have some skill.” Ganondorf then drew his second scimitar, getting into a proper Gerudo fighting stance. “Let’s see if you can keep it up!”

Sheik finally joined Saria’s side, and after exchanging nods, the two fought the King of the Gerudo together. Saria attacked first, striking with her scimitar and dagger. Ganondorf parried these attacks, shirking Saria off to the side. Sheik followed this up with a rapid series of punches and kicks, which seemed to do little damage, but it kept Ganondorf distracted long enough for Saria to come back in swinging, landing another cut across the man’s chest. Ganondorf responded to these two attackers by stomping the ground, causing dark magic to flare up in a circle and force Saria and Sheik back. Soon after, the fighting continued.

As Ganondorf fought off the Kokiri and Sheikah boy, he said, “You brats have some real fighting spirit. I like it!” He then narrowed his gaze, speaking in a cold tone. “But fighting spirit is always trumped by experience.”

Ganondorf threw a horizontal kick through the air, making Saria and Sheik dodge back. In one fluid motion, Ganondorf’s kick made him spin around, then as he turned to face his enemies once more, he tossed his scimitars into the air, one after the other. Before Saria and Sheik thought to react, the Gerudo’s hands flared up with dark magic, and with incredible force, he slammed his fists into the ground, creating a shockwave that sent Saria and Sheik flying backwards. Before his foes hit the ground, Ganondorf caught his scimitars and gave chase.

In the precious few seconds they had together, Sheik spoke to Saria and said, “We can’t keep fighting like this. He’s too strong!”

“Got any ideas?” asked Saria.

“Just one. Make an opening for me.”

The pair lost momentum near the entrance to the temple, catching themselves on the wall. While Sheik dropped to the ground, Saria kicked off the wall to charge Ganondorf, meeting him head-on. The Kokiri and Gerudo then exchanged blows in a furious barrage of sword swings, making sparks fly all throughout the temple. It was unlikely Saria could keep Ganondorf distracted for long. She knew that. But she also knew how fast Sheik truly was. After all, she had watched him run that obstacle course in the hidden village dozens upon dozens of times.

“Got it!” said Sheik.

“What?” Ganondorf looked down. A leather bag that had been hanging from his belt was gone, snatched up by the Sheikah boy. Saria looked at Sheik, realizing he was wounded. Even in that brief opening Saria had made, Sheik still had to take a hit to get what he wanted.

Ganondorf must have lashed out at Sheik without even realizing it due to combat instincts, Saria thought. I can’t even imagine the training he must have undergone…

Saria thought she’d have to chase after Ganondorf as soon as he realized what had happened, but instead, he merely smirked, attacking Saria once more.

“You must be wondering why I won’t go after them, right?” said Ganondorf. Saria’s eyes went wide at this statement, and she struggled against the man’s strength as their blades locked. “Before I tell you, let me ask you something: do you believe in destiny?”

“Huh? What kind of question is that?” asked Saria.

Ganondorf pushed Saria back, but rather than pursue, he simply watched as Saria skid to a halt. He lowered his blades, leaving himself vulnerable to attack. Sensing this was a trap, Saria maintained her fighting stance, waiting to see what would happen. Ganondorf stared her down.

“Well? Do you?!”

Hesitant at first, Saria finally said, “If you must know, I think we choose our own fate.”

Ganondorf’s grin faded into a frown. “You would think that I suppose… You know so little, after all.”

“What are you talking about?”

“Let me ask you a follow-up: if you could go back in time and do things differently, would you?”

This question struck Saria to the core. Memories flashed before her eyes. Memories of the forest, of the Great Deku Tree, of Link.

“Of course I would… I’ve thought about it dozens, maybe even hundreds of times. And you know why I think about it so much?” Saria pointed her dagger at Ganondorf. “It’s because of YOU! You’re the one that took him from me! You’re the one that stole his future!! The world was at peace! Everyone was happy! But you trampled over that peace, that happiness. And for what?! The Triforce? Why do you even want it so badly? To conquer Hyrule?!”

Saria was fuming mad, shouting at the top of her lungs. There was so much vitriol inside of her and she finally had the chance to let it all out. She finally stopped to catch her breath. In that moment, Ganondorf started to chuckle, then laugh, and pretty soon, he was cackling like a madman. Then she saw it. That look in his eye… In that moment, Saria understood what Darunia was talking about. In that moment… She was afraid.

“You think I’m doing this just to conquer Hyrule? With the power the Triforce would offer me, I could conquer the whole world! But… That’s not why I want it. Not anymore.”

“What? Then why?”

“I… Wish to be free.”

Saria froze for a moment. Ganondorf’s expression had shifted from stark-raving mad to one more somber. He really meant it… But what is he talking about? Saria wondered. Free? Free from what?

Then Saria’s gaze shifted from Ganondorf to Sheik. She realized now what he was planning. He was at the far end of the temple, placing the Spiritual Stones on an altar one by one. Saria glanced at the princess for a moment, then back to Sheik. She realized the princess had likely given Sheik the Ocarina of Time as well.

“He’s really going to do it,” Saria said in a hushed tone of disbelief. “Sheik!!” Saria rushed forward, intent on stopping her friend from doing something inconceivable. But before she could get past Ganondorf, he moved his sword in the way.

“What, you’ve lost trust in your friend already? Don’t be like that,” Ganondorf grinned. “If she wants to open the Door of Time for the Master Sword, then let her.”

“Her?”

“Oh right, you don’t know yet. No matter.”

Swinging his blade with horrendous strength, Ganondorf created a whirlwind of dark magic, knocking Saria back once more. Though she tried to block it, the force of the attack was too great, and her Gerudo scimitar shattered to pieces. Once she came to a stop, the Kokiri was riddled with cuts from the metal shrapnel. Down on one knee, she held the tattered handle of her scimitar in her right hand and the Hylian dagger in her left.

He's toying with me… He could have swung with that much power before, but he chose not to. He isn’t taking me seriously at all… Saria tossed the scimitar handle aside, passing the dagger to her right hand. She felt weak and humiliated. Even so, she refused to give up. She forced herself back on her feet and took a fighting stance once more, staring down the King of the Gerudo as he approached.

“Standing already? I much preferred you on your knees,” said Ganondorf in a mocking tone. “Still, I can respect your tenacity. I’ll tell you the real reason I want the Triforce. Perhaps then you may understand why it is that I fight.”

Loathe as she was to admit it, Saria accepted the chance to catch her breath. She wasn’t sure when or how Ganondorf would attack, so she stayed vigilant as the Gerudo told her his story.

“Some time ago, I was on a quest for the Spiritual Stones. My aim was to steal away into the Door of Time and enter the Sacred Realm. I wanted to conquer Hyrule and the rest of the world, and after I was humiliated by Darunia, I returned to my home to rethink my approach. That was when I heard his voice. My voice. A version of myself from another time and another place had reached out to me. According to him, he had been defeated by a young man wearing a green cap, not unlike the cap you wear now. Left in a weakened state, seven sages gathered together and threw him into the dark depths of the Evil Realm, intending to seal him there for all eternity. But… Little by little, he gnawed at his bindings, and he scraped and he clawed every which way, doing his best to break free. Despite his best efforts, he remained trapped. It was then that he found faint cracks in that space. Cracks that let him peer into other realms. Long did he search for his own realm. In time, he found me, and he whispered through the cracks everything he had experienced up until that point. He told me about his rise to power and his eventual downfall. He even taught me magic I would never have dreamed of knowing. In exchange, he wanted me to succeed where he failed, and once I had the Triforce, free him from his prison so that he could return to his own time, his own world.”

“But… You said you wanted to be free, right?” asked Poppy, who was watching over Saria.

“Correct,” said Ganondorf. “One thing that stood out like a sore thumb in his tale was that of the prophecy – the one that spoke of his downfall. Powerful beings had learned of the prophecy through a vision. Much like the fabled power of the princess, it seemed that there was a way for certain beings to see the future. Overcome with curiosity, I wanted that power for myself, so that I might avoid a similar fate to my counterpart. So, I snuck into Hyrule Castle’s secret library and sought a means to learn of my future.” Ganondorf clenched his fist, gritting his teeth. “Not only did I learn about my future, I also learned about my past as well. The truth is that I’ve played out this tired dance of fighting a hero and a princess countless times before, and I will continue to do so in the future over and over and over again. The world might look different, and I might be a different person, but the circumstances remain the same. I’m no king. I’m just a pawn in some never-ending game. I’ve been dancing to someone else’s tune before I was even born.”

Echoes of a magical song drifted through the Temple of Time. The young boy, Sheik, played a song with the ocarina, and before Saria’s eyes, the Door of Time opened.

“Then… All of this… Is just so you can break free of that cycle?” asked Saria.

“Indeed! I’ve always hated being told what to do. Even so, my thirst for power only grew when I learned the truth! No greater power exists in this world than the Triforce. If I wanted to break the shackles of destiny, I knew there was only one way to do it. So I planned, and I schemed, and I waited until the time was right. And now… The door is open.”

Without hesitation, Ganondorf took off in a sprint. Saria gave chase, glancing over at Princess Zelda and Impa for a moment.

“Poppy, can you save Impa? She may be the only way we can stop Ganondorf now.”

“I’ll do my best, but her wounds don’t look good. Are you going to be okay?” asked Poppy.

“I don’t know. All I know is I have to stop that madman before it’s too late.”

Poppy flew over to Zelda and Impa while Saria hopped over the altar, reaching the passageway beyond the Door of Time. Up ahead, she could see Sheik struggling to pull a sword out of a pedestal, but no matter how hard he pulled, it wouldn’t budge.

“Come on… Lend me… Your strength! I… Need you!” Sheik said through struggling breaths. A trail of blood from the boy’s wounds led all the way up to the pedestal.

“That sword is not meant for you,” said Ganondorf, flying out of Saria’s reach with a dark magic kick. Sheik was knocked away from the pedestal, sent tumbling across the floor. Saria circled around the large stony room and rushed to Sheik’s side. Despite the circumstances, Saria couldn’t ignore the boy’s plight.

“Sheik!” said Saria, kneeling down with her medicine kit. Already she was trying to treat Sheik’s wounds and staunch the bleeding.

“You fool! We have to stop him!” Sheik said between coughs.

“What even is that sword?”

“This is the Master Sword,” said Ganondorf. “Also known as the Blade of Evil’s Bane, it is the final barrier to the Sacred Realm, a lock that not even my predecessor could hope to circumvent. It was only by chance that a certain fool of a boy pulled it out for him, and that’s why he was able to gain access to the Sacred Realm.”

“But… If you knew that, why did you do all of this? You could have accomplished everything if you just did what the other you did!” said Saria.

“And let that boy become a threat to me? I think not. No… I was well aware that I would have a harder time accomplishing my mission if I killed that boy. But… I did it anyway. It didn’t take much, after all,” Ganondorf grinned. “A small boon of power to Queen Ghoma was all it took to break the prophecy in two!!”

Saria’s rage flared up in that moment, and she rushed Ganondorf with her dagger, only to be easily blocked by the man’s scimitar. Despite the man’s strength, Saria was able to push him away from the pedestal, if only a little. The two then exchanged blows with one another, but Saria was quickly overwhelmed, and after getting kicked away, she found herself looking up at that man as he approached the pedestal. Still stunned from the pain, she watched Ganondorf grip the Master Sword by its handle. The moment he touched that blade, purifying flames engulfed his hand, forcing him back. He clutched his wrist in utter agony, and when the flames died down, all that was left of Ganondorf’s right hand was pale bone. Yet through dark magic, he was able to regrow his hand. Muscle and skin reformed over the bone until the hand was whole again.

“Hmph. As expected,” said Ganondorf.

“Then that’s it,” said Saria. “It looks like your ambitions end here.”

“Not yet. Before the prophecy tried to mend itself and chose you as its new champion, there was another who was destined to enter these hallowed halls.” Ganondorf then yanked a purple sack from his belt and threw it to the side. With a gesture, the sack began to burn. “While you were busy, I paid another visit to your forest home and brought something precious back with me.”

“No…”

“Now come forth, child of destiny!!!”

From the black and purple flames enveloping the sack, bones emerged, forming into a stalchild. But it wasn’t just any stalchild. His tattered green clothes and worn leather boots were unmistakable. All that was missing… Was his green cap.

“No… No… NO!!!” Saria gripped her dagger and ran towards the stalchild. “Link!!!”

Ganondorf rushed Saria, blocking her attempts to reach the boy. After knocking the girl’s dagger out of her hand with a swipe from his scimitar, Ganondorf struck Saria in the stomach with a punch. The force of the blow was enough to shatter bone, and after Saria toppled over from the pain, Ganondorf planted his foot on the Kokiri’s back, pinning her to the ground.

“Now watch,” said Ganondorf. “Watch as your failure leads me to victory!”

Try as she might, Saria was unable to move. The pain her body felt was nothing compared to the anguish she felt in her heart. She reached out, calling Link’s name, but the boy merely shambled forward, his bony hands ready to grab the Master Sword. Saria turned to look at Sheik, but even after treatment, he still looked too wounded to fight. All Saria could do was watch…

Purifying flame licked at the stalchild in green, yet he was able to grip the Master Sword all the same. It seemed like the magic of the sword and the dark magic Ganondorf wielded were at war, with Link caught in the middle. Despite the flames engulfing him, Link was able to pull the sword up little by little. Perhaps this was through the vestiges of power granted to him by Ganondorf, or perhaps even the sword could not fully disobey the one that was meant to wield it one day… In the end, Link drew the Master Sword from that pedestal, and the surrounding world disappeared.

A great blue and white light blinded Saria, and when she was finally able to see, she was in a sparkling new realm that reminded her of the Great Fairy fountains. The stone floor was covered in pure clean ankle-deep water, the walls glittered like gemstones on a black tapestry, and scattered structures like ornate pillars, ancient castles, and gigantic statues littered the landscape. At the heart of the realm was a large fountain from whence the pure water flowed. The fountain was made up of three unicorn-shaped busts in a triangular shape, and floating above the fountain were three golden triangles bound together.

“Is this… The Sacred Realm?” asked Saria.

“It is…” Ganondorf kicked Saria away. “And now the time has come for me to take back my destiny!”

Ganondorf ran headlong towards the fountain. Though wounded, Sheik ran towards the fountain as well, leaving Saria lying in the water. Though she knew just how urgent things had become, all she could do was look at the burning stalchild nearby. Link was holding onto the Master Sword and standing still, almost like he was waiting for a command that would never come. All the while, the purifying flame was taking its toll on his body. Bit by bit, his bones were turned to ash, and within seconds, he could no longer stand.

Saria crawled on her belly towards the burning Link, forcing her wounded body to move. When she finally got close enough, she and the stalchild locked eyes. The skeleton’s eye sockets had a faint red glow, just like any other stalchild, but somehow, Saria felt a sadness in those eyes. With every ounce of willpower she could muster, Saria stood up on her knees. She finally yanked the Master Sword away from him and embraced the boy in a hug.

“Link! Link! I’m sorry!!!” cried the Kokiri. Tears poured from her eyes as she held the burning stalchild in her arms. The stalchild reciprocated the hug, even as its arms were falling apart. In that moment, everything disappeared. Saria tried to say all the words that were on her mind from the moment she had lost him, but it became a struggle just to speak. Her throat felt hot, and it stung with every wheezing breath she took. Were it not for a certain fairy’s voice, Saria might had remained in that state until the bitter end.

“Saria! Saria!!!” cried Poppy.

The Kokiri’s eyes went wide. The stalchild’s remains had turned to ash in her arms, and finally brought to her senses, she realized that her fairy was floating right beside her.

“Poppy… I…”

“It’s okay, Saria. I know how you feel. But now is not the time to get lost in regret. Look! Your friend is putting his life on the line to keep that madman from taking the Triforce! I know it’s hard, but if we don’t do something, Ganondorf is going to plunge this world into chaos!!”

Saria sniffled, rubbing her tears away with the back of her bruised hand. “You’re right. I’m sorry.”

“Don’t be,” Poppy smiled, flying under Saria’s cap. “Just do what you can. I’ll try to heal your wounds in the meantime.”

“Right!”

Saria looked around. Her dagger had been knocked away by Ganondorf, her scimitar had been shattered, and her dinolfos blade had broken in half. There was still one sword for her to use, though. The mysterious Master Sword was still lying in the water nearby. Somehow, it had manifested a sheath and a leather shoulder strap around itself. As she grabbed hold of its purple handle, she felt a strange magic flow through her body, almost like it was testing her. Then the sensation dissipated. She stood up, drawing the Master Sword, then she pulled the sheath over her shoulder. Up ahead, Sheik and Ganondorf were still fighting. The Master Sword’s blade pointed right at the Gerudo, almost like it was eager to do battle with him.

“Me too,” Saria muttered. “Me too.”

With a renewed sense of purpose, Saria charged into the fray, joining Sheik in her battle against Ganondorf. The three figures clashed, kicking up water, cracking stone, and making sparks fly through the Sacred Realm. At one point, the Master Sword shattered one of Ganondorf’s scimitars, but the Gerudo didn’t let up. He fought with even greater vigor, finally taking his foes seriously.

“You holding that blade only confirms my suspicions. The prophecy demands its champion, and so now you have become my mortal enemy!” shouted Ganondorf.

“You don’t have to tell me that,” said Saria. “Prophecy or no, I’d hunt you down to the ends of the world!”

Saria struck Ganondorf across the shin, staggering him. Sheik then yelled “Jump!” as he pulled out his chain whip, striking the water and electrocuting the Gerudo. Saria narrowly avoided the same fate, leaping to a broken pillar. Though he was stunned for a moment, Ganondorf fought through the pain and grabbed Sheik by the throat, hurling him into a nearby building.

“You won’t stop me! I refuse to be a prisoner of fate!!”

Despite how hard they fought, neither Saria nor Sheik could halt the mad king’s march. That was when the three turned their attention to the Triforce. In a moment of truth, those three destined people reached out for its power. In the end, it was Ganondorf that took hold of the sacred treasure. As soon as he touched it, the gentle blues of the Sacred Realm turned black, and the waters ran red like blood. The King of the Gerudo’s influence had begun to corrupt the realm. It seemed as if the man struggled to hold onto that power though, even as he spoke an incantation to maintain his grasp. In that moment when Ganondorf’s power was at its greatest height, he turned to Saria.

“You who wield that sacred sword, begone from this place!!”

A portal emerged beneath Saria, and the Kokiri fell in, plummeting through a tunnel colored blue and white. Up above, Sheik reached out a hand to Saria, unable to catch her, so instead, the boy threw the Ocarina of Time at the Kokiri.

“Find your way back, Saria! Don’t give up!!” cried Sheik.

Feeling lost and weightless, Saria closed her eyes, unsure of what would happen next. She heard something crack and break apart, and then… Nothing.

When Saria next woke up, she felt a soft breeze on her face, and the smell of the forest filled her nose.

“W-where… Am I?”

The Kokiri slowly opened her eyes, realizing her head was resting on someone’s lap. Up above, a young man with blonde hair, blue eyes, pointed ears, and wearing a green cap was looking down at her.

“Hey, you’re finally awake! Good to have you back, Saria.”